national aluminium company limited - rites.comrites.com/web/images/stories/uploaddocs/po_bbsr_tender...

NATIONAL ALUMINIUM COMPANY LIMITED

BID DOCUMENT NO.

(DOMESTRIC COMPETITIVE BEDDING)

Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges,

drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed)

to West grid inside plant for new Wagon T

Damanjodi (Odisha).

CONTENTS

1. NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT)

2. CHECK LIST

3. COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNARIE

4. INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS (ITB)

5. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

6. PROFORMA FOR THE CREDENTIAL OF THE TENDERER

7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

8. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLANS

9. TENTATIVE DRAWINGS FOR TENDER PURPOSE

10. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND ITS

11. PART-II (BILL OF QUANTITY)

( A GOVERNMENT OF INDIA ENTERPRISE )

BHAGWAN TOWER, 1

0 Signature of the tenderer


BID DOCUMENT NO. OT/02/2015-16/RITES-BBSR/NALCO-


PACKAGE-I (Formation & Bridge Works)

TENDER DOCUMENT

FOR



rid inside plant for new Wagon Tippler at NALCO M&R complex,

PART – I

NOTICE INVITING TENDER (NIT)

COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNARIE

INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS (ITB)

SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

PROFORMA FOR THE CREDENTIAL OF THE TENDERER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

QUALITY ASSURANCE PLANS

TENTATIVE DRAWINGS FOR TENDER PURPOSE

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND ITS

II (BILL OF QUANTITY)

RITES LTD ( A GOVERNMENT OF INDIA ENTERPRISE )

PROJECT OFFICE

BHAGWAN TOWER, 1ST

FLOOR

CUTTACK ROAD,

BHUBANESWAR – 751006

Signature of the tenderer

Under seal of the Firm


-DMJ(CIVIL)




ippler at NALCO M&R complex,

PROFORMA FOR THE CREDENTIAL OF THE TENDERER


GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND ITS AMMENDMENTS

( A GOVERNMENT OF INDIA ENTERPRISE )



MASTER INDEX

Sl. No. Description Page No.

From - To

1. NIT 2 - 3

2. Detailed NIT 4 -10

3. Bid submission letter cum declaration by the bidder

along with Master Index (which is included at Sl. No. 7)

67 - 70

4. Check List & Questionnaire 11 - 18

5. Instructions to Bidders 19 - 25

6. Special Conditions of Contract 26 - 54

7 Proforma for Credential of the Tenderer along with

Proforma for Agreement

(Appendix IA to IX also included in GCC)

55 - 75

8. Technical Specifications 76 - 203

9. Quality Assurance Plan 204 - 218

10. Tender Drawings 219 - 225

11. General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

(2 Mandate forms are also given at the end of GCC)

1 - 98

(NALCO GCC)

12. Bill of Quantity 1 - 16

(Bill of Quantity)



NOTICE INVITING TENDER



RITES

DETAILED NOTICE INVITING TENDER

BID DOCUMENT NO. OT/02/2015-16/RITES-BBSR/NALCO-DMJ(CIVIL)

(DOMESTIC COMPETITIVE BIDDING)


Name of work: Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges,

drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to West grid

inside plant for new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi (Odisha).

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Tenders are invited by RITES Ltd, a Public Sector Enterprise under the Ministry of

Railways acting on behalf of NALCO for the above mentioned work under single stage two

bid system (Part-I: Techno-commercial part along with GCC and its amendments and Part-

II: Price part) from competent agencies with sound technical and financial capabilities

fulfilling the pre-qualification criteria stated under para 4.0 below.

2.0 BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK AND TIME SCHEDULE

2.1 The scope of work shall include all the works connected with following as defined in

Bidding Document:

- Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges, drain

works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to West

grid inside plant for new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi

(Odisha).

2.2 Time Schedule for Completion of Work: 12 (twelve) months from date of issue of

Letter of Acceptance.

3.0 SALIENT FEATURES OF BIDDING DOCUMENT

A NAME OF WORK : Construction of Railway formation in

filling/cutting, minor & major bridges,

drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway

line from holding yard (Loco shed) to West

grid inside plant for new Wagon tippler at

NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi

(Odisha).



B SCOPE OF WORK : As detailed in Special Conditions of

Contract.

C COMPLETION TIME : 12 (twelve) months

D SALE / DOWNLOAD

OF BID DOCUMENT

: Up to 13/10/2015 on working days.

E COST OF BID

DOCUMENT (NON-

REFUNDABLE)

: Rs.1,000/- (Rupees one thousand only)

F EARNEST MONEY

DEPOSIT

: Rs.17,80,000/- (Rupees seventeen lakhs

eighty thousand only) valid for 6 months

from the last date of submission.

G LAST DATE, TIME &

VENUE FOR

RECEIPT OF

TENDER

: 14/10/2015 at 14.30 hrs

In the office of General Manager(C),

RITES Ltd, Regional Project Office,

Bhagwan Tower(1st floor), Cuttack Road,

Bhubaneswar – 751006

H OPENING OF

TECHNO

COMMERCIAL

PART BID

:

15.00 hrs on 14/10/2015 in presence of

authorized representative of attending

bidders.

4.0 PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA

Agencies intending to participate shall fulfill the following minimum pre-qualification

criteria -

4.1 Experience Criteria:

The bidder shall have past experience of having successfully completed works during last

seven 7 years which is ending last day of month previous to the one in which the tenders are

invited :

a) Three similar works each costing not less than Rs.7,12,66,000/- .

b) Two similar works each costing not less than Rs.8,90,83,000/- .

c) One similar work each costing not less than Rs.14,25,32,000/-.

Note: “Similar work means the tenderer should successfully completed earth work in

formation for Railway track / Roads / earthen dams

(or)

Bridge / Culvert / Cross drainage / Spillway

(or)

Combination of both the above work”

Total value of the similar nature of works successfully/ satisfactorily completed

as on the qualifying date shall be considered with appropriate documentary

proof in this regard from the client.



4.2 Financial criteria –

a) Average annual financial turnover during the last 3 year ending 31st March of the

previous financial year (2011–12, 2012–13, 2013-14) should be at least

Rs.5,34,50,000/-.

b) Experience of only bidding entity shall be considered for pre-qualification. In-house

work experience shall not be considered as valid experience for the purpose of pre-

qualification.

c) The bidder shall submit documentary evidence showing satisfactory completion of

the work from their principals with present communication details, like Name of

contact person, Phone/Fax No., E-mail ID etc.

The Bidder may furnish their offer on consortium basis also. In such case, all

members of the consortium shall be responsible & liable jointly and severally for the

execution of the scope of work under the technical specification. However, the

leader of the consortium shall be solely responsible for the integration, interfacing,

and co-ordination completeness of the total scope of work.

The consortium leader shall be authorized to honour liabilities, receive instructions

from Purchaser for and on behalf of any one or all members of consortium during

the entire Execution of contract, including payment which shall be done to the

consortium leader or with his consent to other consortium members. The leader of

the consortium shall operate as single window for all communications.

In case of Consortium Bid or Bid involving Back up Agencies, at least one of the

associated parties/agencies shall be designated as lead partner who meets the

financial criteria of PQC singly and all partner experience together should meet the

experience criteria of PQC and this party shall be fully responsible for carrying out

the supervision and quality control of the work including the performance guarantee

test to be executed by other party or parties who do not meet the requirements as

stated above fully.

Bidder shall submit a copy of the valid Collaboration Agreement Memorandum of

Understanding with the associated parties identifying their respective responsibilities

for the subject work, along-with the bid.

Bids may be submitted by a consortium of maximum 3 (three) parties as members

and shall comply with the following requirements.

- The bid shall include all the information required for the bidder as described in Bid

Document for each consortium member.

- The bids shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all members.

- In case of Consortium, the member having the maximum share of work in value

terms shall be the leader. Leader of Consortium shall fulfill Commercial Criteria

mentioned in the tender document. The criteria for claiming the role of Lead

Partner should be clearly indicated in the bid.

- The leader shall be authorized to incur liabilities and receive instructions for and

on behalf of any and all members of the consortium, and the entire execution of

the Contract, including related payments, shall be done with the leader.



- In case of Consortium becoming the successful bidder, all the members of the

Consortium should be signatories to the Contract Leader of the Consortium shall

be overall responsible for the execution of the contract. The leader and other

members of the Consortium shall be jointly responsible for execution of the

Contract but will be liable for damages in proportion to the respective scope of

facilities.

- Separate bid by a consortium member shall not be accepted for this package.

- A bidder can be member only in one consortium. Bids submitted by another

consortium including the same bidder as member for this package will be

rejected.

- On the offer of the bidder being accepted by NALCO, the Security

Deposit/Performance Bank Guarantee as per stipulations has to be submitted by

the Leader of the Consortium.

- The fee towards cost of Tender Document can be submitted by any of the

members of the Consortium subject to proper authorization from the leader of

Consortium.

d) Failure to meet the above criteria, the bid may be/ liable to be rejected. Therefore,

the bidder shall in his own interest furnish complete documentary evidence by way

of copies of work orders, work completion certificates (either notarized by Notary

Public or Gazetted officer ) and annual reports containing audited balance sheets and

profit & loss accounts statement (certified by Chartered Accountant), in the first

instance itself, in support of their fulfilling the pre-qualification criteria.

NALCO/RITES reserve the right to complete the evaluation based on the details

furnished in the bid without seeking any additional information.

e) Evaluation criteria: Cost of the completed works by the bidder and the Turn over

shall be escalated @10% per annum (simple interest) to bring them at the current

price level.

(The cost of work completed within one year prior to original date of bid opening

and the turnover of the latest previous year shall not be considered for any

weightage. The weightage shall only be considered for work completed prior to one

year of original date of bid opening on annual basis and no weightage shall be given

for part of the year.)

f) Certificates from private individual, for whom the tenderer has worked, shall not be

considered. Certificates from only those Organizations/Institutions/Bodies will be

considered, which execute works in public view and maintain verifiable records. As

such, the organization/bodies, from which certificates will be considered, are as

follow:

i) Government Departments, PSUs & other Government Institutions.

ii) Public Limited Company

iii) Private Limited Company

iv) Government recognized institutions

v) Cooperatives registered with Registrar of firms

vi) Partnership firms Registered with Registrar of firms

vii) Sole proprietary firms.



However the certificate should be on the organizations letter pad, bearing contact address,

telephone no., fax no., e-mail address etc. Further, the certificates from the sources listed at

Sr. No.(ii) to (vii) should invariably be accompanied with the TDS certificate issued by the

client , without which such certificate shall not be considered as adequate proof for the

purpose of this tender.

5.0 Others

5.1 Even though the bidders meet the above pre-qualification criteria, they are subject to be

disqualified if they have

a) Made misleading or false representation in the forms, statements and attachments in

proof of the qualification requirements;

b) Records of poor performance such as abandoning the work, not properly completing

the contract, inordinate delays in completion, litigation history or financial failures

etc.

c) Their business banned by any Central/State Government Department/ Public Sector

Undertakings or Enterprises of Central / State Government.

d) Not submitted all the supporting documents or not furnished the relevant details as

per the prescribed format.

5.2 A declaration to the above effect in the form of affidavit on stamp paper of Rs 10/- duly

attested by Notary/Magistrate should be submitted as per format given in Appendix-XI

enclosed.

6.0 Documents to be submitted

i) Financial criterion of PQC : Attested copies of Auditor’s Report along with the

Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement for the relevant financial year in which

the minimum criterion is made(refer para 4.2.

ii) Experience Criterion of PQC : Documentary proof in support of having met the

criterion(refer para 4.1.

iii) Declaration: Appendix-XI (refer para 5.2)

iv) Attested Copies of E.P.F Certificate

v) Attested Copies of E.S.I Certificate

vi) Attested Copies of PAN card

vii) Attested Copies of Service Tax Registration

viii) Solvency Certificate from Bank

ix) Power of Attorney of the signatory to the Tender if signed by other than proprietor

x) Proof of ownership/partnership of the firm/company of tenderer.

Note: Submission of proof of possession of independent PF and ESI code by the

Bidder is a must for participation in Tender.



7.0 Sub-Contractor's experience and resources will not be taken into account in determining the

bidder's compliances with the qualifying criteria.

8.0 Bidder should not be under liquidation, court receivership or similar proceeding and shall

submit certificate for the same.

9.0 NALCO/ RITES reserve the right to use in-house information for assessment of Bidder’s

capability.

10.0 The complete Bidding Document is available on the website of RITES www.rites.com

and only NIT is available on the website of NALCO www.nalcoindia.com &

www.eprocure.gov.in. Bidders submitting their bid on the basis of downloaded

document have to pay cost of bidding document, in the form of demand draft in favour

of National Aluminium Co Ltd payable at Damanjodi as mentioned in Para 3.0 (E)

above, while submitting the bid, failing which their bid shall not be considered for

evaluation.

11.0 Bidding documents (non-transferable) is also available on sale and may be purchased

on any working day between 14.30 Hrs. and 16.00 Hrs. during the sale period specified

in Para 3.0 above from office of The General Manager (C), RITES Ltd, Bhubaneswar,

by paying the Cost of Bidding Document in the form of crossed demand draft only

(DD should be issued by a listed bank mentioned elsewhere in the Tender), in favour of

National Aluminium Company Limited payable at Damanjodi. Request for sending

Bidding Document by post, courier or any other mode shall not be entertained.

12.0 EMD as specified in Para 3.0 above shall be paid in favour of National Aluminium

Company Limited in the form of a Demand Draft payable at Damanjodi or Bank

Guarantee in the prescribed proforma issued by a listed Bank as specified elsewhere in

the Tender document and valid for 6 months from the due date of submission of bid.

The bids not accompanied with EMD shall be considered, as non-responsive and such

bid shall be rejected.

13.0 Sealed bids will be received up to last date and time specified in Para 3 (G) above as

specified. Techno-commercial part shall be opened at 1500 Hrs. on the last date for

submission of bids specified in Para 3.0 (G) above, in the presence of authorized

representatives of attending bidders. Time and date of opening of Price bids shall be

notified to the qualified and acceptable bidders at a later date.

14.0 Bids not received by the due date and time shall be rejected and representative of such

bidders shall not be allowed to attend the bid opening.

15.0 NALCO/RITES shall not be responsible for any expense incurred by bidders in connection

with the preparation & delivery of their bids, site visit and other expenses incurred during

bidding process.

16.0 Bidders on their own interest may visit site and get acquainted with the site conditions,

before quoting the bids.

17.0 Validity of Bids: The bids once submitted shall remain valid upto 06 (six) months from the

due date/ extended date of submission.



18.0 Telex/ Telegraphic/ Fax/ E-mail bids shall not be accepted.

19.0 RITES/NALCO reserve the right to reject any or all bids without assigning any reason.

20.0 Amendment of Tender Document

i) Before the deadlines for the submission of bids, NALCO/RITES may modify the Tender

Document by issuing ADDENDUM/Corrigendum

ii) Tenderers are advised to download tender documents well in advance and submit the

tender before the stipulated time. It is the responsibility of the Tenderer to check any

correction or any modifications published subsequently in Web site and the same shall

be taken into account while submitting the tender. Tenderer shall, print it out, sign and

attach with the main tender document. Tender document not accompanied by

published corrigendum/s is liable to be rejected. NALCO/RITES will not be

responsible for any postal delays/delay in downloading of tender document from the

internet.

iii) To give prospective bidders a reasonable time to take ADDENDUM/ Corrigendum into

account in preparing their bids, the NALCO/RITES may at their discretion extend as

necessary, the deadline for submission of Tender document.

iv) For site visit, the intending bidder may contact Dy.General Manager (Civil) of

M&R Complex, NALCO, Damanjodi, Orissa Phone- 06853- 253124, Telefax –

06853–254280, Mobile No.9437011364 or AGM(Civil), NALCO, Damanjodi,

Mobile No. 9437579844 or General Manager(C), RITES Ltd, Bhubaneswar,

Phone: 0674 2572690, Fax–0674-2575284 . Sr.DGM(Civil), M/s RITES Limited,

Mob-07752023201, 0674-2572527.

21.0 Any addendum/corrigendum will be published in website of RITES and NALCO only.

General Manager(C)

RITES Ltd, Bhubaneswar For and on behalf of M/s NALCO



CHECK LIST



CHECK LIST FOR SUBMISSION OF BID

Name of work: Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major

bridges, drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to

West grid inside plant for new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi

(Odisha).

Bidder is requested to fill this checklist and ensure that all details documents have been furnished as called

for in the Bidding Document along with duly filled in, signed and stamped alongwith Part-I bid.

Please tick the box and ensure compliance:

1.0 Bid submission Letter cum Declaration by the bidder (APPENDIX-XII) as per proforma attached in

bidding document.

Submitted.

2.0 Information about Bidder (APPENDIX-VII) as per proforma attached in bidding document.

Submitted.

3.0 EMD of requisite amount is submitted in the form of DD/BG from any scheduled bank as

mentioned in List of Banks, in separate sealed envelope marked “Earnest Money Deposit”.

Submitted in the form EMD value: Rs. ___________ of DD/ BG

BG No. _______________ Dated __________ Valid up to _________

DD No. _______________ Dated ___________ Drawn on __________

4.0 Validity of Bank Guarantee towards Earnest Money Deposit enclosed with Techno-commercial

Part of your offer (if submitted in the form of BG) is 6 (Six) Months from the date of submission of

bid.

Yes Valid Up to _______________.

5.0 Validity of Offer is up to 6 (Six) Months from the date of submission of Techno-commercial Part.

Yes Valid Up to _______________.

6.0 Annual Turnover Details including Audited Balance Sheets including Profit and Loss Account

Statement for the last 3 (Three) years.

Submitted. Submitted for the years:

1. ______________

2. ______________

3. ______________



7.0 Fresh Solvency Certificate (APPENDIX-X) from your Bankers (Date of issue of this certificate should

not be earlier than one year from the date of opening of Techno-commercial Part).

Submitted. Certificate dated ___________

From (Name of Bank) ___________

8.0 Details of Past Experience (APPENDIX-IA) in the proforma enclosed in the Bidding Document.

Submitted.

9.0 Details of Present Commitments (APPENDIX-IB) in the proforma enclosed in the proforma

enclosed in the Bidding Document.

Submitted.

10.0 List of equipment (APPENDIX-II) proposed to be deployed for the work in the proforma enclosed

in the Bidding Document.

Submitted. Ref.: ___________________

11.0 Power of Attorney in favour of person who has signed the offer in stamp paper of appropriate

value.

Submitted.

12.0 Partnership Deed in case of partnership firm and Articles of Association in case of limited

company.

Submitted.

13.0 E.P.F. Registration Certificate of the firm :

Submitted.

14.0 E.S.I. Registration Certificate of the firm :

Submitted.

15.0 Service tax Registration Certificate of the firm :

Submitted.

16.0 PAN Card copy :

Submitted.



17.0 Bid Compliance Statement (APPENDIX-XIII)(confirmation for no deviation stipulated in Bid) in the

proforma enclosed.

Submitted.

18.0 Exception and Deviation Statement (APPENDIX-IX) in proforma in GCC.

Submitted.

19.0 All the documents submitted in requisite number of copies as mentioned in the Bidding

Document.

Submitted. No. of copies submitted: ________

20.0 Original Biding Document along with blank (un-priced) copy of Price Bid/ Bill of Quantities and

addendum, if any.

Submitted.

21.0 All pages/ documents are stamped and signed by the authorised signatory of the bidder.

Yes.

22.0 Declaration by the bidder(appendix- XI).

Yes.

23.0 Sales Tax clearance certificate.

Yes

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER: _________________________

NAME OF BIDDER: _________________________

COMPANY SEAL:



COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE



COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE

Bidder’s reply/ confirmation as furnished in the Commercial Questionnaire (CQ) shall

supersede the stipulations mentioned elsewhere in their bid.

SL.

NO. NALCO/RITES’S QUERY BIDDER’S REPLY/ CONFIRMATION

1.0 Confirm that your Bid is valid for 06 (six) months

from the date of submission of Bid.

2.0 Confirm that Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) as per

bid stipulations have been furnished along with bid.

3.0 Confirm that the following documents as submitted

with Part-I & II:

a) All documents as per CHECK LIST.

b) Blank Schedule of Rates/ Prices (without specifying

the rates/ prices) are submitted in unpriced part,

exactly as per the priced portion submitted in Part-II.

In case some of items have not been quoted, such

items should be identified in blank price format.

c) Addendum duly signed and stamped on each page as

a token of acceptance. (Applicable, if issued).

4.0 Confirm that price has been submitted in ORIGINAL

only in a separately sealed envelope superscribing

“PRICE PART”.

5.0 Schedule of Price.

a) Price must be filled in format for SOR enclosed as per

of Bidding Document. If price quoted in separate

typed sheets and any variation in item description,

unit or quantity is noticed and no deviations are

specified by bidder in unpriced bid, confirm that

Owner shall presume that the price quoted are as

per the price format attached with bidding

document.

b) Confirm that rate quoted for similar items in

different Parts are same in each part.



c) Confirm that in case of variation in quoted rates for

similar items, the lowest quoted rate of such items

shall be considered.

d) Confirm that deviation/ terms and conditions are not

mentioned in the price part. In case any terms and

condition is mentioned in the price part, the same

shall be treated as null and void.

e) Confirm that correction fluid is not used in the price

part. (In case of any correction, same shall be

stamped by authorised signatory.)

6.0 Confirm that you have studied complete Bidding

Document including Technical and commercial part

and your Bid is in accordance with the requirements

of the Bidding Document.

7.0 Confirm your compliance to total Scope of Work

mentioned in the Bidding Document.

8.0 Confirm your acceptance for ‘Scope of Supply’

mentioned in the Bidding Document and confirm

that all materials shall be supplied as per Standards

and Specifications.

9.0 Confirm your acceptance for Time Schedule as

mentioned in Bidding Document.

10.0 Confirm that your quoted price includes all taxes,

duties as applicable for this WORK in accordance

with the provision of General Conditions of Contract

& SCC.

11.0 Confirm that your quoted price includes all types of

insurance as per the provisions of General

Conditions of Contract and Special Conditions of

Contract.

12.0 Confirm that all costs resulting from safe execution

of WORK, such as safety induction, use of protective

clothing, safety glasses and helmet, safety

precaution taken during monsoon, or any other

safety measures to be undertaken by the Contractor

for execution of work are included in the quoted

rates.



13.0 Confirm that adequate numbers of construction

equipments, tools, tackles etc. have been proposed

which will be sufficient to complete the work as per

the time schedule.

14.0 Confirm that you have proposed adequate project/

site organisation with qualified supervisory

personnel having requisite experience including

personnel responsible for safety, planning, stores,

QA/ QC etc.

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER: __________________________________

NAME OF BIDDER: __________________________________

COMPANY SEAL: __________________________________



Name of Work: Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges, drain

works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to West grid inside plant for

new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi (Odisha).


1. SUBMISSION OF TENDER

1.1 As the tender is hosted on website, the intending bidder is free to download the same from

the website. However, the bidder must submit the tender by filling up of all relevant

information as required by typing or printing with indelible blue or black ink on white paper

in consecutively numbered pages and be in solid binding and each page signed along with

duly filled in enclosed formats attached to this Tender document.

1.2 The tenderers are advised to submit the tender based strictly on the Terms and Conditions

and Specifications contained in the tender documents including amendments, if any, issued

prior to submission of offer. For amendment if any, with financial implications, issued after

submission of offer, the tenderer shall be entitled to amend his price, however, no price

implication shall be entitled due to any amendment prior to submission offer.

1.3 The offer shall be prepared and submitted in 2 (two) separate sealed envelopes as per the

following:

PART-I: TECHNICAL AND UNPRICED COMMERCIAL OFFER INCLUDING

PRE-QUALIFYING DOCUMENTS (IN 2 COPIES IN SEPARATE

ENVELOPES) DULY SUPERSCRIBED

A) Bank Guarantee as per proforma given in the enclosed GCC or demand Draft towards

Earnest Money Deposit as specified in detailed NIT. Tenders submitted without Earnest

Money Deposit shall not be considered and are liable for rejection.

B) Bidders to furnish all relevant information required to fulfill the PQ criteria as spelt out.

C) Un-priced tender consisting of complete technical package including, drawings and

documents. One original and 1 identical copies shall be submitted. The technical part of

the tender shall interalia include the total tender document duly signed and stamped by

the bidder on each page along with any other technical information the tenderer wishes

to furnish.

D) Unpriced tender shall also include commercial terms and conditions and copy of BILL

OF QUANTITY (PRICE PART) BLANKING THE PRICE. One original and 1

identical copy shall be submitted.

The commercial part of tender will interalia include the following:

i) Copy of tender document marked “Original “ duly signed and stamped on each page

as a token of acceptance.

ii) Duly filled in “Form of Tender”.



iii) Power of attorney duly executed by the authority having concurrence of Board of

Directors and duly notarised as well as with the seal of the company in favour of

the person signing the tender.

iv) Details of present commitments of the tenderer.

v) Duly filled in financial questionnaire as per annexed table.

vi) SALES Tax clearance Certificate / registration certificate etc.

PART-II: PRICE BID (IN TWO COPIES IN ONE ENVELOPE) DULY

SUPERSCRIBED.

“Bill of Quantities ” duly filled in figures and words in one original copy and shall be

signed and stamped on each page. The prices shall be furnished strictly as per the schedule

of quantities enclosed.

In this part of the bid the Tenderer shall not stipulate any condition. In case of any

condition being mentioned in this part, the same shall render the bid for rejection.

Correction/ overwriting (if any) must be signed and stamped.

1.4 Tender shall be submitted under a covering letter.

1.5 Insertion, postscript, addition and alteration shall not be recognised unless confirmed by the

tenderer’s signature.

1.6 All the copies of tenders shall be complete in all respects with all their

attachments/enclosures.

1.7 The tenderer shall satisfy the owner that he possesses the necessary experience and that he

has at his disposal suitable modern facilities and specialised employees to ensure that his

work is of best quality and workmanship according to the latest proven technology and

engineering practices. The tenderer shall satisfy the owner that he is financially in a position

to fulfill contractual obligations offered to be undertaken by him.

1.8 Tenderer’s offer (all the parts) shall be prepared and submitted in double sealed envelope

and the following shall be separately SUPERSCRIBED prominently on the outside of the

envelope:



NAME OF WORK: Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major

bridges, drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to

West grid inside plant for new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi

(Odisha).


The full name, postal address, telegraphic address and telex/telephone/fax no./E-mail of the

Tenderer shall be written on the bottom left corner of the sealed envelopes.

2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

i) The work shall be carried out on item rate basis for which Schedule of Quantities

have been furnished for different items of works as defined in the Bill of Quantities,

Technical Specification Drawings, General Conditions & Special Conditions of

Contract.

ii) The tenderer not covering the total scope of work and services as detailed out-in the

enclosed tender document are liable for rejection.

2.1 The Tenderer shall carefully check the enclosed Technical Specifications and shall satisfy

himself as to the suitability of the work as given in the Technical Specifications and shall

take full responsibility for the completion of work as per defined scope.

3.0 PRICE QUOTATION:

3.1 The Tenderer shall quote his price against each item of the schedule as indicated in

Schedule of Quantities enclosed with technical specification, both in figures and in words

clearly.

3.2 Rates shall be quoted both in figures and in words in clear legible writing. No overwriting is

allowed. All scoring and cancellations should be countersigned by the Tenderer. In case of

illegibility, the interpretation of the NALCO /RITES shall be final. All entries shall be in

English language.

3.3 Tenderer should quote rates against the items in the schedule of items for the work as fully

described and content therein. No modifications to the work content in the items will be

allowed.

3.4 The item wise quantities given in the tender document are approximate. The Contractor

shall not be entitled for any compensation in addition to the payment for the work actually

performed by the Contractor.

However if due to variation/ amendments by NALCO, the gross value of work actually

performed by the Contractor is less than 75% of awarded contract value, then the Contractor

shall be entitled for an additional 5% on the amount by which the contract value falls short

of 75% of total contract value which the contractor may have anticipated towards profit for

due execution of the total contract value. Similarly if due to variation/ amendments by

NALCO, the gross value of work actually performed by the Contractor is more than 150%

of awarded contract value, then a discount of 5% shall be considered on the amount by

which the contract value exceeds beyond 150% of awarded contract value.



3.5 Any request from the Tenderer in respect of additions, alterations, modifications,

corrections etc of either terms and conditions or rates of his Tender after opening of Tenders

may lead to rejection of his Tender.

4.0 RECEIPT OF TENDER

Tender will be received at the following address:

RITES Ltd

Regional Project Office

Bhagwan Tower ( 1st floor),

Cuttack Road,

Bhubaneswar - 751006

The tenderer has the option of sending the tender by Registered Post or submitting the

tender in person, so as to reach on or before the date and time set out for the same in the

Invitation to Tender. Tender submitted by FAX/TELEX/TELEGRAM shall not be

accepted. However NALCO /RITES is no way responsible for late delivery of any tender

by Postal authorities or Courier service.

5.0 TENDER OPENING:

The tenders will be opened in the manner and at the time and date set for opening of tenders

as described in the Notice Inviting Tender.

6.0 VALIDITY OF TENDER

6.1 The tender shall remain valid for six months from the date of opening of the Tender.

6.2 Any suo-moto reduction offered by the Tenderer after opening of the price bids may make

the whole tender liable for rejection.

7.0 LANGUAGE

The tender shall be submitted in English language only.

8.0 EARNEST MONEY

Tenderers shall submit Earnest Money in the form of Bank Guarantee as per proforma

attached herewith, issued by a listed Bank ( list of Bank mentioned elsewhere in the

Tender) or in shape of Demand draft( from a Listed Bank ). Only original copy of Bank

Guarantee will be accepted, photocopy will not be accepted.

Earnest Money shall be returned to the unsuccessful Tenderers at the earliest after

finalisation of the contract. Earnest Money of the successful tenderer shall be returned only

after the tenderer furnishes the Initial Security Deposit and Contract Agreement is signed.

The Earnest Money Deposit in the form of Bank Guarantees shall be kept valid initially for

a period of 6 months from the date of opening of the tender.

No interest shall be paid on Earnest Money Deposit. The offer without Earnest Money or

with short Earnest Money or Earnest Money deposit in the form other than specified herein

above shall be liable for rejection.



The Earnest Money shall be forfeited if:

a) The tender is revoked during its validity period.

b) The prices are increased unilaterally after the tender opening and during validity of offer

by the tenderer,

c) The owner accepts the tenderer’s bid proposal and the tenderer refuse to enter into

contract after the contract is awarded to him,

d) The tenderer fails to submit Bank Guarantee towards Initial Security Deposit within the

period specified as per NIT.

9.0 SECURITY DEPOSIT :

Clause no-19.0 of GCC shall be referred.

10.0 NO CLAIM OR COMPENSATION FOR SUBMISSION OF TENDER

The Tenderer whose tender is not accepted shall not be entitled to claim any costs, charges

and expenses incidental to or incurred by him through or in connection with his submission

of tender or its consideration by the Purchaser, even though the Purchaser may elect to

modify/withdraw the Invitation to Tender or does not accept the tender.

11.0 REGISTRATION CERTIFICATES

The Tenderer shall furnish copies of Orissa Sales Tax (OST), Central Sales Tax (CST),

Service Tax registration, PF & ESI certificates as required for due completion of work.

12.0 SIGNING OF CONTRACTS

12.1 The enclosed General Conditions of the Contract AND ALL OTHER ENCLOSED Contract

stipulations shall form the basis of the final Contract/ Letter of Acceptance. The tenderer

shall carefully go through all the stipulations given in the said documents.

12.2 On the Tender being accepted by the owner, Contract will be signed and executed by and

between the owner and the Successful Tenderer at the earliest to be notified by the owner in

due course.

12.3 Contract Agreement

The contractor shall have to execute an agreement on `50/- non-judicial stamp paper to be

purchased from any stamp vendor under the jurisdiction of the Orissa High Court, in the

specific format. Competent authority of NALCO shall sign the agreement on behalf of

NALCO.

13.0 NOTICE ON BEHALF OF OWNER:

All notices of technical/ commercial nature shall be issued by the authorised representative

of Engineer in charge, after award of work.



14.0 OTHER CONDITIONS:

i) The Tenderer is required to carefully examine the Technical Specification, General

Conditions of the Contract, Special Conditions of contract, drawings and other details relating to work and given in the Tender Documents and fully acquaint himself as to all conditions and matters which may in any way affect the work or the cost thereof.

ii) The tenderer shall be deemed to have on his own and independently obtained all

necessary information for the purpose of preparing the tender and his tender as accepted shall be deemed to have taken into account all contingencies as may arise due to such information or lack of the same.

iii) The tenderer shall be deemed to have exhaustively examined the tender documents

including the General Conditions of the contract, to have obtained all information and clarifications on all matters whatsoever that might affect the carrying out the work and to have satisfied himself as to the adequacy of his tender. He is deemed to have known the scope, nature and magnitude of the work and the requirements of materials and labour involved etc and as to all work he has to complete in accordance with the Contract whatever be the defects, omissions or errors that may be found in the Tender Documents.

iv) The tenderer should visit site to acquaint himself about site condition. For site visit,

the intending tenderer may contact Dy.General Manager (Civil) of M&R

Complex, NALCO, Damanjodi, Orissa Phone- 06853- 253124, Telefax – 06853–

254280, Mobile No.9437011364 & AGM(Civil), NALCO, Damanjodi, Mobile

No. 9437579844 or General Manager (C), RITES Ltd, Bhubaneswar, Phone:

0674 2572690, Fax–0674-2575284 . Sr.DGM(Civil), M/s RITES Limited, Mob-

07752023201, 0674-2572527.

v) Tenderers may please note -

a) RITES is only an agent acting as consultant on behalf of the

Principal/client/Owner. It should also be stated that the Client is the principal as

well as Employer for the work.

b) In case of any dispute between RITES and contractor, being RITES merely an

agent, client should be made first respondent and should be liable for all

monetary losses.

c) RITES is only agent/Consultant acting on behalf of the client/employer and in

case of arbitration the client shall be the first respondent.



Name of work: Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges, drain

works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to West grid inside plant

for new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi (Odisha).


1 General:

1.1 Special Conditions of Contract shall be read in conjunction with the General

Conditions of Contract, Schedule of Rates, Specification of work, Drawings and any

other document forming part of this contract wherever the context so requires.

1.2 Notwithstanding the sub-divisions of the document into these separate sections and

volumes, every part of each shall be deemed to be supplementary to and

complementary to every other part and shall be read with and into the contract so far as

it may be practicable to do so.

1.3 Where any portion of the Special Conditions of Contract is repugnant to or at variance

with any provisions of the General Conditions of Contract, then unless a different

intention appears, the provision of the Special Conditions of Contract shall be deemed

to override the provision of the General Conditions of Contract only to the extent such

repugnancies or variations in the Special Conditions of Contract as are not possible of

being reconciled with the provision of General Conditions of Contract.

1.4 The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the applicable standards,

specifications contained herein and codes referred to. Where the Technical

Specifications stipulate requirements in addition to those contained in the Standard

Codes and Specifications, those additional requirements shall also be satisfied.

1.5 Wherever it is mentioned in the specifications that the Contract shall perform certain

work or provide certain facilities, it is understood that the Contractor shall do so at his

own cost and the Contract Price shall be deemed to have included cost of such

performances and provisions, so mentioned.

1.6 In case of contradiction between relevant Indian Standards, General Conditions of

Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Schedule of Prices

/ Rates, the following shall prevail in order of precedence:

i) Fax of Intent, Detailed Letter of Acceptance along with Statement of Agreed

Variations (if any) and its enclosures.

ii) Schedule of Rates.

iii) Drawings.

iv) Special Conditions of Contract.

v) General Conditions of Contract.

vi) Technical Specifications

vii) Relevant Indian Standards / Specifications.

1.7 The Engineer may order the Contractor to suspend any work, which in the opinion of

the Engineer may be subjected to damage by the prevailing weather conditions.



1.8 Unless specifically mentioned otherwise in the contract, the bidder shall quote rates for

the finished items and shall provide for the complete cost towards power, fuel, tools,

tackles, equipment, construction plant, temporary work, labour materials, levies, taxes,

transport, layout, repairs, rectification, maintenance till handing over, supervision,

colonies, shops, establishments, services, temporary roads, revenue expenses,

contingencies, overheads, profits and all incidental items not specifically mentioned but

reasonably implied and necessary to complete the work according to the contract.

1.9 The decision of the Engineer-in-charge shall be final and binding on the Contractor

regarding clarification of items in the schedule with respect to other sections of the

contract/specifications.

1.10 NALCO/RITES reserves the right to award the whole works to a single contractor or

split the work between more than one contractor. The rates should remain firm

irrespective of the above.

1.11 The specification shall be read in conjunction with the description of item in the

schedule. The schedule of items shall have precedence over any contrary statement

mentioned anywhere in the document.

2.0 Scope of work:

The Scope of work shall include :

• Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges,

drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to

West grid inside plant for new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex,

Damanjodi (Odisha).

• Diversion of water way ,diversion road for carrying out the work at no extra cost.

2.1 The technical specifications and drawings enclosed with the tender document broadly

covers the General concept & requirements of work.

2.2 Scope of work shall read in conjunction with item description in Schedules of Rates and

contractor’s scope shall include all activities of work specified in the item description in

SOR/BOQ etc.

3.0 General information on site:

The site for Construction of proposed Railway siding is located at inside the NALCO

plant for new Wagon Tippler. NALCO’s existing Alumina Refinery is located at

aproximately 40 Km from the nearest town Koraput in the Odisha State of India,

Nearest Railway Station connected with plant is Damanjodi of E. Co. Railway at about

3Km.

The Bidder has to acquaint himself with the access to the site, local working

environment, local interference, interruption of work (if any), that they may encounter

during the pendency of contract, availability of local facilities such as railway

connectivity, transport facilities, material, labour and the bidder shall quote the price

taking into account all expenses likely to arise in this regard. The bidder has to follow

the civic rules regarding disposal of debris, storing of construction material as per

prevailing governing rules.



The intending tenderer shall be deemed to have visited the site and familiarised

themselves thoroughly with the site conditions before submitting their tenders. Non-

familiarity with the site conditions will not be considered a reason either for extra

claims or for not carrying out work in strict conformity with drawings and

specifications.

4.0 Construction water supply and power supply:

In partial modification of Clause 2.2 and 2.3 of General Conditions of Contract (GCC),

the Bidder should note the following:

- Subject to availability Owner may supply Construction Water at source at inside

Plant premises to the contractor as per provision in above clause. It may however

noted that no water shall be supplied to the contractor for the labour colony.

- Subject to availability construction power may be supplied by Owner at source at

inside Plant premises as per provision made in Clause No. 2.3 of GCC and its

amendment.

5.0 Earnest Money Deposit (EMD): Bidder shall furnish earnest money deposit (EMD) as

indicated in the NIT. The bids not accompanied with full amount of EMD shall be

rejected. The Earnest Money Deposit. if deposited in shape of Bank Guarantee as per

relevant Clause of General Conditions of Contract shall be kept valid for a period as

indicated in the NIT from the date of opening of tender. EMD of unsuccessful bidders

will be returned upon award of contract. EMD ( Incase submitted in shape of BG ) of

the successful bidder will be returned upon Bidders furnishing the Initial Security

Deposit/ Security Deposit and signing of contract agreement. EMD ( Incase submitted

in shape of DD ) of the successful bidder may be adjusted to Initial Security Deposit.

5.1 In case the successful bidder fails to submit the ISD / SD within a period of 21 day from

the date of issue of Work Order / FOI, the ISD amount along with a simple interest @

12% per annum as penalty, applicable from the date of Work Order / FOI till the date of

submission of ISD or submission of Ist RA bill, shall be recovered starting from Ist RA

Bill.

6.0 Price basis

6.1 Works Contract

The entire works as per Scope of Work covered under this contract shall be treated as

“Works Contract”. The quoted prices/ rates of the Bidders indicated in schedule of

rates shall include incidence of Works Contract Tax/ Turnover Tax as applicable.

6.2 Taxes and Duties

In addition to the relevant clause in GCC, Bidders to note the following:

6.2.1 The quoted prices shall be deemed to be inclusive of all taxes duties, octroi, levies etc.

except service tax and education cess with respect to CONTRACTOR’s scope of work/

scope of supply till the completion of the work. If after the due date of submission of

last price bid, any increase occurs in the applicable rate(s) of sales tax, excise duty,

works contract tax/ turnover tax or new levies are imposed, the OWNER shall

reimburse the CONTRACTOR the increase in the resultant sales tax, excise duty,

works contract tax/ turnover tax and new levy as the case may be, on satisfactory proof

of payment. Conversely, if there is any reduction in the rates of sales tax, excise duty,



works contract tax/ turnover tax or deletion of taxes/ duties after the date of submission

of the last price bid, the OWNER shall be entitled to benefit of such reduction,

remission or exemption in the rate(s) of the said taxes, which benefit shall be passed on

to the OWNER by way of reduction in the price. This variation shall be paid only for

finished goods incorporated in Works.

6.2.2 For Service Tax and education cess, the clauses in the para 6.2.2.1, 6.2.2.2, 6.2.2.3,

6.2.2.4 and 6.2.2.5 below will be applicable.

6.2.2.1 The contractor is required to get themselves registered under the Jurisdictional Range

Office of Central Excise & Customs (the Service Tax Registration No. should be PAN

based) and submit documentary evidence along with their tender, failing which their

claim for service tax from NALCO will not be entertained.

6.2.2.2 It is the responsibility of the successful bidder to satisfy Excise Authorities with

supporting documents as demanded by Excise Authorities regarding price of items

shown in Annexure-II.

6.2.2.3 Service Tax and Education Cess shall be paid extra at applicable rate prevailing at the

time of execution.

6.2.2.4 (i) Wherever the Service Tax and the Education Cess paid to the Central Excise

authorities on the input services availed by NALCO are CENVATABLE, the

Contractor shall issue Invoice / R.A. Bill in accordance with the Excise Rules /

Cenvat Credit Rules giving all the information as required under the said rules.

(ii) Wherever service tax and education cess is NON-CENVATABLE, the Service

Tax & Education Cess amount payable by NALCO towards the same shall be

loaded on the bidder’s quoted value to arrive at the relative position of the bids.

(iii) For claiming Service Tax from NALCO, the contactor’s invoice should contain

details like Serial no. of documents, Date of issue, Description of work, price of

the input service, service tax payable, service tax registration no., name and

address of the input Service Provider, class / category under which Service Tax is

leviable etc. Invoice for Service tax shall be as per NALCO’s standard.

6.2.2.5 Any variation in the rates of Service Tax / Education Cess or inclusion/exclusion of

certain services in the Service Tax net after award of the contract will be to the account

of NALCO.

NB:- The contractor shall be fully & solely responsible to the statutory authorities

for compliance of all the provisions of Service Tax Act / Rules, Cenvat Rules and

other statutory provisions applicable to this work as a service provider.

7.0 Sales tax clearance certificate:

Bidders must submit attested copy of registration/clearance certificate in prescribed

proforma under the Orissa Sales Tax Act. Alternatively, bidders must give an

undertaking that they would comply with this statutory requirement after award of

work. Owner shall deduct Sales Tax on Works Contract as per prevalent rates from

each RA bill and remit the same with Sales tax authorities as statutory deductions.



8.0 Income Tax

(i) Income Tax as applicable at the prevailing rate on the gross amount billed shall

be deducted from the contractor’s bills.

(ii) Notwithstanding anything contained elsewhere in the contract, NALCO shall

deduct at source from the payment due to the contractor, the taxes as required

under Section-13(AA) of Orissa Sales Tax act or as amended from time to time or

under any statute. The amount so deducted shall be deposited by NALCO with

the Sales Tax Authorities as per Law. It is for the contractor to deal with the Sales

Tax Authorities directly in respect of any claim or refund relating to the above

deductions and NALCO shall not be liable or responsible for any claims or

payments or reimbursement in this regard.

9.0 Time of completion

9.1 Time is the essence of contract. The work shall be executed strictly as per the Time

Schedule given in Notice Inviting Tender (NIT). The period of completion includes the

time required for mobilization as well as testing, rectifications if any, retesting,

demobilization and completion in all respect to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.

9.2 All work within scope of this tender must be completed within a period as stipulated in

the NIT from the date of order/ Fax of Intent (FOI) and strictly in accordance with the

construction programme to be drawn up between owner & contractor. Construction

work at site must commence within three (3) weeks from the date of FOI. The date of

order (FOI) shall be reckoned as the date of commencement of work.

9.3 The bidder shall furnish his proposed construction programme along with his offer.

9.4 The construction programme should be in the form of PERT network considering the

date of issue of Fax of intent as the zero date and should show completion of various

events/activities there from.

9.5 Defect liability period :

The defect liability period shall be governed as per Clause 65 and 68 of General

Conditions of Contract.

10.0 Schedule of rates

10.1 The Schedule of Rates shall be read in conjunction with Special Conditions of

Contract, General Conditions of Contract, Scope of Work, Scope of Supply, Technical

Specification, Drawings and any other document forming a part of this Contract.

10.2 All expenses towards mobilisation at site and demobilization including bringing all

required equipment, work force, materials, dismantling/ demobilization of equipment,

clearing of site including site office etc. shall be deemed to be included in the rates

quoted and no separate payments on account of such expenses shall be entertained.



11.0 Contractor’s Remuneration

The price to be paid by the Owner to the Contractor for the whole work done and for

the performance of all the obligation undertaken by the Contractor under the contract

document shall be ascertained by the application of the respective schedule of rates and

payment to be made accordingly to the work actually executed and approved by the

Engineer-in-Charge.

12.0 Schedule of Rates to be inclusive

The prices / rates quoted by the Contractor shall remain firm till the issue of final

certificate. Schedule of rates shall be deemed to include and cover all costs,

expenses and liabilities of every description and all risks of every kind including all

type of interference/ obstruction/ interruption or any other problems which may likely

to occur from time to time to be taken care during execution of work for completion

and handing over the work to the Owner by the contractor. The Contractor shall be

deemed to have known the nature, scope, magnitude and the extent of the works and

materials required though the contract document may not fully and precisely furnish

them. Contractor shall make such provision in the schedule rates as he may consider

necessary to cover the cost of such items of work and materials as may be reasonable

and necessary to complete the work. The opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the

items of work which are necessary and reasonable for completion of work shall be final

and binding on the contractor although the same may not be shown on or described

specifically in contract documents.

Generally of this present provision shall not be deemed to cut down or limited in any

way because in certain cases it may and in other cases it may not be expressly stated

that the contractor shall do or perform a work or supply articles or perform with

services at his own cost or without addition of payment or without extra charge of

works to the same effect or that it may be stated or not stated that the same are included

in and covered by the Schedule of Rates.

12.1 Cement, reinforcement Steel to be used for the entire work shall be supplied by

Contractor.

12.2 Schedule of Rates to cover Constructional plant, Material, Labour etc

Without in any way limiting the provisions of other sub clauses the schedule of rates

shall be deemed to include and cover the cost of all constructional plant, temporary

works, materials except FIM, labour, insurance, fuel, stores, and appliances etc. to be

supplied by the contractor and all other matters in connection with each item in the

schedule of quantities and the execution of the work or any portion thereof finished

complete in all respect and maintained as shown or described in the contract document

or as may be ordered in writing during the continuance of the contract.

12.3 Schedule of Rates to cover Royalties, Rents and Claims

The schedule of rates shall be deemed to include and cover the cost of all royalties and

fees for the article, processes, protected by letters, patent or otherwise incorporated in

or used in connection with the works, also all royalties, rents and other payments in



connection with obtaining materials of whatsoever kind for the works and shall include

and indemnify the owner, which the contractor hereby gives against all actions,

proceedings, claims, damages, costs and expenses arising from the incorporation in or

use on the works of any such articles, process or charges if levied on materials,

equipment or machinery to be brought to site for use on work, shall be borne by the

contractor.

12.4 Schedule of Rates to cover taxes and duties

No exemption of reduction of custom duties, excise duties, sales, tax, quay or any port

duties, transport charges, stamp duties or Central or State Government or Local Body

(or from any other body) or Municipal Taxes and duties, taxes or charges whatsoever

will be granted or obtained and all expenses of which shall be deemed to be included in

and covered by the schedule of rates. The contractor shall also obtain and pay for all

permits or other privileges necessary to complete the work.

12.5 Schedule of Rates to cover Risk of Delay

The schedule of rates shall be deemed to include and cover the risks of all possibilities

of delay and interference with the contractors conduct of work which occur from any

cause including orders of owner in the exercise of his powers and on account of

extension of time granted due to various reasons and for all other possible causes of

delay.

12.6 Schedule of Rates cannot be altered

For work under unit rate basis no alteration will be allowed in the schedule of rates by

reasons of works or any part of them being modified, altered, extended, diminished or

omitted. The schedule of rates is of fully inclusive rates which have been fixed by the

contractor and agreed to by the Owner and cannot be altered.

12.7 Rate shall be quoted both in figure and in words in clear legible writing. No over

writing is allowed. All scoring and cancellation should counter-signed by the tenderer.

In case of illegibility, the interpretation of the engineer-in-charge shall be final.

13.0 Project scheduling & monitoring

The successful tenderer shall submit a Master Network within three weeks from date of

issue of Fax of Intent.

13.1 The master network will be in the form of PERT/CPM NETWORK prepared system

wise containing major milestones in all phases of execution of contract. Each

event/activity will also have earliest completion date, latest completion date and float in

number of days/weeks.

13.2 The final master network as mutually agreed upon will form the basic document from

which schedules for design, engineering, procurement, construction and commissioning

will be arrived at. These schedules will be prepared discipline or system wise.

13.3 The final master network shall also form the basis for review of schedules, short-term

programme and progress reporting for the entire run of the contract. The

frequency/periodicity of programming and reporting will be mutually agreed upon.



13.4 Progress reporting shall be done by the Contractor on mutually agreed formats. Reports

on such formats will be sent regularly to the Engineer-in-Charge in reproducible with

six copies of print as per frequency/periodicity agreed upon from time to time.

14.0 Statutory Approvals/Labour laws etc.

14.1 The approval from any authority required as per statutory rules and regulations of

Central/State Government shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.

14.2 The Contractor shall have independent account codes from concerned Regional

Provident Fund Commissioner for Provident Fund and Independent account code from

Regional Director ESIC for ESI. Fulfilling all statutory stipulations towards PF & ESI

is mandatory for the bidders.

14.3 It is to be noted that the subject contract would be awarded only to those agencies who

have fulfilled the following requirements:

a) P.F. Registration Number allotted to them by RPFC.

b) The agencies should promptly deposit P.F. deduction of the eligible contract

employees plus the employer’s contribution to the RPFC. For this purpose agency

must submit a certificate in their Bill that PF amount has been deducted from the

eligible employees and along with the employer’s contribution has been deposited

with R.P.F.C. For this purpose agency must submit a certificate in their Bill that PF

amount has been deducted from the eligible employees and along with the

employer’s contribution has been deposited with R.P.F.C. In support of this the

agency must furnish the challan/ receipt for the payment made to RPFC for the

earlier months.

c) ESI Registration Number allotted to them by ESIC.

14.4 If the certificate and the challan/ receipt referred to in clause 14.2(c) above are not

furnished, the Finance & Accounts Dept. of NALCO will deduct 16% (Sixteen percent)

of the amount of the Contractor’s bill and retained deposits may only be refunded to the

Contractor on production of the challan/ receipt.

15.0 Labour license

Before starting of work, the Contractor shall obtain a license from the concerned

authorities under the Contract Labour (Abolition and Regulation) Act 1970, and furnish

copy of the same to the Owner.

16.0 Construction:

16.1 Contractor shall observe all Codes specified in respective specification, all national and

local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and requirements pertaining to the work and

shall be responsible to fulfill all such norms.

16.2 Contractor shall have at all times during performance of the work, post a technically

competent person to supervise the work at the work premises. Any

instruction given to such a person by the Owner/ Engineer in charge shall be construed

as having been given to the Contractor.



16.3 Owner reserves the right to inspect all phases of Contractor’s operations to ensure

conformity to the specifications. Owner will have engineers, inspectors or other duly

authorised representatives, made known to the Contractor, present during progress of the

work and such representatives shall have free access to the work at all times. The

presence or absence of an Owner’s representative does not relieve the Contractor of the

responsibility for quality control in all phases of the work. In the event that any of the

work being done by the Contractor is found by Owner’s representatives to be

unsatisfactory or not in accordance with the drawings, procedures and specifications, the

Contractor shall, upon verbal notice of such discrepancy or deficiency, take immediate

steps to revise the work in a manner to conform to the relevant drawings, procedures and

specifications.

16.4 The Contractor shall carry out required supervision and inspection as per Quality

Assurance Plan and furnish all assistance required by the OWNER in carrying out

inspection work during this phase. The owner will have engineers, inspectors or other

authorised representatives present who are to have free access to the work at all time. If

an Owner’s representative notifies the Contractor’s authorised representative of any

deficiency, or recommends action regarding compliance with the specifications, the

Contractor shall make every effort to carry out such instructions to complete the work

conforming to the specifications and approved drawings in the fullest degree consistent

with best industry practice.

17.0 Field laboratory:

The contractor shall set up required laboratory to carry out field tests and casting of

samples required for tests as per BIS standards at their own cost. Besides the contractor

shall arrange transportation of samples to nearby approved test laboratory as per

direction of engineer in charge. The charges for testing shall also be borne by the

contractor. The bill raised by the test laboratory may be paid by owner and amount

debited to the contractor/ recovered from RA/ Final bill.

All material required/ used in the work shall be tested and certified as per BIS standards.

18.0 Measurement of works:

For all payment purposes, measurement will be based on the execution drawings.

Wherever details are inadequate or not available in the execution drawings, physical

measurements will be taken by the contractor in the presence of the representative of the

Engineer-in-Charge. In such cases, payment will be made on actual measurements.

Measurement will be made in units indicated in Schedule of Rates. Linear Measurements

will be in meter corrected to nearest centimeter.

19.0 Payment Terms :

Payment will be made through monthly running account bills based on joint

measurements with Engineer-in-Charge against the work done during the preceding

month on the basis of item rates (For works portion) as accepted in the contract in

following manner for all items after effecting the necessary deductions. All payments

are subjected to statutory deductions except service tax & education cess.

- 95% of net amount after deduction of SD on completion of work on pro rata

basis as certified in Monthly progress bill.

- 5% on completion of all work in all respect and acceptance thereof.



20.0 Construction methodology/requirements:

20.1 The contractor shall be entirely responsible for execution of the work covered under

this tender in a workmanlike and expeditious manner, as per the technical

specifications, drawings and as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.

20.2 The work shall be executed strictly in accordance with the Technical specifications.

21.0 Construction Equipment

The Contractor shall without prejudice to his overall responsibility to execute and

complete the work as per specifications and time schedule, progressively deploy

adequate number of suitable construction equipment and machineries required for due

completion of work, tools and tackles and augment the same as decided by the

Engineer-in-Charge depending on the exigencies of the work so as to suit the

construction schedule and complete the works within the contractual completion period

without any additional cost of Owner.

21.1 Site Organisation & Contractor’s site establishment:

The Contractor shall without prejudice to his overall responsibility to execute and

complete the works as per specifications and time schedule progressively deploy

adequate qualified and experienced personnel together with skilled/unskilled

manpower and augment the same as decided by Engineer-in-Charge depending on the

exigencies of work to suit the construction schedule without any additional cost to

Owner.

The Contractor shall build and maintain at his own cost a suitable site office and

necessary stores on the portion of the land allotted to him in an appropriate manner.

The Contractor shall also make available an appropriate shed of 15 Sqm area for setting

up a site office for use by the owner/engineer-in-charge. No separate payments will be

made for making available such shed.

21.2 Safety Regulations

The work shall be carried out as per safety practices that need be enforced for any

construction site. The Contractor shall abide by all such safety regulations that are

required to be followed. The contractor shall have to take necessary safety

arrangements / precautions for the workmen engaged by him and shall be liable for any

First Aid / Emergency treatment for his labourers / workmen. In addition, the contractor

shall have to abide by all fire & safety regulations as prevalent. The contractor has to

execute work after taking necessary instructions and clearance from the safety officer/

NALCO.

All lifting / handling tools and tackles should have been tested as per rule.

All mobile equipment like trucks, tractors, tippers, dumpers used in work shall have

valid fitness certificate and Insurance etc. as required under law of the land.



21.3 Site cleaning:

The contractor shall be responsible to promote awareness on the Environmental

requirements among the workmen engaged by them for the subject work and ensure

adherence to sound environmental practices as detailed in the General Environmental

requirement and Environmental Policy.

The contractor shall remove all the waste / debris generated during the work on each

occasion and dispose off to a place as identified by Engineer I/C. If the contractor fails

to comply with the above, the owner may get the up keeping done and will recover the

expenses from the bill of the contractor.

Any dust generated during construction will not be allowed to fly over the roads,

houses etc. Necessary provision of protection will be adopted by the contractor at his

own cost for the same.

Contractor shall comply with the provisions of ISO 14000 (EMS Criteria) for proper

disposal of debris, unused oils, lubricants etc. In consultation with Engineer-in-Charge.

The Contractor shall take care of cleaning the working site from time to time for easy

access to work site and also from safety point of view.

The Contractor shall from time to time clear and remove all rubbish and constructions,

equipment, unused materials, etc. resulting in the execution of the work. The disposal

of rubbish will have to be done only in the areas earmarked by the Owner as per the

direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. All streets and driveways in the work area shall be

kept clear and unobstructed at all times.

Working site should be always kept cleaned up to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-

in-Charge. Before handing over of any work to Owner, the Contractor in addition to

other formalities to be observed as detailed in the document shall clear the site to the

entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.

21.4 Survey and level/setting out of work: The engineer-in-Charge shall furnish the

relevant existing grid point with benchmark on the land. It shall be Contractor’s

responsibility to set out the necessary control points in and to set out the alignment of

the various works. The Contractor shall have in his employ efficient survey team for

this purpose and accuracy of such setting out works shall be Contractor’s

responsibility.

21.5 The various works shall be done true to line, level and grade. The periodical checking

of these by NALCO/RITES staff not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility

regarding their accuracy. In case of any deviation in the discrepancy in line, level or

grade at the meeting face or elsewhere, the Contractor shall make good involved, if

any. Wherever such a discrepancy is found to arise at the junction of works of

different Contractor, the relative liability to set right their respective discrepancy shall

be fixed by the Engineer-in-Charge whose decision shall be final and binding on the

Contractors concerned. The Engineer-in-Charge, shall further have unquestioned right,

if need be, to rectify the discrepancies and recover the costs from the Contractor in the

proportion as he may consider reasonable.



21.6 The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge not less than 24 (twenty four) hours

notice in writing of his intention to set out or give levels for any part of the work so

that arrangements may be made for checking the same.

21.7 Work shall be suspended for such time as necessary for checking lines and levels on

any part of the works.

21.8 The Contractor shall at his own expense provide all assistance, which the Engineer-in-

Charge require, for checking the setting out of works.

22.0 Drawings and documents

22.1 The drawings accompanying the Tender Document are of indicative nature and issued

for tendering purpose only. Purpose of these drawings is to enable the Bidder to make

an offer in line with requirements of the Owner.

22.2 These are preliminary drawings for tender purpose only and are by no means the final

drawings or show the full range of the work under the scope. Work has to be carried

out on the basis of the drawings marked, “Released for Construction” with additions,

alterations and modifications made from time to time and also according to any other

that would be supplied to the contractor progressively during execution of the work.

22.3 Construction shall be as per drawings/specifications issued/approved by Engineer-in-

Charge issued from time to time during the course of execution of work. The quoted

rates shall be deemed to include cost of preparation and submission of fabrication

drawings (if any) for review and approval of Engineer-in-Charge. It is however, clearly

agreed by the Contractor that review and approval of the drawings by Engineer-in-

Charge shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility to carry out the work as

per specifications.

22.4 However, no extra claim whatsoever, shall be entertained for variation in the

“Approved for Construction” and “Tender Drawings” regarding any changes/ units.

Construction shall be as per drawings/ specifications issued/ approved by Engineer-in-

Charge during the course of execution of work. The quoted rates shall be deemed to

include cost of preparation and submission of fabrication drawings as specified

elsewhere in the Tender Document for review and approval of Engineer-in-Charge. It is

however, clearly agreed by the Contractor that review and approval of the drawings by

Engineer-in-charge shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility to carry out

the work as per specifications.

22.5 Contractor shall submit everyday a report on category wise layout and equipment

deployed along with the progress of work done on previous day in the proforma

prescribed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

23.0 Inspection of supply items:

All inspection and test on bought out items required for due completion of work shall

be made as required by specifications forming part of this contract. Various stages of

inspection and testing shall be identified after receipt of Quality Assurance Programme

from the Contractor / manufacturer.



Inspection calls shall be given for association of Engineer-in-charge as per mutually

agreed programme in prescribed proforma with 15 days margin, giving details of

equipment and attaching relevant test certificates and internal inspection report of the

Contractor. All drawings, general arrangement and other contract drawings,

specifications, catalogues etc., pertaining to equipment offered for inspection shall be

got approved by Engineer-in-charge and copies shall be made available to Engineer-in-

charge before hand for undertaking inspection. The Contractor shall ensure full and

free access to the Engineer-in-charge at the Contractor’s or their sub-vendor’s premises

at any time during contract period to facilitate him to carry out inspection and testing

assignments.

The Contractor shall provide all instruments, tools, necessary testing and other

inspection facilities to inspection engineer of Engineer-in-charge free of cost for

carrying out inspection.

Where facilities for testing do not exist in the Contractor’s laboratories, samples and

test pieces shall be drawn by the Contractor in the presence of Engineer-in-charge and

duly sealed by the later and sent for tests in Government approved Test House or any

other testing laboratories approved by the inspection Engineer at the Contractor’s cost.

The Contractor shall comply with the instructions of the inspection Engineer fully and

with promptitude.

24.0 Scope of supply by the contractor wherever applicable :

24.1 Scope of supply shall be as detailed in Specification of this Tender Document.

24.2 The procurement and supply of all other materials, consumables etc. including

necessary tools & tackles required for the completion of work shall be the

responsibility of Contractor and the quoted price shall be deemed to include cost

towards the same.

24.3 Debris generated by the Contractor shall be disposed of by the Contractor at his own

cost at suitable location as mutually agreed with the Engineer-in-Charge.

25.0 Responsibility of contractor:

25.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the approval for any revision

and/or modifications decided by the Contractor from the Owner/ Engineer-in-charge

before implementation. Also such revisions and/ or modifications if accepted/ approved

by the Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge shall be carried out at no extra cost to the Owner.

25.2 All expenses towards mobilisation at site and demobilisation including bringing in

equipment, work force, materials, dismantling the equipment, clearing the site etc. shall

be deemed to be included in the prices quoted and no separate payments on account of

such expenses shall be entertained.

25.3 It shall be entirely the Contractor’s responsibility to provide, operate and maintain all

necessary construction equipment, scaffoldings and safety gadgets, cranes and other

lifting tackles, tools and appliances to perform the work in a workmanlike and efficient

manner and complete all the jobs as per time schedule.



25.4 The Contractor shall acquaint himself with access availability, facilities such as railway

siding, local labour etc. to provide suitable allowances in his quotation. The Contractor

may have to build temporary access roads to aid his own work, which shall also be

taken care while quoting for the work.

25.5 The procurement and supply in sequence and at the appropriate time of all materials

and consumables shall be entirely the Contractor’s responsibility and his rates for

execution of work will be inclusive of supply of all these items.

25.6 The contractor is fully responsible for shifting of materials viz. Suitable earth/soil from

the soil dump area/approved borrows areas to the work site. If any eventualities such as

stoppage/ hindrance are caused by local people/ villagers so arises during the

transportation or shifting of earth/soil shall be dealt by the contractor at no extra cost to

the Owner.

26.0 Measurement of work:

26.1 For all payment purposes, measurements shall be based on the execution drawings.

Wherever details are not available or inadequate in the execution drawings, physical

measurements shall be taken by the Contractor in the presence of representative of the

Engineer-in-Charge. In such cases, payment shall be made on actual measurements.

Measurements shall be made in units indicated in Schedule of Rates.

26.2 Measurement of weights shall be in metric tonnes corrected to the nearest kilogram.

26.3 Linear measurement shall be in meters corrected to the nearest centimeter.

26.4 Wherever the unit of items has been indicated as lumpsum, the payment shall be made

on lumpsum basis on completion and no made of measurement shall be applicable.

27.0 Variation in Contract value:

The quantity of the various items mentioned in the schedule is estimated quantities only

and may vary up to any extent or may be deleted altogether. The quoted rates of each

item shall remain firm for any variation in the value of the work executed under this

tender specification, including extra items, (if any).

28.0 Computerized contractor’s billing system

Without prejudice to stipulation in General Conditions of Contract, Contractor shall

follow the following Computerised Billing System:

The bills will be prepared by the Contractor on his own PCs as per the standard formats

and codification scheme proposed by the Owner. The Contractor will be provided with

data entry software to capture the relevant billing data for subsequent processing. The

contractor shall submit the monthly bills in two hard copies and one floppy/ CD

incorporating all jointly accepted measurements of work done in the previous month. If



the relevant pages shall be marked by flagging in hard copy and such bill shall be

returned to the Contractor. The date of re-submission of the same after incorporating all

such corrections only shall be reckoned as the date of submission of the bill. The

Contractor shall also ensure the correctness and consistency of data so entered with the

hard copy of the bill, submitted for payment. No additional payment on account of

computer hire or peripherals of consumables shall be made.

29.0 Quality assurance/quality control programme:

29.1 Bidder shall include in his offer the Quality Assurance Programme containing the over

all quality management and procedures which is required to be adhered to during the

execution of contract. After the award of the contract, detailed quality assurance

programme shall be prepared by the Contractor for the execution of contract for various

works, which will be mutually discussed and agreed to.

29.2 The Contractor shall establish document and maintain an effective quality assurance

system.

29.3 The Owner/ Consultant or their representative reserve the right to inspect / witness,

review any or all stages of work at shop / site as deemed necessary for quality

assurance.

29.4 The final acceptance of work shall be based on the test results of the quality control

laboratory set up by the owner. The Contractor shall make suitable arrangements to see

that one of his representatives remains present at the time of taking samples and shall

authenticate the facts, if so required. Should the Contractor fail to keep his

representative present at site at the time of taking samples or fail to provide required

labourers and other equipment to collect the samples, it shall be taken by the Owner

and the samples selected shall be considered as authentic. The cost incurred by the

Owner when the Contractor fails to provide required men and material for collecting

samples and for their transport shall be recovered from the Contractor.

30.0 General environment requirement

30.1 The bidder has to ensure efficient use of natural resources like water, fuel oil and

lubricants.

30.2 In case the bidders are quoting for oil, grease, chemicals and toxic substances or these

substances form a part of materials quoted, they should ensure proper storage, handling,

packing and shifting of materials to Owner’s site properly so that the same should not

pollute the environment.

30.3 The bidder should ensure that materials/equipment quoted are manufactured/ supplied

through Eco-friendly process/system.

30.4 The bidder should ensure proper awareness of workers working in their factory / plant

to maintain for a green and clean environment inside/outside their plant.

30.5 It will be the responsibility of the bidder to use Eco friendly packing materials.



30.6 The contract agencies must collect and dispose of all the waste and scrap materials at

the designated place only as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

31.0 Modification to GCC :

31.1 Para (a) of Amendment at Sl. No. 12 (GCC page no. 95 of 96) stands replaced by the

following:

The payment of minimum wages to contract labour shall be as per the rates notified by

the Central Govt. as per Minimum Wage Act, 1948 and as adopted by the NALCO

Management from time to time including any additional element and statutory dues

there on.

31.2 Sl. No. 02 & 03(GCC page no. 93 of 96) of Amendment stands replaced by the

following:

i) Land for Contractor’s Field office, Godown and Workshop:

The owner shall provide land to the Contractor for their offices, godown and

workshop inside the plant boundary limit.

ii) Land for Residential Accommodation:

The Land/houses for residential accommodation for staff and labour shall be arranged

by Contractor at his own cost outside plant boundary limit.

31.3 In the list of Standard banks (page 81 of GCC), Sl no-19 i.e. Indian Overseas

Bank is to be read as deleted.

32.0 Scrap & Surplus material for Rail:

The contactor shall return all the surplus/unused/unutilized as well as the scraps and

wastages out of the materials supplied to him to the Owner’s stores in good condition at

the contractor’s cost. Unaccountable scrap allowances permissible for Rail will be nil.

Rail below 6.0 m length will be considered as scrap material

33.0 Bill of Quantities (BOQ) and Schedule of Rates (SOR) shall be read as same meaning.

34.0 i) No mobilization advance will be paid to the contractor.

ii) The work will be carried out as per the availability of front and no extra payment

will be admissible towards it.

35.0 For any further requirement, labour component will be considered as per CPWD Rate

analysis (Latest edition).

36.0 FREE ISSUE MATERIAL(FIM)

Following materials will be issued as FIM at NALCO’s store . The agency will have to

transport including loading, unloading these materials from Owner’s store to the work

site.

i. Fly Ash bricks

ii. Stone boulders (available boulder at site)

iii. 52 Kg Rails (old), if required.



36.1 The Bank Guarantee / Indemnity Bond as follows:-

i) Bank Guarantee =NIL

ii) Indemnity Bond = Rs.53,200.00

37 The contractor has to have a site laboratory as per IS requirement at his own cost.

However when the equipments are out of order, tests will be conducted in the outside

laboratory approved by the EIC.

38 All Measurements will be after compaction wherever applicable ..

39 The agency has to provide approach roads if required for easy movement of vehicles to

carry out the work at no extra cost.

40 Wherever mixing of materials are required, the party has to mix the material as per

requirement without any extra cost.

41 No change in the unit rate will be admissible for any variation In quantities.

42 Backfilling has to be done in layers of thickness not exceeding 200 mm well watered

are rammed with pneumatic or mechanical means. Core samples are to be taken for

each layer to determine the dry density and reading shall be recorded.

43 In area, where special compaction is requested of this will be carried out by depositing

in layers of 150 mm to 200 mm thickness as may be compacting to the required density

testing and trimming the side slopes. The layers of earth laid may required watering to

attain optimum moisture content and they must be watered before rolling as directed by

the Engineer. In inaccessible places, such as around culverts, pipes, foundations etc.

filling is to be compacted as specified.

44 All material and labour required for fencing in and protecting against risk or accidents

due to open excavations shall be provided without any extra cost to Employer.

45 In the excavation of trenches for laying pipes and for foundations, construction work

below the ground level and refilling the earth should be carried out in the shortest

possible time so as to avoid sinking of ground and consequent reduction in the bearing

capacity at the bottom of the pits.

46 Wherever not mentioned in specification, all work will be done according to IS:456 and

sampling and testing will be as per IS: 1199 and IS:516 respectively and the Contractor

shall be free to design their mix to obtain the most economical use of cement and

aggregate and supply concrete of correct design strength. All aggregates must be

machine crushed unless otherwise specified. The maximum size of the aggregate will

be used as required by the drawings and specifications and the material should conform

to IS:383.

47 The levels are to be referred from the level of the TBM shown in the drawing or to be

shown at site by engineer in charge.



48 Storage of cement for at least 21 day's consumption at peak period must be planned by

the Contractor.

49 The quality of concrete will be tested by cube strength and test cubes of size 15 cm x

15 cm x 15 cm will be taken and tested as per relevant IS code.

50 Samples will be taken by the Contractor in the presence of the Manager in charge or his

representative. Moulds for the cubes from the cubes and transportation of cubes from

the site to the laboratory will be provided by the Contractor. Contractor will provide

facilities at the site for casting and the proper storage of cubes until they are transported

to the laboratory.

51 Testing will be done by the Employer's staff in the laboratory when, the Contractor's

representative may be present. The presence of the Contractor's representative shall

however not be a condition for carrying out tests.

52 The cost of testing works cubes will be borne by the Contractor.

53 The rates for concrete items shall hold good for all concreting work irrespective of the

thickness, size, shapes, volume, etc. And no extra shall be paid except what is provided

for in the Contract.

54 The rates shall cover leaving of holes and pockets as shown in the drawings. Neither

deduction will be made from the concrete for pockets/holes nor extra payment be -

made for providing such holes.

55 In assessing the quantity of reinforcement to be paid for, extra steel used in authorised

spacers, fixtures, stays, overlaps, chairs, will be taken into account including additional

steel used in welding. Normally where additional overlaps are necessary because of the

actual commercial lengths of bar supplied these extra overlaps as authorised and

provided will be paid for. Where angles or other structural sections are used for welds,

these will be paid for at the rate as for reinforcement. The weights of the'

reinforcement/steel will be computed on theoretical basis from lengths and standards

weights.

56 The rate for steel reinforcement item shall cover all types of steel reinforcement such as

plain MS rounds or squares, deformed bars, twisted deformed bars etc., whether in

straight length or coils. In case of rods in coils the rate shall also include the cost of

decoiling operation involved.

57 The bars shall be bent cold, correctly and accurately to the size and shape and shall be

thoroughly cleaned of rust, scales, grease, oil and any other foreign matter. As far as

possible bars of full length shall be used. But where this cannot be done, overlapping or

welding of bars shall be done as directed by the Manager in charge. The overlapping

bars shall be bound with annealed steel wire of 20 SWG twisted tight. The overlaps

shall be staggered. For bigger diameter, rods should be joggled for overlapping so that

when rods are replaced in position bottom faces of the rods will come in one line.



58 The cover of concrete to the reinforcement shall be provided as directed and maintained

within a tolerance of 3 mm by means of distant pieces cover block of cement mortar or

of approved material.

59 The rate of shuttering shall cover all form work including strutting and supports, bolts,

tension devices, wedges, fillets to form chamfers or splays, rebates and grooves,

overlaps at angles, all cutting and additional labour and waste at connections and

intersections, notching, splayed edges, applying approved form releasing agents, raking

or circular cutting, cutting and waste in casing, stripping and removing.

60 Recovery of shuttering and repeated use in work, etc., shall be the Contractor's

responsibility and no extra payment will be made for irrecoverable or blocking of

shuttering.

61 Irrecoverable bolts or any other steel fixtures used for keeping the shuttering from

bulging out under instruction of Engineer, will be not paid extra.

62 Centering and shuttering shall be tight so that the cement slurry may not escape from

the shuttering and cause deformations/honey combing in the structures. Joint of

shuttering are to be stopped with proper materials. The inner surface of shuttering shall

be such as to produce a smooth surface of the concrete. Approved form releasing agent

is to be, applied on, the inner surface of shuttering before placing' concrete. Formwork

shall not be removed till the concrete has attained proper strength and till the

permission of the Engineer is obtained.

63 The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to ensure complete safety and

prevention of accidents at site as per relevant latest IS Codes.

64 The Employer shall not be responsible nor accountable for any of the accidents at site

due to the negligence of the Contractor in not taking adequate precautions for complete

safety of men and materials.

65 No separate payment will be made for de-watering, de-sludging and allied operations at

any stage of the work. The cost of such operations, if becomes necessary, will be

deemed to have been included in the contract rates.

66 The Contractor shall support and maintain adjoining and/or abutting property and

structures to render work safe to persons, property and structures /installation.

67 The Contractor shall provide necessary decking guard, fences, planking with red flags

and red lights at night to maintain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic wherever

necessary.

68 The Contractor shall replace or repair at his own cost in an approved manner, all work

damaged through removal of such temporary work or improper protective work.

69 On completion of the works undertaken by the Contractor, he shall remove all

temporary works erected by him and have the site cleared as directed by the Engineer-

in-Charge. If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, the Engineer-in-

Charge has the right to remove any structure, such surplus, rubbish materials and



dispose off the same as he deems fit and get the site cleared and the contractor shall

forthwith pay the amount of all expenses so incurred and shall have no claim in respect

of any such surplus materials disposed as aforesaid. The Owner reserves the right to ask

the Contractor at any time during the pendency of the contract, to vacate the land by

giving 7 (seven) days notice on security reasons or on national interest or otherwise.

70 Notwithstanding the sub-divisions of the 'documents into the separate sections and

volumes each part shall be deemed to be supplementary to complementary of every

other part and shall be read with and into the contract so far as it may be practicable to

do so.

71 Slips and falls in excavation shall be cleared by the contractor at his own cost.

Excessive heaving shall have to cut and refill with lean concrete by the contractor at his

own cost. The contractor shall have to adopt under-water work in case of occurrence of

piping/quick condition without any additional cost to the Owner.

72 The contractor will be paid for the earthwork as per the drawing. The slopes etc. as

required for the safety of the work has to be provided as per the decision of the

Engineer-in-Charge at his own cost. All types of dewatering including seepage, rain

water , natural nalla water etc shall be carried out by the contractor at no extra cost .

73 No Compensation In case of Change of Location of Site: Change of location of site do

not invalidate the contract and tenderer have no claim for any compensation for such

changes.

74 With respect to any sub-contract entered into by the contractor pursuant to the

provisions of the relevant clause thereof, the contractor shall obtain from the sub

contractor an undertaking to provide the Owner with the same patent protection that

contractor is required to provide under the provisions or this clause.

75 Any change in layout due to site conditions or technological requirement shall be

binding on the contractor and no extra claim on this account shall be entertained.

76 No verbal agreement or inference from conversation with any officer or employee of

the Owner either before, during or after the execution of the contract agreement shall in

any way affect or modify and of the terms or obligations herein contained.

77 The execution of work may entail working in the monsoon also. The contractor must

maintain a minimum labour force as may be required for the job and plan execute the

construction and erection according to the prescribed schedule. No extra rate will be

considered for such work in monsoon.

78 During monsoon and other period, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to keep

the construction work site free from water at his own cost.

79 The contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge reports at regular intervals

regarding the state and progress of work. The contract shall provide display boards

showing progress and labour strength at work site as directed by the Engineer-in-

Charge.



80 The site of work will be released progressively in stages and no claim for any

compensation or damages will be tenable for non-release of the entire site at a time.

81 As built drawing showing all Corrections, adjustments etc. shall be furnished by the

Contractor in five copies ,soft form in one CD & one transparent for record Purposes to

the owner.

82 Copies of all detailed working drawings relating to the works shall be kept at the

contractor's office on the site and shall be made available to the Engineer-in-Charge at

any time during the contract period. The drawings and other documents issued shall be

returned to the Owner on completion of the works.

83 The Engineer-in-Charge shall furnish to the contractor with only the four corners of the

work site that is plant boundary limits, and a level bench mark only. The contractor

shall set out the works, provide an efficient staff for the purpose and shall be solely

responsible for the accuracy of such setting out.

84 The contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all stacks,

templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take all necessary

precautions to prevent their removal or disturbance. He shall be responsible for the

consequences arising of such removals, disturbances, corrections thereon and for their

efficient and timely reinstatement. The contractor shall also be responsible for the

maintenance of all existing survey marks, boundary marks distance marks and centre

line marks, either existing or supplied and fixed by the contractor. The work shall be set

out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The approval thereof or jointly with

the contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge in setting out the work, shall not relieve the

contractor of any of his responsibilities.

85 Before beginning the work the contractor shall at his own cost, provide all necessary

reference and level posts, pegs, bamboos, flags, ranging rods, strings and other

materials for proper layout of the work in accordance with the scheme for bearing

marks acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge. The centre, longitudinal, face, and cross

lines shall be marked by means of small masonry pillers. Each pillars shall have distinct

mark at the centre to enable the theodolite to be set over it. No work shall be started

until all these points are checked and approved .by Engineer-in-Charge in writing, but

such approval shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities. The

contractor shall also provide all labour, materials and other facilities as necessary, for

the proper checking or layout and inspection of the points during construction.

86 Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the sites of units of works under construction

should be protected and fenced by the contractor.

87 On completion of work, the contractor must submit the geodetic documents according

to which the work was carried out.

88 The contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal and

vertical alignment, the level and correctness of every part of the work and shall rectify

effectually any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be carried out

by the contractor at his own cost, when instructions are issued to that effect by the

Engineer-in-Charge.



89 The contractor shall in connection with works provide and maintain at his own cost all

lightings, guards, fencing and watch and ward and the security of the entire work in

progress including all. the machineries, materials shall be the responsibility of the

contractor till taken over by the owner by way of the written taking over certificate.

90 The contractor shall properly store all materials either issued to him or brought by him

to the worksite to prevent damages due to rain, wind, direct exposure to sun etc. as also

from theft, pilferage, etc. [or proper and speedy execution of his works. The contractor

shall maintain sufficient stocks of all materials required by him.

91 The contractor is to provide at all times during the progress of the work and

maintenance period proper means at access with ladders gangways etc. and the

necessary attendance to move and adopt as directed for inspection or measurement of

the works by the Engineering-in-Charge.

92 HR , SHE & Accounts related matters will be dealt by NALCO .

93.0 SOCIAL ACCOUNTABILITY (SA-8000)

i) The Organization/supplier shall not engage in or support any form of child labour.

ii) The Organization/supplier shall refrain from any form of forced labour

iii) The Organization/supplier shall provide to all its employees the necessary health

and safety benefits as per the statutory and regulatory authorities.

iv) The Organization/supplier shall respect the right of worker to organize themselves

and bargain collectively.

v) The Organization/supplier shall not allow or support any form of discrimination

among its workers and shall not engage in or tolerate any form of corporal

punishment.

vi) The Organization/supplier shall follow the statutory requirements described for

normal working hours, remuneration and social benefits

94.0 SAFETY REQUIREMENT:

(a) The party should supply Safety shoes, gum boot & safety helmets ,safety belt,

safety jacket ,safety net ,safety goggles ,face shield, nose mask and other PPEs as

per PPE Matrix to all workman during execution of the work.

(b) The area should be cordoned with proper signage .

(c) Necessary scaffolding, gang ways, platform etc. for workmen shall be provided

for the works at higher elevation.

(d) Necessary head load carrying helmets shall be provided.

(e) Cleaning of the debris/paint/dust/dirt /peel offs /paints etc from the floor / area

after cleaning of the structure and painting .



(f) Necessary work permits ,height permits, confined space entry permits, line

clearances should be obtained before starting the work .

(g) Medical test certificate with respect to fitness to work at height before

commencement of the work from a registered doctor/hospital shall be arranged.

(h) All the lifting equipments, machinery, tools & tackles shall be tested and

necessary test certificates shall be obtained from a approved competent authority

95.0 ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS:

(a) Proper storage of toxic materials so that it can not pollute the environment.

(b) Transportation of debris should be proper and should not harm the environment.

(c) The contractor should use equipments having permissible noise limit and not

polluting the atmosphere at any cost.

(d) The contractor should ensure that oil grease are stored/ handled and disposed

properly so that they don’t find their way into the industrial drain / natural water

ways etc.

(e) Contractor should ensure proper awareness among workers to maintained green

and clean environment, safety and health related issues.

(f) The contractor should train his workers about the PPEs and their safe uses.

(g) The contractor should clean the paint drums as per relevant IS standard and keep

them safely in his store and dispose them periodically .

(h) Sludge, silt, Grass, debris, water weeds bush and other waste etc. generated from

work should be carefully disposed in designated dumping yard to keep the area

clean.

(i) It is the responsibility of the contractor not to cause damage to the afforestation

and the green belt inside the plant.

(j) The contractor has to water the roads through which its vehicles are plying with a

water tank having sprinkling system to prevent dust and ash nuisance.

(k) Environment pollution due to dust, fly ash, bitumen fumes etc. during

transportation and placement shall be averted at any cost.



96.0 TRANSPORATION OF BORROW EARTH

(i.) The earth will be transported from designated borrow area from outside Plant.

Necessary opening of boundary wall if required has to be made by the Contractor

with temporary gate provision and the same will be closed after Completion of

the transportation of earth work.

ii) The contractor is fully responsible for shifting of materials viz. Suitable earth/soil

from the soil dump area/approved borrows areas to the work site. If any

eventualities such as stoppage/ hindrance are caused by local people/ villagers so

arises during the transportation or shifting of earth/soil shall be dealt by the

contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.

**********



CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE OF MATERIALS

The OWNER shall supply Rails as FREE ISSUE MATERIAL(FIM) for due completion of the

work subject to fulfilling following conditions:

1.0 CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE OF MATERIALS

Whenever any material is issued by Owner, following conditions for issue of material in

addition to other conditions specified in the contract shall be applicable:

1.1 Contractor shall submit Indemnity Bond for 100% of the value of material for use inside

the Plant premises, whereas they shall submit Bank Guarantee for 100% of the value of

the materials in NALCO’s approved proforma for the material taken out of the plant

boundary for due completion of the work. Bank Guarantee will be returned back on use

of material in the work.

1.2 Necessary indents will have to be raised by the Contractor as per procedure laid down by

the Engineer-in-Charge from time to time, when he requires the above material for

incorporation in permanent works.

1.3 Materials will be issued only for permanent works or otherwise stated in BOQ and not

for temporary works, enabling works etc. unless specifically approved by the Engineer-

in-Charge .

1.4 The Contractor shall bear all other cost including lifting, carting from issue points to

work site/Contractor's store, custody and handling etc. and return of surplus/serviceable

scrap of owner issue materials to Owner's storage points to be designated by the

Engineer-in-Charge etc. No separate payment for such expenditure will be made.

1.5 No material shall be allowed to be taken outside the plant without a gate pass.

1.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for proper storage, preservation and watch & ward of

the materials.

1.7 RETURN OF UNUSED MATERIAL

1.7.1 All unused/scrap owner issue materials shall be the property of the Owner and shall be

returned in good and acceptable condition size wise, category wise by the Contractor at

his own cost to Owner's Store(s).

1.7.2 No credit will be given to the Contractor for return of scrap. The Contractor should quote

the rates accordingly.

1.7.3 In case the Contractor fails to return unused/scrap materials, then recovery for such

quantity of materials, not returned by the Contractor shall be affected at following penal

rates from the Contractor's bills or from any other dues of the Contractor to the Owner.

Contractor shall make his own arrangements for weighing the off cuts to be returned to

Owner's stores.



1.7.4 Following Penal rates shall be applicable for non return of materials:

Sl.No Material Penal Rates

(a) Penal rate for non

return of accountable

scrap

Issue Rate + 25%

or

Landed Rate + 25% (in case issue rate are

not indicated in the contract)

(b) Penal rates for non

return of Unused

material/ generation of

excess scrap

Twice the Issue Rates

or

Twice the Landed Rates

(in case Issue Rates are not indicated in the

Contract)

NOTE:

1) Landed Rate shall be arrived from the latest Purchase Order of respective material

received at site by Owner.

2) 2) In case different penal rates have been indicated in the Contract (based on

Project requirement), the same will supersede the above rates.

2.0 CEMENT

2.1 Cement of approved quality will be supplied by Contractor at his own cost for use in the

work.

2.2 The Contractor will have to submit their design mix for different grades of concrete,

keeping in view the requirements stipulated in IS:456 and IS 10262, specifically

regarding durability, slump and water cement ratio, and specific gravity of materials

brought to site as analysed in the laboratories. For design mix concrete items, theoretical

consumption of cement shall be as per report of design mix. For other than design mix

concrete items, the coefficients for consumption of cement shall be adopted as per CPWD

practice.

2.3 The permissible variation between Cement actually used on the job and theoretical

consumption worked out on the basis stipulated in above para 2.2 and as determined by

Engineer-in-Charge shall be 3% (Three percent only).

2.3.1 If the actual consumption is more than 03% of the theoretical consumption, then no

payment for the excess over 03% of the quantity of cement will be made.

2.3.2 If the actual consumption is less than 3% of the theoretical consumption then recovery at

the penal rates for the quantity of cement used less than the limit of 3% of the theoretical

consumption shall be effected from the Contractor's bill(s) or any other dues of the

Contractor to the Owner, provided that the quality of the work has been found acceptable

by the Owner @ Rs 350 per 50kg of cement.

2.4 Void.

2.5 The Contractor shall maintain a good store for storing cement The flooring of the storage

house, the clearances of cement bags from the side walls/ floor & stack height etc. shall

be as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.



2.6 The cement store shall be open for inspection and verification by the Engineer-in-Charge

or his authorised representative at any time when the Engineer-in-Charge feels the need to

do so.

2.7 Periodical stock taking as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be done by the

Contractor in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative and a

statement of stocks duly verified shall be submitted to Engineer-in-Charge.

2.8 Empty cement bags shall be the property of the Contractor and shall have to be disposed

off by him.

2.9 Penal rates for excess/less consumption with respect to “theoretical consumption”

allowance as explained in each type of material shall be charged as given in the Contract.

3.0 REINFORCEMENT BARS / STRUCTRUL STEEL/PLATES / RAILS/P- WAY

MATERIALS:

3.1 The unaccountable scrap allowance for the rail issued by the Owner, shall be nil.

3.2 Rails shall be issued as a free issue materials in available length/shapes/sizes and no

claims for extra payment on account of issue of non-standard lengths/shapes/sizes

bending etc. shall be entertained. Rails shall be issued on Weighment/linear measurement

basis as per normal NALCO’s practice. The standard coefficients for unit weight shall be

considered to convert the unit. For the purpose of billing and accounting, only linear

measurements will be taken in two decimals.

3.3 Reinforcement bars/structural steel/steel plates/Rails shall be issued only for those items

where Owner's supply has been specifically mentioned in Schedule of Rates/ Scope of

Supply. Materials which will be supplied by tenderer, no scrap/wastage will be

considered for payment. Payment will be made as per approved drawing.

3.4 All reinforcement bars/structural steel except M.S. Plates in length of 2 meters and above

shall be considered as serviceable materials provided the material is in good and

acceptable condition. Reinforcement bars/structural steel section except M.S. Plates in

lengths less than 2M shall be treated as scrap.

3.5 For the purpose of accounting of the plates, all plates measuring not less than 1 Sqm in

area and having any dimensions not less than 200mm when returned to Owner's store,

will be considered as serviceable material. All other pieces will be treated as

wastage/scrap. The Contractor will prepare a plate-cutting diagram in such a way that the

minimum scrap is generated. Also the cut plates should be used at a proper place to

reduce scrap.

3.6 As regards rails - rail shall be refunded based on reconciliation statement at site and

issued on actual basis. If agency would not be able to refund the actual cut piece of the

rail, penal rate of recovery shall be made twice the landed rate.



3.7 Above serviceable cut pieces as mentioned in 3.4 & 3.5 above shall be considered as

unused material.

3.8 For non return of unused quantity of material shall be charged at penal rates.

3.9 The wastage generated by the Contractor in excess of the allowable percentage shall also

be charged at the penal rates.

3.10 As regards P-way materials - P-way materials shall be refunded based on reconciliation

statement at site and issued on actual basis. If agency would not be able to refund the

actual excess materials, penal rate of recovery shall be made twice the landed rate.

Wastage on Ballast will be considered as per Specification.



PROFORMA FOR THE CREDENTIAL

OF THE TENDERER



APPENDIX-1 A

DETAILS OF WORKS OF SIMILAR NATURE & MAGNITUDE CARRIED OUT

DURING THE LAST 7 YEARS

Sl.No. Name of

work done

Estimated

cost

When

started

When

completed

Date of

Completion

as per

contract

Remarks

Note: 1 In the remarks column, please state whether the works stated above are carried out by

you in the name of the Firm in which the present Bid is submitted or any other names.

If later, state the relationship of the firm and also a copy of the Partnership Deed.

2 Please enclose the true copy of the certificate issued by the authorities, if any.



APPENDIX-1 B

Name of Work :

Name of Tenderer

CONCURRENT COMMITMENTS OF THE TENDERER

Full

Postal

Address

of Client

& Name

of

Officer-

in-

Charge

Description

of the work

Value of

contract

Date of

commencement

of work

Scheduled

Completio

n period

Percenta

ge

Completi

on as on

date

Expecte

d date of

completi

on

Remarks

if any



APPENDIX-II

Name of Work :

Name of Tenderer :

DETAILS OF EQUIPMENTS, TOOLS TRACKLES

Tenderer shall submit herein details of equipment, tools, tackles, etc required to perform the

work and shall note in each case whether the same is (a) already owned by tenderer and

available for use on this contract (b) anticipated to be hired by contractor or (c) anticipated to be

purchased by contractor, in case of (a) anticipated (b) and (c) Location of hirer or supplier shall

be stated.

Sl No. Description,

Make, Mode &

Capacity

Year of

Manufacture

Category(a) or

(b) or (c) below

Location Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6

1. Contractor agrees to augment the above chart with additional number/categories of

equipment, if required to complete the work within the agreed time schedule of completion

and directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

2. In case of hiring of equipment form other agencies, copies of the arrangements made with

the hirer/supplier shall have to be furnished.



APPENDIX-III

DETAILS OF MINIMUM MANPOWER PROPOSED TO BE

DEPLOYED ON THIS WORK

Sl.No. Details of Manpower No. Remarks

Note : Please furnish the above details in two categories – To be deployed by (i) Contractor and

(ii) Sub-contractors.

Minimum manpower deployment shall be based broadly as above and will be modified

as mutually agreed to suit the detailed construction programme jointly worked out;

further if any additional manpower is required for completion of work in time, the same

shall be provided by you as directed by Engineer without any extra cost.

The manpower proposed to be deployed in the work needs to be given quarter wise

separately for direct personnel of the contractor and the manpower proposed to be

deployed through the sub-contractors.



APPENDIX-IV

ORGANISATION CHART SHOWING NO. OF QUALIFIED

ENGINEERS & SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL ETC.

Sl.

No.

Details of personnel to be deployed on this work No.

Note: Names and short resume of their experiences may also be given for key personnel

The tentative chart of your site organization as above furnished by you shall be subject to

variation to suit the construction programme/requirement and as directed by

owner/Engineer.



APPENDIX-V

LIST OF PROPOSED SUB CONTRACTORS

Sl.

No.

Name of sub-contractor Description of work or trade Amount (Rs)

1 Type of work executed by the sub-contractors

2 The particulars of clients where the sub-contractors did the works

3 Approximate value of the work carried by the sub-contractors in the last 3 years



APPENDIX-VI

PROGRESS BILLINGS

(Bidder’s anticipated progress billing month by month to be inserted here)

Tentative construction schedule indicating the expected dates of start of activity is to be given

by the contractor. This schedule shall be updated within specified milestones from time to time

depending upon the availability of fronts equipment and priorities fixed by Engineer. Contractor

shall submit within 15 days of the date of letter of intent programme/schedule for supply of

items covering all phases of work including design, procurement, manufacture, assembly,

fabrication, testing, transportation, erection, testing at site and commissioning matching the

overall completion schedule.

The billing as well as all the connected documents shall be computerized.



APPENDIX-VII

NAME OF WORK :

NAME OF TENDERER :

INFORMATION ABOUT TENDERERS (FORM-H)

1.0 In case of individual :

1.1 Name of Business :

1.2 Whether his business is registered :

1.3 Date of Commencement of Business :

1.4 Whether he pays Income Tax over Rs 10,000/- per year

2.0 In case of partnership :

2.1 Name of partnership with qualification :

2.2 Whether the Partnership is Registered :

2.3 Date of Establishment of firm :

2.4 If each of the partners of the firm pays Income Tax over Rs 10,000/- a year and if not,

who of them pays the same.

3.0 In case of Limited Liability Company or Company Limited by Guarantees :

3.1 Amount of paid of capital :

3.2 Name of Directors :

3.3 Date of Registration of Company :

Copies of the Balance Sheet of the Company of the last two years :

Copies of audited Profit & Loss Account and the Balance sheet shall be enclosed in case

of Individuals, partnerships as well as limited companies for the last 3 years



APPENDIX-VIII

NAME OF WORK :

NAME OF TENDERER :

LIST OF ENCLOSURES (FORM-I)

The tenderer is required to enclose the following documents as part of his tender.

1 Power of attorney of the signatory to the tender

2 Sales Tax Clearance Certificate in the proforma prescribed by the Govt of India.

3 Documents showing annual turnover for similar works for the past two years such as

annual report, profit and loss account etc.

4 Solvency Certificate by Nationalized Schedule Bank.



APPENDIX-IX

NAME OF WORK :

NAME OF TENDERER :

EXCEPTION AND DEVIATION (FORM-J)

As pointed out in the NIT/LIT, tenderer may stipulate here exceptions and deviation to the

tender conditions, if considered un-avoidable.

Sl.

No.

Page No. of tenderer document Sl.No. of tender

document

Subject Deviation



APPENDIX-X

SOLVENCY CERTIFICATE

This is to certify that M/s __________________________________________

is a reputed Company with a good financial standing and solvent to

the extent of Rs. ______________

Signature of authorized Signatory

with Name and Date

seal and Address of Bank



APPENDIX-XI

DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER

I representing

the bidder, do declaration on behalf of the firm as here under :

• That I am the PROPRIATOR of the bidder firm. I undertake to submit proof of

ownership as and when demanded by NALCO.

OR

• That I am the authorized signatory to the tender documents holding valid Power of

attorney, certified copy of the valid power of Attorney is enclosed with the offer.

NOTE : Strike out whichever is not applicable.

(a) That, we don’t have any FINANCIAL/PROFFESSIONAL stake in any of the

other bidders participating in this tender.

(b) That, this firm has not been blacklisted/debarred/banned in any unit of

NALCO/other PSUs/ GOVTs of India/states.

(c) That, we are not in any arbitration/ legal cases with NALCO and no cases are

pending in court of law and we have never been prosecuted by any statutory

authority.

(d) That, I/we have not been convicted /or any case has been initiated against me /us

by a court of law or indictment / adverse order by a regulatory authority against

me/ us, or my/our company or against any sister concern or mine/ours which

relates to a criminal offence.

(e) That any change in the constitution of the firm shall be made with prior clearance

from NALCO.

(f) That, we have studied all the clauses/ sub clauses terms and conditions of the

tender documents and our offer fully complies with the requirements spelt out in

the tender documents.

(g) We undertake to abide by and comply with all the safety and environmental

regulations in force in NALCO during the execution of work.

(h) We undertake to abide by and comply with all the applicable provisions of laws

governing contract workers engaged by you for this work.

(i) The appendix I & II regarding relatives working in NALCO are filled up and

enclosed.



(j) That we have quoted the rates in figures as well as words.

(k) We undertake that we don’t have any authorized structure / construction inside

Nalco nagar Township or Plant. We also undertake to remove any/ all such

structures, if detected by Nalco later on in compliance of GCC terms and

conditions.

(l) We declare that all supporting documents of the offer submitted are attested by a

gazette officer/ Notary public.

(m) We agree for enlistment of our firm in the registered vendor list of NALCO, if

found suitable. We undertake to submit additional documents if any as per

requirement of Nalco for the same.

I further declare that all above statements are true and if found otherwise any time during

preordering/post ordering stage of the contract, action as deemed fit by Nalco including

‘rejection of my offer’ and debarring/blacklisting’ may be taken against me/my firm/ my

company and shall be binding on me/firm/my company represented by me.

Name of Signatory

Postal Address of

the firm

PAN NO TIN NO

EPF NO ESI NO

Phone no Mobile no

Fax no

Email Address



APPENDIX - XII

BID SUBMISSION LETTER CUM DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER

No. Dated:

From

M/s _____________________

_____________________

_____________________

To,

M/s RITES Ltd.,

Bhagwan Tower(1st floor)

Cuttack Road, Bhubaneswar- 751006(Orissa).

Dear Sirs,

Sub:

Ref: Bid document No.:

Dated:

-----

We ____________________________(Name of the Bidder) hereby represent that, we

have gone through and understood the Bidding Document (in two parts), Part-I (Commercial

Part & Technical Part) and Part-II (Price Part) and that our Bid has been prepared accordingly in

compliance with the requirement stipulated in the said documents.

We are submitting Master Index of Bidding Document as part of our Bid duly signed and

stamped on each page in token of our acceptance to the above mentioned bid document. We

undertake that Part-I and Part-II of the Bidding Document shall be deemed to form part of our

bid and in the event of award of work to us, the same shall be considered for constitution of

Contract Agreement. Further, we shall sign and stamp each page of this Part-I and Part-II as a

token of Acceptance and as a part of the Contract Agreement in the event of award of Contract

to us.

We further confirm that we have indicated prices in Schedule of Rates (Short

Description), which is print out of Excel file of SOR, considering detailed description of items

given in Schedule of Rates (Detailed Description) and submitted in Price Bid in separately

sealed envelope. We confirm that rate quoted by us includes price for all works/activities/supply

etc as mentioned in item description of the items in Schedule of Rates (with detailed item

description) which has been issued to us in hard copy of Schedule of Rates.

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER : ___________________________

NAME OF BIDDER : ___________________________

COMPANY SEAL : ___________________________

NOTE : This declaration should be signed by the Bidder’s representative

who is signing the Bid.



MASTER INDEX

Sl. No. Description Page No.

From - To

1. NIT 2 - 3

2. Detailed NIT 4 -10

3. Bid submission letter cum declaration by the bidder

along with Master Index (which is included at Sl. No. 7)

67 - 70

4. Check List & Questionnaire 11 - 18

5. Instructions to Bidders 19 - 25

6. Special Conditions of Contract 26 - 54

7 Proforma for Credential of the Tenderer along with

Proforma for Agreement

(Appendix IA to IX also included in GCC)

55 - 75

8. Technical Specifications 76 - 203

9. Quality Assurance Plan 204 - 218

10. Tender Drawings 219 - 225

11. General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

(2 Mandate forms are also given at the end of GCC)

1 - 98

(NALCO GCC)

12. Bill of Quantity 1 - 16

(Bill of Quantity)



APPENDIX - XIII

BID COMPLIANCE STATEMENT

We hereby agree to fully comply with, abide by and accept without variation, deviation or

reservation all technical, commercial and other conditions whatsoever of the Bidding

Documents and Addendum to the Bidding Documents, if any for subject work issued by RITES

Ltd.

We hereby further confirm that any terms and conditions if mentioned in our bid (Un-priced as

well as Priced Part), shall not be recognized and shall be treated as null and void.

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER : ______________________

NAME OF BIDDER : ______________________

COMPANY SEAL : ______________________



AGREEMENT

(To be executed between successful bidder & NALCO on non judicial stamp paper of Rs. 50.00

and jurisdiction of Orissa High Court)

Contract Agreement for the work “Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting,

minor & major bridges, drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard

(Loco shed) to West grid inside plant for new Wagon tippler at NALCO M&R complex,

Damanjodi (Odisha)”

dated ______________ (The _______day of the month of ______________of the year Two

Thousand Eight) between ________________(party’s name) ________hereinafter called the

“CONTRACTOR” (which terms shall unless excluded by or repugnant to the subject or context

include its successors and permitted assignees) of the one part and the national Aluminium

Company Limited hereinafter called the “Owner” (which term shall unless excluded by or

repugnant to the subject or context include its Successors and permitted assignees) of the other

part.

Whereas :

A. The Owner being desirous of having provided and executed certain works mentioned,

enumerated or referred to in the tender documents including Notice Inviting

Tender/Letter Inviting Tender, General Conditions, Drawings, Plans, Time Schedule of

Completion of jobs and other documents has called for Tender.

B. The contractor has inspected the site and surroundings of the works specified in the

tender documents and has satisfied himself by careful examination before submitting his

tender as to the nature of the surface strata, soil, sub-soil and ground, the form and nature

of site and local conditions, the quantities, nature and magnitude of the work, the

availability of labour and materials necessary for the execution of work, the means of

access to site, the supply of power and water thereto and the accommodation he may

require and has made local and independent enquiries and obtained complete information

as to the matters and things referred to or implied in the tender documents or having any

connection therewith, and has considered the nature and extent of all probable and

possible situations, delays, hindrances or interferences to do or with the executions and

completion of the work to be carried.



C. out under the Contract, and has examined and considered all other matters, conditions

and things and probable and possible contingencies, and generally all matters incidental

thereto and ancillary thereof affecting the execution and completion of the work and

which might have influenced him in making his tender.

D. The Notice Inviting Tender/Letter Inviting Tender, General Conditions of Contract,

Special Conditions of Contract, General Obligations, Specifications, Drawings, Plans,

Time Schedule of Completion of jobs, Letter of Acceptance of Tender and any statement

of agreed variations with its enclosures, copies for which are hereto annexed from part of

this contract though separately set out herein and are included in the expression

“CONTRACT” wherever herein used.

And whereas :

The Owner accepted the Tender of the Contractor for the provision and the execution of the said

work at the rates stated in the Schedule of Quantities of works and finally approved by Owner

(hereinafter called the “Schedule of Rates”) upon the terms and subject to the conditions of

contract :

Now this agreement witnesses and it is hereby agreed and declared as follows :

1. In consideration of the payment to be made to the contractor for the work to be executed

by him, the contractor hereby covenants with the Owner that the contractor shall and will

duly provide, execute and complete the said works and shall do and perform all other

acts and things in the contract mentioned or described or which are to be implied there

from or may be reasonably necessary for the completion of the said works and at the

said times and in the manner subject to the terms and conditions or stipulations

mentioned in the contract.

2. In consideration of the due provision execution and completion of the said work, the

Owner does hereby agree with the contractor that the owner will pay to the contractor the

respective amounts for the works actually done by him and approved by the Owner at the

Scheduled Rates and such other sum payable to the contractor under provision of the

such contract, payment to be made at such time and in such manner as provided for in

the contract.



AND

3. In consideration of the due provision, execution and completion of the said work the

contractor does hereby agree to pay such sums as may be due to the owner for the

services rendered by the owner to the contractor, such as power supply, water supply and

others as set for in the said contract and such other sums as many become payable to the

owner towards the controlled items of consumable materials or towards loss, damages to

the owner’s equipment, materials, construction plant and machinery, such payments to

be made at such time and in such manner as is provided in the contract.

It is specifically and distinctly understood and agreed between the owner and the

contractor that the contractor shall have no right, title or interest in the site made

available by the owner for execution of the works or in the building, structure or works

executed on the said site by the contractor or in the goods, articles, materials etc. brought

on the said site (unless the same specifically belongs to the contractor) and the contractor

shall not have or deemed to have any lien whatsoever charge for unpaid bills nor will be

entitled to assume or retain possession or control of the site or structures and the owner

shall have an absolute and unfettered right to take full possession of the site and to

remove the contractor, his servants, agents and materials belong to the contractor and

lying on the site.

The contractor shall be allowed to enter upon the site for execution of the works only as

a licensee simplicitor and shall not have any claim, right, title or interest in the site or the

structures erected thereon and the Owner shall be entitled to terminate such license at

any time without assigning any reason.

The materials including sand gravel, stone, loose earth, rock etc dug up or excavated

from the said site shall unless otherwise expressly agreed under this contract, exclusively

belong to the

Owner and the contractor shall have no right to claim over the same and such

excavations and materials should be disposed off on account of the Owner according to

the instructions in writing issued from time to time by the Engineer-in-charge.



In witness whereof the parties have executed these presents in the day and the year first

above written.

Signed and delivered for Signed and delivered for

and on behalf of Owner and on behalf of Owner

(M/s National Aluminium Co. Ltd.) (M/s (Name of party)_______)

Date - Date –

Place - Place –

In presence of two witnesses In presence of two witnesses

1. 1.

2. 2.



TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS



SPECIFICATIONS FOR BRIDGE WORKS

CONTENTS

SUBJECT

1 EARTHWORK AND BLANKETING IN

RAILWAY FORMATION

2 BRIDGE WORKS

3 BORED PILE FOUNDATIONS

4 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDERS/

SLABS

5 ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS FOR

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDERS

6 STRIPSEAL EXPANSION JOINT

7 FUSION BONDED EPOXY COATED

REINFORCING BARS



SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHWORK AND BLANKETTING IN RAILWAY FORMATION



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

EARTHWORK AND BLANKETTING IN RAILWAY FORMATION

1.1 EARTHWORK - GENERAL

1.1.1 Site Clearance : Before work is started, the whole area between the toes of banks or tops of cuttings plus 2m in on both sides shall be properly and effectively cleared by the contractor of all small trees (of girth upto 30 cm), roots, bushes, heavy grass etc; The Contractor shall also clear the site of all buildings, abandoned structures etc as directed by the Engineer, for which extra will be made unless otherwise stated in the agreement The Contractor shall arrange removal of rubbish and other excavated material excluding earth upto a distance of 50 the periphery of the area under site clearance. High portions of the ground shall be cut down and hollow depressions filled upto the required level with the excavated earth so as to give an even neat and tidy look. The work of this nature will be covered by the initial rate for earth work, unless stated to the contrary in the agreement.

1.1.1.1 Trees of girth over 30 cm, measured at a height of 1m above ground level, shall be considered as large trees. Cutting down of large trees shall be paid extra at the rate specified when stumps are grubbed up in addition. Large trees shall not be cut without specific orders from the Engineer. As few trees shall be cut as is absolutely necessary for the execution of work. The roots of trees and saplings shall be removed to a depth of 60 cm below ground level or 30 cm below formation level or 15 cm below subgrade level, whichever is lower. All holes or hollows formed due to removal of roots shall be filled up with earth rammed and levelled. Trees, shrubs, poles, fences, signs, monuments, pipe lines, cable, etc adjacent to the area which are not required to be disturbed during site clearance shall be properly protected by the contractor at his own cost and nothing extra shall be payable. In case any damage to the pipe lines, cables, etc is done due to negligence on part of the contractor the necessary damage charges will be recovered accordingly.

1.1.1.2 Any trees cut down or building materials released from dismantling of structures shall be stacked by the contractor within a distance of 100 metres outside the periphery of the area under site clearance as per instructions of the Engineer. The contractor shall have no claim to the trees or other material removed during site clearance and the same shall be the property of the Employer.

1.1.2 Demarcation and Profiles : The contractor, before starting work, is to demarcate with a deep furrow, at least 20 cm wide and 15 cm deep, 1m away from the toes of slopes of banks and the outside limits of cuttings on both sides of the centre line, the boundaries of the bottom and the top of the slopes of the borrow pits. This is to be considered as part of the setting out of work, and preliminary to contractor being allowed to start the work; and this dag belling is to be maintained and renewed by contractor as and when necessary, or when ordered by the Engineer. The cost of this is included in the initial rate for earth-work.

1.1.2.1 The centre line will be initially set out by the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall, at his own expense, provide all building materials as cement, stone chips, sand, bricks, steel plates, nails, markers, stakes, bamboos, strings, pegs and labour necessary for setting out the centre line and profiles required for the correct execution of work and for marking out borrow pits and slopes and will be responsible to ensure that they are maintained in proper order. The costs of providing and maintaining the above including all materials and labour is included in the initial rate for earth-work.



1.1.2.2 The contractor before starting any work, shall take charge of all bench marks, centre line, demarcation and other field stones and reference pegs and be responsible for their subsequent preservation, and should they disappear or be destroyed after he has taken them over, he shall pay the cost of their replacement or replace them at his own level in consultation with the department.

1.1.3 Maintenance : Banks and cuttings are to be correctly dressed and finished in profile with slopes as specified in each case. Where gullies or water-cuts commence to form on the slopes of embankments or cuttings, the erosion is to be checked as early as practicable and made good with suitable material well rammed into place. Where a gully or water-cut has not been checked at its commencement, it may be advisable to cut it out or step it before filling it in, and to further protect the place by turfing, pitching or other means as may be ordered by the Engineer. Work, before being finally paid for, is to be checked by the Engineer as having been correctly brought up, or carried down, to the proper level and to be otherwise complete in all respects in accordance with the specifications, and with the proper allowance for settlement as specified in para 1.2.6.

1.1.3.1 As soon as the work has been satisfactorily completed, the Engineer shall issue a certificate of completion in respect of the work as specified in the General Conditions of Contract. Unless otherwise specified in the Tender conditions, the contractor shall maintain the banks / cuttings for a period of six months or as per conditions of contract and hand over banks / cuttings to Engineer-in-charge in proper condition and where necessary, for their restoration to such condition, at the end of maintenance period. Until then, contractor is responsible for all losses due to subsidence, wastage or guttering due to rain, wind, wear, wash or from any other cause whatsoever and he shall have no claim for any extra work or payment on this account.

1.1.4 Spoil from cutting to bank : Up to the normal lead of 50 metres, material from each end of every cutting shall be led forward into the adjoining bank as a matter of course, and the rate to be paid for such material shall be the rate for cutting only. Both bank and cutting will not be paid for. The Engineer shall specify in each case from what point in each cutting to what point in the adjoining bank, spoil shall be led out, payment being made only for the excess lead over and above the initial lead included in the rate for cutting. The Engineer can modify these limits at any stage of the work and all such changes shall be binding on the contractor without any claim for any extra payment on this account. Dressing and compaction of the bank will, however, be paid for in addition.

1.1.5 Classification of Soils : The classification of soils met with in executing the work shall be made by the Engineer/ Engineers’ representative authorized by the Engineer for this purpose subject to the approval and final decision of the Engineer, if not made by him. The rates to be paid to the contractor in his bills shall be based on these classifications.

Earth work can be divided under the following heads :

1.1.5.1 Soft / Loose Soil : Generally any soil which yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, or to phawra, rake or other ordinary digging implements; such as vegetable or organic soil, turf, gravel, sand, silt, loam, clay, peat, etc.

1.1.5.2 Hard/Dense Soil : Generally any soil which requires the close application of picks or jumpers or scarifiers to loosen; such as stiff clay, compact moorum, macadam surfaces of any description, (water bound, grouted, tarmac etc), kankar soil, shingle and boulder studded soil and soft conglomerate etc.

1.1.5.3 Mud (Soil) : A mixture of soil and water in fluid or weak solid state and where inflow of sub soil water is not involved.



1.1.5.4 Soft/Disintegrated Rock (Not Requiring Blasting) : Rock or boulders which may be quarried or split with crow bars. This will also include laterite and hard conglomerate.

1.1.5.5 Hard Rock (Requiring Blasting) : Any rock for the excavation of which blasting is required.

1.1.5.6 Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited) : Hard rock requiring blasting as described under sub para 1.1.5.5, but where blasting is prohibited for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiselling, wedging or any other agreed method.

1.1.6 Measurements : Cutting and banks are to be excavated and made up neatly to the lines shown in the cross section as per approved construction drawing. No payment will be made for excess work done outside these lines except when such work is so ordered in writing by the Engineer. However, if any bulges are left in the slopes of cuttings due to practical difficulties and are permitted, deduction as per actual measurements will be made. Similar action will be taken in case of concave surfaces in the slopes of embankments, if permitted.

1.1.6.1 Should the Engineer so desire, he may, at any stage of the work, order the Contractor to increase or reduce the slopes of any cutting or bank or alter the formation level, in which case the amount of work actually done will be paid for in accordance with the specifications and the Schedule of Rates.

1.1.6.2 Unless otherwise specified the initial rate for Earth work is inclusive of an initial lead upto 50 metres and lift of 1.5 metres.

1.1.6.3 Additional lead for the purpose of payment will be measured from the centre of gravity of excavation to the centre of gravity of the bank or spoil heap, and shall be measured along the shortest practicable route and not necessarily the route actually taken.

1.1.6.4 Additional lift for the purpose of payment will be estimated by dividing the cross section of the bank or cutting into successive stages of 1.5m high or deep respectively from the natural ground level and only the quantity contained in each strip shall be paid for at the rate appertaining to its height or depth above or below the natural ground level, respectively. Lift from the borrow-pit to the ground level or from ground level to the spoil bank shall not be taken into account in any payment for lift unless the depth of the borrow- pit or the height of the spoil bank has been made in excess of 1.5m under instructions from the Engineer, and in such cases, only the portion of the borrow-pit below 1.5m depth or of the spoil bank above 1.5m height as measured from the natural ground level, shall be, measured separately for payment of lift on the same basis as for cuttings or banks respectively. No extra payment will be made for descent, ascents, crossing of nallahs and ridges.

1.1.6.5 For purpose of payment, cuttings shall be assumed to be composed of such soil / soils only, as stand exposed on both or one side of the finished cuttings, depending upon whether the cutting is box type or one sided on a transversely sloping ground. The content of each type of soil thus assigned to any cross section shall be determined as indicated below. It is to be noted that no portion of cutting will be payable for any such type of soil as is not exhibited on the finished side slope, where the side slope exists. The only exception will be in cases where a hard or soft rock layer exists in cutting but is not exhibited in the original and finished side slopes. In such cases, the hard / soft rock excavated should be stacked separately and paid for after deducting 30% for voids.

(a) For box type cutting : The centre line of the alignment will be marked vertically on the cross section and the content of each type of soil will be determined by computing the area of the strip, formed by joining the points, which form the extremity of occurrence of the particular soil on the finished side slope of cutting, by straight horizontal lines terminating on the centre line. Figure No.1.1 is illustrative of the manner in which payment is to be made.



(b) For one sided cutting on a transversely sloping ground : Content of each type of soil will be determined by computing the area of the strip, formed by joining the points, which form the extremity of occurrence of the particular soil on the finished side slope of the cutting, by straight lines to the zero point. Figure No.1.2 is illustrative of the manner in which the payment for the cutting will be made

(c) For widening of existing cuttings for one or more lines where the existing cutting slope disappears and a fresh slope stands : Before undertaking widening of the cutting, pre-classification of the existing cutting slope (which will disappear) should be done after clearing and cleaning the surface and the strata met marked on the cross-section sheets. After completion of the work various strata as stand exposed on the new finished slope of the cutting shall again be marked on the cross-sections. Then the demarcation points of adjacent strata as determined by classification of the existing slope and the final slope should be joined as shown in Figure No. 1.3.

The cross-sectional areas for different strata may be worked out and quantities payable classification-wise assessed accordingly.

(d) For extension to the existing cutting where no fresh cutting slope is available after work : Before execution of the work pre-classification of the existing cutting slope which will not be finally available, should be done and recorded in the initial cross-section. Figure No. 1.4 is illustrative of the manner in which the payment for the cutting is to be made for soil of different classifications.

1.1.6.6 Classification in the above manner shall be made only at such points where the cross sections giving the ground profile have been recorded. The classification as recorded in the above manner in case of cuttings shall be signed by the contractor in token of his acceptance. The classification as recorded by the Authorized representative of the Engineer in the above cases for cuttings is subject to confirmation by the Engineer, whose decision shall be final and binding on the contractor. Where there is disagreement between the Contractor and the Authorized representative of the Engineer on classification of soil, payment shall be effected “on account” as per lower classification as made by the Authorised representative of the Engineer. Payment for extra at the rate for higher classification shall be made after final decision by the Engineer on the admissibility of the Contractor’s claim for higher classification.

1.1.6.7 In computing the quantity of earth work in cuttings and side drains, no cognizance will be taken of the additional excavation, which may be necessitated during the progress of the work due to the presence of boulders or other material, and payment will only be made for the quantity as per cross sections required to be provided.

1.1.6.8 Where cutting spoil is utilised for making the bank, stones over 15 cm size, which are not to be used in the bank, shall be stacked separately at a site to be indicated by the Engineer. To determine the quantity of cutting spoil led out for making the bank, the sectional quantity of the cutting shall be reduced by the volume of stones and boulders stacked outside, which will be arrived at by deducting 50% for voids from the stack measurements of these stones and boulders. The stacking of these stones and boulders including lead upto 50 metres and lift upto 1.5 metres is covered by the initial rate of Earth work.

1.1.6.9 Stones and boulders over 15 cm size shall not be used in making embankments. In embankments where payment is made on the basis of cross section measurements, the stones and boulders over 15 cm size shall be stacked separately, and their volume, after deducting 50% for voids from the stack measurements of these stones and boulders, shall be included as extra, for payment for earthwork in excavation from borrow pits.



1.1.6.10 Payment : It must be clearly understood that the Contract rates are intended to cover the full cost of finished work. Banks and cuttings are to be carefully dressed to formation with such slopes as may be specified in each case. The payment for the quantity of earth work in cutting / bank shall normally be made on cross sectional measurements. The existing ground / bank profile shall be taken and plotted by the Authorised representative of the Engineer in the presence of contractor or his authorized agent before commencement of the work. The profile of the bank or the cutting required to be provided including allowance of settlement in case of embankment, shall also be plotted on the same sheets. The levels and cross sections shall be signed by both the Authorised representative of the Engineer and the contractor / his authorized agent. The profiles of the bank or cutting as required to be provided are for the guidance of the contractor and not for the purpose of measurements.

The profiles of the finished and plotted bank/ cutting shall like-wise be taken in the presence of the contractor or his authorised agent and super-imposed on the original ground profile. These profiles are to be taken at locations as directed by the Engineer, atleast at 25m intervals on straight and at least at every 15m on Curves with radii sharper than 600m and at extra locations in special cases such as irregular or side long ground etc. The gross volume of earth work shall be calculated from the original and finished profile of the bank/ cutting. For the purpose of payment the gross quantity thus calculated shall be reduced by 10% towards shrinkage allowance for earth work in embankments only, but no such deductions shall be made for earth work in cuttings. Where the embankment has been compacted by heavy machinery as stipulated in subsequent Para 1.9 or in accordance with any other special specifications, on the specific instructions of the Engineer in writing, shrinkage allowance shall be deducted at the rate of 5% of the gross quantity of earth work. Irrespective of the type of soil, number of monsoons passed over the embankment, shrinkage / compaction which may be caused due to base settlement, wash out, mode of working, i.e. use of trucks, camel carts, donkeys etc, and other reasons, whatsoever and the actual shrinkage allowance provided in setting out the profiles in different sections.

As it may, at times, be difficult to measure by means of cross sections the quantity of rock excavated by blasting or chiselling, owing to its irregular configuration or intermixture with other materials, the quantity of rock may be measured after stacking the excavated rock spoil. The same procedure also applies to any other type of soil, which requires to be measured separately from the material constituting the bulk of the spoil. In all such cases, the payable quantity of the stacked material is to be arrived at by making suitable deductions for voids from the measured cubical contents of the stacks as specified below:-

Type of soil stacked Deduction (a) Rock spoil of different sizes 30 per cent (b) Sandy materials 7 ½ per cent (c) Black cotton soil 20 per cent (d) Other soils, including coal ashes 15 per cent

To facilitate measurement, all stacks to be measured shall be made rectangular in plan and of uniform height, on level ground or ground levelled for this purpose. The stacking of spoil shall be done in a compact manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The rates provided shall include all charges on account of such stacking as well as any lead or lift, as also the re-stacking of stacks or portions of stacks which the Engineer considers, in his sole discretion, as not properly stacked.



As far as possible spoils from cuttings fit for embankment shall be used to make up the bank. If however, this is found to be uneconomical due to excessive lead or lift, the earth if available from the borrow pits in the Employer’s land may be used if permitted. If sufficient quantity of good earth fit for embankment is not available from the source of cut spoils and the source of borrow pits, Contractor’s earth shall be utilised. As far as possible each stretch of bank should be made of earth from only one source so as to avoid mix up. If however, this is not possible due to exigencies of work, earth from one source should be utilised first and compaction done before earth from the next source is allowed to be dumped. Initial cross section of bank and cross section after compaction of earth from each of the sources should be taken. Based on the cross sectional areas, the gross quantity of earth work embankment executed by utilising the earth from different sources shall be determined. The net quantity shall be assessed after deduction of shrinkage allowance at the rate of 10%/5% as the case may be, depending upon the type of compaction done.

Final measurements shall be taken only after the bank/ cutting has been completed to the required profile as directed by the Engineer irrespective of the period of completion and number of monsoons that may pass during execution. Shrinkage allowance shall be applied on these final measurements for banks.

1.1.6.11 At the end of final measurements, following certificate shall be recorded in the Measurement Book by Authorised representative of the Engineer.

“Certified that necessary allowance for shrinkage as prescribed was made while giving profiles to the contractor for doing earth work and the same has been provided by the Contractor”.

1.1.6.12 Where, for any reason at the discretion of the Engineer, borrow-pit measurements are resorted to, all matams and roads and excess earth work, such as bulges in the slopes of the banks / cuttings, shall be excluded from the measurements.

1.1.6.13 Nothing extra shall be paid for :

(i) Excavation for insertion of planking and strutting. (ii) Removing slips or falls in excavations (iii) Bailing out water in excavations from rains, ordinary springs not requiring

pumping etc. (Note : Pumping out water caused by powerful springs, tidal or river seepage,

broken water mains or drains and the like, shall be paid separately if provided for in the Agreement)

(iv) Unauthorised battering or benching of excavations. (v) Forming steps in sides of deep excavations and their removal after

measurements. (vi) Protective measures for protection against risk of accidents to the public due to

open excavation. (vii) Protective measures / precautions taken to avoid damage to existing Signal /

Electrical / Telecom / other Miscellaneous Cables, Pipes, installations etc.

1.1.7 Dressing Surface :

1.1.7.1 This specification is applicable to Surface dressing executed as a separate work for purposes other than Earthwork for Embankment or Cutting. In case of Earthwork for Embankment or cutting, provisions of Para 1.1.1 will apply and the surface dressing will be covered by the initial rate of earthwork unless stated to the contrary in the Agreement. This specification shall also be applicable only to work involving Soft / Loose soil and Hard / Dense soil.

1.1.7.2 The terms “Dressing Surface” shall be taken to mean the cutting down of high portion of a specified area of ground and using the excavated earth to fill up the hollows and the depressions. The maximum depth of excavation or filling shall be restricted to 15 cms.



1.1.7.3 The levels to which the ground is to be dressed shall be such that the quantity filled is nearly equal to the quantity cut and the finished surface is even and tidy with such slopes as may be necessary for proper drainage. Before the work is commenced the proposed levels shall be set up at regular intervals both for the cuts and for the fills, by suitable means as directed by the Engineer and these shall be got checked and approved by him.

1.1.7.4 Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract, the rates shall be inclusive of removal of rubbish upto a distance of 50m outside the periphery of the area cleared.

1.2 EARTH WORK IN EMBANKMENTS

1.2.1 Embankment in Water-logged ground etc. : When embankments are to be carried across water-logged or swampy ground or to be made in soil which requires special protective measures, it rests with the Contractor in all such cases to bring these facts to the notice of the Engineer concerned who will direct on the methods to be adopted and the rates to be paid, and will arrange for a special agreement for the same if necessary.

1.2.2 Selection of Earth : If due to non availability of adequate quantity of earth from the Employer’s land, the contract provides for contractor’s earth the contractor shall get the prior approval of the Engineer for the quality of earth and where Contract Conditions provide for lead based on the distance from the sources of supply to site, the lead to be paid. The disturbed / undisturbed soil samples along with the test results as per specifications will be submitted by the contractor for approval of the source from where the earth is proposed to be borrowed before the Earth work in embankment is started or in case of change in location of the source.

1.2.3 Formation Width : The formation widths are to be as shown in the drawings.

1.2.4 Side Slopes : The side slopes will ordinarily be 2:1, but the Engineer or his Authorised representative may, by order in writing, vary this slope to suit local conditions. The side slopes shall be carried up simultaneously with the rest of the work and not filled in afterwards. This can only be ensured by insisting on the whole width of embankment from the toes of the slope coming up simultaneously. The slopes of banks composed of sand shall, if directed by the Engineer be covered by a layer of not less than 30 cm thickness of Moorum or other good soil to facilitate turfing and extra payment will be made for the same.

1.2.5 Profiles : Profiles for banks shall be set out where-ever cross section has been taken. These profiles shall be set up atleast every 25m on the straight and every 15m on curves with radii shorter than 600m. Profiles shall also be set up at any additional places if ordered by the Engineer.

1.2.6 Allowance for settlement : In width of formation 50mm extra should be provided for each 30 cm of the height of the bank as shown on the section upto a maximum of 0.60m. This does not affect the width at the toes of the slopes, which will be set out from the height given on the section. In setting up profiles for bank, due allowance for settlement must be made and added to the height of the profile over and above the height of formation as shown in the approved drawing. As a guide the following shrinkage allowances per metre height are suggested for adoption with different classes of soil:-The additional earth has to be removed after final dressing and it can be used elsewhere after a stretch of the work is completed, dressed to final profile and taken over by the Engineer-in-charge.

Shrinkage allowance for work Done manually per metre height

Bank made of rocky fills 0 to 2 cm

Bank made of moorum and sandy soils 8 to 12 cm

Bank made of fills with considerable clay content 16 to 20 cm



The Engineer will decide the scale of allowance for settlement for each section and shall be at liberty to vary the same during the progress of the work to suit the nature of soil met with, the method adopted for executing the earth work, the consolidation achieved during the progress of the work and any other factors affecting the earth work.

1.2.6.1 The above shrinkage allowances are only for the purpose of setting out of the work. For payment, the deduction for shrinkage shall be as specified in para 1.1.6.10.

1.2.7 Borrow Pits : The Engineer concerned will direct from where material is to be obtained and has powers to refuse to allow any unsuitable material to be put into a bank. As far as possible, Bank should be made of homogeneous material with no mix of rubble or boulders with soil. No excavation for borrow pits shall be made within 2m of the limits of the acquired land. Borrow pits shall not be dug close to level crossings, bridges or culverts, telegraph poles, electric poles, or close to inhabited areas, unless they can be properly drained to prevent water stagnating. Borrow pits within station limits shall be avoided as far as possible. The earth is to be excavated and thrown to such width, depth and height and in such places as may be from time to time decided.

1.2.7.1 During excavation, the contractor shall take particular care to avoid damage to drains, water mains, cables or other underground work. Should any damage be caused, the Engineer shall be notified immediately and the damage shall be made good at the contractor’s expense.

1.2.7.2 Borrow pits shall be excavated within the limits of the Employer’s land as directed by the Engineer. The pits must be rectangular or conform to the land boundaries. The sides of the pits next to the toe of the bank are to be sloped down at 2:1, and elsewhere at a slope of 1:1 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Any pits wrongly excavated shall be refilled by the contractor at his own cost, and in such a manner as the Engineer directs.

1.2.7.3 Borrow pits are not to be made of uneven depth but the whole area of each pit is to be neatly excavated to the same level. The outer or the most distant half of the borrow-pits is to be excavated first, so that in the event of the pits being flooded by rain, there will still be ground available for work.

1.2.7.4 A berm 15m wide is to be left untouched initially at every 85m between edges of borrow-pits, and is not to be encroached upon for any excavation except under the instructions of the Engineer. If it is necessary for drainage purposes to cut through the berm, the channel will be made on the side remote from the Bank.

1.2.7.5 In side long ground, the borrow pits are to be dug on the upper side of the bank, and are to be continuous to serve as catch water drains; and, if so ordered, the contractor shall get the earth for the bank exclusively from such pits till the catch water drain is complete to the required length, section and level as prescribed by the Engineer.

1.2.7.6 When doing repair work to banks it is absolutely essential that diagonal bunds be kept, when digging fresh borrow-pits in the old ones, as a precautionary measure for correct assessment of the work. Diagonal bunds are also to be kept in borrow-pits for new works where payments are to be made on borrow-pit measurements. When doing earthwork repairs, Authorised representative of the Engineer should bear this point in mind and refuse to measure up any pit in which a diagonal bund has not been kept. For repair works it would save a large amount of unnecessary detailed measurements if all pits were excavated to a uniform size as far as practicable.

1.2.8 Bank executed manually : All banks, if executed manually shall be made in successive layers, not more than 30 cm in depth, over the whole width and slightly concave in section so as to retain water for subsidence. The subsequent top layer shall be started only when the previous layer has been completed for a length not less than 30m along the embankment.

1.2.9 Clods:- All large clods ( larger the 15 cm ) shall be broken up in the borrow pits or bank by labour specially deputed for this work. This shall be strictly ensured.



1.2.10 Bunding of Bank Top : In banks executed manually/mechanically, before the commencement of monsoon, continuous longitudinal earth bunds, 25 cm high and 30 cm wide on the top with side slopes of 2:1, are to be made on the outer edges of the top of embankments, together with cross bunds of the same dimensions at every 15m, so as to impound rain water to expedite consolidation. This work shall be paid for separately at the rate for soft/loose soil and may be left uncompacted.

1.2.11 Benching : In widening an existing bank, steps 30cm in height and approximately 60 cm wide, shall be cut in the existing bank before any new earth is placed, to form a bond between the new and old earth work. Similar benching is to be provided in side-long ground of which the slope at right angles to the alignment of the banks is 3 Horizontal to 1 vertical or steeper or if ordered by the Engineer. The benching in side long ground will not be separately measured or paid for, but is deemed to be covered by the initial rate for earth work.

1.2.12 Stream diversions : When it has been decided to divert a stream adjoining the bank, the excavation for this work is to be undertaken and completed before any borrow pit work is done at site and all earth from such diversion is to be put into the main bank, if so ordered. If earth excavated from the drain is led into the bank, payment will only be made for the quantity excavated including lead and lift if any and not for both cut and fill. In excavating for diversion of stream, care must be exercised by the Engineer that such diversion does not start a land slip.

1.2.13 Backing to bridges : In carrying embankments over a bridge or a culvert intended to be covered by the work, the earth work shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the structure so that the pressure may be equalised. In filling in the approaches of a bridge, or the spandrels between small arches, the earth filling shall be raised simultaneously with the wing walls in the former case and with the face walls in the latter, in order that the filling may be well trodden down under the feet of the labourers; and in filling in foundations and backing to revetments, the earth work shall similarly be brought up level as the masonry proceeds. Filling for the backing of bridges or culverts will conform to specifications under Para 1.6, and subsequent sub paras, or as ordered by the Engineer. Cast iron rammers should be used to consolidate the earthwork where meachanical compaction can not be done due to practical constraints.

1.2.14 Dressing : After completion of earth work the slopes shall be neatly dressed to the correct profiles, and shall be made up where required during the maintenance period. The top should be neatly dressed off sloping at an inclination of 1 in 30 either side from the centre line unless otherwise specified in the drawings.

1.2.15 Turfing : Turfing of banks shall be done during the monsoon season, preferably after a heavy shower, when it can be ensured that the bank slopes will remain wet for a long time after planting the grass. Turfing shall be paid for separately. Turfing shall not be commenced without the prior written permission of the Engineer. The stretch of embankment where turfing is to be done should be completed in all respects and should be so recorded in the level books and profiles. Contractor should be given permission in writing to this effect before starting the Turfing.

1.2.15.1 Before turfing is commenced, the side slopes are to be dressed to the specified section. This dressing is included in the initial rate for earth work, and should a contractor stop work before dressing the bank, he shall be debited with the estimated cost of the dressing to be done by another contractor or departmental labour, as decided by the Engineer. Where the slope is already consolidated, it should be loosened for a depth of about 4 cms before the sods are laid.



1.2.15.2 Turfing shall consist of sods, not less than 10 cm thick and 20 cm square well beaten into the bank till they get a proper hold and form a level and compact mat. The contractor shall be responsible for watering where necessary to ensure that the turf grows properly; and in the event of it not doing so, he will returf such parts as have not grown, at his own cost. The turfing shall be measured and taken over only after the grass has rooted well and has formed a sufficiently dense growth over the earth slopes. Turing with sarkanda or other varieties of locally available grass may also be permitted by the Engineer incharge depending upon the local conditions.

1.2.15.3 Turfing of side slopes of cuttings if ordered by the Engineer shall be carried out in a manner similar to Turfing of bank.

1.2.16 Sarkanda or similar type of planting on bank slopes : Where Sarkanda is planted on bank slopes, the minimum distance centre to centre in rows shall be 40 cm in either direction. The plantation in adjacent rows will be staggered for proper coverage of the area. For other types of plantation, the local practice shall be followed as directed by the Engineer. Where directed to be done, this item will be paid for extra.

1.3 EARTH WORK IN CUTTINGS:

1.3.1 Formation width : The formation widths, exclusive of side drains, are to be as shown in the drawings :

The top width of each side drain will ordinarily be 120 cm at formation level and depth 30 cm, unless shown otherwise in the drawing. For longer drains specially designed sections will be adopted depending upon the catchment area, length and slope of the drain which should be finalized before completion of the cuttings .

1.3.2 Side Slopes : The side slopes will ordinarily be 1:1 unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.

1.3.3 Excavation :

1.3.3.1 When so ordered, the centre portion of gullet of the cutting shall be first taken out to the full width of formation to enable the Engineer to determine the slopes suitable to the full length of the particular cutting or to different lengths of it. When the gullet is cut out to its full depth in shallow cuttings, or to the depth of the first cut in deep cuttings, the side portions or triangular sections up to the slopes may be excavated. In deep cuttings, the, second cut will not be started until the top portion is thus completed.

The necessity of excavating cuttings in this manner is evident as, in the event of heavy rain occurring with work partly completed, and the bottom of the excavation uneven and incapable of drainage, excessive delay might occur or excessive pumping might become necessary. The contractor is solely responsible for any such contingency and the Employer will not be liable for any compensation.

1.3.3.2 All cuttings shall be taken down carefully to the precise level and section as delineated in the drawings or as ordered by the Engineer. In case the bottom of the cutting is taken down deeper than is necessary by over sight or neglect of the contractor or due to blasting operations, the hollow must be filled up to true depth with selected material and rammed, at contractor’s expense. Cuttings with the formation in rock will be excavated upto 15 cm (Max.) below the true formation and filled up to true level with cutting spoil to ensure that no lumps of solid rock project above formation level. The bottom sloping from centre towards side drains shall be as given in Sub Para 1.3.3.3 below. Payment will, however be made for earth work in cutting up to the true formation level only.

1.3.3.3 In soft soil the excavation of cuttings shall, in the first instances be carried to about 15 cms short of the full depth, so much being left for dressing the bottom true to the formation. The side slopes shall be dressed true and straight and the bottom shall then be completed by sloping if from the centre line towards the side drains to a slope of 1 in 30 or any other slope as shown in the drawing.



1.3.4 Drainage of cuttings :

1.3.4.1 In excavating cuttings, special precautions are to be taken to ensure that the excavations drain themselves automatically. To ensure this, the central block of earth or gullet is to be excavated first. This will be done in such a manner that the bottom of the excavation shall, where possible, slope downwards from the centre of the cutting towards the ends. It will be made in such cuts or steps as may from time to time, be directed. Generally, in deep cuttings the first cut or step will approximately follow the surface of the ground, where this will secure the necessary slope for drainage, and will be excavated to such depth not exceeding 3m as may be ordered, with perpendicular sides leaving pathways for workmen along the sides of the cut parallel to the central line about every 15 m. In shallow cuttings, not exceeding 2m in the deepest part, the gullet may be cut out at once to formation level.

1.3.4.2 Side drains according to the cross section shown in the drawing shall be provided at the toe of the slope in all cuttings to ensure proper drainage. Excavation to the required cross section and longitudinal slope to form the side drain will be paid for at the same rates for cutting.

1.3.5 Catch-water drains : Where required, catch water drains cut to the section and profile prescribed, shall be constructed on the up hill side leaving a berm of one metre from the boundary of the Employer’s land or as decided to suit the local conditions and shall be paid for at the same rates as for cutting. The cross sectional area of the catch water drain shall normally not exceed 0.75 sqm.

The spoil from the catch water drain will be deposited to make a uniform slope from the edge of the cutting towards the drain. The material derived from the catch water drain will be used to the extent required to provide the slope and the surplus earth should be deposited in the spoil bank of the cuttings. Unless ordered to the contrary by the Engineer, the Catch water drain must be excavated before the cutting is started.

1.3.6 Berms and spoil banks : No spoil shall be deposited within a distance of 10 m from the top edge of the slope of any cutting duly taking into account the location of the catch water drain, if any. While doing so, the Engineer may bear in mind the side on which the doubling may eventually be done and may be suitably increased.

1.3.6.1 The spoil heap shall be roughly but neatly dressed off to a slope of 1 ½: 1, and shall form a continuous bund along the top of the cutting. In country where there is any cross fall, sufficient spoil shall be thrown on the up hill side of the cutting to supplement the catch water drain and assist in keeping drainage out. This work must be done first.

1.3.6.2 (a) All material excavated from cuttings suitable for pitching, ballast, masonry or any other purpose whatever, shall be the property of the Employer, and shall be stacked, as also disposed off, as directed by the Engineer, within the limits of lead specified for stacking of spoil. This is included in the rate for cutting.

(b) Any finds of archaeological interest such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other articles of value shall be delivered to the Engineer and shall be the property of the Employer.

1.3.7 Springs or Inflow : Should springs or inflow of water appear in cuttings, or should they be flooded, the contractor must arrange for bailing, pumping or drainage of water, without obstruction to adjacent works. Payment for the same shall not be made unless otherwise provided for in the Agreement with the Contractor.

1.3.8 Protections : Excavation, where directed by the Engineer, shall be securely fenced and provided with proper caution signs, conspicuously displayed during the day and properly illuminated with red lights during the night, to avoid accidents. The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation operations do not damage the adjoining structures or dislocate the services. Water supply pipes, sluice valve chambers, sewerage pipes, manholes, drainage pipes & chambers, communication cables, power supply cables etc. met within the course of excavation shall be properly supported and adequately protected, so that these services remain



functional. No extra payment will be made for taking such measures unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Contract.

Excavation shall not be carried out below the foundation level of adjacent buildings untill underpinning; shoring etc. is done as per the directions of the Engineer for which payment shall be made separately. The temporary arrangement drawings should be submitted by the contractor and got approved before undertaking such excavation.

1.3.9 Blasting : If any blasting operations are necessary, they shall be carried out in accordance with the Explosives Act and the Rules as amended upto date. Extracts from the Explosives Rules 1983 are kept at Annexure 1.1 for strict adherence by the Contractor’s staff as well as other employees engaged in blasting operations. For general guidance, the instructions contained in Chapter X of Indian Railways Works Manual may be referred to. The following specifications are supplementary to the above.

1.3.9.1 Where hard rock is met with and blasting operations are considered necessary, the contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer in writing for resorting to blasting operation.

Note : In ordinary rock, not requiring blasting, blasting operations shall not be generally adopted. However, the contractor may resort to blasting with the permission of the Engineer, but nothing extra shall be paid for such blasting operations.

The contractor shall obtain licence from the competent authority for undertaking blasting work as well as for containing and storing the explosive as per the Explosive Act, 1884 as amended upto date and the Explosive Rules, 1983. The contractor shall purchase the explosives fuses, detonators etc. only from a licenced dealer. Transportation and storage of explosive at site shall conform to the aforesaid Explosive Act and Explosive Rules. The contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody and proper accounting of the explosive materials. Fuses and detonators shall be stored separately and away from the explosives. The Engineer or his authorised representative shall have the right to check the contractor’s store and account of explosives. The contractor shall provide necessary facilities for this.

The contractor shall be responsible for any damage arising out of accident to workmen public or property due to storage, transportation and use of explosive during blasting operation.

1.3.9.2 Blasting operations shall be carried out under the supervision of a responsible authorized agent of the contractor (referred subsequently as agent on duty), during specified hours as approved in writing by the Engineer. The agent shall be a licensed blaster. In case of blasting with dynamite or any other high explosive, the position of all the bore holes to be drilled shall be marked in circles with white paint. These shall be inspected by the Contractor’s agent. Bore holes shall be of a size that the cartridge can easily pass down. After the drilling operation, the agent shall inspect the holes to ensure that drilling has been done only at the marked locations and no extra hole has been drilled. The agent shall then prepare the necessary charge separately for each bore hole. The bore holes shall be thoroughly cleaned before a cartridge is inserted. Only cylindrical wooden tamping rods shall be used for tamping. Metal rods or rods having pointed ends shall never be used for tamping. One cartridge shall be placed in the bore hole and gently pressed but not rammed down. Other cartridges shall then be added as may be required to makeup the necessary charge for the bore hole. The top most cartridge shall be connected to the detonator which shall in turn be connected to the safety fuses of required length. All fuses shall be cut to the length required before being inserted into the holes. Joints in fuses shall be avoided. Where joints are unavoidable, a semi-circular nitch shall be cut in one piece of fuse about 2 cm deep from the end and the end of other piece inserted into the nitch. The two pieces shall then be wrapped together with string. All joints exposed to dampness shall be wrapped with rubber tape.



The charges shall be fired successively and not simultaneously. Immediately before firing, warning shall be given and the agent shall see that all persons have retired to a place of safety. The safety fuses of the charged holes shall be ignited in the presence of the agent, who shall see that all the fuses are properly ignited.

Careful count shall be kept by the agent and others of each blast as it explodes. In case all the charged bore holes have exploded, the agent shall inspect the site soon after the blast but in case of misfire, the agent shall inspect the site after half an hour and mark red crosses (X) over the holes which have not exploded. During this interval of half an hour, nobody shall approach the misfired holes. No driller shall work near such bore until either of the following operations have been done by the agent for the misfired boreholes.

(a) The contractor’s agent shall very carefully (when the tamping is of damp clay) extract the tamping with a wooden scraper and withdraw the fuse, primer and detonator.

(b) The holes shall be cleaned for 30 cm of tamping and its direction ascertained by placing a stick in the hole. Another hole shall then be drilled 15cm away and parallel to it. This hole shall be charged and fired. The misfired holes shall also explode along with the new one.

Before leaving the site of work, the agent of one shift shall inform the agent relieving him for the next shift, of any case of misfire and each such location shall be jointly inspected and the action to be taken in the matter shall be explained to the relieving agent.

The Engineer shall also be informed by the agent of all cases of misfires, their causes and steps taken in that connection.

1.3.9.3 General Precautions : For safety of persons, red flags shall be prominently displayed around the area where blasting operations are to be carried out. All the workers at site, except those who actually ignite the fuse, shall withdraw to a safe distance of atleast 150 metres from the blasting site. Audio warning by blowing whistle shall be given before igniting the fuse.

Blasting work shall be done under careful supervision of a licensed blaster and trained personnel shall be employed. Blasting shall not be done within 100 metres of an existing structure, unless specifically permitted by the Engineer in writing. In such cases, the Authorised representative of the Engineer must be present to ensure that special precautions as may be prescribed by the Engineer and those stipulated by the licensing authority are taken and that necessary warning is given to the inhabitants.

All procedures and safety precautions for the use of explosives drilling and loading of explosives before and after shot firing and disposal of explosives shall be taken by the contractor as detailed in IS 4081, Safety code for blasting and related drilling operation.

1.3.9.4 Precautions against misfire : The safety fuse shall be cut in an oblique direction with a knife. All saw dust shall be cleared from inside of the detonator. This can be done by blowing down the detonator and tapping the open end. No tools shall be inserted into the detonator for this purpose.

If there is water present or if the bore hole is damp, the junction of the fuse and detonator shall be made water tight by means of tough grease or any other suitable material.

The detonator shall be inserted into the cartridge so that about one-third of the copper tube is left exposed outside the explosive. The safety fuse just above the detonator shall be securely tied in position in the cartridge. Water proof fuse only shall be used in the damp bore hole or when water is present in the bore hole.



If a misfire has been found to be due to defective fuse, detonator or dynamite, the entire consignment from which the fuse, detonator or dynamite was taken shall be got inspected by the Engineer or his authorised representative before resuming the blasting or returning the consignment.

1.4 EARTH WORK BY DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL TRAINS ; Since earthwork is not done by DMT these days, specifications have not been included.

1.5 EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATIONS FOR BUILDINGS / TRENCHES FOR PIPELINES ETC.

1.5.1 Clearance of Site : The contractor will, at his own expense, clear the site of all obstructions to enable the setting out to be done, and will also provide all necessary labour, pegs, string ,building materials including cement etc. required for the proper setting out of the work. If any huts or other structures, trees (girth 30 cm and above) etc. are to be removed they will be paid for separately.

1.5.2 Setting out : The centre longitudinal or face line and atleast one main cross line shall be marked by means of small masonry pillars built clear of the point to which the slopes of the excavation will extend. On each pillar there shall be an accurate mark to enable a theodolite being set up over it for setting out purposes. These pillars shall be adequately protected from any possibility of damage during the course of the work. The provision and protection of the pillars shall be at the expense of the contractor, for which nothing extra shall be paid.

1.5.3 Size and Form of Excavation : The excavation for the foundations of bridges, culverts, columns and buildings and all other structures as well as trenches for sewers, drains and pipes, shall be executed to the depths shown on the drawings, or to such greater or lesser depth as the character of the ground necessitates to ensure a stable and solid foundation, and as directed by the Engineer. Should the trenches be excavated by the contractor by negligence or mistake to greater dimensions than are necessary, no payment shall be made for this extra excavation and the contractor will bear the cost of the concrete of the mix proportion stipulated for bed concrete and for levelling the concrete required to fill up the excess excavation.

1.5.4 Sides and Shoring : Excavations for foundations and trenches shall be executed with sloping sides, or shall be properly timbered with vertical sides as may be necessary and as directed by the Engineer. Whatever be the method adopted for the excavation, it shall be efficiently carried out to ensure its stability and safety of adjoining lands, railway line, pipes and other structures, as also the safety of the labourers employed on excavation work. No excavation shall be carried out below the foundation level of adjacent structures until adequate safety measures, as directed by the Engineer, have been taken. Any measures as may be necessary or as directed by the Engineer for protection against risk of accidents to the public due to open excavation shall be provided by the Contractor. These may include temporary fencing, lighting of site etc.

1.5.5 Trenches for Sewers, Pipe lines or drains : The excavation of the trench shall be carried out accurately to the depths, gradients, lengths and directions shown in the drawing. All trenches which are to be with gradients, must be excavated commencing from the lowest point and advancing towards the highest point, the excavation of man-holes, chambers, etc. at the different points being completed before the excavation of the trench advances beyond those points. Trenches for laying of pipes shall be excavated wide enough to allow a space of 22.5cm unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, on either side of the collars, sockets or flanges of the pipes when laid, so as to provide walking space for workmen. No extra payment shall be made for making a trench to any special shape as may be specified in the case of drains, pipes bedded on earth etc.



1.5.6 Sight rails etc. : The Contractor shall supply and erect proper sight rails and supply boning rods, as necessary for the proper execution of the excavation work. Boning shall be done at intervals not exceeding 1.8m along the length of the trench. In the case of trenches for pipes and drains, where the boning rod is devised to show the invert level, a block of wood of height equal to the difference in level between the invert and the bottom of foundation should be used in boning the excavated trench.

1.5.7 Wet Excavation : All excavations in foundations shall be paid for as “dry”, except such as is actually below sub-soil water level and requiring continuous bailing or pumping. The contractor will be responsible that no work in excavation at the increased rate for “wet” excavation is commenced, until the work has been inspected by the Engineer or the Authorised representative of the Engineer, and approval obtained stating the point from which the “wet” excavation commences.

1.5.7.1 In all pumping and other operations, special care shall be taken to prevent “blowing” and to ensure that sand or other material is not withdrawn from the bottom or sides of the trenches and the adjoining ground. The contractor shall take adequate measures for bailing and / or pumping out water from excavations and construct diversion channels, bunds, sumps, coffer dams etc. as may be required. Pumping shall be done directly from the foundation trenches or from a sump outside the excavation in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of movement of water through any fresh concrete or masonry and washing away parts of concrete or mortar. During laying of concrete or masonry and for a period of atleast 24 hours thereafter, pumping shall be done from a suitable sump separated from concrete or masonry by effective means. Capacity and number of pumps, locations at which the pumps are to be installed, pumping hours etc. shall be decided from time to time in consultation with the Engineer.

Pumping shall be done in such a way as not to cause damage to the work or adjoining property by subsidence etc. Disposal of water shall not cause inconvenience or nuisance in the area or cause damage to the property and structures nearby.

1.5.7.2 The rate for dry excavation includes seepage water standing up to a maximum of 15 cm in depth in 3 hours when work is not in progress. The rate for wet excavation includes the cost of pumping or bailing out water with the contractor’s tools, plants, fuel and labour.

1.5.7.3 Should it be necessary to do “Shoring” as approved by the Engineer the same will be paid for as extra.

1.5.8 Bottom of foundations : The bottom of all foundations and trenches shall be accurately excavated to the form of the permanent work, and carefully levelled and cleaned, and if dry, shall be well watered and thoroughly rammed, and all loose or soft material of every kind shall be entirely removed before building work is started. Where the excavation is in rock, the sides of the trenches shall be properly sheared and cut, and the bottom shall be dressed and stepped for proper bearing as per plans or as directed by the Engineer, all without any extra payment beyond the contract rates.

1.5.9 Special measures : When a safe and solid foundation cannot be obtained at the depth shown in the plans, special measures (to be determined in all cases by the Engineer) may be necessary, and the carrying out of these must be made the matter of a special agreement before hand.

1.5.10 Disposal of soil : All spoil from excavation of foundations shall be neatly spread to make up the adjacent ground, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer. Nothing extra shall be paid for the neat spreading of the spoil.

1.5.10.1 No excavated earth is to be heaped within 2 m of the edge of the trench or half the depth of the trench, whichever is more.



1.5.11 Inspection : Foundation trenches shall be passed by the Engineer or the Authorised representative of the Engineer before laying the concrete. The bottom of the excavation shall be carefully examined for any soft spots. Should any such places be found, all the soft earth must be removed and the hollow space filled with concrete with the same mix as the foundation concrete or as directed by the Engineer. If differences of level have to be provided for, it shall be done by means of vertical steps.

1.5.12 Measurements : The quantity of excavation to be paid for is to be the product of the area of the foundation trench as shown in the plan and the depth to which the trench has been carried, and is not to include slopes and slips due to the falling in of the sides or due to undermining, or any other cause whatsoever. Where shoring is considered necessary and approved by the Engineer, it shall be paid for at the rate as provided for in the Contract.

However, in case where excavations with sloping sides or with varying widths at different depths has been specifically permitted by the Engineer, the quantity of earth work in excavation will be paid for as actually executed.

1.6 EARTH FILLING IN FOUNDATION TRENCHES AND PLINTH, UNDER FLOORS AND BEHIND ABUTMENTS ETC.

1.6.1 Foundation Trenches : The space between the sides of the foundation trenches and the masonry is to be filled with sound impervious material such as moorum, chips, spawls, gravel or other sandy material well rammed in layers not exceeding 15 cm, each layer being watered, rammed and consolidated before the succeeding one is laid. Earth shall be rammed with iron rammers where feasible, and with the butt ends of crow bars / wooden ballies where rammers cannot be used. Earth used for filling shall be free from salts, organic or other foreign matter. All clods of earth shall be broken or removed.

1.6.1.1 Where there is likelihood of rain, the earth filling may closely follow the masonry until ground level is reached, but the contractor shall only do this after obtaining the written permission of the Engineer.

1.6.1.2 Where concrete foundations are brought up in reducing off-sets, it will be necessary to bring the earth filling up with the form walls but in such cases special care shall be taken that no earth is allowed to fall on the concrete surface, on which further concrete is to be laid.

1.6.2 Plinth filling or filling under floors: After allowing 7 days / 14 days setting time respectively for Cement / Lime masonry, filling in plinth or under floors shall be similarly done with earth in layers not exceeding 15 cm, watered and consolidated by ramming with iron rammers and with butt ends of crow bars / wooden ballies. Only sandy soil, free from salts, organic or other foreign matter and white ants shall be used for such filling. Where there is black cotton soil, this shall be removed to a depth of 60 cm as it is liable to absorb moisture and expand and thus ruin a floor. The top 30 cm immediately below or as shown in the drawings the floor shall be filled with sand or cinder. If earth of good quality fit for this filling is not available from earth generated by excavation for foundation etc, or from borrow pits from within the Employer’s land, good contractor’s earth should be used.

1.6.2.1 To prevent future sinkage, and damage to the floor it is necessary, when convenient to do so, that the plinth area be flooded with water for minimum 3 days so as to enable the earth filling to consolidate thoroughly. In this case, however, the earth filling shall be allowed to dry and then rammed and consolidated, before the pucca flooring is laid.

1.6.2.2 In all fillings sufficient allowance shall be made for settlement of all materials and restoration of the surface to the required level.



1.6.2.3 The filling shall not be commenced until the recording of levels, measurements etc as maybe necessary in respect of the existing ground or of any work to be filled over or likely to be hidden by the filling has been completed and permission in writing has been given to the contractor by the Engineer to start the filling.

1.6.2.4 The finished level of the filling shall be kept to slope intended to be given to the floor.

1.6.3 Filling behind abutments etc. : Unless otherwise specified, the space next to the masonry at the back of all bridge abutments, wing walls and return walls is to be “Backed” or filled by hand packed graded coarse material such as boulders and cobbles, quarry rubbish, chips, spalls, hand packed dry rubble or other hard and drainable materials for a thickness of at least 60 cm. or to such thickness as may be shown in the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer with the smaller size material towards the back.

1.6.3.1 The space at the back of this packing is to be filled with granular material such as moorum, sand or sandy oil, well watered and rammed in layers 15 cm or less thick. Under no circumstances is black cotton soil or any clayey or silty soil to be used for backing. Each layer shall have a slope of about 45o towards the ground level, toe slope to commence from immediately behind the abutments. Compactions of the layers shall be done by vibratory plate compactors or as directed by the Engineer.

1.6.4 Dressing of surrounding ground : On the completion of a building, the ground all round up to a distance of 15m is to be carefully dressed, and when practicable, given a gentle slope outwards. This dressing will be paid for separately.

1.6.5 Use of earth from excavation : If the excavated earth from the foundations of a bridge is thrown up to form part of the guide bund, embankment or backing of a bridge, it is to be understood that the only items (over and above the rate for the excavation) to be paid for are any extra “Lift”, “Lead” “Dressing” and “Compaction” which may be thus necessitated.

1.6.6 Filling of Trenches for Pipes etc.: The filling back of pipe-line trenches shall not be commenced until any testing as required to be done has been carried out and the pipe-line passed. The filling shall generally be done using the material excavated from the same trench. But any excavated rock used for filling back shall be mixed with finer material so as to fill up all the voids. In refilling, care shall be exercised to avoid damaging or disturbing the pipe line or other work being covered up. The manner in which filling and consolidation are to be done shall, in other respects, be the same as laid down for foundation trenches. Where the trench carries a pipe-line or an arch barrel, sand or other stable soil approved by the Engineer shall be used upto a height of 15 cm above the top of the pipe or barrel. This height shall be increased to 30 cm in the case of trenches cut in rock. In case of sand filling as per drawing additional payment as per relevant item will be made.

1.6.7 Measurement: The measurement shall in all cases be of the space filled and all the hidden details required for the same shall be measured up before being filled over and deductions made accordingly. No deduction shall be made for shrinkage or subsidence, provided the Engineer is satisfied that the consolidation has been done properly, as specified in each case. In the filling for foundations and other trenches, any extra work done on account of over cuts, slips, etc. shall not be paid for.

1.6.8 Rates: The rate for each type of filling shall include the cost of all the operations as described above for each, except that in cases where the excavated earth available within the initial lead and lift is not adequate for the filling, the procurement of the extra earth required will be a matter of special agreement.



1.7 SHORING OR TIMBERING FOR TRENCHES:

1.7.1 General : In case of deep trenches, exceeding 2 metres or where the soil is soft or slushy, the sides of trenches shall be prevented from collapsing by stepping, sloping and / or shoring or timbering as may be decided by the Engineer or the Authorized representative of the Engineer. Timbering shall be “Close” or “Open” depending on the nature of soil and the depth of the trench and the type of timbering shall be determined by the Authorised representative of the Engineer or the Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to take all necessary steps to prevent the sides of trenches from collapsing. Guidance may be taken from IS 3764 for designing the shoring and strutting arrangements.

1.7.2 Close Timbering : Close timbering shall be done by completely covering the sides of the trench generally with short, upright members called ‘polling boards’. These shall be 25 cm x 4cm section or as directed by the Engineer. The boards shall generally be placed in position vertically in pairs, one board on each side of cutting, and shall be kept apart by horizontal wallings of strong wood at 1.0 to 1.2m spacings, cross strutted with ballies or as directed by the Engineer. The length of the ballies shall depend upon the width of the trench. Typical sketch of close timbering is given in Figure Nos. 1.5A & 1.5B.

1.7.2.1 In case the soil is very soft and loose, the boards shall be placed horizontally against the sides of the excavation and supported by vertical wallings, which shall be strutted to similar timber pieces on the opposite fact of the trench. The lowest boards supporting the sides shall be taken into the ground. No portion of the vertical side of the trench shall remain exposed, so that earth is not liable to slip out.

1.7.2.2 The withdrawal of the timber shall be done very carefully to prevent the collapse of the trench. It shall be started at one end and proceed systematically to the other end. Concrete or masonry shall not be damaged in the removal of timber. Where planking and strutting are required to be left permanently in position as directed by the Engineer, extra payment will be made under the relevant schedule item. In cases where there is no such specific directive of the Engineer no claim shall be entertained for any timber, which cannot be withdrawn and is lost, damaged or buried.

1.7.3 Open Timbering : In case of open timbering, the entire side of the trench is not required to be covered. The vertical boards of 25 cm width shall be spaced sufficiently apart to leave unsupported strips of 50 cm average width. The detailed arrangement, sizes of the timber and the distances apart shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. In all other respects, specifications for close timbering shall apply to open timbering. A typical sketch of open timbering is given in Figure Nos. 1.5A & 1.5B.

1.7.4 Measurements : The area of longitudinal section of the timbered trench shall be measured for the purpose of payment. This shall be the area of one side of the trench timbered on both sides. In case of basements, where the opposite sides, are not connected by struts but, each side is supported by slanting struts and toe supports, the measurements for timbering shall be taken for the area of all the walls supported by timbering. The dimensions shall be measured correct to a cm.

1.8 PUDDLE

1.8.1 Composition : Puddle shall consist of good adhesive and stiff clay containing nearly 20% sand by weight. So called ‘Sodium Clays’, containing sodium carbonate shall generally be preferred. If adequate quantity of sand is not present in the clay, suitable amount of sand may be mixed with the clay after it has been weathered and pulverised. The clay shall be free from roots, turf, shale and other injurious materials, and should be approved by the Engineer.



1.8.2 Preparation : The clay should be dry and exposed to the sun and pulverised with rammers. Additional sand if necessary shall be uniformly mixed with the powdered clay two days previous to that on which the clay is required for use. The clay and sand mixture shall be wetted and thoroughly worked up into a plastic homogeneous mass of the toughest consistency, in a pug mill or under men’s feet.

1.8.3 Laying As soon as possible after it has been worked up into puddle it shall be deposited in place, spread in even layers 15 cm thick, each layer laid out to its full extent, rammed, trodden and if necessary, cross cut and made perfectly water-tight.

1.8.3.1 The puddle shall be carried in baskets or wheel-borrow as convenient. Each batch shall be well consolidated with rammers or trodden under feet until it is thoroughly integrated with the batch already in place. Stones, bricks, roots, grass, etc. shall not be allowed to remain in the puddle.

1.8.3.2 If at any time the puddle surface should become dry/hard or soft, it shall be excavated and removed from the work before another layer is laid. Puddle walls must be supported on each side by selected material.

1.8.4 Protection : All puddle after placing shall be protected from the strong rays of the sun by covering with wet gunny bags or mats.

1.8.4.1 Contractor’s liability and maintenance : The contractor shall make good at his own expense any defect that may occur either in the puddle or in its junction with the ground or walls whether during the construction stage or during the period of maintenance.

1.9 MECHANICAL COMPACTION OF EARTHWORK

Note : Based on RDSO’s “Guidelines for Earthwork in Railway Projects” (July 2003 – Guideline No.GE:G-1 to which reference may be made for further details.)

1.9.1 Orders for compaction : Depending upon the height of the embankment the type of the soil, time available for completing the embankment, the importance of the line and other relevant factors such as axle load, permitting higher speeds within a limited time etc, the Engineer shall decide whether Mechanical compaction is to be done for the full or part height of the embankment.

1.9.2 Advantages of Compaction :

1.9.2.1 Compaction is the process of increasing the density of soil by mechanical means by packing the soil particles closer together with reduction of air voids and to obtain a homogeneous soil mass having improved soil properties. Compaction brings many desirable changes in the soil properties as follows:

a) Helps soils to acquire increase in strength in both bearing resistance and shear strength.

b) Reduces compressibility, thus minimising uneven settlement during services. c) Increased density and reduces permeability, thereby reducing susceptibility to

change in moisture content. d) Reduction in erodibility e) Results in homogeneous uniform soil mass of known properties. f) Reduction in frost susceptibility in cold regions.



1.9.3 Factors affecting Compaction in the filed :

Compaction of a particular soil is affected by moisture content, compacting effort, type of roller etc as explained below:

(a) Compacting Effort : In modern construction projects, heavy compaction machinery is deployed to provide compaction energy. Types of machinery required are decided based on type of soil to be compacted. The method of compaction is primarily of four types viz kneading compaction, static compaction, dynamic or impact compaction and vibratory compaction. Different type of action is effective in different type of soils such as for cohesive soils, Sheep’s foot rollers or pneumatic rollers provide the kneading action. Silty soil can be effectively compacted by Sheep’s-foot roller / pneumatic roller or smooth wheel roller. For compacting sandy and gravelly soil, vibratory rollers are most effective. If granular soil has some fines both smooth wheeled and pneumatic rollers can be used.

(b) Moisture Control : Proper control of moisture content in soil is necessary for achieving desired density. Maximum density with minimum compacting effort can be achieved by compaction of soil near its OMC (Optimum Moisture Content). If natural moisture content of the soil is less than the OMC, calculated amount of water should be added with sprinkler attached to water tanker and mixed with soil by motor grader for uniform moisture content. When soil is too wet it is required to be dried by aeration to reach upto OMC.

(c) Soil Type : Type of soil has a great influence on its compaction characteristics. Normally, heavy clays, clays and silts offer higher resistance to compaction, whereas, sandy soils and coarse grained or gravelly soils are amenable for easy compaction. Coarse-grained soils yield higher densities in comparison to clay. A well-graded soil can be compacted to higher density.

(d) Thickness of Layer : Suitable thickness of soil of each layer is necessary to achieve uniform compaction. Layer thickness depends upon type of soil involved and type of roller, its weight and contact pressure of its drums. Normally, 200-300mm layer thickness is optimum in the field for achieving homogeneous compaction.

(e) Number of Passes : Density of soil will increase with the number of passes of roller but after optimum number of passes, further increase in density is insignificant for additional number of passes. For determination of optimum number of passes for given type or roller and optimum thickness of layer at a predetermined moisture content, a field trial for compaction is necessary which will be arranged by the Engineer for which the Contractor shall make all arrangements and bear the cost of test / tests as required.

1.9.4 Compaction procedure for Different soils

The embankments are constructed with locally available soil provided it fulfils the specified requirements. Procedure of compaction to be adopted will depend on the type of soil being used in construction. General guidelines to deal with compaction of various types of soils for attaining optimum dry density/ relative density at minimum effort, have been briefly given as under. The procedure to be adopted will be decided by the Engineer for strict adherence by the Contractor.

1.9.4.1 Compaction of Cohesion less gravely and Sandy soil

i) Sandy & gravely soils should be compacted with vibratory rollers. If fines are less in these types of soils, it can be compacted with minimum number of passes of vibratory rollers without strict control of moisture to achieve desired Relative Density. With higher percentage of fines, sandy and gravely soils need to be brought to OMC level to get effective compaction. Uniformly graded sand and gravel are difficult to be compacted. Top layer of sand and gravel remains loose in vibratory compaction. Therefore, in final pass the roller should move smoothly without vibration. Dry densities attained in field trials normally should be around MDD/ specified Relative



Density as obtained from laboratory tests and should form the basis for specification and quality control.

ii) Poorly graded sand and gravel with Cu<2.0, should not be used in earthwork for the banks to safeguard against liquefaction under moving loads or especially due to earthquake tremor. Generally, fine sand is prone to liquefaction. This aspect should be specifically examined to prevent possibility of any liquefaction.

1.9.4.2 Compaction of Silty- Clayey Soils

Silty soil is a fine-grained soil. These can be plastic or non-plastic depending upon the clay content in it. Silts and fine sands with high water content have a tendency to undergo liquefaction under vibrating rolling due to the pore water pressure generated by mechanical work. Silty soils can be compacted satisfactorily near about OMC either with smooth rollers or vibratory rollers. Vibratory roller will give high degree of compaction and higher lift. Compaction of silty clays will have to be handled in a manner similar to clays.

1.9.4.3 Compaction of Clays

i) Water content plays very important role in compaction of clays. Main objective of compacting predominantly clays is to achieve uniform mass of soil with no voids between the lumps of clays. If moisture content is too high, roller tends to sink into the soil and if too low the chunks would not yield to rolling by rollers. Appropriate water content i.e. OMC of the soil is in the range of about plastic limit plus two percent. Sheeps-foot rollers are most effective in breaking the clods and filling large spaces.

ii) Thickness of layer should not be more than depth of feet of roller plus 50mm. Pad foot vibratory roller with drum module weight of 7 tonne (total static weight of 11 tons) for a lift thickness of 30 cm is found quite effective for compaction of clays. For better results, initial rolling with static pad foot roller followed by 15 tons vibratory roller can be tried.

iii) In case of such soils, the MDD and OMC as determined in the Laboratory may not be very relevant and therefore achievable MDD and practicable moisture content at which such soils can be compacted should be determined by conducting field trials for which the Contractor shall make all arrangements and bear the cost of field trials as required.

1.9.5 Selection of Compacting Equipment :

The performance of roller is dependent mainly on type of soil used in construction. Guidelines on selection of compacting equipment are given in Annexure 1.2. Vibratory rollers which can be used in static as well as dynamic mode with plain and pad drum, are now being manufactured by reputed Indian Companies also. Salient features of some of models are given in Annexure 1.3. The Contractor should get the Engineer’s approval for the type of equipment to be deployed for compaction.

1.9.6 General aspects of Mechanical Compaction

a) The spreading of material in layers of desired thickness over the entire width of embankment should be done by mechanical means and finished by a motor grader. The motor grader blade shall have hydraulic control suitable for initial adjustment and maintain the same so as to achieve the slope and grade.

b) Thickness of layer is decided based on field compaction trials. However, as a good practice thickness of layer should be generally kept as 300mm for fill material and 250mm for blanket material in loose state before compaction.

c) If natural moisture content (NMC) of the soil is less than the OMC, calculated amount of water based on the difference between OMC and NMC and quantity of earthwork being done at a time, should be added with sprinkler attached to water tanker and mixed with soil by motor grader or by other means for obtaining uniform moisture content. When soil is too wet, it is required to be dried by aeration to reduce moisture content near to OMC. Efforts should be made to keep moisture content level of the soil in the range of OMC + 2% at the time of compaction.



d) Fill shall be placed and compacted in layers of specified thickness. The rate of progress should be, as far as possible, uniform so that the work is completed to final level almost at the same time.

e) The rolling for compaction of fill material should commence from edges towards center with minimum overlap of 200mm between each run of the roller. In final pass, roller should simply move over the surface without vibration so that top surface is properly finished.

f) Extra bank width of 500mm on either side shall be rolled to ensure proper compaction at the edges. The extra soil would be cut and dressed to avoid any loose earth at the slopes. This should preferably be done with help of grade cutter. The earth so cut in final stages will not be paid but can be used at other places by the contractor.

g) At the end of the working day, fill material should not be left uncompacted. Care should be taken during rolling to provide suitable slope on toe of the bank to facilitate quick shedding of water and avoid ponding on formation.

h) During construction of formation, there may be rainfall to the extent that rain cuts may develop on the surface of formation due to erosion of soil. Care should be taken that these rain cuts are not allowed to develop wide and deep otherwise these locations will remain weak spots.

i) Top of the formation should be finished to cross slope of 1 in 30 from one end to other towards cess / drain in multiple lines and from center of formation to both sides in single line.

j) Once the top surface of the formation has been finished to proper slope and level, movement of material vehicle for transportation of ballast, sleepers etc. should be avoided since these movements will cause development of unevenness, ruts on the surface which will accumulate water and weaken the formation.

k) In conversion / doubling / rehabilitation projects, suitable benching of existing slope shall be done as provided for in the contract before new earthwork is taken up to provide proper bonding between old and new earthworks. It should be ensured that there is no humus material left on the benched slope. Care needs to be taken to avoid entry of rainwater into the formation from this weak junction, otherwise this would result in development of weak formation, slope failure, maintenance problem due to uneven settlement etc.

l) At locations where the water table is high and the fill soil is fine-grained, it may be desirable to provide a granular layer of about 30 cm thickness at the base, above subsoil across the full width of formation. This work will be carried out if directed by the Engineer for which extra rate will be paid.

1.9.7 Quality Control of Compacted Earth / Blanket layer

1.9.7.1 Compacted Earth : Degree of compaction of each layer of compacted soil should be ascertained by measurement of dry density / Relative Density of soil at locations selected in specified pattern. The method of sampling, frequency of tests, method of tests to be conducted and acceptance criteria to be adopted are as under.

a) Method of Sampling:

i) Various methods of selection of sample points for check of in-situ dry density are in vogue. The sampling adopted has to be such that effectiveness of proper compaction having been done for the entire area under consideration can be judged. For this, the Engineer will lay down in detail the method to be adopted in detail depending on site conditions and accordingly records of checks done are to be properly maintained. However, in absence of such procedure laid down, following method should be adopted.



Suggested Method of Sampling : For each layer, a minimum of one sample at a predetermined interval (in compliance with the requirement stated in next para) along the centre line of the alignment, would be taken in a staggered pattern so as to attain a minimum frequency of tests as given in sub para “b” below. For subsequent layer, the stagger should be such that the point of sampling does not fall vertically on the earlier sampling points of the layer immediately below. Additional sampling points can be taken, as considered necessary.

ii) In case of bank widening, sampling should be done at an interval of minimum 25 metres on widened side(s) of embankment.

b) Frequency of Tests :

Density check would be done for every layer of compacted fill / blanket material as per following minimum frequency (Ref : Annexure - VII RDSO guide line No GE:G-1, July 2003).

i) At least one density check for every 200 sqm. for blanket layers and top one metre of sub-grade.

ii) Atleast one density check for every 500 sqm. for other than blanket and top one metre of sub-grade.

In case of bridge approaches or special locations closer frequency may be adopted.

c) Method of In-situ Dry Density Measurements

Any of the following methods could be adopted as per the requirements at site. RDSO’s guidance may be taken for adoption of other methods such as by use of Nuclear Moisture Density gauge and Compact Meter fitted on rollers.

Method Of Measurement

Procedure Of Test

Parameters To Be Measured

Remarks

i) Sand Replace-ment Method

As per IS-2720 (Part 28) 1974

a) In-situ Dry Density

b) Moisture content

May be adopted for all type of soils

ii) Core Cutter Method

As per IS-2720 (Part 29) 1975

a) In-situ Dry Density

b) Moisture content

In some of the coarse grained soils (with little fines) taking core cutter samples is difficult. In such cases, sand replacement method may be used for density measurement.

d) Acceptance Criteria :

i) Coarse grained soils which contains fines passing 75 micron IS Sieve, upto 5 percent should have the Density Index (Relative Density) a minimum of 70% as obtained in accordance with IS:2720 (Part-14)-1983.

ii) For other soils, field dry density should not be less than maximum attainable dry density obtained in field compaction trial. However, in field compaction trial, the maximum attainable dry density should not be less than 98% of MDD values as obtained by Heavy Compaction Test (IS 2720 (part 8) – 1983) in the laboratory.



In case, there are difficulties in achieving 98% of the MDD values as obtained by Laboratory test, in the field trials, the same may be relaxed upto 95% of MDD with the specific approval of the Engineer, recording reasons of such relaxation.

iii) During widening of bank in case of gauge conversion and rehabilitation of unstable formation, compaction of earthwork should be minimum 95% of MDD as obtained by Laboratory test as per Heavy Compaction Test (IS:2720 (part 8) – 1983) or 70% Relative Density for cohesion less soil (IS:2720 (Part 14) –1983).

1.9.7.2 Formation Level : Finished top of sub-grade level may have variation from design level by + 25 mm and finished top of blanket layer may also be permitted to have variation from design level by plus 25mm. The ballast should be placed only on level formation without ruts or low pockets.

1.9.7.3 Cross Slope : Cross slope should be within 1 in 28 to 1 in 30.

1.9.7.4 Side Slopes : Side slope should in no case be steeper than designed side slope. Provision of berm width should not be less than the designed width.

1.9.7.5 Formation Width : Formation width should not be less than the specified width.

1.10 BLANKETING

Note: Based on RDSO’s Specification No. GE.IRS.2 (Final) dated July 2005 on “Mechanically produced Blanketing Material for Railway formation including Guidelines for Laying” to which reference may be made for further details.

1.10.1 Scope : Where the drawings provide for a Blanket of coarse and granular material of thickness as shown therein over the full width of formation, the contractor shall arrange for the supply of the materials at site, spreading over the formation earthwork and for consolidation as detailed below. The thickness of blanketing layer shall be fixed in light of the Guidelines dated July 2005 of RDSO referred to in the Note above.

1.10.2 Sample for Material : The successful contractor should submit for approval by the Engineer samples of the Blanketing material in three wide mouth sealed glass jars of a quantity of 0.035 Cum. each. The material to be used by the contractor for blanketing should strictly adhere to the quality of material as approved by the Engineer.

1.10.3 Specifications of Blanket Material

Blanket material produced in a plant should generally conform to following specifications :

a) It should be coarse, granular and well graded.

b) Skip graded material is not permitted.

c) Non -plastic fines (particles of size less than 75 micron) are limited maximum to 12%, whereas plastic fines are limited maximum to 5%.

d) The blanket material should have particle size distribution curve within one of the bands of enveloping curves shown in Figure 1.6 or the percent passing of the material through each IS sieves should lie between the upper and lower limit of blanket material as given in the Table 1.1

e) The material should be well graded with Cu & Cc as under : Uniformity coefficient, Cu = D 60/D10 > 7

Coefficient of curvature, 1060

2

30

xDD

DCC = between 1 and 3

f) Particle size distribution must follow one of the gradation ranges tabulated below.



Table 1.1 : Particle size distribution ranges for different grades of blanket material

1.

40 mm 100 95-100 95-100

2.

20 mm 100 93-100 80-100

3.

10 mm 95-100 85-95 65-85

4.

4.75 mm 92-99 70-92 43-70

5.

2 mm 65-90 46-65 22-46

6.

600 micron 33-50 22-33 08-22

7.

425 micron 28-40 18-28 05-18

8.

212 micron 16-27 10-16 00-10

9.

75 micron 00-12 00-10 00-08

1.10.4 Selection of Blanket Material

Depending on the source of material, the blanket material can be categorized in the following categories:

• Natural material

• Machine manufactured material � Crushed material � Blended material

1.10.4.1 Proper survey of area close to projects needs to be carried out to identify suitable sources of blanket material required for the project. Aim of such source identification survey is to use naturally available material, or select alternatives of machine manufactured blanket material through crushing, blending or a combination, which is cheap and conforms to the specifications laid down.

1.10.4.2 The parent material of the blanket material so chosen should be chemically inactive and sturdy in normal working environment. Brickbats, factory slag, weak dissolvable stones like lime, shale, laterite etc. need not be selected as blanket material.

1.10.4.3 The choice of gradation as provided in 1.10.3 (f), above, may be exercised judiciously, based on the availability of material. It may be advisable to choose the grade A for finest subgrade soils (requiring 1.0m thick layer of blanket), and grade B or C for coarser subgrades (requiring less thickness of blanket).

1.10.5 Mechanical Production :

The Blanket can be produced by adopting either crushing methodology or Blending Methodology as described in Paras 6.1 and 6.2 respectively of RDSO’s Specification No.GE.IRS.2 (Final) dated July 2005 and to which reference can be made for any details. Crushing Methodology is resorted to in the event of non availability of natural source of blanket materials and involves crushing the rock / boulder to produce crushed blanket material. Blending methodology involves proper blending of two or more soils or in combination with soils crushed material like stone chips or quarry dust.



1.10.6 Quality Control on Blanket Material at Production site

1.10.6.1 The source of blanket material, detailed in para 1.10.4, needs to be identified based on tests & studies conducted and conformity of the material to the Specification as laid down in para 1.10.3.

1.10.6.2 It is desirable to have a check on quality of material at source/manufacturing point so that major deviation in quality of the material being sent to site does not exist. It would be in the interest of the supplier to have such tests conducted on his own to avoid any complication at a later stage.

1.10.6.3 The frequency of such test could be laid down by the engineer in-charge, if need be. In the absence of any other instructions, at least one test may be performed per day to check the particle size gradation at the point of loading into the trucks. However, the final acceptance of the blanket material should be at the site where it is laid, as per para 1.10.6.6.

1.10.6.4 The supplier/ Engineer may also lay down proforma for 'Incoming Material Register' to be maintained at manufacturing point for having a control on utilization of different grades of material, especially where blending is done using crushed as well as local material.

1.10.6.5 Test for Quality : Blanket material should be tested as per IS: 2720 (Part 4) of a minimum of one test per 500 cum. or part thereof to plot particle size distribution curve, so as to assess its suitability. It would be necessary to carry out wet analysis to assess actual percentage of fines. To expedite testing work, dry sieve analysis may be carried out if variation between results of dry and wet analysis is not significant and adequate margin exists with respect to acceptance criteria. However, in such cases also, wet analysis has to be carried out at frequent interval to verify the extent of variation. In any situation, acceptance of blanket material would be based on wet analysis only. The sample for wet analysis should be prepared as per para 4.3 of IS: 2720 (Part 4).

1.10.6.6 Acceptance Criteria :

The material should generally conform to specification as given at para 1.10.3.

1.10.7 Transportation:

The blanket material should be transported wet after mixing water in order to achieve OMC, in tippers for direct unloading on formation.

1.10.8 Laying, Spreading and Compacting

1.10.8.1 The blanket material must be spread with a tractor mounted grader or a paver- finisher in layers of uniform thickness, before allowing compaction.

1.10.8.2 Compaction to specified levels of RD or percentage of MDD (para 1.10.10.3) will be carried out through a number of passes of vibratory rollers of 100-120 kN static weight or equivalent capacity. A combination of vibrating rolling initially and static finishing rolling may be established through trials. Speed of roller shall not exceed 5 km/hr.

1.10.8.3 Proper control of moisture is required to optimize the compaction effort. Optimum moisture content may be established through Modified Proctor Apparatus (IS: 2720, part 8) and moisture may be added by sprinkling at the plant or at site as per the requirement.

1.10.8.4 Rolling is to be carried out in layers of not more than 300 mm each, following the same camber profile as provided in the subgrade layer and to be maintained upto the top layer.

1.10.8.5 No provision for uncompacted portion may be made on the edges of embankment. The sides may be hand rammed with a suitable rammer.

Note : The engineer should generally expect to get MDD above 2.1 gm/cc, and OMC in the range of 5-9%, as matter of guidance.



1.10.9 Quality Control Checks on Finished blanket work :

1.10.9.1 Degree of compaction of each layer of compacted blanket should be ascertained by measurement of dry density/Relative Density of soil at locations selected in specified pattern. The method of sampling, frequency of tests, method of tests to be conducted and acceptance criteria to be adopted are as under.

1.10.9.2 Method of Sampling :

(a) The sampling adopted has to be such that effectiveness of proper compaction having been done for the entire area under consideration can be judged. For this, the Engineer in-charge should lay down the method adopted in detail depending on site conditions and accordingly records of checks done are properly maintained. However, in absence of such procedure laid down, following method should be adopted:

(b) Suggested method of sampling : For each layer, a minimum of one sample at a predetermined interval (in compliance with the requirement stated in next para) along the centre line of the alignment would be taken. The checking points may be staggered to the extent possible.

(c) Frequency of Tests : Density check would be done for every layer of blanket material as per following minimum frequency:

At least one density check for every 200 sqm of blanket layer. (say, every 18 to 30 m for single line, or doubling work and every 12 to 16 m for a double line construction.)

1.10.9.3 Method of in-situ dry density measurements :

Any of the following methods could be adopted as per the requirements at site -

Method of measurement

Procedure of test

Parameters to be measured

Remarks

Sand Replacement Method

As per IS-2720 (Part 28) 1974

Insitu Dry Density Moisture content

May be adopted for all type of material

ii) Core Cutter Method

As per IS-2720 (Part 29) 1975

-do-

In some of the coarse-grained soils (with little fines) taking core cutter samples is difficult. In such cases, sand replacement method may be used for density measurement.

iii) Nuclear Moisture

Density Gauge

As issued by RDSO

a) Bulk density b) Moisture

content c) Dry density d) Degree of compaction

May be used in consultation with RDSO

iv) Compactor meters fitted on roller (On roller

continuous compaction control)

As issued by RDSO

As issued by RDSO

May be used in consultation with RDSO



1.10.10 Acceptance Criteria :

1.10.10.1 1.10.1 to 1.10.4 above.

1.10.10.2 The blanket material, which contains fines passing 75 micron IS Sieve, upto 5 percent should have the Density Index (Relative Density) a minimum of 70% as obtained in accordance with IS: 2720 ( Part 14) – 1983.

1.10.10.3 For other materials, field dry density should not be less than maximum attainable dry density obtained in field compaction trial. However, in field compaction trial, the maximum attainable dry density should not be less than 98% of MDD values as obtained by Heavy Compaction Test (IS: 2720 (part 8) – 1983) in the laboratory. In case, there are difficulties in achieving 98% of the MDD values as obtained by Laboratory test, in the field trials, the same may be relaxed upto 95% of MDD with the specific approval of Chief Engineer/construction, recording reasons of such relaxation.

1.10.10.4 During widening of bank in case of gauge conversion and rehabilitation of unstable formation, compaction of blanket layer should be minimum 95% of MDD as obtained by Laboratory test as per Heavy Compaction Test (IS: 2720 (part 8) – 1983) or 70% Relative Density for cohesionless soil (IS: 2720 ( Part 14) – 1983).

1.10.11 Measurement :

1.10.11.1 Measurement of blanket material should be done on the basis of finished cross section after the material and workmanship have been accepted as per the above criteria. No deduction is to be made towards voids.

1.10.11.2 In very rare cases, where it is not possible to take blanket material on finished subgrade, measurement may be done on the basis of stack measurement with the permission of Chief Engineer in-charge. It may be necessary to frame different schedule items for different methods of measurement. There should be no occasion to change the method of measurement unless specifically provided for in the tender documents duly approved by competent authority.

1.10.11.3 Method of measurement in case of stack measurement may be the same as in case of ballast incorporated in "Specification for track ballast-2004".

1.10.11.4 It is advisable to tally the quantity and quality measured at site with the ' Incoming Materials Register' maintained at plant (para 1.10.6.4) as a means of double check.

1.11 SPECIFICATIONS OF BIAXIAL GEOGRIDS FOR TRACKBED STABILIZATION

Biaxial Geogrids of Punched & oriented type with large aperture with below mentioned specifications are to be used for trackbed stabilization application.

Biaxial Geogrids shall be manufactured from carefully selected polypropylene (PP). Grade of PP used shall in manufacturing of Geogrids shall combine optimum values of strength, stiffness, toughness and durability. Biaxial Geogrids shall be made by extruding a sheet of PP to very precise tolerances, punching an accurate pattern of holes, then stretching the sheet under controlled temperature, firstly in longitudinal direction, then in transverse direction. Process shall create a geogrid with square or almost square apertures by stretching in two orthogonal directions.

The polymers long chain molecules shall be orientated in the direction of stretching resulting in a dramatic increase in both strength and stiffness. This orientation shall pass through both the narrower ribs and the thicker nodes. The resulting product shall be monolithic grid with square edged ribs and integral junctions which possesses both geometrical and molecular symmetry; critical for consistency in manufacture and efficient load transfer in service.



The geogrid shall be supplied in standard width of 3.8m and roll length of minimum 40m.

SL Property Test Method Values Testing Facilities At

General Properties :

1. Polymer Polypropylene / HDPE or similar polymer

IIT-Chennai, IIT-Delhi, IIT-Bombay, BTRA-Mumbai, BICS-Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, SASMIRA-Mumbai, CBRI-Roorkee, CIPET-Chennai

3. Carbon Black BS 2782 Part-4

Method 452B:1993 2% (min.)

2. Mass Per Unit

Area IS:14716 /

ASTM D : 3776 320 g/m2

(min.)

IIT-Chennai, IIT-Delhi, IIT-Bombay, BTRA-Mumbai, BICS-Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, SASMIRA-Mumbai, CBRI-Roorkee

4. Aperture Size

Square opening of suitable size with tolerance of ±10% : Size of 60mm to 70mm at the interface of ballast & blanket, i.e. for ballast reinforcement application, such that effective interlocking takes place with existing ballast particles.

5. Rib Profile & Thickness

Rectangular with 1.5mm rib depth (min.)

6. Roll Width 3.8m to 4.0m, as per site requirement and width attachment to BCM

Not Applicable

7. Roll Length

40m to 50m (However, it has to be ensured that final roll dia does not exceed 350mm or else geo-grids may get struck underneath the sleepers during installation on existing tracks)

Not Applicable

Mechanical Properties :

8. Ultimate Tensile Strength (CD & MD)

IS:13162 Part-5 & IS:13325

And

ASTM D 6637/ BS EN ISO

10319:1996

30 kN/m (min.)

IIT-Chennai, IIT-Delhi, IIT-Bombay, BTRA-Mumbai, BICS-Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, SASMIRA-Mumbai, CBRI-Roorkee

9. Strain at Ultimate Tensile Strength (CD & MD)

8% To 12%

10. Load at 5% Strain (CD & MD)

21.0 kN/m

(min.)

11. Junction Efficiency (CD & MD)

GRI-GG2-87 and GRI-GG1-87

95 %

IIT-Chennai, IIT-Delhi, IIT-Bombay, BTRA-Mumbai, BICS-Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, CBRI-Roorkee

12. Radial Stiffness at low strain, (@ 0.5% strain)

13. Aperture Stability

U.S. Army Corps of

14. Resistance to Installation Damage

15. Resistance to Chemical Degradation

16. Resistance to UV Light Weathering

1.11.1 Installation Methodology

The formation shall be prepared as per Indian Railway from stumps, stones or other large protrusions which could cause damage to the grids.

Biaxial Geogrids shall be placed over the formation just below the ballast.

Adjacent rolls are secured along both the longitudinal and transvforming 300mm overlaps. Ballast must be placed over Geogrid so that it is able to fully interlock with the grid to ensure continuity of strength between adjacent rolls.



ISO 10319:1996 350 kN/m

(min.)

IIT-Chennai, IITIIT-Bombay, Mumbai, BICSHyderabad, BTTGAhmedabad, SASMIRACBRI-

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

Methodology for measurement of Torsional Rigidity

3.5 Kg-cm/deg

(min.)

BICS-BTTGTensar

BS 8006:1995 & ISO 10319:1996

> 90 %

IIT-Chennai, IITIIT-Bombay, BICSHyderabad, BTTGAhmedabad, CBRIRoorkee

EPA 9090 100 % IIT-Chennai, IITIIT-Bombay, Mumbai, BICSHyderabad, BTTGAhmedabad, SASMIRACBRI-Chennai

ASTM D4355 100 %

Installation Methodology

The formation shall be prepared as per Indian Railway standards. It shall be free from stumps, stones or other large protrusions which could cause damage to the


Adjacent rolls are secured along both the longitudinal and transvforming 300mm overlaps. Ballast must be placed over Geogrid so that it is able to fully interlock with the grid to ensure continuity of strength between adjacent rolls.



Chennai, IIT-Delhi, Bombay, BTRA-

Mumbai, BICS-Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, SASMIRA-Mumbai,

-Roorkee

-Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, Tensar – UK

Chennai, IIT-Delhi, Bombay, BICS-

Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, CBRI-Roorkee

Chennai, IIT-Delhi, Bombay, BTRA-

Mumbai, BICS-Hyderabad, BTTG-Ahmedabad, SASMIRA-Mumbai,

-Roorkee, CIPET-Chennai

standards. It shall be free from stumps, stones or other large protrusions which could cause damage to the


Adjacent rolls are secured along both the longitudinal and transverse edges by forming 300mm overlaps. Ballast must be placed over Geogrid so that it is able to fully interlock with the grid to ensure continuity of strength between adjacent rolls.

1.12 WOVEN GEOTEXTILE AS SEPERATOR TO SUBGRADE AND BLANKET LAYER

The geotextile shall be made from polypropylene multifilament yarns, woven together into a stable fabric structure with a superior combination of mechanical and hydraulic properties. Finished product shall have excellent resistance to biological and chemical environments normally found in soils and shall be stable against short-term exposure to ultraviolet radiation.

The woven geotextile shall conform to property values listed below :

Specifications of Multifilament Woven Geotextile

SL Property

I Polymer Composition, Structure and Physical Properties

1 Polymer

2 Structure

3 Mass per unit area

II

1 Tensile strength

2 Elongation at specified

Tensile Strength

3 Trapezoid tearing strength

4 Puncture strength

III

1 Apparent opening size

2 Water flow rate normal to the

plane

Roll Dimensions

1. Values listed are minimum average roll values except for IImaximum average roll values.

2. The elongations reported are the actual fabric elongations at the specified tensile strength measured over a gauge length of 100mm marked at th

3. Roll length and Roll width may vary as per requirement.



WOVEN GEOTEXTILE AS SEPERATOR TO SUBGRADE AND BLANKET

The geotextile shall be made from polypropylene multifilament yarns, woven together into a stable fabric structure with a superior combination of mechanical and hydraulic properties. Finished product shall have excellent resistance to biological

chemical environments normally found in soils and shall be stable against term exposure to ultraviolet radiation.


Specifications of Multifilament Woven Geotextile

Test Method Value (MARV)

Polymer Composition, Structure and Physical Properties

Polymer Polypropylene

Structure Woven with multifilament yarn in both

warp and weft directions

Mass per unit area ASTM D 5261

Mechanical Properties

Tensile strength Warp

IS 1969 Weft

Elongation at specified Tensile Strength

Warp

Weft

Trapezoid tearing strength Warp

ASTM D 4533 Weft

Puncture strength ASTM D 4833

Hydraulic Properties

Apparent opening size ASTM D 4751

Water flow rate normal to the ASTM D 4491

Roll Dimensions Standard roll length : 100m, Standard roll

width : 5m

Values listed are minimum average roll values except for II-2 and IIImaximum average roll values.

The elongations reported are the actual fabric elongations at the specified tensile strength measured over a gauge length of 100mm marked at the center of specimen.

Roll length and Roll width may vary as per requirement.



WOVEN GEOTEXTILE AS SEPERATOR TO SUBGRADE AND BLANKET

The geotextile shall be made from polypropylene multifilament yarns, woven together into a stable fabric structure with a superior combination of mechanical and hydraulic properties. Finished product shall have excellent resistance to biological

chemical environments normally found in soils and shall be stable against


Value (MARV)

Polypropylene

Woven with multifilament yarn in both warp and weft directions

240 g/m2

55 kN/m

40 kN/m

25 %

25 %

1100 N

750 N

600 N

150 microns

32 l/m2/s

Standard roll length : 100m, Standard roll

2 and III-1, which are

The elongations reported are the actual fabric elongations at the specified tensile e center of specimen.



1.12.1 Installation of Woven Geotextile as Separator

The woven geotextile shall be laid directly on the site, having removed major protrusions such as rocks and bush stumps and also having filled local hollows and depressions with the approved fill.

The geotextile rolls of specified width shall be laid in the longitudinal direction (parallel to the track) on the prepared subgrade. A 300mm overlap shall be provided between any joint of two geotextile rolls (transversely or longitudinally).

After laying the geotextile, first layer of blanket layer as per drawing is to be constructed and compacted.

1.13 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS – WORKS NEAR RUNNING TRACK:

1.13.1 When any work is required to be carried out near a Running Track (Track which is in use for train or shunting movements) extra care is required to be taken to ensure safety of the moving rail traffic as well as of the Contractor’s working personnel. Brief details of the precautions to be taken are detailed below.

1.13.2 The contractor shall, at all times, adopt such safe methods of works as will ensure safety of structures, equipment and labour. If at any time the Employer finds the safety arrangements inadequate or unsafe the Contractor’s attention shall be drawn to the same and the contractor shall take immediate corrective step at site. The absence of any such warning by the Engineer-in-charge shall in no way absolve the contractor of his sole responsibility to adopt safe working methods.

1.13.3 The contractor shall not allow any road vehicle belonging to him or his suppliers etc., to ply in Railway land next to the running line. If, for execution of Earthwork, Minor bridges, platforms and other works, road vehicles are necessarily to be used in Railway land next to the Railway line, the contractor shall apply to the Engineer-in-charge for permission giving the type and No. of individual vehicles, names and license particulars of the drivers, location, duration and timing of such work/movement. The Engineer-in-charge or his authorised representative will arrange for the Railway representative to personally counsel, examine and certify the road vehicle drivers, contractor’s flagmen and supervisor and give written permission giving names of road vehicle drivers, contractor’s flagmen and supervisors to be deployed on the work as well as location, period and timing of the work. This permission will be subject to the following obligatory conditions.

i) The road vehicles can ply along the track after suitable cordoning of track with minimum distance of 6.00metres from the center of nearest track. For plying of road vehicles during night hours, adequate safety measures will have to be followed which will be communicated in writing by the Railway representative through Engineer-in-charge, along-with a sketch, to the contractor/contractor’s representative and controlling engineer/supervisor-in-charge of the work and concerned Railway officers and the in-charge of the section.

ii) Nominated vehicles and drivers will be utilised for work in the presence of at least one flagman and one supervisor certified for such work.

iii) The vehicles shall ply 6 m. clear of track. Any movement or work at less than 6 m. and up to minimum 3.5 m. clear of track center shall be done only in the presence of Railway employee authorised by the Railways. No part of the road vehicle will be allowed at less than 3.5 m. from track center. Cost of such Railway employee shall be borne by the Employer.



iv) The contractor shall remain fully responsible for ensuring safety and in case of any accident, shall bear cost of all damages to his equipment and men and also damages to Railway and its passengers.

1.13.4 When the vehicle is to be worked closer to 6 Mt but not less than 3.5 Metres from centerline of running track due to site conditions or requirement of work, following further precautions shall be observed:

i) In no case the road vehicle shall run or machinery shall work at distance less than 3.5m from center line of track.

ii) Demarcation of land shall be done by bright colored ribbon/nylon chord suspended on 75 cm. High wooden/bamboo posts at distance of 3.5m from center line of nearest running track.

iii) Presence of an authorised Railways representative shall be ensured before plying of vehicle or working of machinery.

iv) Railway’s supervisor shall issue suitable caution order to drivers of approaching trains about road vehicles plying or machineries working close to running tracks.

The train drivers shall be advised to whistle freely to warn about the approaching train. Whistle boards shall be provided wherever considered necessary.

v) Lookout men shall be posted along the track at a distance of 800m from such locations who will carry red flag and whistles to warn the road vehicle/machinery users about the approaching trains.

vi) On curves where visibility is poor, additional lookout men shall be posted.

1.13.5 When the vehicle is to be worked closer to 3.5 Metres from centerline of running track,

the following provisions will apply.

i) Plying of vehicle or working of machinery closer to 3.5m of running track shall be done only under protection of track. Traffic block shall be imposed wherever considered necessary. The site shall be protected as per provisions of Para Nos.806 & 807 of Permanent-Way manual as the case may be.

ii) Presence of a Railway’s supervisor shall be ensured at work site.

iii) Railway’s supervisor shall issue suitable caution order to drivers of approaching

train about road vehicles plying or machineries working close to running tracks.

The train drivers shall be advised to whistle freely to warn about the approaching train.

1.13.6 The following general safety measures should invariably be adopted when any work is

to be carried out in the vicinity of running trade.

i) The contractor shall not start any work without the presence of railway supervisor at

site.

ii) Wherever the road vehicles and/or machinery are required to work in the close

vicinity of railway line, the work shall be so carried out that there is no infringement to the Railway’s schedule of dimensions. For this purpose the area where road vehicles and/or machinery are required to ply, shall be demarcated and acknowledged by the contractor. Special care shall be taken for turning/reversal of



road vehicles/machinery without infringing the running track. Barricading shall be provided wherever justified and feasible as per site conditions.

iii) The look out and whistle caution orders shall be issue to the trains and speed

restrictions imposed where considered necessary. Suitable flagmen/detonators shall be provided where necessary for protection of trains.

iv)The supervisor/workmen should be counseled about safety measures. A

competency certificate to the contractor’s supervisors as per proforma below shall be issued by the Assistant Engineer of the Railway which will be valid only for the work for which it has been issued.

Certified that Sri __________________________________ P.way supervisor of M/s. ________________________________ has been examined regarding P.way working on ____________________ work. His knowledge has been found satisfactory and he is capable of supervising the work safely.

iv) Ballast/rails/sleepers/other P-way materials, after unloading along track, should be kept clear of moving dimensions and stacked with stack heights and distance from the running track as directed by the Railway representative.

vi) Supplementary site specific instructions, wherever considered necessary, shall be

issued by the Engineer-in-charge for any particular worksites.



ANNEXURE 1.1

EXTRACTS FROM THE EXPLOSIVES RULES, 1983

4. Safety distance categories of explosives:

(1) Explosives are divided into four categories according to the risks which they present when initiated, namely—

(i) Category X — those explosives which have a fire or a slight explosion risk or both but the effect of which will be local.

(ii) Category Y — Those explosives which have a mass fire risk or a moderate explosion risk, but not the risk of mass explosion.

(iii) Category Z — Those explosives which have a mass explosion risk and major missile effect.

(iv) Category ZZ. — Those explosives which have a mass explosion risk and minor missile effect.

(2) If any question arises as to whether any explosive belongs to Category X, Category Y, Category Z or Category 22, the matter shall be referred to the Chief Controller whose decision shall be final.

General Provisions

7. Restriction on delivery and dispatch of explosives:

(1) No person shall deliver or dispatch any explosive to any one other than a person who

(a) is the holder of a licence, to possess the explosives or the agent of a holder of such a licence duly authorised by him in writing in this behalf; or

(b) is entitled under these rules to possess the explosives without a licence.

(2) The explosives so delivered or dispatched shall in no case exceed the quantity which the person to whom they are delivered or dispatched is authorised to possess with or without a licence under these rules.

(3) (i) No person shall receive explosives from any person other than the holder of a licence granted under these rules.

(ii) No person shall receive from or transfer explosives to any person for a temporary storage or safe custody in a licensed premises, unless prior approval is obtained from the Chief Controller.

11. Competent person to be Incharge of operations — Every person holding or acting under a licence granted under these rules shall, whenever explosives are loaded, unloaded or handled, depute a competent person experienced in the handling of explosives to be present at and to conduct the operations in accordance with these rules.

12. Precautions to be observed in handling explosives — (1) The floor of any place or any carriage or vessel in which any explosive is or is to be laid and the ground gangway, decks and other places over which the explosive is to be conveyed during loading or unloading shall be —

(i) carefully examined to ensure that there is nothing thereon in contravention of these rules or likely to endanger the safety of the consignment;

(ii) thoroughly cleaned and swept before and after use,

(2) The packages containing the explosives shall not be thrown or dropped down or rolled or pulled along the ground or floor but shall be passed from hand to hand and carefully deposited and stored.

(3) Where a package is to be slung, due precaution shall be taken to slung it in such a manner as effectively to prevent the possibility of a fall.

(4) After the handling of explosives has commenced, the operations shall proceed with due diligence and without unnecessary stoppage.

13. Restriction on handling of explosives after sunset — No person shall handle or cause to be handled any explosive between the hours of sunset and sunrise:



Provided that nothing in this rule shall apply to handling of explosives during the dark hours if proper illumination is provided in the area and the place is guarded,

14. Prohibition of smoking, fires, lights and dangerous substances — No person shall smoke, and no fires, lights or articles or substances of a flammable nature or liable to spontaneous ignition, or to cause or communicate fire or explosion such as acids, petroleum, carbide of calcium, compressed gases or such other hazardous substances, shall be allowed —

(a) at any time within 15 metres from a place where an explosive is stored; or

(b) at any place where an explosive is handled, during transport, one hour before and during such handling:

Provided that nothing in this rule shall apply to the use on a ship of :

(i) an engine room fire, if such fire has been previously carefully banked up or

(ii) any artificial light or ship's signal lights or of a type approved in writing by the Chief Controller in areas outside port limits and by the Conservator of the Port within port limits.

15. Prohibition of matches etc. — No person on, in, or near any place where explosives are stored or handled or on any carriage conveying explosives shall —

(a) have in his possession any matches, fuses or other appliances for producing ignition or explosion or any knives or other articles made of iron or steel; or

(b) wear boots or shoes with iron nails or shod or strengthened with iron, unless such boots or shoes are covered with leather, rubber, felt or other material, in the form overshoes or other.

41. Protection from fire or explosion —

(1) No carriage or aircraft or vessel shall be used for transporting explosives unless all iron or steel therein with which a package containing any explosive is likely to come in contact is effectually covered with lead, leather, wood, cloth or other suitable material.

(2) Where the weight of the explosives transported in any carriage exceeds 1000 kg, they shall be placed in the interior of the carriage which shall be enclosed on all sides with wood or metal so as effectually to protect the explosives from communication of fire and the carriage shall be locked.

(3) Where the weight of explosives transported in any vessel exceeds 1000 kgs. they shall be placed in the hold of the vessel which shall have a closed deck and closely fitting hatches and double water-tight bulk heads shall be provided at each end of the hold where the explosives are stowed and the hatches shall be locked.

(4) Where the explosives carried in carriage or vessel do not exceed 1000 kgs. in weight, the explosives shall, unless they are conveyed in the manner specified in sub-rule (2) or sub-rule (3), as the case may be, be completely covered with fireproof cloth tarpaulin or any other suitable material as effectually to protect the explosives from communication of fire.

(5) All doors, hatches and coverings of every compartments or hold containing explosives in or on any carriage or vessel shall be kept closed and secured except when explosives are being loaded or unloaded into, onto or from it.

(6) When explosives are being carried in or on a carriage or aircraft or vessel, they shall be kept away from anything whether in the carriage or vessel or elsewhere that would be liable to cause them to ignite or explode.

42. Delay in transit to be avoided —

If the quantity of explosives transported in any carriage or vessel exceeds 2.5 kgs., the person or persons incharge of such carriage of vessel shall not stop or delay at any place for a longer time than may be reasonably necessary, nor stop unnecessarily at any place where such stopping would be attended with danger to public.

44. Small quantities of fireworks:

Exempted nothing contained in Rules 35, 40 and 41 shall apply to the transport of manufactured fireworks in the custody of a person entitled to possess them without a



licence under Rule 14 provided that not more than 2.5 kg. of manufactured fireworks, securely packed, shall be so transported in any motor vehicle licensed for conveyance of more than six passengers.

113. Licence for possession, sale and use —

(1) No person shall possess, sell or use any explosive except under and in accordance with a licence granted under these rules.

(2) The licensee shall be responsible for all operations in connection with the possession, sale or use of explosives which may be conducted in the premises covered by the licence.

114. No licence needed for possession and sale in certain cases -

(l) notwithstanding anything contained in Rule 113, no licence shall be necessary for the possession.

(a) of any explosive by a carrier or other person for the purpose of ( transport, when the same is being kept or transported in accordance with the provisions of Chapter IV regulating transport of such explosives: or

(b) by any person of manufactured fireworks in any quantity not exceeding 25 kgs. Provided that the fireworks -

(i) are obtained and intended by such person for immediate use and not for sale and are possessed by him for a period not exceeding 14 days; and

(ii) are kept in substantial receptacle which is exclusively appropriated to the keeping of explosives and is closed and secured so as to prevent unauthorised person from having access to the explosives; or

(c) by any person for his own private use and not for sale of gunpowder not exceeding 5 kgs. and 50 metres of safety fuse for blasting in any State, other than Bihar, Kerala, Tamil Nadu and West Bengal, and of small arm nitre-compound not exceeding 5 kgs. except in the State of Kerala and Tamil Nadu;

(d) by Railway Administration for flare lights or other explosives for its own use and not for sale to any other person by transfer or otherwise for maintaining railways, tracks, tunnels, provided that the provisions of the Act and these rules or otherwise complied with;

(e) of any explosive, which is not for sale and is required solely for the navigation of aircraft, when kept in an aircraft for use | therein, or for distribution to other aircraft or to aerodromes or at an aerodrome for use there or for distribution to aircraft or to other aerodromes, provided that the maximum quantity so possessed shall not exceed 25 kgs. when carried in an aircraft and 50 kgs., when kept at an aerodrome;

(f) and sale from a shop of amorces (an explosive of Class 7 and division 2) in quantity not exceeding 12.5 kgs, Provided that in respect of clauses (b) and (c) the Central Government may prohibit the possession of any explosive or prescribe any conditions under which the explosives can be possessed without a licence when considered necessary for the security of public peace.

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in Rule 113, no licence shall be necessary for the sale of such explosives manufactured by the Armed Forces of the Union and Ordnance Factories or other establishment of such Forces as are sold or delivered to any person who is in possession of a valid licence issued under these rules for the class and quantity of the explosives so sold or delivered.

116. Protection from lightning —

(1) Every magazine shall have attached thereto one or more efficient lightning, conductors designed and erected in accordance with the specification laid down in Indian Standard Specification No. 2309 as amended from time to time.



(2) The connections to various parts of earth resistance of the lightning conductor terminal on the building to the earth shall be tested at least once in every year by a qualified electrical engineer or any other competent person holding a certificate of competency in this behalf from the State Electricity Department. A certificate showing the results of such test and the date of the last test shall be hung up in conspicuous place in the building-

117. Precautions during thunderstorm –

Whenever a thunderstorm appears to be imminent in the vicinity of a magazine or store house every person engaged In or about such magazine or store house shall be withdrawn to a safe distance from such magazine and store house and the magazine and the store house shall be kept closed and locked until the thunderstorm has ceased or the threat of it has passed.

119. Maintenance of records —

Every person holding a licence granted under these rules for possession, sale or use of explosives shall maintain records in the prescribed Forms and shall produce such records on demand to an inspecting officer.

120. Repairing of licensed magazine or store house —

Before repairs are done to any magazine or store house or part thereof used for storage of explosives, that magazine or Store house shall be cleaned by removal of all explosives and by thorough washing.

122. Premises to be kept locked —

(1) Any licensed magazine or store house shall be kept securely closed or locked at all times except when goods, are being placed in or taken from it or when it must be kept open for some other purpose in connection with the management of such premises.

(2) The keys of the licensed magazine shall, at all times be kept secured in license's, own custody or of his authorised agent and shall be produced for opening the magazine or store house whenever so required by an inspecting officer. The name and address of the person with whom the keys will be kept shall be intimated to the licensing authority and the controller of Explosives having Jurisdiction.

123. Guards to be provided —

(1) The licensee shall at his own expenses provide for round the clock safe custody of the magazine or store house a guard which shall be of such strength as the District Authority may consider it to be sufficient.

(2) The licensee, shall provide a shelter for the watchman on duty near the magazine or store house,

124. Repacking or opening of packages —

(1) No packages containing explosives shall be opened in magazine or store house.

(2) Repacking of explosives shall be done, where the necessary in an approved open sided shed having smoothly finished cemented floor at a distance as approved by licensing authority.

125. Explosives not to be kept in damaged boxes —

The licensee of every magazine or store house shall ensure that the explosives are always kept in their original outer package. In case the outer package gets damaged so that the explosives contained therein cannot be stored or transported, such explosives shall be repacked only after the same are examined by a Cont

126. Storage of explosives In excess of licensed quantity —

(1) The quantity of any kind of explosives kept in any licensed magazine or store house shall not exceed the quantity entered in the licence against such kind of explosives,

(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-rule (1), the Chief Controller may issue a permit, on payment of the prescribed fee to a holder of licence in Form 22 and such holders of licence in Form 21 who also have licence in Form 20 (for the class of explosives) for keeping of explosives in excess of the licensed quantity entered in the



licence when he is satisfied that such excess storage is essential and unavoidable due to circumstances beyond the control of the licensee. The validity of such permit shall not exceed 30 days

(i) the licensing authority shall not issue any permit for excess storage of explosives if the magazine or store house cannot observe the requisite safety distances for the total quantity entered in the licence plus the additional quantity of the explosives so permitted.

(ii) no permit for storage of explosives in excess of the licensed capacity shall be granted if the specified distances on the licence around the magazine or store house or the floor space in the specified rooms for storage of each kind of explosives is not adequate for keeping of the total quantity of explosives, including the excess quantity applied for.

(iii) The licensing authority may refuse to grant a permit for excess storage of explosives if such excess storage is of a repeated nature.

(iv) No explosive in excess of the licensed quantity shall be stored in the magazine or store house unless a permit in this behalf is obtained from the licensing authority by a letter or telegram.

129. Storage in a magazine —

An explosive if stored in a magazine shall be stored either in Mode 'A' or Mode 'B' magazine as specified in Schedule VII.

130. Restriction, on use of Mode 'B' magazine —

Mode 'B' magazine shall be used for storage of explosive required (or use for a temporary period for a specific purpose and such magazine shall not be used for sale of explosives.

131. Mound of magazines —

A substantial mound shall be provided near a magazine, if so required by the licensing authority. Such mound shall be of a type approved by the licensing authority and shall always be maintained in good condition to provide effective protection.

135. Construction of premises :

(1) All explosives on the premises shall be kept in a brick, stone or concrete building which is closed and secured so as to prevent unauthorized person from having access thereto.

(2) The premises shall have a floor area of minimum nine square metres.

(3) The premises shall have independent entry and exit.

(4) If the premises are situated in a building used for other purposes also, such premises shall not be situated under a staircase and shall be so located as not to obstruct any passage in from or to the building in case of fire or accident.

(5) The premises shall be situated at ground level.



ANNEXURE 1.2

Typical Compaction Characteristics for natural soils, rocks and artificial materials

(Ref: BS: 6031-1981, Table 4)

Material Major Divisions

Subgroups Suitable type of compaction

plant

Maximum number of passes for satisfactor

y compactio

n

Maximum

thickness of compacted layer (mm)

Remarks

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Rock-like materials

Natural rocks

All rock fill (except chalk)

Heavy vibratory roller not less than 180 kg per 100mm of roll Grid roller not less 180 kg per 100mm of roll

4 to 12 500 to 1500

depending on

plant used

If well graded or easily broken down then this can be classified as a coarse-grained soil for the purpose of compaction. The maximum diameter of the rock fragment should not exceed two third of the later thickness.

Chalk See remarks 3 500 This material can be very sensitive to weight and opearation of compacting effort and spreading plant. Less compactive effort is needed than with other rocks

Artificial Waste material

Burnt and unburnt colliery shale

Vibratory roller Smooth wheeled roller Self-propelled

4 to 12 depending on weight of plant

300



tamping roller

Pulverized fuel ash

Vibratory roller Self - propelled tamping roller Smooth wheeled roller Pneumatic tired roller

Includes lagoon and furnace bottom ash

Broken concrete, bricks, steel works, slag, etc.

Heavy vibratory roller Self- propelled tamping roller Smooth wheeled roller

Non-processed sulphide brick slag should be use with caution

Coarse-grained soils

Gravel sand, gravelly soils

Well graded gravel and gravel/ sand mixture: little or no fines Well graded gravel / sand mixtures with excellent clay binder Uniform gravel: little or no fines Poorly graded grave and gravel / sand mixtures: little or no fines. Gravel with excess fines, silty gravel, clayey gravel, poorly graded gravel / sand / clay mixtures

Grid roller over 540 kg per 100mm of roll. Pneumatic tired over 2000 kg per wheel Vibratory plate compactor over 1100 kg /Sq.m. of base plate Smooth wheel roller Vibratory roller Vibro rammer Self-propelled temping roller

3 to 12 depending on type of

plant

75 to 275

depending on

type of plant



Sand and sandy soils

Well graded gravel and gravel/ sand mixture: little or no fines Well graded gravel / sand mixtures with excellent clay binder Uniform gravel: little or no fines Poorly graded grave and gravel / sand mixtures: little or no fines. Gravel with excess fines

Unifrom sands and

gravels

Uniform gravels; little or no fines. Uniform sands; little or no fines. Poorly graded sands; little or no fines. Sands with fines, silty sands, clayey sands, poorly graded sand / clay mixtures

Smooth wheeled roller below 500 kg per 100mm of roll. Grid roller below 540 kgper 100mm of rolling. Pneumatic tired roller below 1500 kg per wheel. Vibratory roller. Vibrating plate compactor Vibro-tamper

3 to 16 depending on type of plant

75 to 300

depending on

type of plant

Fines soils

Soils having low plasticity

Silts (inorganic) and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clayey fine sands with slight plasticity Clayey silts (inorganic)

Sheepsfoot roller Smooth wheeled roller Pneumatic tired roller Vibratory roller over 70 kg per 100 mm of roll Vibratory plate compactor



If water content is low, it may be preferable to use vibratory roller. Sheeps foot rollers are best suited to soils at water contents below their plastic limit.



Organic silts of low plasticity

over 1400 kgs./sqm. of base plate Vibro tamper Power rammer

Soils having medium plasticity

Silty and sandy clays (inorganic) of medium plasticity Clays (inorganic) of medium plasticity

Organic clays of medium plasticity

Generally unsuitable for Earthworks

Soils having high plasticity

Micaceous or diatomaceous fine sandy and silty soils, plastic silts Clay (inorganic) of high plasticity, fat clays

Should only be used when circumstances are favourable

Organic clays of high plasticity

Should not be used for earthworks

Note: The information in this table should be taken only as a general guide. Field trials for compaction should be conducted for working out optimum layer thickness and number of roller passes for the type of compaction equipment being used. Compaction of mixed soils should be based on that subgrade requiring most compactive effort.



ANNEXURE 1.3

SALIENT FEATURES OF VIBRATORY ROLLERS MANUFACTURED IN INDIA

MAKE MODEL

No.

Operating

Weight (Kg.)

Drum Detail Normal

Amplitude

(Mm)

Vibrating

Frequency (Hz)

REMARKS DRUM WIDT

H (Mm)

AXLE LOAD (T)

Front Rear

ESCORTS

EC 5250 STD

9350 2130 5.050 4.300 1.72 30

9550 2130 5.250 4.300 1.72 30 It is used for better gradeability

10500 2130 6.650 4.300 1.53 30

It is used for better gradeability & breaking clods

9300 1680 4.650 4.300 1.27/0.

75 0-

30/42

GREAVES

BOMAG

BW 212-D-2 (2A)

10424 2100 6.463 3.961 1.67 40/31 It is used for better gradeability

BW 212-PD-2

10879 2100 6.201 4.678 1.5 30


L&T 1104 STD

11150 2330 5.770 5.380 1.6/0.6 28/36

1104 D 11150 2330 5.900 5.535 1.6/0.6 28/36 It is used for better gradeability

1104 PD

11835 2330 6.300 5.535 1.6 28


INGERSOLLRAN

D

ISD-100 STD

10740 2135 6.210 4.535 1.7 0-30

ISD-

100 D 10830 2135 6.295 4.535 1.7 0-30

It is used for better gradeability

ISD-100F

11740 2135 7.205 4.535 1.41 0-30

NOTE: The rollers indicated above can also be used in Static mode. The list includes rollers manufactured by reported firms only.

LEGEND : STD- Standard Type, D- Drum Type & PD - Pads + Drum Type



SKETCHES SHOWING MANNER OF COMPUTATION OF QUANTITIES OF VARIOUS CLASSIFICATIONS OF SOIL

(FIG. NOS.1.1 TO1.4)

SOFT/LOOSE SOIL

FINAL EXPOSEDSLOPE OF CUTTING

HARD/DENSE SOIL

HARD ROCK

BOX TYPE CUTTING

FINAL EXPOSED

(Figure No.1.1)

SLOPE OF CUTTING

SOFT/LOOSE SOIL

SOFT/DISINTEGRATEDROCK

HARD ROCK

FINAL EXPOSED

SLOPE OF CUTTING

SOFT/LOOSE SOIL

SOFT/DISINTEGRATED

ROCK

HAED ROCK

ONE SIDED CUTTING IN A TRANSVERSE SLOPING GROUND

SLOPE OFORIGINAL

CUTTING

CL

FINAL BASE OF CUTTING

(Figure No.1.2)

SOFT/LOOSE SOIL

FINAL EXPOSED

SLOPE OF CUTTING

HARD/DENSE

ORIGINAL SLOPE OF CUTTING

SOFT/LOOSESOIL

FINAL EXPOSEDSLOPE OFCUTTING

HARD ROCK

SOFT/DISINTEGRATED

ROCKHARD ROCK

WIDENING OF CUTTING WHERE THE EXISTING

CUTTING SLOPE DISAPPEARS AND A FRESH SLOPE ARISES (Figure No.1.3)

(Figure No.1.4)

SOFT/LOOSE SOIL

HARD/DENSE SOIL

ORIGINAL SLOPEOF CUTTING

HARD ROCK

ORIGINAL EXPOSED

SURFACE

FRESH CUTTING SLOPE IS AVAILABLE AFTER THE WORK.

EXTENSION OF EXISTING CUTTING WHERE NO



(SECTIONAL ELEVATION & CROSS SECTION)DETAILS OF CLOSE AND OPEN TIMBERING

Figure No.1.5A

DETAILS OF CLOSE & OPEN TIMBERING

CLOSE TIMBERING (With vertical poling boards)

NOT TO SCALE

60cm

POLING BOARD1.5m X25 cm X 4 cm

REQUIRED

WIDTH

23 TO30 cm

CLOSE TIMBERING (WITH LONGITUDINAL POLING BOARD)

SECTIONAL ELEVATION X -- SECTION

STRUT 12.7cm DIA

WALLING10cm X 10cm

POLING BOARD

3mX25cm X4cm

VERTICALWALLING10cmX10cm

REQUIREDWIDTH

STRUT 12.7cm DIA.

SECTIONAL ELE VATION

OPEN TIMBERING

X- SECTION

POLINGBOARD

1.5cm X25cmX 4cm

REQUIREDWIDTH

23 TO 30cm

STRUT 12.7cm DIA.

WALLING10cm x 10cm

SECTIONAL ELE VATION X -SECTION

1.8m c/c 60 cm60 cm

60cm

1.8 m60 cm

60 cm

1.5 m

1.5m

50cm

25cm

50cm

1.8m C/C60cm

60cm

75cm75cm 75cm

25cm3 m



Figure No.1.5B

DETAILS OF CLOSE AND OPEN TIMBERING

(ISOMETRIC VIEW)

CLOSE PLANKING & STRUTTING WITH VERTICAL POLING BOARD WIDE EXCAVATION

PLANKING & STRUTTING FOR SHALLOW

WITH LONGITUDINAL POLING BOARDCLOSE PLANKING & STRUTTING OPEN PLANKING AND STRUTTING

Waling100x100

250x30Poling Board

Max.1800

600600

Struts

Max.1200

300Max.

600600

250x38Poling Board

Rake

Blocking

250 500250

250x30Poling Board

600Max1800

Poling Board250x30

Struts

Waling 100x100

2000

2000

2000

2000

Max.1800



SPECIFICATION FOR BRIDGE WORKS



BRIDGE WORKS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 General requirement The contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete

performance of the work in accordance with the drawings and as described herein. 1.2 Reference Points and Bench Marks z Permanent reference pillars established and fixed in the area shall not be removed or

disturbed under any circumstances without the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer-in-Charge will locate initially the centre line of the bridges and set out the centre point. Contractor will provide all labour and materials required for this purpose. The contractor shall set out details of position/profile of individual foundations, piers, abutments etc. and be responsible for accuracy thereof. The contractor shall carefully maintain and protect all benchmarks and reference points and shall lay out all his work by accurate reference there to. The relevant level of structure at different part will be checked by Engineer-in-charge or his representative. Para 401 of Indian Railways Bridge Manual, 1998 may be referred to for details on “Setting Layout of Bridges”.

1.3 For items not covered by these Specifications but required for Bridge Works such as Brick Masonry, Stone Masonry, Steel work etc, relevant CPWD Specifications may be referred to.

1.4 In Girder and Slab Bridges, Bearing areas for members shall be finished to true plane so as to give uniform bearing on the entire area. Bearing plane shall be horizontal even for the bridges in grades.

1.5 In major works, a field laboratory should be set up by the Contractor at his cost at the

work site, which should be equipped with necessary equipments to carry out the various tests on coarse and fine aggregates, cement, water and concrete.

2.0 EXCAVATION

2.1 Site Clearance

The contractor shall remove all vegetation, trees, structures and any foreign material existing at the site of proposed work. The area shall be stripped to remove roots of grass/trees, and other organic materials which shall be burnt and/or removed to approved disposal areas or other locations as indicated by the Engineer-in-Charge. Cost of labour, tools, transport etc. required for this is deemed to be included in the overall rates unless otherwise specified.

2.2 General requirements

The Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete performance of the works n accordance with the approved drawings and as described herein.

2.3 Drainage in the Vicinity of Excavations The contractor shall control the surface grade in the vicinity of all excavations so that the surface of the ground in vicinity is properly sloped or diked to prevent surface water from running into the excavated areas during the progress of the construction.

2.4 Excavations shall include the removal of all materials as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge, as may be required to execute the work properly. Excavation shall be made



with sufficient clearance to permit the placing, inspection and setting of forms and completion of all works for which the excavation is made.

2.5 Sides and bottoms of excavation shall be cut sharp and true. Undercutting shall not be permitted. Earth sides of excavation shall not be used in lieu of formwork for placement of concrete unless otherwise authorised in special cases, by the Engineer-in-Charge where limitations of space for larger excavation necessitate such a decision.

2.6 When machines are used for excavation, the last 300 mm before reaching the required level shall be excavated by hand or by such equipment that will leave the soil at the required final level, in its natural condition.

2.7 The Bearing capacity of the soil at the bottom of excavation shall be determined by the Engineer-in-Charge, so as to decide on the depth of foundation.

2.8 The bottom of excavation shall be trimmed to the required levels and when carried below such levels by error shall be brought to level by filling with concrete 1:3:6 or as specified, at the contractor's cost. If the contractor is directed by the Engineer-in-Charge to excavate to a lower level than that indicated on the drawings and the work is covered by through rates, such additional excavation shall be paid for at the applicable unit rate.

2.9 The foundation for Bridges should be taken to a depth not less than 1.75 metres below

the lowest anticipated scoured bed level in ordinary soil. In rocky soil, it will be adequate if it is properly keyed into the rocks for a minimum of 0.30 metre in case of hard rock and 1.50 metres in case of soft rock. Sloping rock is to be suitably benched. Fissures and weathered rocks are to be avoided. In soft soils, raft foundations may be provided protected by means of suitable aprons and cut off walls or launching apron both on the upstream and downstream side to prevent undermining of the foundation.

2.10 The contractor shall be responsible for assumptions and conditions regarding the nature

of materials to be excavated and the difficulty of making and maintaining the required excavations and performing the work required as shown on the drawing and in accordance with these specifications. Coffer-dams, sheeting, shoring, bracing, draining, dewatering, etc. shall be arranged and installed as required and the cost thereof shall be included in the unit rate quoted for the item of excavation. The contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to any part of the work and property caused by collapse of sides of excavations. Material used for temporary works may be salvaged if it can be done without jeopardising safety of the work and structures and subject to approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. However, no extra claim shall be entertained for material not salvaged or any other damage to contractor's property as a result of the collapse. He shall not be entitled to any claim for additional payment for having to re-do the excavation as a result of the same.

2.11 All excavation for installation of underground facilities, such as piping, sewer lines, tunnels, ducts, drain lines etc. shall be open cuts.

2.12 Where excavation requires bracing, sheeting, or shoring etc. the contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge, drawings showing arrangements and details of proposed installations and shall not proceed until he has received approval from the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.13 Classification of earth for excavation for bridges shall be same as applicable for earth work, unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract.

2.14 Measurement



Except where otherwise provided for in BOQ, for foundation in bridges, the following specific provisions will apply.

Measurement for payment will be based on volume calculations determined by the existing grade, (ground level) and the bottom elevation (level) of structure/lean concrete with lateral dimensions (vertical sides) as per concrete outline of lowest footing Concrete dimensions determined from drawings). The unit of measurement shall be cubic metre. Nothing extra would be payable for slope, shoring, strutting etc. irrespective of the fact that they are actually provided. Payment includes leading excavated soil to a spoil dump or for reuse in a location in the vicinity as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

2.15 Excavation in Rock- Hard, Soft or Decomposed:

2.15.1 For the purpose of classification of rock in excavation, the following definitions shall apply

a) Hard rock requiring blasting:

Any rock excavation for which blasting is required.

b) Soft or Decomposed rock:

Lime stone, sand stone, laterite, hard conglomerate or other soft or disintegrated rock which can be quarried or split with crow bars or wedges.

2.15.2 Excavation

The specifications for excavation Clause No.2.0 to 2.13 above shall apply to excavation

work in rock also, except for the bottom of excavation, where depending on the type of rock, over-breaks upto a maximum depth of 0.3 m below the required level may be allowed by the Engineer-in-Charge at his discretion and paid accordingly. Concrete backfill in such over-breaks shall also be paid for. No payment shall, however, be allowed for backfilling, if such overbreaks are required to be brought to grade by filling with only soil including its proper compaction.

2.15.3 Blasting

Blasting material required for excavation work shall be arranged by the contractor at his

cost, from any authorised dealer of such approved material. Necessary assistance for obtaining approval for procurement of the material will be given by the RITES/Employer. The contractor shall be fully responsible for entering into agreement with any authorised magazine contractor in respect of rates, regularity of supply etc. Contractor will also obtain necessary license for transporting, stocking and use of explosives and depute only suitable qualified and licensed personnel for handling the explosives.

All rules under the Explosives Act or other local rules in force shall be fully observed. All blasting works shall be done in accordance with the stipulations contained in the Indian Standard Specification No. IS:4081. Blasting shall be done by employing qualified personnel and under careful supervision. Proper precautions for safety of persons and property shall be taken, where blasting is to be carried out in the proximity of other structures. Sand bags etc. shall be used on top of the blast holes to prevent the rock fragments, from causing damage to adjacent structures and other property. The unit rate for excavation involving blasting shall be inclusive of the cost of providing all necessary materials, labour and arranging for such precautions.

2.15.4 Unexploded charge



The number of blasts to be fired and the actual number of shots heard shall be compared and the person responsible shall satisfy himself by site examination that all blasts have exploded before any person working in the area is permitted to re-approach the work site. The withdrawal of the unexploded charge shall not be permitted under any circumstances. Unless any other procedure is considered advisable by the person in charge of blasting operation, the unexploded charge shall be flooded with water and the hole marked in a distinguishable manner. Another hole shall be made at a distance as decided by the person in charge of blasting operation, off the old hole and fired in the usual way. This process shall be continued till the original blast is exploded.

2.15.5 Decomposed or Soft rock

Excavation in "decomposed or soft rock" shall be carried out by blasting or by crow bars, by shovel and pick axes etc. or both the methods. Nothing extra shall be paid for the use of any particular method.

2.15.6 Chiseling in Hard Rock :

Where blasting is prohibited or not practicable, excavation shall be carried out by chiseling and payment shall be made at the same rate as provided for hard rock requiring blasting. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in this regard shall be final.

2.15.7 All excavated materials obtained from excavation shall be disposed off by the contractor as directed by Engineer-in-charge.

2.16 Measurement for Excavation in rock:

(i) As soon as level of rock is reached, the contractor shall intimate the Engineer-in-

Charge, who shall record the level for calculating quantities of excavation in rock.

(ii) When "hard rock" and "decomposed or soft rock" are mixed together and separate

rates have been provided for in the contract, the entire quantity of excavation done below rock level shall be recorded from cross-section taken before commencement and after completion of rock excavation, payment lines being as provided in clauses 2.14 and 2.15.2. The hard rock excavated shall be stacked, measured and reduced by 30% to allow for bulking and voids to arrive at the quantity payable under "hard rock". The difference between the entire excavation below rock level (between the pay lines) and the quantity payable under "hard rock" shall be paid for as "decomposed or soft rock".

(iii) In case, the quantity of "hard rock" alone as measured above is in excess of the

theoretical total payable quantity of excavation below rock level, then payment under "hard rock" shall be restricted to the total theoretical payable quantity.

(iv) All excavated material, rock or soil, obtained as a result of over-excavation and for which payment shall not be made, shall also be carried and disposed of as directed and stacked at places shown by the Engineer-in-Charge, at the cost of the contractor.

(v) In the case of stray boulders which are classified as "hard rock", measurements of such outcrops shall be made on the basis of linear measurements of the outcrop



made before excavation. Such measurements shall be signed by the contractor in token of acceptance before excavation is taken in hand.

(vi) When the excavation in rock is paid for as a single item for all classes of rock, the

measurement will be made based on cross-sectional area after recording rock level at commencement and finishing.

2.17 Excavation below water Table

2.17.1 Wherever water table is met with during the excavation. the Contractor shall immediately report the fact to the Engineer-in-Charge who shall arrange to record the exact level of the water table. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in the matter shall be final.

2.17.2 The Contractor shall dewater and maintain the water table below the bottom of the excavation level during excavation. concreting and back-filling.

2.18 Methods of Measurements

In the case of excavation in rock, payment for overbreaks upto a maximum depth of 0.3 m below the required level may be allowed by the Engineer-in-Charge at his discretion. Nothing extra is payable for dewatering operation during execution of work for earthwork carried out above sub-soil water level.

3.0 RUBBLE BACKING

3.1 A backing of dry rubble walling or Boulder filling will be provided behind abutments, wing walls and Return walls for facilitating proper drainage. It shall be provided to dimensions in accordance with the drawings. The Boulder filling will be for full height and of thickness not less than 600mm with smaller size towards the back behind the boulder filling.

3.2 The materials used should be broken stone of quality approved by Engineer-in-Charge. The stones used will be of least dimension of 15 cm in any direction and not friable. Materials selected from out of excavated material may be permitted to be used by Engineer-in-Charge, in which case only labour rate is payable for the work. Otherwise, the cost will include supply of all materials, labour and tools.

3.3 For typical arrangements of Rubble Packing and Backfill behind the Abutments, wing walls and Return walls. Sketch 1 relating to Para 6.4.2 of RDSo’s Guidelines for Earthwork in Railway Projects GE G-1 may be referred to.

4.0 BACKFILL

4.1 The contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for

complete performance of the work in accordance with the drawings and as described herein. Back fill material shall consist of Granular materials of Soil Groups GW, GP and SW as per IS 1498-1970.

4.2 After completion of foundation footings, abutments and wing walls and other constructions below the elevation of the final grades and prior to backfilling, all forms, temporary shoring, timber etc. shall be removed and the excavation cleaned of all trash, debris, and perishable materials. Backfilling shall begin only with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.



4.3 Backfilling shall be done with inorganic materials, obtained from the excavation if found suitable or from borrow pits and subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Filling behind abutments and wing walls shall be done with sandy materials to be obtained from approved source.

4.4 Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon or against any structure in locations where there is danger of displacement or damage.

4.5 Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness. Each layer shall be compacted under proper moisture content and with such equipment as may be required to obtain a density equal to or greater than 95 % of maximum dry density as determined by the relevant Indian Standards. Trucks or heavy equipment for depositing or compacting backfill shall not be used within 1.5 m of building walls, piers, or other facilities which may be damaged by their weight or operation. The methods of compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Pushing of earth for backfilling shall not be adopted under any circumstances.

4.6 Backfill adjacent to pipes shall be hand placed, free of stones, concrete, etc.

compacted uniformly on both sides of the pipe and where practicable, to a depth of 300 mm over the top of pipes. While tamping around piping, care shall be taken to avoid unequal pressures.

4.7 On completion of structures, the earth surrounding them shall be accurately finished to line and grade as shown on the drawings. Finished surface shall be free of irregularities and depressions and shall be within 50 mm of the specified level.

4.8 Measurements of backfill

Measurements shall be based on the volume by computed cross-sections.

5.0 CONCRETE

5.1 Scope

5.1.1 This section of the Specification covers the technical requirements for furnishing, forming, placing and finishing all concrete, plain and reinforced complete for all structures at all elevations, superstructures, ducts and trenches and including encasement of steel section as shown on the drawings except as otherwise specified, and providing necessary recesses, weepholes etc.

5.1.2 All concrete works as indicated in the scope of this contract shall be carried out as per these specifications.

5.2 General Requirements

5.2.1 The contractor shall furnish all labour, material and equipment to form, place and finish all structural concrete and miscellaneous items complete, as indicated on the drawings and as described herein.

5.2.2 All materials, tests, mixing, placing, formwork, reinforcing and workmanship shall conform to the Indian Railway Standard Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete for General Bridge Construction (Revised latest edition) (Concrete Bridge Code) and subsequent amendments and other relevant codes of the Bureau of Indian Standards and/or as shown on drawings and/or described herein.



5.3 Materials

5.3.1 Cement shall conform to Clause 4.1 of IRS Concrete Bridge Code of year 1997

incorporating all Correction Slips upto date (currently C.S.No.11 dated 27.12.2007)

5.3.2 Concrete aggregates shall conform to "Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregate from Natural Sources for Concrete" IS : 383 (Latest Edition) as indicated in Clause 4.2 of Concrete Bridge Code.

5.3.3 Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalies, organic materials, or other deleterious substances. Reference may be made to Clause 4.3 of Concrete Bridge Code.

5.3.4 Reinforcement shall conform to the provisions in Clause 4.5 of Concrete Bridge Code from reputed manufacturer like SAIL, TISCON, RINL. All reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose, mild scales, dust, loose rust and coats of paint, oil or other coatings, which may destroy or reduce bond. The exact IS Specifications to which Steel should conform to IS 432 Pt.I or IS 1786 or both shall be indicated in the Drawings or advised by the Engineer-in-charge. Where directed by the Engineer in charge, anticorrosive protective coating of reinforcement bars shall be provided as stipulated in Clause 7.1.5 of Concrete Bridge Code.

5.3.5 Reinforcement accessories shall be furnished by the contractor. Binding wire shall be annealed from wire quality not less than No. 16 S.W. gauge (1.65 mm dia). Bar supports, chairs and bolsters (as approved by the Engineer- in-Charge) shall be sufficiently strong to support the steel properly.

5.4 Concrete Mix

5.4.1 The compression strength as measured by works test at 28 days, shall be as

indicated on the drawings for the different areas and types of construction or as indicated in Clause 5.1 of IRS-Concrete Bridge Code 1997.

5.4.2 Where controlled concrete is used. the minimum cementious Material content will be as per Clause 5.4.5 of IRS Concrete Bridge Code 1997.

5.4.3 Unless otherwise specified in the BOQ Concrete grade M-20 will be Nominal Mix Concrete with proportions of materials as per Clause-5..5.3 and Table-5 of Concrete Bridge Code for M-20 Concrete. For Nominal Mix concrete of Grades M5, M7.5, M10 and M15, Clause 9.3 and Table 9 of IS 456-2000 may be referred to. Concrete grade above M-20 will be as per mix design to be submitted by the contractor conforming to Code IS-10262:1982(SP-23:1982). Such mix design will be carried out jointly by the Contractor and the Site Engineer of RITES and cement consumption thereon will be decided on the basis of mix design in terms of Clause 5.4.5 of Concrete Bride Code. No extra payment will be made for this mix design of any grade.

5.5 Sampling and Testing in the Field

5.5.1 Workability of the Concrete should be controlled by direct measurement of water content with or without use of admixtures. Samples of concrete shall be taken at the direction of Engineer-in-Charge in the field and workability checked in accordance with IS : 1199 "Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete".



5.5.2 These samples shall be tested for strength and consistency at testing laboratory set up at the Project site or at any other Government Laboratory, approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, in accordance with IS : 516. The moulds, labour and material for cubes shall be supplied by the contractor who shall also arrange to transport the cubes to laboratory at his cost. Actual cost of the testing shall be borne by the contractor.

5.5.3 The acceptance criteria for concrete shall be as given in subsequent paras. Only the

slumps indicated in the approved design mix shall be adopted. However, larger slumps than those indicated in the approved design mix of concrete of a specified grade (strength) may be necessary to get a workable consistency for concrete in the case of beams, walls columns and other heavily reinforced members. No extra payment shall be made for extra cement that may have to be added in such cases to get the concrete of the same specified grade (strength) with larger slumps. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge regarding the degree of consistency or the amount of slump shall be final.

5.5.4 Samples shall be cured under laboratory conditions, except when in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge extreme weather condition may prevail at which time the Engineer-in-Charge may require curing under job (field) conditions.

5.5.5 If the 'test strength' of the laboratory controlled cubes for any portion of the concrete work falls below the compressive strength specified, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to order a change in the proportions or the water content for the remaining portion of the structure.

5.5.6 If the 'test strength' of the job cubes falls below the specified strength, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to require provisions for temperature and moisture control during the period of curing as necessary to secure the required strength, and may require re-tests in accordance with "standard method of securing, preparing and testing specimens for hardened concrete for compressive and flexural strengths".

5.5.7 When the cubes tested reveal a strength lower than those specified, the acceptance criteria for such concrete shall be decided as stipulated in subsequent paras. The Engineer-in-Charge shall also reserve the right to reject whole or any part of the work. In case of acceptance of such works the standard deviations shall be worked out, and examined by the Engineer-in-Charge and if he is satisfied only then such works can be accepted at the accepted or at the reduced rate.

5.6 General Storage

5.6.1 All materials shall be stored by the contractor in a manner affording convenient access for identification and inspection at all times. The storage facilities arrangements shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Reference may be made to Clause 4.7 of Concrete Bridge Code on Handling and Storage of materials which also refers to IS 4082.

5.6.2 Cement shall be stored by the contractor in silos or suitable weather-proof buildings with dry floors, to be provided by the contractor, in a manner so as to prevent deterioration.

5.6.3 Aggregate shall be stored by the contractor in areas floored with tightly laid wooden planks or other approved hard, smooth and clean surface, in a manner precluding intrusion of any foreign material. Aggregates of different classes shall be stored in separate piles sufficiently separated from each other to prevent the material at edges of the piles from getting intermixed.



5.6.4 Reinforcement shall be stored off the ground in a manner to prevent objectionable changes in original surface characteristics, in separate piles or racks above grade.

5.7 Mixing and Placing Concrete

5.7.1 For detailed provisions on “Production and Control of Concrete” clause 5.6 of Concrete Bridge Code may be referred to. On Transportation, placing and compaction of Concrete, Clauses 8.1 to 8.3 of Concrete Bridge Code may be referred to. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit of the work until after the forms, bracing, reinforcing steel and other preparations for casting have been approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and approval given in writing to proceed with the casting. Concreting under extreme weather conditions shall not normally be permitted. Where concreting has to be done under Special conditions, reference may be made to Clause 8.6 of Concrete Bridge Code which deals with concreting in extreme weather conditions, under water concreting, concrete in sea water and concrete in aggressive soils and water.

5.7.2 No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative. Concrete which is not placed in accordance with the specifications or which is of inferior quality shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at his cost.

5.7.3 It is imperative that all excavations prepared for concrete construction are maintained free of water until such concrete work is completed. The contractor shall make provisions and furnish equipment as required for such dewatering, . Water used for flushing concrete placing equipment shall be discharged clear of the concrete and forms.

5.7.4 All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of materials, and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. Mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer and the type and size shall be subject to the approval by the Engineer-in-Charge. The mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer and mixing shall be continued at least two minutes after all materials are in the drum. For batches larger than 0.75 cum, mixing time shall be increased at the rate of 15 seconds for each additional 0.75 cum or fraction thereof. All concrete shall be discharged within 3 minutes after the introduction of mixing water to the cement and aggregates unless a different time is specified by the Engineer-in-Charge.

5.7.5 Before beginning a run of concrete, all hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment. The first batch of concrete through a cleaned mixer for use in the works shall contain 15% less coarse aggregates than normal in order to compensate for coating the interior of the mixer. All conveyance buggies and borrows shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placing of concrete. Concrete shall be rapidly handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit and shall not be delivered by spout or troughs nor dumped into carriers with a free fall from the mixer of more than 1.50 m. Every possible precaution shall be taken to prevent separation or loss of the ingredients while transporting the concrete.

5.7.6 The placing of concrete shall be a continuous operation with no interruption in excess of

30 minutes between the placing of continuous portions of concrete. Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner as would prevent displacement of forms or reinforcement above the level of the fresh concrete, and the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the sections. Each layer shall be plastic where a new layer is placed upon it. Concrete shall be deposited as close to its final position as practicable in order to prevent segregation. After initial set of concrete the forms shall not be jarred and no vibrating equipment shall be placed on the ends of projecting



reinforcement. Chutes used to convey concrete shall be surfaced with metal or other material, and there slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation. Suitable spouts or baffles shall be provided to prevent segregation during discharge. Where concrete is placed manually by use of pans, the entire pan with the concrete shall be dropped to the surface where concrete is to be deposited instead of emptying the pan manually.

5.7.7 Concrete shall not ordinarily be placed under water. In unavoidable cases, such

concreting shall be done only with the specific approval of procedure and application by the Engineer-in-Charge Additional cement shall be added as necessary and shall be paid for if the accepted rate for concrete provides for separate payment for cement as opposed to through rate for cement Concrete.

5.7.8 To secure maximum density and eliminate formation of air pockets the concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated and worked around all reinforcement, embedded facilities and into corners of forms. Unless other methods are authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge, mechanical vibrators shall be used for the purpose, the type and operation of which is subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The extent of vibration shall be through the entire depth of each new layer and several centimetres into the layer below with vibration applied at the point of deposit and uniformly through out the freshly placed concrete, not farther apart then the radius over which the vibration shall be sufficient to accomplish thorough compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement. The tendency for large aggregate to gravitate to lower elevations due to vibration shall not relieve the contractor from his responsibility for obtaining a uniform density throughout the mass. Excess cement paste thus formed at the top of each layer shall be removed before the succeeding layer is deposited. Hand tamping shall not be permitted. Contractor shall provide proper equipment for compaction of concrete in areas where conventional methods would not be adequate. Immersion type vibrators shall be provided at the rate of at least one 65 mm unit per 4 cum per hour together with at least one stand-by vibrator of the appropriate size. Vibrators shall be inserted in the concrete at a sufficient number of places so that their fields of influence overlap and shall not be used to work the concrete along the forms or screens. Vibrators shall be withdrawn in time to prevent the formation of voids. Over-vibration causing segregation, surface laitance, or leakage through the forms shall be avoided. Where electrically operated vibrators are used, diesel or petrol driven stand-by vibrators shall be available for carrying on uninterrupted vibration in case of power failure.

5.7.9 Form Vibrators shall be used in addition to internal vibration in case of Prestressed concrete girders, slabs etc.

5.7.10 The use of vibrators complying with IS 2505, IS 2506, IS 2514 and IS 4656 for compacting concrete is recommended.

5.7.11 Re-tamping of concrete or mortar which has partially hardened shall not be permitted.

5.7.12 Concrete cover blocks of the same strength and density as parent concrete shall be

used.

5.8 Construction Joints 5.8.1 The location and details of construction joints not indicated on the drawings must be

approved of by the Engineer-in-Charge before concrete is poured. Reference may be made to Clause 8.5 of Concrete Bridge Code read with Appendix A of the Code.



5.8.2 Construction joints in foundations shall not be provided without specific concurrence of the Engineer-in-Charge.

5.8.3 When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface shall be roughened, clean with wire brushes etc. thoroughly wetted and excess water removed before placing of the concrete.

5.8.4 Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgment of particles of aggregate. The first layer of concrete shall be placed on this surface with care and shall be well-rammed against old work, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots.

5.8.5 The unit rate of concrete work shall include the cost of preparation of construction joints as mentioned above and no extra payment shall be admissible on this account.

5.9 Inserts

5.9.1 All anchors, anchor bolts, inserts, pipes, conduits, sleeves, brackets, frames,

nosings, bolts, etc. and any other items that are required to be embedded in the concrete shall be placed in correct position before pouring. Extra care shall be taken during pouring operation to maintain their location. Blockouts and openings shall be kept as indicated in the drawings. These inserts shall be welded to the nearest reinforcement to keep them in position and all such weldings shall be deemed to be included in the unit rate quoted and no extra shall be payable on this account.

5.9.2 Provision will be made for insertion of holding down bolts on piers/bed-blocks in form of

necessary holes by leaving a suitable insert before concreting and removing the same after the concrete attains adequate strength. These holes will be filled with cement sand mortar after the girders are aligned and holding down bolts inserted and fixed in position.

5.10 Curing of Concrete

5.10.1 Reference may be made to Clause 8.4 of Concrete Bridge Code on the Specifications

relating to Curing of Concrete.

5.10.2 Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall be moist cured by keeping all exposed

surfaces, edges and corners continuously moist for at least seven days after being placed, by spraying, ponding or covering with waterproof paper or moisture retaining fabric. Where air temperature is expected to fall below 5 deg.C during the curing period, additional covering by blanketing material shall be provided so that concrete temperature at surface does not fall below 10 deg. C. Immediately after stripping of the forms, water shall be applied directly to the concrete surfaces, the wetting down operations shall be continuous within the curing time specified.

5.10.3 As an alternative to continual wetting down of pier/abutment/girder faces, the use of

a sprayed-on membrane may be substituted subject to approval by the Engineer-in-Charge. Such approved curing compounds shall be applied to all exposed surfaces of the concrete along with stripping of form work.

5.11 Method of Measurement of Concrete Measurement shall be in cubic metres correct upto second place of decimal.

Deductions shall be made for all block outs and openings but not for embedments, reinforcements, and weep holes.



6.0 FALSE WORK AND FORMWORK 6.1 Reference may be made to Clauses 6.1 and 6.2 of Concrete Bridge Code respectively

for Falsework and Formwork.

6.2 All details of formwork, placing, tieing etc. shall be subject to the approval of the

Engineer-in-Charge and the contractor, when required, shall submit drawings, showing details of form construction. The contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy of the formwork to withstand the pressure of freshly placed concrete or other loads imposed without failure, movement or deflection of the component parts. Forms shall be true to the shape, lines and dimensions of the concrete work as shown on the drawings. Wherever vibration has to be applied externally the design of the formwork should receive special consideration based on the disposition of vibrators.

6.3 For concrete surfaces that are exposed to view and for all other concrete surfaces that are to be finished smooth, the lining of forms shall be of smooth, non-absorbent lining material. The type and conditions of such lining for forms shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. All edges of panels shall be square and straight in both directions, and all panels shall match perfectly in length, width and alignment as required.

6.4 All forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the loss of liquid from the concrete. All rubbish particularly chipping, shaving and saw dust shall be removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed and the formwork in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and thoroughly wetted or treated with an approved composition or release agent to prevent absorption of water from adherence of form to the concrete. Such composition or release agent shall be kept out of contact with reinforcement and shall be non-staining and non- injurious to concrete.

6.5 Form lumber may be reused, provided it is true, unwarped, thoroughly clean and without broken or damaged edges and equal in every respect to new lumber. All reformed lumber shall have the contact surfaces reoiled or recoated with an approved composition prior to usage.

6.6 Contractor shall keep an accurate record of the date on which the concrete is cast for each part of the work and the date on which the form work is removed.

6.7 Removal of forms from structural concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements stipulated on stripping time in Clause 6.4 of Concrete Bridge Code.

6.8 No supporting forms shall be removed suddenly in such a manner as to create shock-loading.

6.9 The tolerances for Finished Concrete Bridge structures shall be as stipulated in Clause

6.5 of Concrete Bridge Code.

6.10 Method of Measurement

Measurement of form work where separately provided for and so included in the Schedule shall be based on contact area of concrete worked out from dimensions shown on the drawings. The unit of measurement shall be sq. metres correct to second place of decimal. Otherwise, the cost will be part of rate quoted for concrete works.

7.0 BENDING AND PLACING REINFORCEMENT

7.1 For specifications relating to ordinary reinforcement (other than Prestressing Tenders)

reference may be made to Clause 7.1 of Concrete Bridge Code. Contractor shall, as



per instruction of Engineer-in-Charge, fabricate and place reinforcement to shapes and dimensions as indicated or required to carry out intent of drawings and specifications. The reinforcement shall conform to the provisions detailed in Para 5.3.4 above.

7.2 The contractor shall prepare bar-bending Schedule on the basis of the drawings marked "released for construction" and submit the same for approval. No work shall be commenced without the approval of the Schedule.

7.3 Any adjustments in reinforcement to suit field conditions and construction joints other than those shown on drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

7.4 The contractor shall adhere strictly to requirements for concrete cover over steel reinforcement, protection of bars for bonding with future extensions, columns ties, splices, laps, spacer bars, temperature reinforcement, mesh reinforcement and other items in connection with proper placing.

7.5 Reinforcement shall be placed accurately, conforming to tolerances not exceeding those stipulated in Clause 7.1.3.3 of Concrete Bridge Code, tied or welded securely at intersections and splices, and held in position with spacers or other approved supports during concrete placement. Tie wire ends shall be pointed away from surface. Where bars at laps are welded, the length of weld shall be minimum butt welded on both sides of the joint and shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards specially IS 2751. The contractor will not be entitled to any extra payment for welding the reinforcements.

7.6 Payment for steel reinforcement bars shall be on the basis of weight of bare steel irrespective of any coating applied, in metric tonnes. The weight of the bar shall be derived from the sizes and corresponding unit weights given in hand book of BIS. Standard hook lengths, chairs, spacer bars and authorised laps only shall be included in the weight calculated. Binding wires shall not be weighed nor otherwise measured. Measurements for weight shall not include cutting allowance etc.

7.7 Bending of bars will normally be done 'cold'. Engineer-in-Charge's specific approval will be obtained for hot-bending of bars. Torsteel/Deformed bars will under no circumstances be hot-bent. No extra will be payable for hot-bending in lieu of cold bending.

8.0 TESTING OF GRADE MIX CONCRETE

For Grades M-20 and above Sampling, Strength Test and Acceptance Criteria shall be as stipulated in Clause 8.7 of Concrete Bridge Code. Extracts are at Annexure A. Procedure for carrying out Cube Compressive Test is at Annexure B.

9.0 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS

9.1 General

9.1.1 The pipe used shall be in accordance with IS:458-56 "Concrete Pipes" and the type will generally be to class NP-4 or as per approved RDSO drawing, unless otherwise specified in the drawing. They shall also be provided with collar unless otherwise specified or permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge.

9.1.2 The laying of pipes will be in accordance with IS:783 Code of Practice for laying of concrete pipes and guidelines in Section 2300 of Ministry of Shipping and Transport Specification for Road and Bridge works.

9.2 Materials and Handling



9.2.1 All materials used in the manufacture of pipes as well as laying in the pipe culverts shall conform to the general requirements contained in the IS Specification mentioned above and indicated in the foregoing paras.

9.2.2 Each consignment of the pipes shall be inspected, tested where considered

necessary and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before their incorporation in the works. If the pipes are not being cast in the vicinity of the works, suitable facilities shall be provided for the Engineer-in-Charge to inspect them during the process of manufacture at the place of manufacture. Necessary test certificates for the materials used shall be produced to the Engineer-in-Charge when demanded.

9.3 Excavation

9.3.1 The foundation bed for the pipes shall be excavated true to the levels and grades shown

in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The pipes shall be placed in shallow excavation made in natural ground, or in trenches cut in the previously made embankments. Where the height of fill exceeds 3 times the external diameter of the pipe before excavating for pipe laying, the embankment shall first be made and properly consolidated upto a level of one pipe diameter above the proposed top of the pipe for length equal to 5 pipe diameters on either side of centre line, trenching being done thereafter. The sides of the trench shall be as nearly vertical as possible, and the clearance between sides, and pipe shall not be less than 150 mm or more than 1/3rd the pipe diameter.

9.3.2 If soft, spongy or other type of unstable soil is met with during such excavation, the

unsuitable material shall be removed to depth, width and length as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and be back filled with approved granular soil which shall be thoroughly compacted and shaped to the specified level and shape.

9.3.3 Where bed-rock-boulder, hard clay, shale or other hard material is met with, the excavation shall be taken for at least 20 mm below the bottom level of the pipe and space filled with approved soil, free of stone, fragmented material etc. and compacted for providing adequate support unless concrete bedding is specified otherwise.

9.3.4 Generally pipes for railway culverts will be laid on concrete bedding unless otherwise specified in the drawing.

9.4 Bedding for Pipe

The concrete used for the bedding shall have mix which shall have a 28-day compressive strength of not less then M15 grade. Unless otherwise specified bedding shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4th of the normal diameter of the pipe and form a cradle extending for 1/4th of the diameter of the pipe above the lowest bedding level. Suitable recess will be provided in the bedding for resting the projection, collars, etc. for the pipe.

9.5 Back Filling

9.5.1 Trenches shall be back filled soon after the jointing material has hardened. Back filling shall be made of selected good soil free of stones, roots or other organic matter and the soil shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The back filling shall be done carefully with selected/approved material upto 30 cm above the top of pipe and fully rammed and consolidated at optimum moisture content. It shall be laid in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Care should be taken particularly while consolidating the soil under the haunches of the pipe. Consolidation below and above haunches of the



back fill shall be done by foot, light tampers or hand-operated mechanical equipment approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

9.5.2 Filling shall be done simultaneously on both sides of the pipe so that unequal pressures do not occur. No walking or working out the completed pipe shall be permitted till it is back-filled upto 30 cm over the pipe.

9.5.3 In case of high embankment after filling the trench upto the top of the pipe, a loose fill of a depth equal to the external diameter of the pipe shall be placed over the pipe before further layers are added and compacted. This shall be done for the full width of the trench. Only further layers placed above this level, shall be compacted.

9.6 Face Walls and Wing Walls

Face walls, wing walls and aprons, etc. shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown in the drawing or as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. No traffic shall be permitted over the pipe culvert unless the filling over the pipe is at least 60 cm.

9.7 Measurements for Payment

9.7.1 RCC pipe culverts shall be measured along their centre between the inlet and outlet

ends, in linear meters. Length for supply and laying includes supply of collars jointing material and all labour required for laying, aligning, jointing and curing joints.

9.7.2 Selected granular material and cement concrete for pipe bedding shall be measured as laid in cubic metres. Ancillary work like head walls, etc. shall be measured as provided under the respective items of BOQ.

9.8 Rates

9.8.1 The rate for the pipe shall include the cost of pipe and matching collars including

loading, unloading hauling handling, storing, laying in position and jointing complete.

9.8.2 Ancillary work such as excavation including back filling, concrete and masonry shall be paid for separately, as provided under the respective clauses.

10.0 RIVER PROTECTION WORKS

10.1 Pitching

General

Pitching shall not be laid until the banks on which it is to be laid have become consolidated. Before slope pitching is commenced, unless a floor apron is also provided, a trench is to be dug at the toe of the bank, 50 cm deep, or to the depth shown on the drawings, and 15 cm layer of quarry chips or ballast must be laid in trench, on the bed of the pitching.

All earth surfaces that are to be pitched and subsequently exposed to the action of running water, must be covered with a rammed layer of gravel, moorum or quarry refuse to a depth of about 15 cm or as ordered by the Engineer In charge. This under layer prevents the finer material of the bank from being sucked out by the flowing water.

10.2 Stone pitching and flooring

The stones for stone pitching shall be set in the work as received from the quarry, and without any dressing except knocking off weak corners and edges with a mason's hammer. A small proportion of chips may be allowed to show in the face work. The face stones must in general weigh at least 40 Kg and not more than 60 Kg unless otherwise specified, and be well-bedded and hand set in the earth or dry stone



backing, which must be brought up at the same time as the hand set face work. If the backing is of earth, it shall be rammed in 30 cm layers. For bank protection, only rough stone pitching should be used for reasons of economy.

Stone pitching in continuous lengths will be divided suitably in the form of panels by stone masonry walls 45 cm wide and equal to a depth of pitching with cement mortar 1 : 6 or otherwise specified in such a way that total enclosed area does not exceed 10 sq.m.

11.0 FLOORING - BRIDGE WORKS

11.1 Base

Except where otherwise shown in the Drawings, the base shall consist of dry rammed moorum or dry rammed quarry refuse of 15 cm thickness as decided by the Engineer- in-Charge.

11.2 Drop Walls & Curtain walls

The drop walls both on the upstream and down stream shall be built in Cement concrete or as specified in the Drawing. On the upstream side the foundation shall be taken to a depth of 90 cm below the bed level while on the down stream side it shall be taken to a sufficient depth so as to effectively dissipate the hydraulic head due to high flood level and afflux thereby preventing seepage underneath the flooring towards the down stream side. Alternatively the depth of the drop walls and the length of the flooring should be as shown in the drawings so that the minimum flow line is longer than the piping gradient line. The foundation for the drop wall shall also be laid in cement concrete and dimensions shall be in accordance with the drawings.

11.3 Aprons 11.3.1 Aprons are provided at the toes of Banks in continuation of the slope pitching for

affording protection to the banks. These are provided to overcome the effects of scour that will be caused in the bed of the river at this location due to high velocities, whirls etc. Aprons are provided in such a manner that they can launch slope pitching below bed level, extending beyond scour level. Hence such aprons are provided in form of loose stones to a predetermined thickness and width.

11.3.2 A base consisting of smaller stones not exceeding 25 Kg in weight and not exceeding 20 cm in any direction shall be laid first over a layer of stones varying from 25 to 60 Kg in weight. The stones in the pitching shall be laid in such a way that the longest side is bedded vertically. Aprons shall be grouted by cement mortar as specified in the drawing.

11.4 Payment

Measurement will be taken in Cubic meters for pitching and flooring where thickness is predetermined and specified uniformly in drawing.

12.0 MISCELLANEOUS

Stone masonry random rubble/coursed rubble/dry course rubble would be used in breast/retaining walls, drop and curtain walls, top, toe and intermediate walls of supporting panels in pitching and flooring in bridges as shown in the drawing and/or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

13.0 WEEP HOLES 100 mm dia PVC pipe of suitable length would be provided in retaining walls at regular intervals as specified in the drawings/directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Keeping these holes would be a part of the masonry work/ concrete but no deduction



would be made in the quantities for holes. In abutments, weep holes should be provided at vertical intervals of 1 metre and horizontal intervals of 1 metre in a staggered manner.

14.0 PROTECTIVE COATING FOR R.C.C. GIRDERS/ SLABS AND OTHER CONCRETE

STRUCTURES:

Where specifically provided for in the contract, for durability R.C.C. girders/slabs and other Concrete structures located in areas with aggression environment, coastal areas and heavy rainy areas should be given a protective coating with epoxy / polymer based paints as per specifications given in Annexure C. Extra payment will be made for providing such protective coating, unless this item is specifically covered under the Lumpsum rate for the concrete structure. It is advisable to provide such protective coating where High strength Rebars have been proposed for use as reinforcement as against ordinary mild steel round bars.



ANNEXURE A

(Para 8.0)

GRADE MIX CONCRETE WORKS TESTS ON CONCRETE SAMPLING, STRENGTH TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

EXTRACTED FROM CONCRETE BRIDGE CODE (REVISED – 1997)

Note: Unless otherwise specified in the Contract the cost of tests including Materials, labour

and testing charge in Laboratory will be borne by the contractor.

8.7. Sampling, Strength Tests and Acceptance Criteria

8.7.1. General:

Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per IS: 1199 and cubes shall be made, cured and tested at 28 days in accordance with IS: 516.

8.7.1.1. In order to get a relatively quick idea of the quality of concrete, optional tests on beams for modulus of rupture at 72 + 2 hours or at 7 days, or compressive strength tests at 7 days may be carried out in addition to 28 days compressive strength tests. For this purpose, the values given in Table 7 may be taken for general guidance in case of concrete made with ordinary Portland cement. In all cases, the 28 days compressive strength specified in Table 2 shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.

(Note:-Table 2 is on “Grading Concrete” in terms of which the specified characteristic compressive strength at 28 days in N/mm2 is 20 in case of M-20, 25 in case of M-25 and so on).

TABLE 7

OPTIONAL TESTS REQUIREMENTS OF CONCRETE (Clause 8.7.1.1)

GRADE OF CONCRETE

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ON 15 CM CUBES (N/mm2)

MODULUS OF RUPTURE BY BEAM TEST Min. (N/mm2)

Min. at 7 days At 72 + 2 h At 7 days

(1) (2) (3) (4) M 20

13.5 1.7 2.4

M 25

17.0 1.9 2.7

M 30

20.0 2.1 3.0

M 35

23.5 2.3 3.2

M 40

27.0 2.5 3.4

M 45

30.0 2.7 3.6

M 50

33.5 2.9 3.8

M 55

37.0 3.1 4.0

M 60

40.0 3.3 4.2



8.7.2. Frequency of sampling

8.7.2.1. Sampling Procedure –

A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete batch shall have a reasonable chance of being tested: that is, the sampling should be spread over the entire period of concreting and cover all mixing units.

8.7.2.2. Frequency -

The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be in accordance with the following:-

Quantity of concrete in the work m3

Number of Samples

1-5 1

6-15 2

16-30 3

31-50 4

51 and above 4 plus one additional sample for each additional 50m3 or part thereof.

NOTE - At least one sample comprising of 3 cubes shall be taken from each shift.

8.7.3. Test Specimen -

Three test specimens shall be made from each sample for testing at 28 days. Additional cubes may be required for various purposes such as to determine the strength of concrete at 7 days or at the time of striking the form work, or to check the testing error. Additional cubes may also be required for testing cubes cured by accelerated methods as described in IS: 9013. The specimen shall be tested as described in IS: 516.

8.7.4 Test Strength of Samples – The test strength of the sample shall be the average of the strength of three specimens. The individual variation should not be more than + 15 percent of the average. If more, the test results of the sample are invalid. When individual variation exceeds this limit, the procedure for the fabrication of specimen and calibration of the testing machine should be checked.

8.7.5 Standard Deviation

8.7.5.1. Standard Deviation Based on Test Results

(a) Number of Test Results: The total number of test results required to constitute an acceptable record for calculation of standard deviation shall not be less than 30. Attempts should be made to obtain 30 test results, as early as possible, when a mix is used for the first time.



(b) Standard Deviation to be brought up to date

The calculation of the standard deviation shall be brought up to date after every change of mix design and at least once a month.

8.7.5.2 Determination of Standard Deviations (Not given in this Annexure)

8.7.5.3 Assumed Standard Deviation –

Where sufficient test results for a particular grade of concrete are not available, the value of standard deviation given in Table 8 may be assumed.

TABLE 8 ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION (Clause 8.7.5.2)

GRADE OF CONCRETE ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION N/mm2

M 20 4.6

M 25 5.3

M 30 6.0

M 35 6.3

M 40 6.6

M 45 7.0

M 50 7.4

M 55 7.6

M 60 7.8

However, when adequate past records for a similar grade exist and justify to the designer a value of standard deviation different from that shown in Table 8, it shall be permissible to use that value.

8.7.6 Acceptance Criteria

8.7.6.1. Compressive Strength

When both the following conditions are met, the concrete complies with the specified compressive strength:

(a) The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results complies with the appropriate limits in column A of Table.9.; and

(b) Any individual test result complies with the appropriate limits in column B of

Table.9.

8.7.6.2. Flexural strength:

when both the following conditions are met, the concrete complies with the specified flexural strength:



(a) The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds the specified characteristic strength by at least 0.3 N/mm2.

(b) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic strength less 0.3 N/mm2.

TABLE 9 CHARACTERISTIC COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS (Clauses 8.7.6.1 & 8.7.6.2)

Specified grade

Group of test results

A

The mean of the group of test results exceeds the specified characteristic compressive strength by at least

B

Any individual test result is not less than the specified characteristic compressive strength less

N/mm2. N/mm2.

M20 & above Any consecutive

4 Tests

3 3

Special note for Table. 9

8.7.6.3 Quantity of Concrete Represented by Strength Test Results

The quantity of concrete represented by a group of 4 consecutive test results shall include the batches from which the first and last samples where taken together with all intervening batches.

For the individual test result requirements given in column B of Table 9 or in item (b) of para 8.7.6.2. only the particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk.

Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified the maximum quantity of concrete that four consecutive test results represent shall be limited to 60 m3.

8.7.6.4. If the concrete is deemed not to comply pursuant to para 8.7.6.2. the structural adequacy of the parts affected shall be investigated and any consequential action as needed shall be taken.

8.7.6.5. Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately.

8.7.6.6. Concrete shall be assessed daily for compliance.

8.7.6.7. Concrete is liable to be rejected if it is porous or honey combed; its placing has been

interrupted without providing a proper construction joint, the reinforcement has been displaced beyond the tolerances specified; or construction tolerances have not been met. However, the hardened concrete may be accepted after carrying out suitable remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer.



ANNEXURE B

(Para 8.0)

CUBE TEST FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE A-0 One sample (consisting of six cubes 15 x 15 x 15 cm) shall be taken for every 20 cum or

part thereof of concrete work, ignoring any part less than 5 cum or as often as considered necessary by the Engineer. The test of concrete cubes shall be carried out in accordance with the procedure as described below. A register of cubes shall be maintained at the site of work. The casting of cubes, concrete used for cubes and all other incidental charges such as curing, carriage to the testing laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor The testing fee for the cubes, if any, shall also be borne by the Contractor unless the contract provides otherwise.

A-1 Test procedure: A – 1.1 Mould: The mould shall be of size 15 cm x 15 cm x 15 cm for the maximum nominal size of

aggregate not exceeding 40 mm. For concrete with aggregate size more than 40 mm. Size of mould shall be specified by the Engineer, keeping in view the fact that the length of size of mould should be about four times the size of aggregate.

The moulds for test specimens shall be made of non-absorbent material and shall be

substantially strong enough to hold their form during the moulding of test specimens. They shall not vary from the standard dimensions by more than one percent. The moulds shall be so constructed that there is no leakage of water from the test specimen during moulding. All the cube moulds for particular site should, prior to use, by checked for accuracy in dimensions and geometric form and such test should at least be made once a year.

Each mould shall be provided with a base plate having a plane surface and made of non-

absorbent material. This plate shall be large enough in diameter to support the moulds properly without leakage. Glass plates not less than 6.5 mm thick or plain metal not less than 12 mm thick shall be used for this purpose. A similar plate shall be provided for covering the top surface of the test specimen when moulded.

Note Satisfactory moulds can be made from machine or steel castings, rolled metal

plastes or galvanized iron. A.1.2. Sample of Concrete: Sample of concrete for test specimen shall be taken at the mixer or in the case of ready

mixed concrete from the transportation vehicle discharge or as directed by the Engineer. Such samples shall be obtained by repeatedly passing a scoop or pail through the discharge stream of concrete. The sampling operation should be spread over evenly to the entire discharging operation. The samples thus obtained shall be transported to the place of moulding of the specimen. To counteract segregation, the concrete shall be mixed with a shovel until it is uniform in appearance. The location in the work of the batch of concrete thus sampled shall be noted for further reference. In case of paving concrete, samples shall be taken from the batch immediately after deposition of the sub-grade. At least five samples shall be taken from different portion of the pile and these samples shall be thoroughly mixed before being used to form the test specimen The sampling shall be spread as evenly possible through out the day. When wide changes occur during concreting, additional samples shall be taken if so desired by the Engineer.



A.1.3. Preparation of Test Specimens:

The interior surfaces of the mould and base plate shall be lightly oiled before the concrete is placed in the mould. The samples of concrete obtained as described under the test specimen shall be immediately moulded by one of the following methods as indicated below:-

When the job concrete is compacted by manual methods, the test specimen shall be moulded by placing the fresh concrete in the mould in three layers, each approximately one third of the volume of the mould. In placing each scoopful of concrete the scoop shall be moved around the top edge of the mould as the concrete there slides from it, in order to ensure a uniform distribution of concrete within the mould. Each layer shall be pounded 35 time with 16mm rod, 60 cm in length, bullet pointed at the lower end. The strokes shall be distributed in uniform manner over the cross section of the mould and shall penetrate into underlying layer. The bottom layer shall be pounded through its depth. After the top layer has been rodded, the surface of the concrete shall be struck off with a trowel and covered with a glass plate at least 6.5 mm thick or a machined plate. The whole process of moulding shall be carried out in a such a manner as to preclude the alteration of water- cement ratio of the concrete by loss of water, either by leakage from the bottom or everflow from the top of the mould.

When the job concrete is placed by vibration and the consistency of the concrete is such that the test specimens cannot be properly moulded by handrodding as described above, the specimens shall be vibrated to give a compaction corresponding to that of the job concrete. The fresh concrete shall be placed in mould in two layers, each approximately half the volume of the mould. In placing each scoopful of concrete the scoop shall be moved around the top edge of the mould as the concrete there slides from it, in order to ensure a symmetrical distribution of concrete within the mould. Either internal or external vibrators may be used. The vibration of each layer shall not be continued longer than is necessary to secure the required density. The internal vibrators shall vibrate only the layer to be compacted. In compacting the first layer, the vibrators shall not be allowed to rest on the bottom of the mould. In placing the concrete for top layer there should be no mortar loss during vibrations. After vibrating the second layer enough concrete shall be added to bring level above the top of the mould. The surface of the concrete shall then be struck off with a trowel and covered with a glass or steel plate as specified above. The whole process of moulding shall be carried out in such a manner as to preclude the alteration of water-cement ratio of the concrete by loss of water, either by leakage from the bottom or over flow from the top of the mould.

A 1-4 Curing and Storage of Specimen:

In order to ensure reasonably uniform temperature and moisture conditions during the first 24 hours for curing the specimen and to protect them from damage, moulds shall be covered with wet straw or gunny sacking and placed in a storage box so constructed and kept on the work site that its air temperature when containing concrete shall remain 22oC to 33oC , Other suitable means which provide such a temperature and moisture conditions may be used.

NOTE:- It is suggested that the storage box be made of 25 mm dressed tongued and grooved timber, well braced with battens to avoid warping. The box should be well painted inside and outside and should be provided with a hinged cover and padlock.

The test specimen shall be removed from the moulds at the end of 24 hours and stored in a moist condition at a temperature within 24oC to 30oC until the time of test. If storage in water is desired, a saturated lime solution shall be used.



A – 1.5 Testing: The specimens shall be tested in accordance with procedure as described below:-

(a) The tests shall be made at an age of concrete corresponding to that for which the strengths are specified.

(b) Compression tests shall be made immediately upon removal of the concrete test

specimen from the curing room i.e. the test specimen shall be loaded in damp condition. The dimensions of the test specimens shall be measured in mm accurate to 0.5 mm.

(c) The metal bearing plates of the testing machine shall be placed in contact with the

ends of the test specimens. Cushioning materials shall not be used. In the case of cubes, the test specimen shall be placed in the machine in such a manner that the load is applied to sides of the specimens as cast. An adjustable bearing block shall be used to transmit the load to the test specimen. The size of the bearing block shall be the same or slightly larger than that of test specimen. The upper or lower section of the bearing block shall be kept in motion as the head of the testing machine is brought to a bearing on the test specimen.

The load shall be applied axially without shock at the rate of approximately 140 kgs. per/ Sq.cm. per minute. The total load indicated by the testing machine at failure of test specimen shall be recorded and the unit compressive strength is calculated in kg per sq.cm. using the area computed from the measured dimensions of the test specimen. The type of failure and appearance of the concrete shall be noted.



ANNEXURE C

(Para 14)

SPECIFICATION FOR COATING OF PSC GIRDERS AND RCC SUBSTRUCTURES AS PER EPOXY PHENOLIC INTERPENETRATING POLYMER NETWORK (IPN) SYSTEM OF CBRI / ROORKEE.

1.0 MATERIALS

1.1 The coating materials shall meet the standards specified by various codes and

formulation setforth by the patentor.

1.2 A written certification shall be furnished to the Railways that properly identifies the number of each batch of coating material used in the work, material, quantity represented, date of manufacture, name and address of manufacturer and a statement that the coating material used must meet the requirements specified by CBRI/ Roorkee. Also proof of purchase from the CBRI’s approved manufacturer shall be submitted.

1.3 The coating material shall be stored in the manner as per recommendations of the manufacturer until ready for use. The coating material shall be used within the manufacturer’s written recommended shelf life.

1.4 When a representative sample of the material is to be sent to CBRI, Roorkee laboratory, then the sample shall be packaged in an airtight container and identified by batch number. The cost of testing will be borne by the Contractor.

2.0 SPECIFICATION OF COATING MATERIAL

Sl.No. Description Primer Coat Middle Coat Top Coat

1 Base Interpenetrating Polymer (Dpoxy phenolic)

Interpenetrating Polymer (Epoxy phenolic)

Interpenetrating Polymer (Aliphatic Polyurethane)

2 Pot life 1 hour for 2 lt. Mix

1 hour for 2 lt. Mix.

1 hour for 2 ltr. Mix

3 Curing Air curing Air curing Air curing

4 Colour Clear or as specified by the Engineer in charge

Yellow / Grey or as specified by the Engineer in charge


5 Shelf Life One year in tightly sealed container

One year in tightly sealed container


6 Dry film thickness

55064 microns 90-100 microns per coat

40-50 microns per coat



7 Coverage 5-6 sq.mt./lt. (5.5 sq.m./lt. Average)

4-5 sq.mt./lt (4.5 sq.mt./lt Average)

6-7 sq.mt./lt(6.5 sq.mt./lt Average)

8 Recommended No. of coats

One One One

9 Recoatibility Subsequent coat shall be applied after 6 hours to 7 days

4 hours to 7 days. Ensure the surface is dust and deposit free prior to application

NA

10 Mix proportion Base:1 PBV*/ Curing Agent: 1 PBV*

* PBV parts by volume

Base:1 PBV*/ Curing Agent: 1 PBV*


Base:1 PBV*/ Curing Agent: 1 PBV* * PBV parts by volume

2.1 Tensile strength: Minimum tensile strength of the coating must be 15 N/mm2 and it should be determined as per ASTM D-2370-73.

2.2 Elongation: Minimum elongation of the coating must be 15% and it should be determined as per ASTM D –2370-73.

2.3 Specific permeability: The maximum value must be 0.15 mg/cm2/mm/24 hr. and it should be determined as per ASTM D-1653-74.

2.4 Adhesion with concrete: The minimum adhesion with concrete by pullout method must be 2.5N/mm2 and it should be determined as per BS-3900-E-2-70.

2.5 For consumption calculation of various coats (primer, middle and top) average values of the specified coverage shall be adopted.

3.0 SURFACE PREPARAITON

3.3.1 In order to have better bonding, the concrete surface should be clean, dry and

mechanically sound. The surface of the concrete structure to be coated shall be cleaned of all traces of mould oil, laitance, salt deposits by mechanised means. Finally, the surface should be washed with clean water jet to remove any salt deposits. The surface should be dried. All the productions should be removed and cracks, joints should be seated with IPNet putty as per Central Building Research Institute (CBRI), Rookee’s recommendations.



4.0 APPLICATION OF COATING

4.1 Mix the base and curing agent in prescribed proportion by volume thoroughly for 5-10

minutes and allow it to remain in a container for five minutes.

4.2 A primer coating of IPN polymer (transparent) shall be applied to the cleaned surface after surface preparation within the pot lift.

4.3 After air curing, intermediate and top coating should be applied with time lag as per

manufacturer’s specification.

4.4 The coating shall be applied by aidess spray or other approved means.

5.0 COATING THICKNESS

5.1 The minimum total thickness of all coats (primer coat + middle coat + top coat) must be

200 + 15 microns.

6.0 MEASUREMENT OF COATING THICKNESS

6.1 During the application of IP Net systems clean abraded steel plates of approximately 10

cm x 8 cm shall be adhered to the concrete surface by means of putty / adhesive in such a way that these can be detached. IP Net system can be applied over the plates in the course of application over the concrete surface. Dry film thickness (DFT) can be measured using magnetic electrometer. DFT measurement should be done at every 500 to 600 sqm area or as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.

7.0 COATING CONTINUITY

7.1 The coating shall be visually inspected after curing for continuity of the coating and shall

be free from holes, voids, contamination, cracks and damaged areas discernible to the unaided eye.

8.0 PERMISSIBLE COATING DAMAGE AND REPAIR OF DAMAGED COATING

8.1 All coating damage shall be repaired with patching material by the contractor at his own

cost.

8.2 Repaired areas shall have a minimum coating thickness of 200 + 15 microns for prestressed girders and sub structures and a minimum coating thickness of 105 + 10 microns for parapet walls.

8.3 Repair of damaged coating shall be done in accordance with the patching material

manfacturer’s written recommendations within the accepted rates.

9.0 INSPECTIONS

The official representing the Railway’s shall have free entry at all times to the parts of

the contractor’s works. The contractor shall afford the Railway’s representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. Site visits of CBRI/ Roorkee scientists must be arranged for 2-3 days at the start of the application work and 3 visits during total period of application i.e. total 4 visits, including submission of test reports.



10.0 TESTING OF MATERIALS

Following tests may be performed on the coating materials at CBRI/ Roorkee testing

laboratory by the contractor and testing report should be furnished to the MTP (Railways).

i) Tensile strength, N/ mm2

ii) Elongation, %

iii) Specific permeability, mg / cm2/ mm/24 hours.

iv) Adhesion with concrete, N/ mm2

11.0 CERTIFICATION AND TEST REPORT

Railways shall be furnished with, at the time of completion, written certification that samples representing each lot have been tested as directed in this specification and the requirements have been met. A report of the test results shall be furnished to the Railways.



SPECIFICATIONS FOR BORED PILE FOUNDATIONS



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR BORED PILE FOUNDATIONS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 The bored pile foundations shall be of cast-in-situ RCC solid bored piles. The

Construction of the bored piles shall generally conform to IS:2911 (Part –1/ Section 2-1979 as per Railway design and the following specifications. Technical Specifications for Bridge Works will apply in general.

1.2 The mix of the concrete for the piles shall be “Controlled Concrete” of mix M 35 except

where otherwise indicated in the Drawing. An additional 10% quantity of cement shall be added to the designed requirement of cement for any mix adopted where the piling work is to be done in water. The concreting under water shall be done in accordance with the specifications i.e. IS:2911 (Part –I/ Section-2 latest edition).

1.3 After reaching the level considered for founding the piles, the Engineer-in-charge may

require the contractor, if there is any doubt in the opinion of the Engineer as to the exact nature of the strata met with, to perform a standard penetration test if soil is encountered and crushing strength test if rock is encountered as per relevant IS Specifications. The Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to decide whether or not and where the above test shall be conducted. The contractor, if required by the Engineer-in-charge shall repeat the test, at different depths till the level of foundations is finally decided by the Engineer. The rate quoted by the tenderer for the piles shall be deemed to exclude the cost of the above tests to be done as per the Employer'’ requirements and extra payment for any such additional SPTs ordered shall be made under the relevant Schedule or as a Non-Schedule item as the case may be.

The piles will have to be founded on hard rocks/ coarse sand / other suitable soil as per the direction of the Engineer-in-charge. Minimum anchorage in sheet rock should be 0.50 Metre and the rate quoted shall include this also. Additional anchorage in hard / sheet rocks over this minimum of 0.50 metre shall also be provided, if ordered by the Engineer-in-charge. Payment for such extra depth of anchorage shall be done. Where hard rock is not met with, the Engineer-in-charge may at his sole discretion order that the pile be founded on coarse sand strata or any other strata as decided upon. In such cases, no recovery shall be made for not having provided 0.50 metre minimum anchorage in rock. The top level of the pile cap will be decided by the Engineer-in-charge, in cases of piles for Bridge works in streams, sea etc depending on the low water level and bed level. The spoils arising out of the borings shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge within the quoted rates.

1.4 The pile shall be extended upto 150mm height into the pile cap except where Otherwise

stipulated. The weak concrete above the extended portion shall be cutoff. The reinforcement of piles shall project into pile cap to the required bond length to develop necessary designed strength in the reinforcement. The level of the pile cap shall be decided by the Engineer at the time of execution of the work. In the portion of the pile which will be embedded in pile cap there shall be no laitance or weak concrete which should be ensured by the contractor before progressing pile caps above the cut off level.



1.5 The control of alignment of piles should be within the tolerances specified in Para 7 of IS:2911 Part I Sec.2 (with latest amendments). For large diameter bored piles the permissible positional deviation for bored piles should not be greater than 7.5cm. for piles upto 750mm diameter and not greater than 10cm. for piles of 1800mm in diameter at the level of the bottom of pile cap. For pile diameter in range 750mm to 1800mm tolerances may be interpolated linearly. The deviation from vertical should not be more than 1.5% and all works accepted within the above tolerances shall be measured and paid for at the quoted rates. While cutting the soil / rock for construction of pile frequent checks should be made to satisfy the Engineer-in-chare that the pile to be concreted will be within the above tolerances. In cases where these tolerances are exceeded, steps should be taken by additional cutting to achieve the above tolerances. Cost of any additional cutting involved in rectification shall be borne by the contractor.

1.6 Level marks shall be put accurately on each pile immediately after it is installed. If any

pile shows subsequently a tendency to heave up due to installation of other piles or due to any other reason, the same shall be reinstalled firmly without having heaving tendency in a suitable manner as approved by the Engineer-in-charge, without any extra cost.

1.7 If any pile during driving or boring has deviated from the designed position or from the

verticality or if the allowable load of the pile is not obtainable as per the design all these facts shall be reported promptly to the Engineer-in-Charge during the execution of work with suggestion from the Contractor regarding adequate corrective measure. The Engineer-in-charge shall consider the suggestions of the Contractor and shall give necessary directions for the corrective measures which will be done by the Contractor at his own cost and risk. If certain piles are rejected by the Engineer-in-charge on account of their improper location, the contractor shall pull out the rejected piles and reinstall the piles with proper workmanship and materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge without any extra cost. The Engineer-in-charge may allow the rejected piles to be left in their places and additional piles may be installed to take up the safe working load of the rejected piles, without any extra cost including for the liner if he considers it feasible and correct. If any such change involves additional expenditure due to increased size of pile cap etc., the same will be borne by the Contractor including the cost involved in the extra quantity of cement and steel used in such changes. In a group of two or more piles, piles of same diameter and size and same load carrying capacity shall be installed. The distance between centres of such piles shall be governed by IS 2911 (Part I – Section 2) 1985. In case any pile is to be driven closer than this spacing, the safe working load of the pile will have to be suitably reduced.

1.8 No payment will be made for rejected piles as also the reinforcement steel and the MS

liners provided for the rejected piles.

1.9 In the finishing of pile heads, the clearances of the reinforcement in the pile cap and the

keying of the pile head into the pile cap shall be as given in IS 2911 Part-I Section 2 with latest amendments. While inserting the reinforcement cage, care shall be taken to provide extra length so as to enable interlacing with the cappiing slab.

1.10 The stiffeners for reinforcement should be tack welded to the main reinforcement and

binding wire / tack welding can be used elsewhere. It should, however, be ensured that the reinforcement cage is done in such a manner that there is no likelihood of the rods getting displaced.

1.11 When the tube or bore has reached its final depth, it shall be free from any foreign matter before the placing of the reinforcement and concrete filling for the pile, is started. The reinforcement for the pile shall be carefully placed in position and concreting then started.



1.12 Use of drilling mud (Bentonite) in stabilizing the sides of the bore holes is permitted wherever necessary. The consistency of Bentonite suspension shall be as per IS 2911 (Part –1/Sec.2). The Contractor cannot claim any extra cost on account of the use of Bentonite for piling.

1.13 Removal of obstruction if any met with during pile driving or boring shall also be done

by the Contractor. No extra payment will be made for this work.

1.14 Under water concreting shall be done as per Para 14.2 of IS 456-2000 and IS 2911 read

with Para 415 on “Tremie concreting” in Indian Railways Bridge Manual. Concrete is to be placed in the pile only by Tremie method ensuring that tip of the Tremie is atleast 500mm below the top of concrete at any time. The concrete should be coherent, rich in cement (not less than 370 kg/ m3 ) and of a slump between 150 and 180mm. When concreteing is carried out under water, a temporary casing should be installed to the full depth of the borehole or 2 Metres into non-collapsible stratum so that fragments of ground cannot drop from side of the hole into concrete as it is placed. The temporary casing may not be required except near the top when concreting under Drilling mud (Bentonite slurry). The Tremie shall be water tight throughout its length and have a hopper attached at its head by a water tight connector. The Tremie pipe shall be large enough in relation to the size of aggregate. For 20mm aggregate, the Tremie pipe shall be of dia not less than 200mm Larger size aggregates, shall not be used. The top of concrete in a pile shall be brought above cut-off level to permit removal of all laitance and weak concrete before capping and to ensure good concrete at the cut off level for proper embedment into pile cap. No payment will be made for providing overflow concrete or scum concrete beyond cut off level. The depth of over flow will be decided by the Engineer in charge. The pile cut off level shall be 150mm above bottom of pile cap except where otherwise stipulated. Where BOQ provides for separate payment for cement used in pile work, the quantity of Concrete shall be calculated on the spot and rechecked with the actual quantity of concrete used. The quantity of concrete used as jointly recorded by the representatives of the Contractor and the Engineer-in-charge, shall form the basis for determining the quantity of cement used. The concrete shall be machine mixed.

1.15 The rate quoted by the contractor for the piles shall be an all inclusive rate including amongst others bailing out water, strutting, shoring, empty boring, using bentonite while doing boring etc., where necessary and making working platforms, with either earthern bund or temporary structural steel platform as required for piling in difficult conditions, the cost of labour and any special arrangements to be made by the contractor (ii) drilling, excavation through all strata of every description including stiff clay, shales, boulder filling and soft decomposed disintegrated fragmented or hard rock etc.

1.16 The rate quoted by the contractor for the piles shall, unless specified otherwise in BOQ,

include cost of all materials excluding supply and usage of cement, supply and provision of steel for reinforcement, application of anticorrosive treatment to reinforcement bars and supply and fabrication of MS sheet for liners but including all lead and lifts, labour, tools, plant, machinery, equipment, consumables etc., complete. Payment will be made for cement, steel reinforcement, anticorrosive treatment to steel reinforcement and MS sheet liners as per items provided under relevant Schedule.

1.17 Payment for cutting the RCC pile weak concrete up to a maximum height of 300mm

only will be made separately under relevant item. Payment for the pile concrete will be made from the bottom of the foundation to the bottom of pile cap including 150mm or as indicated in the Drawing for projection portion in pile cap. No payment will be made for weak concrete portion of piles. No extra payment will be made for interlacing of the reinforcement of the Pile with Pile Cap slab.



1.18 It should also be noted that where applicable utmost care and precautions be taken while operating the machinery in the electrified territory to ensure safety of the workmen from the moving electric train traffic in the section.

1.19 The quoted rate for piles is inclusive of placing the M.S. liners wherever necessary. But

the cost of liner will be paid separately under relevant item of the schedule.

1.20 Where applicable sequence of Piling in a pile group shall be as indicated in Para 413 of

Indian Railways Bridge Manual.

2.0 PROVIDING MS LINERS FOR PILES

2.1 MS liners shall be provided for all the piles from minimum 30cm inside hard strata for

the heights as decided by the Engineer-in-charge. In cases where cavities are encountered the liners should extend below further, to depths as decided by the Engineer.

2.2 Except where otherwise shown in the BOQ, the thickness of the liner shall be not less than 5mm except for the bottom length of 1.2 M or such increased length as the Engineer may decide where the thickness shall be 10mm.

2.3 The rate quoted by the contractor for liner work shall include fabrication by cutting to

sizes, bending, grinding, welding and placing in position and cutting off the liners at the required cut off level. The rate shall include all lead and lifts, expenses towards labor and machinery deployed for the work, cost of all consumables stores required and special arrangements to be made.

2.4 Payment will be made on the basis of theoretical weight of MS plate for the finished

liner. No payment shall be made for the portion of liner above the safe cut off level, removed by gas cutting. There is no objection to such surplus liner pieces being rewelded for reuse in piling work.

3.0 PILE LOAD TEST

3.1 Either one trial pile or one or more working piles, as decided by the Engineer-in-charge of the work, shall be tested for a load not less than one and a half time the estimated safe load carrying capacity of the pile. The pile test shall be carried out in accordance with the Clauses D.3 and D.4 of IS 2911 Part IV (Latest edition).

3.2 Payment for the test of the pile or group of piles shall be made to the contractor only when the test is found to be satisfactory. For the tests, which are found unsatisfactory or which are not completed due to any reason whatsoever, no payment shall be made

3.3 The test shall be considered satisfactory if the safe load from the vertical load test with

settlement not exceeding 12 mm works out to be not less than one and a half times safe bearing capacity of the pile and the behaviour of pile or pile group during the period of testing does not disclose any defects.

3.4 If the pile or the pile group does not satisfy the above conditions for accepting the same

as satisfactory the corrective measures shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. These corrective measures may include provision of additional piles. If in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, it is necessary to reject the pile and provide entirely additional piles as corrective measures, the contractor shall do so. If the Engineer in charge considers it necessary to extract any rejected piles, the same shall be extracted and fresh pile reinstalled in the place The additional expenditure incurred by the Contractor for such corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor himself.



3.5 (i) The contractor shall furnish on completion of load test the results of the test

showing separately the skin friction and point resistance. The safe load shall be assessed as the least of the following:

- 2/3 of the final load at which the total settlement attains a value of 12mm.

- 2/3 of the final load at which the net settlement increases to 6mm.

ii) The contractor, for the purposes of the above test, shall make his own loading platform and erect the same on the pile to be tested. He shall also make all arrangements for the test load. No materials will be issued for the purpose by the Employer. The testing shall be done under the supervision of the Engineers-in-charge maintaining proper records as required in terms of the relevant IS code for loading jointly signed by the contractor’s representative and the Engineer-in-charge’s representative. Pile load test scheme should be submitted by the contractor and approval of the Engineer-in-charge taken before starting the testing. If the testing is to be carried out near an electrified section, necessary safety precautions should be taken while executing the work and testing.

iii) The rate for load test shall be an all inclusive one per each pile tested. This includes all the arrangements necessary to ensure satisfactory completion of the load test, erection and removal of platform, all measures to ensure stability of the platform, trimming of pile and arranging of all tools, plant and machinery required for the same including all lead and lifts. The rate should also include submission of final test report including the technical interpretation of the load test. It should be submitted in two copies.

iv) When a pile is taken up for testing, work should not be done on other piles in that group till testing is completed and the Engineer gives clearance based on the results of the pile load test.

v) The rates for tests, include arranging of necessary kentledge, RS joists, sand bags etc., required for loading the platform for successful testing of the pile or group of piles and removing the same from the site of work after the test is completed and clearing the site to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge and no extra payment shall be made on this account. The Employer will not supply any staging materials free of cost and the contractor has to make his own arrangements for erecting temporary staging.

vi) The contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any claim or obligations arising out of any damage to structure or any injury to any person / persons due to piling work done by him.

4.0 PAYMENT FOR PILES

Where directed by the Employer-in-charge, the contractor has to cast the test pile and then only take up the balance piles. The contractor has to do load testing on either test pile or one of the working piles as directed for assessing the depth of termination of pile. The decision of the Engineer-in-charge is final and binding on the contractor on whether casting of test pile is required or not. At the first stage, payment will be made for the working piles as well as test pile at the rate of 75% of the accepted rate. Once the piles are cast to the depths finalised based on satisfactory results of load test on trial pile / working pile, payment will be made for the piles at the accepted rate fully. If it is found necessary to conduct subsequent load test on other working piles also, payment will be made for such piles at the rate of 75% of the accepted rate only. After successful completion of load test and satisfactory results as prescribed by the code are obtained the balance 25% payment will be released for all the piles cast. All the



preliminary arrangements required for load test such as chipping of concrete, casting of pile cap to required size etc., will be covered by the quoted rate.

5.0 PILE CAPS

5.1 The minimum embedment of cast-in-situ concrete piles into pile cap shall be 150mm. Any defective concrete at the head of the completed pile shall be cut away and made good with new concrete. The clear cover between the bottom reinforcement in pile cap from the top of pile shall be not less than 25mm. The reinforcement in the pile shall be exposed for full anchorage length to permit it to be adequately bonded with the pile cap. Exposing such length shall be done carefully so as to avoid damaging the rest of the pile. In cases where the pile cap is to be laid on ground a levelling course of M 15 or the stipulated Nominal mix concrete 100mm thick shall be provided. Pile caps shall be of reinforced concrete of minimum grade M 30 unless otherwise stated in the Drawings / BOQ or directed by the Engineer. A minimum offset of 150mm shall be provided beyond the outer face of the outermost pile in the group. The permissible tolerances for pile caps are as under:

a) Variation in dimension 50mm - 10mm

b) Misplacement from specified position in plan 5mm c) Surface irregularities measured with 3m straight edge 5mm



SPECIFICATION FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDERS / SLABS



PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDERS / SLABS

1.0 GENERAL

1.1 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS

Provisions in Concrete Bridge Code (Second Revision 1997) with all upto date Correction Slips should be strictly followed in all Prestressed Concrete Works in Bridge Construction. The Code gives reference to IS Codes which govern different aspects of materials and workmanship. Where required by the contract Document to make out the Design and Drawings for any PSC elements, the Contractor should carryout the design strictly meeting the requirements indicated in the contract Document and the provisions in the relevant sections of Concrete Bridge Code and get the Design and Drawings accepted by the Engineer-in-charge.

1.2 Methodology Statement

a) The Contractor will submit a ‘methodology statement’ if not already furnished with the bid at tendering stage itself and have it approved by the Engineer-in-charge before start of work. This statement shall include:

i) Sequencing of superstructure work, vis-à-vis the substructure work ii) PERT chart to fit in with overall duration within targeted completion dates iii) Requirement and arrangements proposed in base depot / precasting yard including

form work designs and details. iv) Scheme for transport of precast elements. v) Girder erection scheme including prestressing, grouting, alignment etc. vi) Scheme for providing accessories / appurtenances.

b) Before commencement of work, Contractor will discuss with the Engineer-in-charge and finalise the details listed above. If any changes in the scheme are called for, the Contractor will promptly bring such necessity to the notice of Engineer-in-charge and give his proposals in writing. They will be discussed and finalised in a workmanlike manner. Any delay and cost involved will be to contractor’s account unless such change has been called for due to any major change in design or scope of the work or change of policy of the Employer.

c) No extra is payable for preparation and finalisation of the Methodology/ Methods Statement and discussions mentioned above.

2. MATERIALS

2.1 Cement, Aggregate, Water and Admixtures shall conform respectively to Clauses

4.1,4.2, 4.3 and 4.4 of Concrete Bridge Code. Prestressing Steel shall be any one of the following conforming to IS Codes referred to in Clause 4.6.1 of Concrete Bridge Code a) Plain Hard drawn Steel wire b) Uncoated Stress relieved strand c) High Tensile Steel bar d) Uncoated stress relieved low relaxation strand



All prestressing steel shall be free from splits, harmful scratch, surface flaws, rough, jagged and imperfect edges and other defects likely to impair its use in Prestressed Concrete works. Coupling units and other similar fixtures used in conjunction with the wires or bars shall have an ultimate tensile strength of not less than the individual strength of the wires or bars being joined.

2.2 Use of admixtures such as superplasticisers for concrete may be made with the approval of the Engineer. Manufacturer should provide satisfactory evidence that such admixtures do not have adverse effect on the properties of concrete or mortar particularly with respect to strength, volume change & durability and has no deleterious effect on the reinforcement. Admixtures used should conform to the provisions of IS 9103. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing Calcium chloride shall not be used in structural concrete containing reinforcement, prestressing tendons or other embedded metal. Also admixture containing Cl and SO3 ions or nitrates shall not be used. Admixture based on thiocyaniate can promote corrosion and hence is prohibited.

2.3 Handling and storage of different types of materials shall be as per IS 4082as

described in Clause 4.7 of Concrete Bridge Code.

3 CONCRETE

3.1 Minimum Grade of Concrete etc.

Minimum Grades of Concrete for prestessed concrete work in terms of Correction Slip No.8 dated 15.02.2006 to Concrete Bridge Code are as under. Other relevant requirements have also been listed below, all as given in C.S.No.8.

Environment Min. Grade of Concrete

Specified characteristic strength at 28 days N/mm3

Min. Cementitious material content Kg/m3 *

Maximum water cement ratio

Mild M-35 35 350 0.45

Moderate M-35 35 400 0.40

Severe M-45 45 430 0.40

Very Severe M-50 50 440 0.35

Extreme M-50 50 440 0.35

For under-water concrete 10% extra cement is to be added.

3.2 Concrete Mix Proportioning:

Since PSC works require Concrete Mix of Grade above M-20, Nominal Mix Concrete is not permitted. Only Design Mix Concrete is to be used. The mix is to be designed to produce the grade of Concrete having the required workability, durability and required minimum characteristic strength. The procedure given in IS 10262 is to be followed for mix design.



3.3 Production and Control of Concrete

a) Provisions in Clause 5.6 of Concrete Bridge Code are to be adhered to on supervision

at all stages of production including batching of cocrete, ensuring proper quality and uniformity in the materials used, mixing and controlling workability of the concrete.

b) Unless, specified otherwise, equipment for production of concrete shall be as under: i) Batch type concrete mixer diesel or electric operated with a minimum size of 200

litres, automatic water measuring system and integral weigher (Hydraulic/ Pneumatic type). However it will be preferable to use Concrete batching and mixing plant fully automatic with minimum capacity of 15 cubic metres per hour.

All measuring devices shall be periodically checked for accuracy and shall be within the range of + 3% for measurement of cement, water, aggregate and admixtures.

3.4 Construction Joints

Construction joints shall be avoided as far as possible and in no case the location of such joints shall be changed or increased from those shown in the drawings, except with the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. Annexure A gives the detailed specifications for construction joints.

4.0 FALSE WORK AND FORM WORK

4.1 Provisions contained in Clause 6 of Concrete Bridge Code shall apply. Clause 6.1

gives details of the requirements on False work regarding design, detailing of connections, loads for which to be designed, materials and false work plans.

4.2 Clause 6.2 of Concrete Bridge Code relates to the Formwork and refers to the requirements on strength of form work, finishing, clearing and Treatment of forms. Moulds for Pretension works shall be sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand without distortion the effects of placing and compacting concrete as well as those of prestressing in the case of manufacture by individual mould process where the prestressing tendon is supported by the mould before transfer.

4.3 The formwork shall be constructed with Precamber to the soffit to allow for settlement / deflection of the form work. Pre-camber to allow for deflection of form work shall be in addition to that indicated for the permanent structure in the drawings. Where centering trusses or launching trusses are adopted for casting of superstructure, the joints of such trusses whether welded, rivetted or bolted should be checked thoroughly periodically. The various members of the trusses should also be periodically examined for alignment, level, deformation, corrosion, loose joint etc. The formwork shall be made to produce a finished concrete true to shape, line, levels and dimensions as shown in the drawings subject to permissible tolerances. Unless otherwise specified, fillets of sizes 25mm shall be provided at sharp corners. Where ties are used they shall be with HDPE Sheathing for ease of removal after concreting. Sheathing shall be grouted with cement mortar of same strength as concrete.



4.4 For slip or moving form, the rate of slipping or moving of the form work should be designed for each individual case taking into account various parameters including the grade of concrete, concrete strength, concrete temperature, ambient temperature, concrete admixtures etc. In the case of segmented construction, the concrete mix shall be normally designed for developing high early strength so that the form work can be released as early as possible.

4.5 The Stripping time for concrete works under different situations will be varying from 24 hours to 7 days with time for removal of props from 7 days to 21 days as detailed in Clause 6.4.1 of Concrete Bridge Code. These periods are applicable for Ordinary Portland Cement and for other types of cement they should be suitably modified.

4.6 (i) Immediately after the removal of forms, exposed bars or bolts, if any, shall be cut

inside the concrete member to a depth of at least 50mm below the surface of the concrete and the resulting holes filled with cement mortar. All fins caused by form joints, all cavities produced by the removal of form ties and all other holes and depressions, honeycomb spots, broken edges or corners, and other defects, shall be thoroughly cleaned, saturated with water, and carefully pointed and rendered true with mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of concrete that is being finished and of as dry a consistency as is possible to use. Adequate pressure shall be applied in filling and pointing to ensure thorough filling in all voids. Surfaces which have been pointed shall be kept moist for a period of twenty four hours. Special pre-packaged proprietary mortars shall be used where appropriate or where specified in the drawing or by the Engineer.

ii) All construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and free from any mortar and concrete. Expansion joint filler shall be left exposed for its full length with clean and true edges.

iii) Immediately on removal of forms, the concrete work shall be examined by the Engineer before any defects are made good.

a) The work that has sagged or contains honeycombing to an extent detrimental to structural safety or architectural appearance shall be rejected.

b) Surface defect of a minor nature may be accepted. On acceptance of such work by the Engineer, the same shall be rectified as directed by the Engineer.

iv) After making the necessary repairs, the surface should be finished with wood float so

as to be free from streaks, discolourations or other imperfections. Plastering will not be permitted and steel trowel shall not be used to finish the surfaces.

5) TOLERANCES FOR FINISHED CONCRETE BRIDGE STRUCTURES:

Specifications in Clause 6.5 of Concrete Bridge Code will apply.

6) REINFORCEMENT – ORDINARY

6.1 The types of steel that can be used should be as stipulated in Clause 4.5 of Concrete

Bridge Code.



6.2 For stipulations relating to straightening, cutting, bending, coating of reinforcement when used in severe and very severe exposure conditions, placing including Tolerances, and welding / mechanical connections, Clause 7.1 of Concrete Bridge Code may be referred to.

7.0 PRESTRESSING TENDONS

7.1 Specifications relating to straightening, coating of Tendons under Severe and very

severe exposure conditions, cutting, jointing and arrangement of Tendons and their positioning shall be as stipulated respectively in Clauses 7.2.1 to 7.2.5 of Concrete Bridge Code.

7.2 Tensioning the Tendons

Provisions in Clause 7.2.6.1 should be strictly adhered to. The order in which the wires

or cables forming a part of prestressing tendons are to be stressed should be in such a way that stresses permitted are not exceeded at any stage. The tensioning of each Tendon should be such as to cause as little eccentric stress as possible and it should be ensured that symmetrical tendons are successively stressed.

7.3 Tensioning Apparatus

Pre or Post Tensioning may be carried out by Hydraulic Jacks or mechanical apparatus.

The type of Tensioning apparatus shall satisfy the following requirements as detailed in Clause 7.2.6.2 of Concrete Bridge Code.

i) Shall be such that a controlled force can be applied without inducing dangerous

secondary stresses, torsional force etc.

ii) The means of attachment of the Tendon to the tensioning device shall be safe and

secure.

iii) Load measuring device should be incorporated in the Tensioning apparatus. Facilities

shall be provided to measure extension of the Tendons and movement of the Tendons in the gripping device.

iv) The temporary gripping device shall be such that in a tensile test, the wire or wires fixed

by them would break before failure of the grip itself.

v) The releasing device shall be so designed that during the period between tensioning

and release, the tension in the prestressing elements is fully maintained by positive means such as external anchorage.

7.4 Pre Tensioning

Provisions in Clause 7.2.6.3 of Concrete Bridge Code will apply with regard to Straight

Tendons and Deflected Tendons. In the individual mould system, the moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to provide the reaction to the prestressing force without distortion.

7.5 Post Tensioning



a) Provisions in Clause 7.2.6.4 of Concrete Bridge Code will apply. Where wires, strands

or bars in a tendon are not stressed simultaneously, spacers shall be used as recommended by the system manufacturer. Sheathing can be Cold Rolled Cold Annealed (CRCA) Mild Steel intended for mechanical treatment and surfacing refining. Alternatively, if found cost effective, High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Sheathing can be used. The anchorage device should be capable of holding without more than nominal slip the prestresing Tendon subject to a load midway between the proposed initial prestressing load and the ultimate strength of the Tendon. The anchoring device shall be strong enough to resist the force equal to atleast the breaking strength of the Tendon it anchors and transfer the entire force from the tendon to the concrete without inducing undesirable secondary or local stresses.

b) Prestressing tendons shall be accurately located and maintained in position, both

vertically and horizontally, as per drawings. Tendons shall be so arranged that they have a smooth profile without sudden bends or kinks.

The locationing of prestressed cables shall be such as to facilitate easy placement and vibration of concrete in between the tendons. High capacity tendon shall be used to reduce the number of cables thereby eliminating the necessity of grouping. The selected profiles of the tendons shall be such that their anchorages are not located in the top deck surface. Where two or more rows of cables have to be used, the cables shall be vertically in line to enable easy flow of concrete. The clear vertical and horizontal distances between any two cables shall in no case be less than 100mm anywhere along the length of the superstructure. Where precast segments are used, the clear distance shall be atleast 150mm.

c) Sheathing shall be placed in correct position and profile by providing suitable ladders

and spacers. Such ladders may be provided at intervals of approximately 1.0m. Sheathing shall be tied rigidly with such ladders / space bars so that they do not get disturbed during concreting. Sheathing in which the permanent tendon will not be in place during concreting shall have a temporary tendon inserted or shall be stiffened by some other method to be approved by the Engineer. The temporary tendon shall be pulled out before threading the permanent tendon into place by a special threading machine or other contrivance.

d) Where possible, tendons shall not be placed until immediately prior to stressing. Tendons shall be handled with care to avoid damage or contamination, to either the tendon or the sheathing. Any tendon damaged or contaminated shall be cleaned or replaced.

Provision should be made to cater for an additional prestresing force of 15% of the Design prestressing force, for easy installation of prestressing steel at a later date.

i) Post tensioning system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions and proven procedures. Manufacturer’s recommendations regarding end block details and special arrangements in anchorage zones applicable to their particular system should be observed.



ii) Details and positions of ducts: Ferrous metal is recommended for duct material. Aluminium should not be used. Metal ducts must be such that destructive galvanic action on duct and tendon will not occur.

iii) As the alignment and position of ducts within the member are critical, short kinks and wobbles shall be avoided. The trajectory of ducts shall not depart from the curve or straight lines shown in the drawing by more than 1 in 240. The cable position shall not deviate by more than 5 mm from the designed trajectory vertically. The area and alignment of ducts shall be such that tendons are free to move within them and there shall be sufficient area left out to permit free passage of grout.

iv) Any slack in the prestressing tendon shall first be taken up by applying a small tension. For arriving at the extent of correction and the actual elongation, the procedure given in IS:1343 shall be followed. The rate of application of load shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedure for post tensioning.

Slip must be measured at each end and the extension for the total length.

g) Tensioning of the prestressing steel shall not be commenced until all the necessary tests of the concrete cubes manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the same conditions have been carried out and the results found satisfactory.

7.6 Stressing

a) As described in Clause 7.2.6.5 of Concrete Bridge Code, the tensioning of prestressing

tendons shall be carried out in a manner that will induce a smooth and even rate of increase of stress in the Tendons. All wires / strands of a tendon shall be stressed simultaneously. The placement of cables or ducts and the order of stressing and grouting shall be so arranged that the prestressing steel when tensioned and grouted does not affect adversely the adjoining ducts. The force induced in the prestressing tendon shall be determined by means of gauges attached to the tensioning apparatus as well as by measuring the extension of the steel and relating it to the stress – strain curve. The variation between the two measurements shall be within + 5%. In measuring the extension of prestressing steel, any slip which may occur in the gripping device shall be taken into consideration. The transfer of the prestress shall be carried out gradually so as to avoid large difference of tension between the wires in a tendon, severe eccentricities of prestressing force and the sudden application of stress to the concrete. Prestressing steel and anchorage shall be protected against corrosion during the prestressing operators.

b) Safety Precautions during Tensioning

These are applicable for both pre-tensioning and post tensioning operations.

i) Care shall be taken during tensioning to ensure the safety of all persons in the vicinity.

ii) Jacks shall be secured in such a manner that they will be held in position, should they

lose their grip on the tendons.

iii) No person shall be allowed to stand behind the jacks or close to the line of the tendons

while tensioning is in progress.



iv) The operations of the jacks and the measurement of the elongation and associated operations shall be carried out in such a manner and from such a position that the safety of all concerned is ensured.

v) A safety barrier shall be provided at both ends to prevent any tendon, which might become loose from recoiling unchecked.

vi) During actual tensioning operation, warning sign shall be displayed at both ends of the

tendon. No person will stand behind in line with jacks while tendon / wire are being stressed.

vii) After prestressing, concrete shall neither be drilled nor any portion cut nor chipped away

nor disturbed, without express approval of the Engineer.

viii) No welding shall be permitted on or near tendons nor shall any heat be applied to tendons. Any tendon which has been affected by welding, weld spatter or heat shall be rejected.

7.7 TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE OF PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS

i) Precast girders or elements shall be transported in an upright position. Points of support

and the direction of reactions with respect to the girder shall approximately be the same during transportation, and storage as when the girder is placed in final position.

ii) When members are to be stacked, they shall be firmly supported at such bearing

positions as will ensure that the stresses induced in them are always less than the permissible design stresses. Further, inclined side supports shall be provided at the ends and along the length of a precast girder to prevent lateral movements or instability.

iii) Care shall be taken during storage, hoisting and handling of the precast units to prevent

their cracking or being otherwise damaged. Units worked or damaged by improper storing or handling or transport shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

8 TRANSPORTATION, PLACEMENT, COMPACTION & CURING OF CONCRETE

The provisions contained in Clause 8.1 on Transportation, 8.2 on Placing, 8.3 on compaction and 8.4 on Curing of Concrete in Concrete Bridge Code should be complied with by the Contractor. If Ready Mix Concrete is used, and cast-in-situ concreting is done, special care should be exercised in transportation of concrete. Where placement of concrete in situ is done by mechanical means, proper arrangements will be required to be done such as Concrete Pumps, Tower Cranes, Hoisting lifts etc. A record shall be kept of the time and date of placing of the concrete in each portion. In case of Pre-stressed Concrete Girders / slabs etc., Form Vibrators shall be used as addition to internal vibrators. When vibration has to be applied externally the design of form work and the disposition of vibrators should receive special attention to avoid surface blemishes. The curing of concrete should be done for a minimum period of 14 days by either system of Moist curing or by use of curing compounds as acceptable to the Engineer in charge.



9.0 SAMPLING, STRENGTH TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

9.1 Clause 8.7 of Concrete Bridge Code, which lays down the detailed specifications should be adhered to in full with regard to frequency of sampling. The Acceptance Criteria on compressive strength and Flexural strength have been stipulated in clause 8.7.6 of the Code. For each mix, attempts should be made to obtain as early as possible Standard Deviation Value based on 30 Test results to obviate the need for use of Assumed Standard Deviation Value. Extracts from Clause 8.7 of Concrete Bridge Code have been given as an Annexure to the Technical Specifications in Bridge works.

9.2 Density of Fresh concrete:

Where minimum density of fresh concrete is specified, the mean of any four consecutive samples shall not be less than the specified value and any individual sample result shall not be less than 97.5 per cent of the specified value.

9.3 Density of Hardened Concrete:

Where minimum density of hardened concrete is specified, the mean of any four consecutive samples shall not be less than the specified value and any individual sample result shall not be less than 97.5 per cent of the specified value.

9.4 Permeability Test:

The concrete should pass the following test if it is properly compacted and is not considered permeable.

i) Prepare a cylindrical test specimen 150mm dia and 160mm high

ii) After 28 days of curing, the test specimen is fitted in a machine such that the specimen can be placed in water under pressure upto 7 bars.

iii) At first a pressure of one bar is applied for 48 hours, followed by 3 bars for 24 hours and 7 bars for next 24 hours.

iv) After the passage of the above period, the specimen is taken out and split in the middle by compression applied on two round bars on opposite sides above and below.

v) The water penetration in the broken core is to be measured with a scale and the depth of penetration assessed in mm (max. permissible limit 25mm).

If the concrete is not able to meet any of the standards of acceptance as prescribed, the effect of such deficiency on the structure shall be investigated by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer may accept the concrete as sub-standard work. Any additional work required by the Engineer for such acceptance shall be carried out by the Contractor at his cost. In case the concrete is not found to be acceptable after investigation, the Contractor shall remove the rejected concrete forthwith. Payment for sub-standard concrete shall be made at reduced rates.



10 GROUTING OF PRESTERSSING CABLE:

Recommend practice for grouting of cables has been given at Appendix D of Concrete Bridge Code. The same has been enclosed as Annexure B for ready reference.

11. TESTING OF THE GIRDER

Testing of the girders to destruction is not required. However it will be necessary to carry out non-destructive tests on one or more girder / span as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor is to make all necessary arrangements for carrying out such Non-destructive tests and the tests shall be done in the presence of the Engineer-in-charge or his representative. The load for carrying out the test on complete superstructure shall be static load equal to 1.25 times the design live load in addition to the dead load complete including in the case of Railway Bridges load of track and ballast. The applied load should be maintained for a period of 24 hours before removal. If, within 24 hours after removal of the load, the structure does not show a recovery of atleast 85% of the observed deflection under load, the test should be repeated. The structure shall be considered to have failed in the test, if the recovery even after the second test is not atleast 85% of observed deflection under the applied load. If cracking of concrete occurs under the test had, the structure shall be considered to have failed in the test. The pattern of test load would conform to the pattern of design load on the girder.

12.0 Protective coating for PSC Girders and Concrete Structures:

Where specifically provided for in the contract, for durability PSC girders/ slabs and other Concrete structures located in areas with aggressive environment, coastal areas and heavy rainy areas should be given a protective coating with epoxy / polymer based paints as per specifications given in Annexure C. Extra payment will be made for providing such protective coating, unless this item is specifically covered under the Lumpsum rate for the concrete structure. It is advisable to provide such protective coating where High strength Rebars have been proposed for use as reinforcement as against ordinary mild steel bars.



Annexure A

(Para 3.4)

SPECIFICATION FOR CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

(EXTRACTED FROM APPENDIX A OF CONCRETE BRIDGE CODE)

A-1. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A.1.1 The Position of Construction Joints

A.1.1.1 Constructions Joints should be positioned to minimise the effect of the discontinuity on the durability, structural integrity and appearance of the structure.

A.1.1.2 As far as possible, joints should be positioned in non-aggressive zones, but if aggressive zones cannot be avoided, joints should be sealed.

A.1.1.3 Joints should be positioned where they are readily accessible for preparation and concreting. The preparation of the joints is more likely to be satisfactory where the cross section is relatively small, and where reinforcement is not congested.

A.1.1.4 As far as possible, joints for fairfaced concrete should be located where they conform with the architectural features of the construction. Unless they are masked in this way, the position of the joints are always obvious, even when the concrete is given a textured finish.

A.1.1.5 If substantial changes in the cross section of a member are necessary, the joints should be formed where they minimise stresses caused by temperature gradients and shrinkage.

A.1.1.6 Joints should be located away from regions of maximum stress caused by loading, particularly where shear and bond stresses are high. Construction joints between slabs and ribs in composite beam should be avoided. As a general rule, joints in column are made as near as possible to the beam haunching. Joints in beams and slabs should normally be made at the centre or within the middle third of the span.

A.1.2 Preparing the Surface of the Joint

A.1.2.1 The minimum number of joints should be used and their construction should be simple.

They should be either horizontal or vertical, because concreting sloping surfaces is usually unsatisfactory.



A.1.2.2 Where concrete is placed in vertical members e.g. walls, columns and the like, the lift of concrete shall finish level or at right angles to the axis of the member, the joint line matching the features of the finished work. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the construction joint.

A.1.2.3 Laitance, both on the horizontal and vertical surfaces of the concrete, should be removed before fresh concrete is cast. The surface should be roughened to promote good adhesion. Various methods for removal can be used but they should not dislodge the coarse aggregate particles. Concrete may be brushed with a soft brush soon after casting while the concrete is still fresh, and while it has only slightly stiffened.

A.1.2.4 If the concrete has partially hardened, it may be treated by wire brushing or with a high pressure water jet, followed by drying with an air jet, immediately before the new concrete is placed.

A.1.2.5 Fully hardened concrete should be treated with mechanical hand tools or grit blasting, taking care not to split or crack aggregate particles.

A.1.2.6 The best time for treating the joint is a matter of judgement because it depends on the rate of setting and hardening which is itself dependent on the temperature of the concrete. Before further concrete is cast, the surface should be thoroughly cleaned to remove debris and accumulated rubbish, one effective method being air jet.

A.1.2.7 Where there is likely to be a delay before placing the new concrete lift, protruding reinforcement should be protected. Before the next lift is placed, rust, loose mortar, or other contamination should be removed from the bars and, where conditions are particularly aggressive and there has been a substantial delay between lifts, the concrete should be cut back to expose the bars for a length of about 50mm to ensure that contaminated concrete is removed.

A.1.2.8 In all cases, when construction joints are made, it is essential to ensure that the joint surface is not contaminated with release agents, dust, or cutting membrane, and that the reinforcement is fixed firmly in position at the correct cover.

A-1-3 Concreting at Construction joints:

A.1.3.1 When the formwork is fixed for the next lift, it should be inspected to ensure that no leakage can occur from the fresh concrete. It is a good practice to fix a 6mm thick sponge which seals the gap completely.

A.1.3.2 The practice of first placing a layer of mortar or grout is not recommended. The old surface should be soaked with water without leaving puddles, immediately before starting concreting then the new concrete should be thoroughly compacted against it. When fresh concrete is cast against existing mature concrete on masonry, the older surfaces should be thoroughly cleaned and soaked to prevent the absorption of water from the new concrete. Standing water should be removed shortly before the new concrete is placed and the new concrete should be thoroughly vibrated in the region of the joint.



ANNEXURE B

(Para 10)

RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR GROUTING OF CABLES IN PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES

D-1. GENERAL

D-1.1 The recommendation cover the cement grouting of post tensioned tendons of prestressed concrete members of bridges. This also covers some of the essential protective measures to be adopted for minimizing corrosion in PSC bridges.

D-1.2 The purpose of grouting is to provide permanent protection to the post tensioned steel against corrosion and to develop bond between the prestressing steel and the surrounding structural concrete. The grout ensures encasement of steel in an alkaline environment for corrosion protection and by filling the duct space, it prevents water collection and freezing.

D-2. MATERIALS

D-2.1 Water.-- Water free from impurities conforming to 4.3 of this code shall only be permitted.

D-2.2 Cement.-- Ordinary Portland Cement should be used for preparation of the grout. It should be as fresh as possible and free from any lumps. Pozzolana cement shall not be used.

D-2.3 Sand.-- It is not recommended to use sand for grouting of prestressing tendons. In case the internal diameter of the ducts exceed 150 mm, use of sand may be considered. Sand, if used shall conform to IS: 383. The weight of sand in the grout shall not be more than 10 % of weight of cement, unless proper workability can be ensured by addition of suitable plasticizers.

D-2.4 Admixtures.-- Acceptable admixtures conforming to IS:9103 and 4.4 of this code may be used with the approval of the engineer-in-charge, if tests have shown that their use improves the properties of grout, i.e. increasing fluidity, reducing bleeding entraining air or expanding the grout. Admixtures must not contain chlorides, nitrates, sulphides, sulphates or any other products which are likely to damage the steel or grout. When an expanding agent is used, the total un restrained expansion should preferably be between 4 to 6%. Aluminium powder as an expanding agent is not recommended for grouting because its long term effect are not free from doubt.

D-3. GROUT OPENINGS OR VENTS:

D-3.1 All ducts should have grout openings at both ends. For this purpose special openings should be provided where such openings are not available at end anchorages. For draped (curved) cables crown points should have a grout vent. For draped cables longer than 50 m grout vents or drain holes may be provided at or near the lowest points. All grout openings or vents should include provisions for preventing grout leakage.

D-3.2 Standard details of fixing couplers, inlets, outlets and air vents to the duct anchorage shall be followed as recommended by the supplier of the system of prestressing.



D-3.3 Ducts should be securely fastened at close intervals. All unintended holes or openings in the duct must be repaired prior to concrete placing. The joints of the couplers and the sheathing should be made water proof by use of tape or similar suitable system capable of giving leak proof joints. Grout openings and vents must be securely anchored to the duct and to either the forms or to reinforcing steel to prevent displacement during concreting operations due to weight, buoyancy and vibrations.

D-3.4 Ducts require very careful handling as, being of thin metal, they are succeptible to leakage due to corrosion in transit or storage, by tearing/ripping in handling particularly when placed adjoining to reinforcement steel, by pulling apart of joints while inserting tendons, prior to concreting, or by accidental puncturing while drilling for form ties/inserts. Ducts are also liable to damage by rough use of internal vibrator and sparks from welding being done close.

D-4. EQUIPMENT:

D-4.1 Grout Agitator.-- It is essential that the grout is maintained in a homogenous state and of uniform consistency so that there is no separation of cement. It is therefore, necessary that the grout be continuously agitated by a suitable mixer with a minimum speed of 1000 RPM and travel of discharge not exceeding 15 m per second.

D-4.2 Grout Pump.-- The pump should be a positive displacement type and should be capable of injecting the grout in a continuous operation and not by way of pulses. The grout pump must be fitted with a pressure gauge to enable pressure of injection being controlled. The minimum pressure at which grout should be pumped should be 0.3MPa and the grout pump must have a relief arrangement for bypass of the grout in case of build up of pressure beyond IMPa. The capacity of the grout pump should be such as to achieve a forward speed of grout of around 5 to 10 metres per minute. The slower rates are preferable as they reduce the possibility of occurrence of voids. If the capacity of the pump is large, it is usual to grout two or more cables simultaneously through a common manifold.

Use of hand pumps for grouting is not recommended. Use of compressed air operated equipment for injection is prohibited as it is likely that there will be some air entrapped in grout.

D-4.3 Water Pump-- before commencement of grouting, a standby direct feed high pressure water pump should be available at site for an emergency. In case of any problem in grouting the ducts, such pump shall immediately be connected to the duct and all grout in flushed by use of high pressure flushing. It is, therefore, necessary to have adequate storage of clean potable water for operation of the water pump for such emergencies.

D-4.4 Grout Screen.-- The grouting equipment should contain a screen having a mesh size of 100 Micron (150 Micron if sand is used). Prior to introduction into the grout pump, the grout should be passed through such screen. This screen should be easily accessible for inspection and cleaning.

D-4.5 Connections and Air Vents Standard details of fixing inlets, outlets and air vents to the sheathing and/or anchorage should be followed as recommended by specialist supplier of the system of prestressing. In general, all connections are to be of the “Quick Couple” type and at change of diameters, suitable reducers are to be provided.



D-5 PROPERTIES OF THE GROUT

D-5.1 Water/cement ratio should be as low as possible, consistent with workability. This ratio should not normally exceed 0.45.

D-5.2 Before grouting the properties of the grout mix should be tested in a laboratory depending on the facilities available. Tests should be conducted for each job periodically. The recommended test is described below:-

D-5.3 Compressive Strength.-- The compressive strength of 100 mm cubes of the grout shall not be less than 17 N/mm² at 7 days. Cubes shall be cured in a moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours and subsequently in water. These tests shall be conducted in advance to ascertain the suitability of the grout mix.

D-5.4 Cement.-- Which shall normally be ordinary Portland cement shall be less than one month old. The cement shall be stored in a dry place. When used, its temperature shall not exceed 40°C unless special precautions are taken.

D-6 MIXING OF GROUT:

D-6.1 Proportion of materials should be based on field trials made on the grout before commencement of grouting, but subject to the limits specified above. The materials should be measured by weight.

D-6.2 Water should be added to the mixer first, followed by cement and sand, if used. Admixture if any, may be added as recommended by the manufacturer.

D-6.3 Mixing time depends upon the type of the mixer but will normally be between 2 and 3 minutes. However, mixing should be for such a duration as to obtain uniform and thoroughly blended grout, without excessive temperature increase or loss of expansive properties of the admixtures. The grout should be continuously agitated until it is injected.

D-6.4 Once mixed, no water shall be added to the grout to increase its fluidity.

D-6.5 Hand mixing is not permitted.

D-7. GROUTING OPERATIONS

D-7.1 General

D-7.1.1 Grouting shall be carried out as early as possible but not later than one week of stressing a tendon. Whenever this stipulation cannot be complied with for unavoidable reasons, adequate temporary protection of the steel against corrosion by methods or products which will not impair the ultimate adherence of the injected grout should be ensured till grouting. The sealing of the anchorage ends after concreting is considered to be a good practice to prevent ingress of water. For structures in aggressive environment, sealing of the anchorage ends is mandatory.

NOTES: 1. Application of some patented water soluble oils for coating of steel / VPI powder injections/sending in of hot, dry and oilfree compressed air through the vents at frequent intervals have shown some good results.

2. Some of the methods recommended for sealing of anchorages are to seal the openings with bitumen impregnated gunny bag or water proof paper or by building a brick pedestal plastered on all faces enclosing the exposed wires outside the anchorages.



D-7.1.2 Any traces of oil if applied to steel for preventing corrosion should be removed before grouting operation.

D-7.1.3 Ducts shall be flushed with water for cleaning as well as for wetting the surfaces of the duct walls. Water used for flushing should be of the same quality as used for grouting. It may, however, contain about 1 per cent of slaked lime or quick lime. All water should be drained through the lowest drain pipe or by blowing compressed air through the duct.

D-7.1..4 The water in the duct should be blown out with oil free compressed air. Blowing out water from duct for cables longer than 50m draped up at both ends by compressed air may not be effective; outlet/vent provided at or near the lowest point shall be used to drain out water from duct.

D-7.1.5 The connection between the nozzle of the injection pipe and duct should be such that air cannot be sucked in.

D-7.1.6 All outlet points including vent openings should be kept open prior to the commencement of injection of grout.

D-7.1.7 Before grouting, all air in the pump and hose should be expelled. The suction circuit of the pump should be airtight.

D-7.2 Injection of Grout:

D-7.2.1 After mixing, the grout should be kept in continuous movement.

D-7.2.2 Injection of grout must be continuous and should not be interrupted.

D-7.2.3 The method of injection should ensure complete filling of the ducts. To verify this, it is advisable to compare the volume of the space to be filled by injected grout with the quantity of grout actually injected. Also, the bypass system indicated in D-4.2 above is essential for further safety.

DE-7.2.4Grouting should be commenced initially with a low pressure of injection of upto 0.3 N/mm² increasing it until the grout comes out at the other end. The grout should be allowed to flow freely from the other end until consistency of the grout at this end is the same as that of the grout at the injection end. When the grout flows at the other end, it should be closed off and build up of pressure commenced. Full injection pressure at about 0.5 N/mm² shall be maintained for at least one minute before closing the injection pipe. It is a recommended practice to provide a stand pipe at the highest point of the tendon profile to hold all water displaced by sedimentation or bleeding. If there is a build up of pressure much in excess of 1 N/mm² without flow of grout coming at the other end, the grouting operation should be discontinued and the entire duct flushed with high water pressure.

D-7.2.5 Grout not used within 30 minutes of mixing should be rejected.

D-7.2.6 Disconnection is facilitated if a short length of flexible tube connects the duct and injection pipe. This can be squeezed and cut off after the grout has hardened.

D-8 PRECAUTIONS AND RECOMMENDTIONS FOR EFFECTIVE GROUTING

D-8.1 When the ambient temperature during the day is likely to exceed 400 C, grouting should be done in the early morning or late evening hours.



D-8.2 When the cables are threaded after concreting, the duct may be temporarily protected during concreting by inserting a stiff rod or a rigid PVC pipe or any other suitable method.

D-8.3 During concreting, care shall be taken to ensure that I the sheathing is not damaged. Needle vibrators shall be used with extreme care by well experienced staff only to ensure protection against such damage.

D-8.4 It is a good practice to move the cables in both directions during the concreting operations. This can easily be done by light hammering of the ends of the wires/strands during concreting. It is also advisable that 3 to 4 hours after concreting the cable should be moved both ways through a distance of about 20 cms. With such movement, any leakage of mortar which has taken place in spite all precautions loses bond with the cables, thus reducing the chance of blockages. This operation can also be done by fixing prestressing jacks at one end, pulling the entire cable and then repeating the operation by fixing the jack at the other end. Compressed air should also be pumped to clear leaked mortar plug.

D-8.5 In case of stage prestressing, cables tensioned in the first stage should not remain ungrouted till all cables are stressed. It is good practice while grouting any duct in stage prestressing, to keep all the remaining ducts filled up with water containing 1 per cent lime or by running water through such ducts till the grout has set. After grouting the particular cable, the water in the other cable should be drained and removed with compressed air to prevent corrosion.

D-8.6 Care should be taken to avoid leaks from one duct to another at joints of precast members.

D-8.7 End faces where anchorages are located are vulnerable points of entry of water. They have to be necessarily protected with an effective barrier. Recesses should be packed with mortar/concrete and should preferably be painted with water proof paint.

D-8.8 After grouting is completed, the projecting portion of the vents should be cut off and the face protected to prevent corrosion.



ANNEXURE C (Para 12)

SPECIFICATION FOR COATING OF PSC GIRDERS AND RCC SUBSTRUCTURES AS PER EPOXY PHENOLIC INTERPENETRATING POLYMER NETWORK (IPN) SYSTEM OF CBRI / ROORKEE.

12.0 MATERIALS

1.1 The coating materials shall meet the standards specified by various codes and formulation setforth by the patentor.

1.2 A written certification shall be furnished to the Railways that properly identifies the number of each batch of coating material used in the work, material, quantity represented, date of manufacture, name and address of manufacturer and a statement that the coating material used must meet the requirements specified by CBRI/ Roorkee. Also proof of purchase from the CBRI’s approved manufacturer shall be submitted.

1.3 The coating material shall be stored in the manner as per recommendations of the manufacturer until ready for use. The coating material shall be used within the manufacturer’s written recommended shelf life.

1.4 When a representative sample of the material is to be sent to CBRI, Roorkee laboratory, then the sample shall be packaged in an airtight container and identified by batch number. The cost of testing will be borne by the Contractor.

13.0 SPECIFICATION OF COATING MATERIAL Sl.No. Description Primer Coat Middle Coat Top Coat

1 Base Interpenetrating Polymer (Dpoxy phenolic)

Interpenetrating Polymer (Epoxy phenolic)

Interpenetrating Polymer (Aliphatic Polyurethane)

2 Pot life 1 hour for 2 lt. Mix 1 hour for 2 lt. Mix.

1 hour for 2 ltr. Mix

3 Curing Air curing Air curing Air curing

4 Colour Clear or as specified by the Engineer in charge



5 Shelf Life One year in tightly sealed container



6 Dry film thickness

55 - 64 microns 90-100 microns per coat

40-50 microns per coat



7 Coverage 5-6 sq.mt./lt. (5.5 sq.m./lt. Average)

4-5 sq.mt./lt (4.5 sq.mt./lt Average)

6-7 sq.mt./lt(6.5 sq.mt./lt Average)

8 Recommended No. of coats

One One One

9 Recoatibility Subsequent coat shall be applied after 6 hours to 7 days

4 hours to 7 days. Ensure the surface is dust and deposit free prior to application

NA

10 Mix proportion Base:1 PBV*/ Curing Agent: 1 PBV*


Base:1 PBV*/ Curing Agent: 1 PBV*


Base:1 PBV*/ Curing Agent: 1 PBV* * PBV parts by volume

2.1 Tensile strength: Minimum tensile strength of the coating must be 15 N/mm2 and it

should be determined as per ASTM D-2370-73.

2.6 Elongation: Minimum elongation of the coating must be 15% and it should be

determined as per ASTM D –2370-73.

2.7 Specific permeability: The maximum value must be 0.15 mg/cm2/mm/24 hr. and it

should be determined as per ASTM D-1653-74.

2.8 Adhesion with concrete: The minimum adhesion with concrete by pullout method must

be 2.5N/mm2 and it should be determined as per BS-3900-E-2-70.

2.9 For consumption calculation of various coats (primer, middle and top) average values of

the specified coverage shall be adopted.

14.0 SURFACE PREPARAITON 3.3.1 In order to have better bonding, the concrete surface should be clean, dry and

mechanically sound. The surface of the concrete structure to be coated shall be cleaned of all traces of mould oil, laitance, salt deposits by mechanised means. Finally, the surface should be washed with clean water jet to remove any salt deposits. The surface should be dried. All the productions should be removed and cracks, joints should be seated with IPNet putty as per Central Building Research Institute (CBRI), Rookee’s recommendations.

15.0 APPLICATION OF COATING 4.1 Mix the base and curing agent in prescribed proportion by volume thoroughly for 5-10

minutes and allow it to remain in a container for five minutes.

4.5 A primer coating of IPN polymer (transparent) shall be applied to the cleaned surface after surface preparation within the pot lift.

4.6 After air curing, intermediate and top coating should be applied with time lag as per manufacturer’s specification.

4.7 The coating shall be applied by aidess spray or other approved means.



16.0 COATING THICKNESS 5.1 The minimum total thickness of all coats (primer coat + middle coat + top coat) must be

200 + 15 microns.

17.0 MEASUREMENT OF COATING THICKNESS

6.1 During the application of IP Net systems clean abraded steel plates of approximately 10

cm x 8 cm shall be adhered to the concrete surface by means of putty / adhesive in such a way that these can be detached. IP Net system can be applied over the plates in the course of application over the concrete surface. Dry film thickness (DFT) can be measured using magnetic electrometer. DFT measurement should be done at every 500 sqm area subject to a minimum one test per span.

18.0 COATING CONTINUITY

7.1 The coating shall be visually inspected after curing for continuity of the coating and shall

be free from holes, voids, contamination, cracks and damaged areas discernible to the unaided eye.

19.0 PERMISSIBLE COATING DAMAGE AND REPAIR OF DAMAGED COATING

8.1 All coating damage shall be repaired with patching material by the contractor at his own

cost.

8.4 Repaired areas shall have a minimum coating thickness of 200 + 15 microns for prestressed girders and sub structures and a minimum coating thickness of 105 + 10 microns for parapet walls.

8.5 Repair of damaged coating shall be done in accordance with the patching material manfacturer’s written recommendations within the accepted rates.

20.0 INSPECTIONS

The official representing the Railway’s shall have free entry at all times to the parts of the contractor’s works. The contractor shall afford the Railway’s representative all reasonable facilities to satisfy that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The work shall be got inspected and passed by CBRI representatives at contractor’s cost. Payment shall be made only after certification by CBRI.

21.0 TESTING OF MATERIALS

Following tests may be performed on the coating materials at CBRI/ Roorkee testing laboratory by the contractor and testing report should be furnished to the MTP (Railways).

i) Tensile strength, N/ mm2

ii) Elongation, % iii) Specific permeability, mg / cm2/ mm/24 hours. iv) Adhesion with concrete, N/ mm2

22.0 CERTIFICATION AND TEST REPORT

Railways shall be furnished with, at the time of completion, written certification that samples representing each lot have been tested as directed in this specification and the requirements have been met. A report of the test results shall be furnished to the Railways.



SPECIFICATION FOR ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS FOR PRESTRESSED

CONCRETE GIRDERS



ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDERS

1.0 GENERAL

The term “Elastomeric Bearing” refers to Bearing consisting of one or more internal layers of Elastomer bonded to internal steel laminates by the process of vulcanisation. The Bearing shall cater for translation and / or rotation of the superstructure by elastic deformation.

1.1 Raw Material

a) Chloroprene (CR) only shall be used in the manufacture of bearing. Grades of raw elastomer of proven use in elastomeric bearings, with low crystalization rates and adequate shelf life (e.g. Neoprene WRT, Bayprene 110, Skyprene B-5 and Denka S-40V) shall be used.

b) No reclaimed rubber or vulcanized wastes or natural rubber shall be used.

The raw elastomer content of the compound shall not be lower than 60 per cent by its weight. The ash content shall not exceed 5 per cent (as per tests conducted in accordance with ASTM D-297, sub-section 10)

c) EPDM & other similar candidate elastomers for bridge bearing use shall not be permitted.

d) Properties and Tests -The elastomer shall conform to properties specified in

Table 1.1

Table 1.1 Properties of Elastomer for Bearings

Property

Unit Test Method, IS Specification reference

Specified Characteristic Value

1 Physical properties

1.1 Hardness IRHD IS:3400 (Part II) 60+5

1.2 Minimum Tensile Strength

Mpa IS:3400 (Part I) 17

1.3 Minimum Elongation at break

Per cent IS:3400 (Part I) 400

2 Maximum Compression

Set Per cent IS:3400 (Part X) duration (h)

Temperature (deg C)

CR +0 to 24.2 100+1 35



3 Accelerated Ageing

IS:3400 (Part IV) duration (h)

Temperature (deg C)

CR 70 100+1

3.1 Max. change in Hardness

IRHD +15

3.2 Max. change in Tensile Strength

Per cent -15

3.3 Max. change in Elongation

Per cent -40

Shear modulus of the elastomer bearing shall neither be less than 0.80MPa nor greater than 1.20 MPa.

e) The adhesion strength of elastomer to steel plates determined according to IS:3400 (Part XIV) method A shall not be less than 7 kN/m.

For elastomeric bearings (CR) used in adverse climatic conditions the following ozone resistance test shall be satisified:

f) The ozone resistance of elastomer shall be proved satisfactory when assessed by test according to IS:3400 (Part XX). The strain, temperature, duration and ozone concentration of the test shall be 20 per cent, 40 + 1 degree Celsius, 96h and 50 pphm by volume respectively.

g) No cracking detected by visual observation at the end of the test shall be considered

satisfactory. No specific tests for assessment of low temperature resistance may be deemed necessary.

NOTE: For use of elastomer in extreme cold climates, the Engineer may specify special grade of low temperature resistant elastomer in conformity with operating ambient temperature conditions. The specifications of such special grade elastomer including the tests for low temperature resistance shall be mutually agreed to by the Engineer and the producer supplier and are outside the purview of these specifications.

h) Laminates of mild steel conforming to IS:226 shall only be permitted to be used. Use of any other material like fibre glass or similar fabric as laminates shall not be permitted.

i) The manufacturers of elastomeric bearings shall satisfy the Engineer that they have in-house facilities for testing the elastomer for carrying out the following tests in accordance with the relevant provisions of ASTM D-297 as given below:-

i) Identification of polymers : to confirm the usage of

Chloroprene (Appendix X-2)



ii) Ash content test : to determine the percentage

(sub-section 34)

iii) Specific gravity test : (sub-section 15)

iv) Polymer content test : (sub-section 10)

j) The Engineer shall invariably get the test (i) performed in his presence or in the

presence of his authorized representative to satisfy the requirement. In case of any disputes regarding interpretation of results the Engineer may carry out test as per ASTM S-3452-78 (Chromatography test) at the manufacturer’s cost in a recognised test house.

k) The elastomer specimen to conduct the test shall be obtained from the bearings selected at random for destructive test. Remaining part of the test bearing shall be preserved by the Engineer for any test to be done in future, if required.

1.2 Fabrication

a) Steel plates for laminates shall be sand blasted, clean of all mill scales and shall be

free from all contaminants, prior to bonding by vulcanisation. Rusted plates with pitting shall not be used. All edges of plates shall be rounded.

c) Each bearing with steel laminates shall be cast as a single unit in a mould and vulcanised under heat and pressure. Casting of elements in separate units and subsequent bonding shall not be permitted, nor shall cutting from large size cast be permitted.

Bearings of similar size to be used in particular bridge project shall be produced by identical process and in one lot as far as practicable. Phased production may only be resorted to when the total number of bearings is large enough.

The moulds used shall have standard surface finish adequate to produce bearings free from any surface blemishes.

d) Spacers used in mould to ensure cover and location of laminates shall be of maximum size and number practicable. Any hole at surface or in edge cover shall be filled in subsequently.

Care shall be taken to ensure uniform vulcanising conditions and homogeneity of elastomer through the surface and body of bearings.

e) The bearings shall be fabricated to comply with the tolerances specified in Table 1.2.

TABLE 1.2 TOLERANCES

ITEMS TOLERANCES

1. Overall plan dimensions -0, + 6mm

2. Total bearing thickness

-0, + 5mm



f) The vulcanising equipment / press shall be such that between the plattens of press

the pressure and temperature are uniform and capable of being maintained at constant values as required for effecting a uniform vulcanisation of the bearing.

g) The moulding dies utilised for manufacturing the bearings shall be so set inside the

platten of the press so that the pressure developed during vulcanisation of the product is evenly distributed and the thickness maintained at all places within acceptable tolerance limits taking into consideration the shrinkage allowance of vulcanizate.

h) The raw compound which has been introduced inside the metal dies for

vulcanisation shall be accurately weighed each time and it must be ensured that sufficient quantity has been put inside the die for proper flow of material at every place so that a homogeneous and compact bearing is produced without any sign of sponginess or deficiency of material at any place.

i) Before any vulcanizate of any batch of production is used for producing vulcanised

bearings, test pieces in the form of standard slab and buttons shall be prepared in accordance with prescribed standards and salient properties tested and recorded regularly against each batch of production to monitor the quality of the products.

1.3 Acceptance Specifications

a) All acceptance and process control tests shall be conducted at the manufacturer’s

plant. Cost of all materials, equipment and labour shall be borne by the manufacturer unless otherwise specified or specially agreed to between the manufacturer and the Engineer.

The manufacturer shall have all the test facilities required for the process and acceptance control tests installed at his plant to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. The test facilities and their operation shall be open to inspection by the Engineer on demand.

3. Parallelism

a) Of top surface of bearing with respect to the bottom surface as datum

in 200

b) Of one side surface with respect to the other as datum

1 in 100

4a) Thickness of individual internal layer of elastomer

+ 20 per cent (max. of 2mm)

b) Thickness of individual outer layer -0, +1mm

5a) Plan dimensions of laminates -3mm, +0

b) Thickness of laminates + 10 per cent

c) Parallelism of laminate with respect to bearing base as datum

1 in 100



b) Acceptance testing shall be commenced with the prior submittal of testing programme by the manufacturer to the Engineer and after obtaining his approval. Any acceptance testing delayed beyond 180 days of production shall require special approval of the Engineer and modified acceptance specification, if deemed necessary by him.

All acceptance testing shall be conducted by the Inspector with aid of the personnel having adequate expertise and experience in rubber testing provided by the manufacturer, working under the supervision of the Inspector and to his complete satisfaction.

c) The size and composition of acceptance lot shall be got approved by the Engineer. Acceptance lot shall comprise all bearings including pair of extra bearings, where applicable, of equal or near equal size produced under identical conditions of manufacture to be supplied for the particular project.

d) Testing lots shall be classified as follows:

i) a lot of size 24 or larger number of bearings shall be defined as a large lot

ii) a lot of less than 24 bearings shall be defined as a small lot

When production of a number of bearings of equal or near equal size for a large (single) bridge project is permitted to be manufactured in phases, the number of bearings supplied from each phase shall be treated as a lot and each such lot shall be considered a large lot.

e) Lot by lot inspection and acceptance shall be made.

1.4 Levels of Acceptance Inspection and Testing:

a) The level of acceptance testing shall generally be graded into the following two levels depending on lot size:

Level 1 acceptance testing

Level 2 acceptance testing

b) Acceptance testing Level 1 is a higher level inspection and shall be applicable to large lots only, unless otherwise specified. This shall involve manufacture of two extra bearings for each lot to be used as test bearing and eventually consumed in destructive testing.

c) Acceptance testing Level 2 shall be applicable to small lots only, (i.e. less than 24 sets) for which one extra bearing shall be manufactured. Out of the lot, one bearing shall be selected at random for carrying out material tests. This bearing shall be excluded from the lot accepted.

d) Acceptance inspection level 1 may be specified at the sole discretion of the Engineer taking into account the special importance of bridge project for small lots also under the purview of special acceptance inspection. The cost of extra bearings, in such cases shall be borne by the user, while the cost of all other materials, equipment and testing shall be borne by the manufacturer.



e) Testing: Acceptance testing shall comprise general inspection, test on specially moulded test pieces and test on complete bearings or sections for measurement of various quality characteristics as detailed in relevant paras of MOST Specifications for Roads and Bridges and IRC 83 Part II – 1996 Appendices 2 and 3, which may be referred to for details.

1.5 Certification and Marking:

a) Bearings shall be transported to bridge site after final acceptance by the Engineer

and shall be accompanied by an authenticated copy of the certificate to that effect.

c) An information card giving the following details for the bearings, duly certified by the

manufacturer shall also be appended:

Name of manufacturer

Date of manufacture

Elastomer grade used

Bearing dimensions

Production batch no.

Acceptance lot no. Date of testing

Specific bridge location, if any

Explanation of markings used on the bearing

c) All bearings shall have suitable index markings for identifying the information. The

markings shall be made in indelible ink or flexible paint and if practicable should be visible after installation. The top of the bearing and direction of installation shall be indicated.

1.6 Storage and Handling

Each elastomeric bearing shall be clearly labelled or marked. The bearing shall be wrapped in a cover. They shall be packed in timber crates with suitable arrangement to prevent movement and to protect corners and edges.

Care shall be taken to avoid mechanical damage, contamination with oil, grease and dirt, undue exposure to sunlight and weather to the bearings during transport and handling prior to and during installation.

1.7 Installation of Elastomeric Bearings

i) Multiple bearings to be installed one behind the other on a single line of support shall

be of identical dimensions.

ii) Bearings must be placed between true horizontal surfaces (maximum tolerance 0.2 per cent perpendicular to the load) and at true plan position of their control lines marked on receiving surfaces (maximum tolerance + 3mm.)



iii) Concrete surfaces shall be free from local irregularities (maximum tolerance + 1mm in height)

iv) Design shall be checked for the actual inclination in seating if larger inaccuracies than those specified are permitted.

v) For cast-in place concrete construction of superstructure, where bearings are installed prior to its concreting, the forms around the bearings shall be soft enough for easy removal. Forms shall also fit the bearings snugly and prevent any leakage of mortar grout. Any mortar contaminating the bearings during concreting shall be completely removed before setting.

vi) For precast concrete or steel superstructure elements, fixing of bearing to them may be done by application of epoxy resin adhesive to interface, after specified surface preparation. The specifications for adhesive material, workmanship and control shall be approved by the Engineer. Care shall be taken to guard against faulty application and consequent behaviour of the adhesive layer as a lubricant. The bonding by the adhesive shall be deemed effective only as a device for installation and shall not be deemed to secure bearings against displacement for the purpose of design.

vii) As a measure of ample safety against accidental displacement, the bearings shall be placed in a recess as shown in Fig. 9 of IRC: 83 (Part II).

1.1 Seating of Elastomeric Bearings on a Non-Horizontal Plane:

Normally for railway bridges, Bearings are seated in a horizontal plane even if girders are at grade. However, if bearings are to be seated in grade , following specifications shall be applicable.

i) Elastomeric bearings shall be delivered with MS backing plate fastened to the bearing from the manufacturer.

ii) Template of 6mm M.S. plate and of size same as bearing holding base plate with matching holes for the anchor screws shall be used. Anchors shall be fitted to the templates with the anchor screws but with MS washers in place of elastomer washers. The above template assembly shall be fitted in the form work at its proper location and in a vertical plane.

iii) After casting of the pedestal and removal of the form work, the template is to be removed.

Installation with Face Plate and without Template in-situ Casting:

i) The sub-assembly of elastomeric bearing with the MS backing plate shall be fitted to the

embedded anchors with anchor screws and elastomeric washers replacing the steel washer.

ii) A clearance is required between the stainless steel face of the elastomeric bearing and that of the vertical face of the face plate with stainless steel top installed on the projection below the soffit. This shall be achieved by inserting removable steel sheeting of thickness as per the drawing, during preparation of the form work before casting of the superstructure.

iii) The face plate with stainless steel top and pack plate shall be assembled with the anchors with elastomeric washers and anchor screws. The assembly shall be fitted in the form work at its proper location and in a vertical plane. The removable steel shims shall be removed at an appropriate time after the casting of the super-structure.



Installation with Face Plate and with Template in-situ Casting:

i) Template of 6 mm MS plate and of size same as face plate with stainless steel top and

matching holes for the anchor screws shall be used. Anchors shall be fitted to the templates with the anchor screws but with MS washers in place of elastomer washers. Separate screws may be used in case of inconvenience of fixing the washers in the length of original anchor screws. The above template assembly shall be fitted in the form work for the super structure at its proper location and in a vertical plane.

ii) After removal of the superstructure form work, the template shall be removed.

iii) The face plate with the required thickness of pack plate shall be loosely fitted to the anchors embedded in the projection below the superstructure, with elastomer washers and anchor screws.

iv) The sub-assembly of elastomeric bearing with the MS backing plate shall be fitted to the

embedded anchors in the pedestal with anchor screws and elastomeric washers replacing the steel washer this time.

v) The required clearance between the stainless steel face of the elastomeric bearing and that of the vertical face plate installed on the projection below the soffit shall be checked. After adjustment of the required working clearance the small gap between the vertical face of the projection below the soffit and the back of the face plate (with pack plates, if any) shall be grouted with epoxy grout.



SPECIFICATION FOR STRIP SEAL EXPANSION JOINT



STRIP SEAL EXPANSION JOINT

1.1 Components - Strip seal expansion joint shall comprise the following items:

a) Edge beams – This special claw leg profiled member shall be of extruded rolled steel section combining good weldability with notch toughness.

b) Strip seal – This shall be of chloroprene with high tear strength, insensitive to oil, gasoline, and ozone. It shall have high resistance to aging. This component, provided to ensure water tightness, shall have bulbous shape of the part of the seal which is inserted into the groove, provided in the edge beam. The seal should be vulcanized in single operation for minimum full length of joint.

c) Rigid Anchorage – This shall be welded to the edge beam at staggered distance.

d) Anchor loops – This shall be made of weldable steel connecting the rigid

anchorage with deck reinforcement.

1.2 Material

a) Edge beams of this special section are at present being directly imported in India. The steel shall conform to steel grade Rst 37-2 of Geman Standard or equivalent. Import documents and certificate from manufacturer shall be supplied by the contractor.

b) Chloroprene of strip seal shall conform to clause 915.1 of IRC:83 (Part II) . The properties of chloroprene shall conform to Table 1.1.

c) Anchorage steel shall conform to IS: 2062.

d) Anchor loop shall conform to IS: 2062.

TABLE 1.1 STRIP SEAL ELEMENT SPECIFICATION

Sealing element is made of chloroprene and must be an extruded section. The working movement range of the sealing element shall be at least 80 mm with a maximum of 100 mm at right angles to the joint and + 40 mm parallel to the joint.

PROPERTY SPECIFIED VALUE

Hardness 63 + 5 Shore A

Tensile Strength Min 11 MPa

Elongation at Fracture Min 350 per cent



Tear Propagation Strength

Longitudinal Min 10 N/mm

Transverse Min 10 N/mm

Shock Elasticity Min 25 per cent

Abrasion Min 220 mm³

Residual Compressive Strain

(22 h/70 deg C/30 per cent strain) Max 28 per cent

Ageing in hot air

(14 days/70 deg C)

Change in hardness Max +5 Shore A

Change in tensile strength Max -20 per cent

Change in elongation at fracture Max -20 per cent

Ageing in ozone

(24 h/50pphm/25 deg C/20 per cent strain) No cracks

Swelling behaviour in Oil

(116 h/25 per cent C) ASTM Oil no.

Volume Change Max 5 per cent

Change in hardness Max 10 Shore A

ASTM Oil no.3

Volume Change Max 25 per cent

Change in hardness Max 20 Shore A

Cold Hardening Point Min – 35deg C



1.3 Fabrication (Pre-installation):

a) Rolled steel profiles for edge beams shall be long enough to cater for a 2-lane carriageway in case of Road Bridges. These shall be cut to size of actual requirements by means of a mitre box saw. Alignment of the cut-to-size steel profiles shall then be made in accordance with the actual bridge cross-section on work tables. For this purpose, the contour of bridge cross-section shall be sketched onto these tables. After the steel profiles are aligned, they will be chucked to the tables by means of screw clamps and tacked by are welding.

b) Anchor plates shall be cut to the required size by gas cutting. These shall be welded to the edge beams.

c) Anchor loops shall be bent to the required shape and welded to anchor plates.

d) The finally assembled joints shall then be clamped and transported to the work site.

1.4 Handling and Storage:

a) For transportation and storage, auxiliary brackets shall be provided to hold the joint assembly together.

b) The manufacturer shall supply either directly to the Engineer or to the Bridge Contractor all the materials of strip seal joints including sealants and all other accessories for the effective installation of the jointing.

c) Expansion joint material shall be handled with care. It shall be stored under cover on suitable lumber padding by the Contractor to prevent damage. Any damage occurring after delivery shall be made good at the Bridge Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.5 Installation

i) The width of the gap to cater for movement due to thermal effect, prestress, shrinkage and creep, superstructure deformations (if any) and sub-structure deformations (if any) shall be determined and intimated to the manufacturer. Depending upon the temperature at which the joint is likely to be installed, the gap dimension shall be preset.

ii) Taking the width of gap for movement of the joint into account, the dimensions of the recess in the decking shall be established in accordance with the drawings or design data of the manufacturer. The surfaces of the recess shall be thoroughly cleaned and all dirt and debris removed. The exposed reinforcement shall be suitably adjusted to permit unobstructed lowering of the joint into the recess.

iii) The recess shall be shuttered in such a way that dimensions in the joint drawing are maintained. The formwork shall be tight.

iv) Immediately prior to placing the joint, the presetting shall be inspected. Should the actual temperature of the structure be different from the temperature provided for presetting, correction of the presetting shall be done. After adjustment, the brackets shall be tightened again.

v) The joint shall be lowered in a pre-determined position. Following placement of

the joint in the prepared recess, the joint shall be leveled and finally aligned and the anchor loops on one side of the joint welded to the exposed reinforcement bars of the structure. Upon completion, the same procedure shall be followed for the other side of the joint. With the expansion joint finally held at both sides, the auxiliary brackets shall be released, allowing the joint to take up the movement of the structure.



vi) High quality concrete shall then be filled into the recess. The packing concrete

must feature low shrinkage and have the same strength as that of the superstructure, but in any case not less than M 35 grade. Good compaction and careful curing of concrete is particularly important. After the concrete has cured, the movable installation brackets still in place shall be removed.

vii) Rolled up neoprene strip seal shall be cut into the required length and inserted

between the edge beams by using a crow bar pushing the bulb of the seal into the steel grooves of the edge beams. A landing to a bead shall be formed in the thickened end of the edges of the seal which would force the thickened end against the steel beam due to wedge effect when the strip seal is buttoned in place.

viii) As soon as the concrete in the recess has become initially set, a sturdy ramp shall

be placed over the joint to protect the exposed steel beams and neoprene seals from site traffic. Expansion joint shall not be exposed to traffic loading before the carriageway surfacing is placed.

ix) The carriageway surfacing shall be finished flush with the top of the steel sections.

The actual junction of the surfacing/wearing coat with the steel edge section shall be formed by a wedge shaped joint with a sealing compound. The horizontal leg of the edge beam shall be cleaned beforehand. It is particularly important to ensure thorough and careful compaction of the surfacing in order to prevent any premature depression forming in it.

1.6 Acceptance Test

i) All steel elements shall be finished with corrosion protection system.

ii) For neoprene seal, the acceptance test shall conform to the requirements stipulated in Table 1.1. It shall also be stretch tested. If a manufacturer is to supply this type of joint, they will have to produce a test certificate accordingly conducted in a recognized laboratory, in India or abroad.

iii) In view of the importance of the built up edge beams, special investigation of fatigue strength of this section with anchorages to withstand 2 x 106 load change cycles without showing signs of damage, will be required. The supplier shall have to produce a test certificate in this regard, conducted in a recognized laboratory, in India or abroad.

iv) The manufacturer shall produce test certificates indicating that anchorage system had been tested in a recognized laboratory to determine optimum configuration of anchorage assembly under dynamic loading.

v) The manufacturer shall satisfy the Engineer that water tightness test for the type of joint has been carried out in a recognized laboratory to check the water tightness under a water pressure of 4 bars.

vi) As strip seal type of joint is specialized in nature, generally of the proprietary type, the manufacturer shall be required to produce evidence of satisfactory performance of this type of joint.



SPECIFICATION FOR FUSION BONDED EPOXY COATED REINFORCING BARS



FUSION BONDED EPOXY COATED REINFORCING BARS

These specifications cover method of fusion bonded epoxy coating over HYSD steel bars conforming to IS-1786 as per IS 13620 : 1993. Steel bars shall be supplied and paid for as per relevant item. Payment for straightening/cutting/bending/hooking and placing in position incl. cost of binding wire shall be paid separately. Some important paras of the above IS code are reproduced below for information and guidance.

1 SCOPE

This standard covers deformed steel reinforcing bars with protective epoxy coating applied by electrostatic spray method.

2 REFERENCES

The Indian Standards mentioned below are a necessary adjunct to this standard:

IS NO. Title

1786 : 1985 High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement (third revision)

6885 : 1973 Method for knoop hardness testing of metals

3 COATING MATERIALS

3.1 The coating material shall meet the requirements specified in Annex A.

3.2 The patching or repairing material or both, shall be compatible with the coating, inert in concrete and feasible for repairs at the coating pant or in the field. This material shall be approved by the purchaser prior to use. The patching or repair shall be performed in accordance with the recommendation of the material manufacturer.

4 REINFORCING STEEL

4.1 Steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall conform to IS 1786 : 1985.

5. SURFACE PREPARATION

5.1 The surface of the steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall be cleaned by abrasive blast cleaning to near white metal. The surface profile shall be free from mill scale, rust and foreign matter when viewed under well-lit conditions.

5.2 The coating shall be applied to the cleaned surface as soon as possible after cleaning. Any formation of rust blooms on the cleaned bars are to be removed by blast cleaning before application of the coating. However, in no case shall the coating be delayed more than eight hours after cleaning unless otherwise permitted by the purchaser.

6 APPLICATION OF COATING

The coating shall be applied as an electro statically charged dry powder sprayed onto the grounded steel bar using an electrostatic spray gun. The powder may be applied to either a hot or cold bar. The coated bar shall be given a thermal treatment specified by the manufacturer of the epoxy resin which will provided a fully cured finish coating. Temperature shall be controlled as recommended by the manufacturer of the coating to ensure a workman like job without blistering or other defects.



7 REQUIREMENTS OF COATED BARS

Coating Thickness

7.1.1 For acceptance purpose at least 90 percent of all coating thickness measurements shall be 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm after curing. The coating thickness limits do not apply to patched areas. A minimum of 15 measurements shall be taken approximately evenly spaced along each side of the test bar. At least 90 percent of these measurements shall be within the specified limits.

NOTE- By mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, thicker coating may be accepted where the bars are not to be bent or worked after the coating has been applied.

7.1 Continuity of Coating

The coating shall be visually inspected after curing for continuity of the coating and shall be free from holes, voids, contamination, cracks and damaged areas discernible to the unaided eye. In addition, there shall be not more than an average of two holidays per 300mm when tested in accordance with 8.2.

7.2 Adhesion

The adhesion of coating shall be evaluated on a representative number of bars selected in accordance with 9.4 from each production lot No visible cracks of disbanding in the coating on the outside radius shall be allowed when tested in accordance with 8.3.

8 TEST METHODS

8.1 The thickness of the coating shall be measured on the body of reinforcing bar between deformations and ribs or both, on a straight length. Non-destructive coating thickness measurements using magnetic gauges shall be used.

8.1.1 ‘Pencil’ type pull-off gauges which require the operator to observe the reading at the instant the magnet is pulled from the surface and do not hold shims tightly against the steel plate during calibration are not recommended for use.

8.1.2 Gauge calibrating with shims shall be performed on a smooth, clean, low-carbon steel plate (at least 75x75x13 mm), rather than on a clean reinforcing bar.

8.1.3 A correction factor defining the effect of the bar preparation process shall be obtained as the difference between (a) the average of the 10 gauge readings on a cleaned but uncoated reinforcing bar of the size and lot being coated and (b) the average of 5 gauge readings on a smooth mild steel plate. This correction factor shall than be subtracted from all subsequent gauge readings on coated bars.

8.1.4 Fixed probe gauges shall be checked to ensure that the force generated by the spring loaded probe housing is sufficient to ensure intimate contact between the probe tip and the coating on the curved bar surface. If intimate contact does not result, it will be necessary to remove the probe housing and utilize hand-pressure to obtain valid indicated thicknesses.



8.2 Holidays

A 67.5 volts holiday detector shall be used in accordance with the detector manufacturer’s instructions. The detector may be an in line DC detector or a hand held DC detector.

8.3 Adhesion of Coating

The adhesion of the coating shall be evaluated by bending production coated bars 120 degrees (after rebound) around a mandrel of size as prescribed in Table 1. The bend test shall be made at a uniform rate and shall take up to 90 seconds to complete. The two longitudinal deformations shall be placed in a plane perpendicular to the mandrel radius and the test specimen shall be at thermal equilibrium between 25 C and 35 C.

NOTE – the fracture of partial failure of steel reinforcing bar in the bend test for adhesion of coating shall not be considered as an adhesion failure of the coating.

Table 1 Mandrel diameter for Bend Test Requirement (Clause 8.3)

_________________________________________________________________

Bar diameter, mm Mandrel Diameter, mm

(1) (2) 6 60 7 80 10 100

12 100

16 125

18 150

20 150

22 200

25 200

28 225

32 280

36 280

40 400

45 450

50 500

___________________________________________________________



9 FREQUENCY OF TEST

9.1 Coating thickness shall be tested at a frequency of not less than one full length bar every twenty bars for each size.

9.2 Continuity of coating shall be determined by testing one full length bars for each size.

9.3 Coating thickness over the whole of the coated bar section shall be determined by sectioning and examining one bar in every twenty tones for each size.

9.4 For testing adhesion of coating, samples shall be selected from each size according to the frequency given below:

Nominal Size of Bar, mm No. of Samples

Up to 16 1 for every 1 tones

Above 16 and up to 25 1 for every 2 tones

Above 25 1 for every 4 tones

10 RETEST

10.1 If the specimen for coating thickness or for adhesion of coating fails to meet the specified requirements, twice the number of samples originally selected shall be tested for each failure test. If the results of these retests meet the specified requirements, the coated bar represented by the samples shall be accepted.

11 HANDLING AND IDENTIFICATION

11.1 All systems for handling coated bars shall have padded contact areas. All bundling shall be used to prevent damage to the coating. All bundles of coated bars shall be lifted with a strong back, spreader bar, multiple supports, or a platform bridge to prevent bar-to-bar abrasion from sags in the bundles of coated bars. The bars or bundles shall not be dropped or dragged.

11.2 The identification of all reinforcing bars shall be maintained throughout the fabrication and coating processes to the pint of shipment.

12 INSPECTION

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified.

13 PERMISSIBLE COATING DAMAGE AND REPAIR AFTER COATING APPLICATION

13.1 Coating damage due to fabrication and handling need not be repaired in case where the damaged area is 40 mm2 or smaller.

13.2 All damaged areas larger than 40 mm2 shall be repaired with patching material.



13.3 Maximum amount of damage shall not exceed 2 percent of the surface area of each bar (total of damage in 13.1 and 13.2)

13.4 Patching shall be done in accordance with the patching material manufacturer’s recommendations.

14 REJECTION

Coated bars represented by the samples that do not meet the requirements of this specification shall be rejected. By mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer, such bar may be stripped of coating, re cleaned, re-coated, and resubmitted for acceptance test in accordance with the requirements of the specification.

15 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE

If requested by the purchaser, the manufacturer shall furnish, at the time of shipment, a written certificate that the coated reinforcing bars meet the requirements of this specification.

16 IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING

16.1 The manufacturer or supplier shall mark the bars in such a way that all finished bars can be traced to the cast from which they are made or the original identification mark of the bars.

16.2 Each bundle containing the bars may also be suitably marked with the Standard Mark in which case the concerned test certificate shall also bear the Standard Mark.

For each bundle of bars a tag shall be attached indicating the Cast No./Lot No., grade and size of bars

Items to be operated –

Description of Item Unit

Supply of HYSD bars conforming to IS – 1786 duly Fusion bonded epoxy coated as per IS 13620

A. up to 16mm dia bars

quintal

B. above 16 mm dia bars quintal



QUALITY ASSURANCE PLANS



CLIENT QUALITY PROCEDURE CONSULTANT

NALCO ALUMINIUM COMPANY LTD

CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD

REGIONAL PROJECT OFFICE

BHAGWAN TOWER( 1ST FLOOR)

CUTTACK ROAD,

BHUBANESWAR(ORISSA) - 751006

REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4

QUALITY MANUAL SECTION

NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2

TITLE: QUALITY ASURANCE PLAN FOR

FIELD/LAB TESTS FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING

WORKS

PAGE No. 1 of 14

Sl.No. Description of

Item

Characteristic Check Type of

Check

Frequency

of Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

1 CEMENT i) Fineness LAB TEST One test in

Every 100

MT

Cement/per

lot of

incoming

stock

IS Code for grade

of cement

As per IS

Specification

Manufactures

test certificate

& test result

from testing

agency/Field

test report

Consultant/Approv

ed testing agency

ii) Compressive Strength -do- -do-

iii) Setting Time -do- -do-

iv) Soundness -do- -do-

v) Consistency -do- -do-

vi) Manufacturing Week

Month, Year

Visual

vii) Grade of cement -do- -do-

viii) Weight of Bag By Spring

Balance

-do-

ix) IS Marking Visual -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,

BHUBANESWAR(ORISSA) - 751006

REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No. 2 of 14

Sl.No. Description of Item Characteristic Check Type of Check Frequency of

Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

2 Reinforcement

Steel (HT)

i) Chemical Composition LAB TEST One test

upto 50 MT/

per lot of

incoming

stock

IS Code As per IS

Specification

Manufactures

test certificate &

test result from

testing

agency/Field

test report

Consultant/Approve

d test agency

ii) 0.2% Proof Stress -do-

iii) Ultimate Tensile

Strength

-do-

iv) % Elongation -do-

v) Bent Test -do-

vi) Rebend test -do-

vii) Unit weight Field Test





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,

BHUBANESWAR(ORISSA) – 751006. REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2

TITLE: QUALITY ASURANCE PLAN FOR FIELD/LAB

TESTS FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS PAGE No. 3 of 14


Item

Characteristic Check Type of Check Frequency of Check Reference

Documents

Acceptance norms Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

3 Fine Aggregates i) Particle size distribution Lab Test or

field test as

decided by

Engineer-in-

charge

1. Every 40 Cum. Of fine

aggregates required for

RCC works only

2. Every 80 Cum. Of fine

aggregates required for

others item

IS 383 Relevant

Specification

Test

certificate/Test

report from

approved testing

agency/field test

report

-do-

ii) Silt Content Field Test Every 20 Cum. Or part

thereof or more

frequently as decided

by the Engineer-in-

charge

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Bulkage -do- Random

-do- -do- -do- -do





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2

TITLE: QUALITY ASURANCE PLAN FOR FIELD/LAB TESTS

FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS PAGE No. 4 of 14


Item

Characteristic Check Type of Check Frequency of

Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance norms Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

4 Coarse Aggregate

i) Grading LabTest One test in every

60 Cum.

IS 383/IS 2386

Pt.I

Test

Certificate/Test

Result from

approved testing

agency/field test

report

Test

certificate/test

result from testing

agency/field test

report

Consultant/Approved

test agency

ii) Flakiness/Elongation -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Impact Value -do- -do- IS 383/IS 2386

Pt.IV

-do- -do-

v) Soft & deleterious

materials

-do- -do-

IS 383/IS 2386

pt.II

5 BRICKS i) Compressive Strength Lab Test Before

commencement

of work for each

brand brick as per

IS 5454, Table

no.1(Clause 4.1.1,

4.2 & 4.3.2) and

Table No.2

(Clause 5.1, 5.2.3

and 5.2.4)

IS 5454, IS 3495

(Parts 1 to 4), IS

1077

As per Bureau of

Indian Standards

Test

Certificate/Test

Result from Govt.

approved testing

agency/field test

report

Approved testing agency





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,

BHUBANESWAR(ORISSA) – 751006.

REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No. 5 of 14

Sl.No. Description of Item Characteristic Check Type of

Check

Frequency of Check Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

BRICKS ii) Water Absorption Lab Test Before

commencement of

work for each brand

brick as per IS 5454,

Table no.I (Clause

4.1.1, 4.2 & 4.3.2) and

Table no.2 (Clause

5.1, 5.2.3 and 5.2.4)

IS 5454, IS

3495 (Parts 1 to

4), IS 1077

As per Bureau

of Indian

standards

Test

Certificate/Test

Result from

Govt. approved

testing

agency/field test

report

Approved testing

agency

iii) Efflorescence -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

iv) Dimension -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No. 6 of 14


Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

6 WATER

i) PH-Value LAB TEST Before

commencement

of work and

thereafter

every three

months till

completion of

work

IS 456 3025 Relevant

Specification

Test

Certificate/Test

Result from

Approved

testing

agency/field

test report

Consultant/Approved

testing agency

ii) Sulphate Content -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Chloride Content -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No. 7 of 14


Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

7 MARBLE 1. Moisture absorption Lab Test 50 Sqm. IS:1124 As per contract

specification

-do- -do-

8 FLOOR

TILES/TERRAZZO

TILES

i) Transverse strength Lab Test

Manufactures

test certificate &

test result from

testing

agency/Field

test report

Consultant/Approved

test agency

ii) Water absorption -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Abrasion Test -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2

TITLE: QUALITY ASURANCE PLAN FOR FIELD/LAB

TESTS FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS PAGE No.8 of 14


Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of Document Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

9 GLAZED TILES (for

floor & wall)

i) Water absorption LAB TEST 3000 nos. or

part thereof

IS:777-1988 As per contract

Specification

-do- -do-

ii) Crushing Test -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Impact strength -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iv) Chemical resistant test -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

10 BALLAST i) Grading Field Test As per contract

specification

1. IS:2386

(Part-I)

As per contract

specification

Field/Lab test result

from approved testing

agency/field data

-do-

ii) Aggregates Impact Lab test -do-

2. IS:5640-1970 -do- -do- -do-

iii) Los Angles Abrasion Lab test -do-

3. IS:2386

(Part-IV)

-do- Test Certificates/Test

Result from Approved

testing agency/field

test report

Consultant/Approved

testing agency

iv) Crushing Value -do- -do- 4. IS:2386

(Part-I)

-do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No. 9 of 14


Item

Characteristic Check Type of Check Frequency of

Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

BALLAST v) Water absorption

Chemical Composition

LAB TEST As per

contract

specification

5. IS:2386

(Part-III)

As per contract

specification

Test

Certificates/Test

Result from

Approved testing

agency/field test

report

Consultant/Approved

testing agency

vi) Flakiness Index -do- -do-

6. IS:2386

(Part-I)

-do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No. 10 of 14


Check

Frequency of

Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

11 CONCRETE

ADMIXTIURE

i) Permeability to water LAB TEST As decided by

the Engineer-in-

charge before

commencement

of work

IS:9103 As per contract

Specification

-do- -do-

ii) Setting time -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Complete strength -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iv) Chloride content -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No.11 of 14


Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

12 BENTONITE i) Sand Content Bentonite

powder

LAB TEST -do- 1. IS:2911 (Part-I) As per contract

Specification

-do- -do-

ii) Liquid Limit -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Density of Bentonite

Slurry (using Hydrometer)

-do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iv) Marsh viscosity (using

Marsh core)

-do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

v) Swelling Index -do- -do- -do- -do-

-do- -do-

vi) PH value of Bentonite

suspension

-do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,

BHUBANESWAR(ORISSA) –751006.

REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No.12 of 14


Check

Frequency

of Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

13 CONSTRUCTION

QUALITY (CONCRETE)

i) Mix Design LAB TEST Regular IS-465-2000

IS-10262

SP-23

IS-10262 –

SP-23

Test

Certificate/Test

Result from

Approved testing

agency/field test

report

Consultancy/Approved

testing agency

ii) Slump Test Field Test Random

Specification

iii) Crushing Strength at

7 & 28 days

Lab Test Regular and

as per codal

provision

IS-Code IS-Code 456-

2000

-do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2



WORKS

PAGE No.13 of 14


Check

Frequency of

Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of

Document

Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

14 SHUTTERING &

REINFORCEMENT

i) Level Field Test 100% Contracts

specification

As per codal

provision

Inspection

Report or Pour

Card

Consultancy/Approved

testing agency

ii) Level -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iii) Support -do- -do-

-do- -do- -do- -do-

iv) Cover -do -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

15 EQUIPMENTS i) Weighbatcher Field Test Regular

condition to

be checked

As per contract

specification

As per contract

specification

Inspection

Report by site

engineer

-do-

iii) Vibrator -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

iv) Cube moulds -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

v) Slump cone -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

vi) Sieve -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-





CAPTIVE POWER PLANT

ANGUL

ORISSA - 759128

RITES LTD



CUTTACK ROAD,


REFERENCE:

ISO-9001 :2000

Clause No. – 7.4, 3 & 8.2.4


NO. QM: 7.4 & 8.2


FIELD/LAB TESTS FOR CIVIL

ENGINEERING WORKS

PAGE No.14 of 14

Sl.N

o.

Description of Item Characteristic Check Type of

Check

Frequency of

Check

Reference

Documents

Acceptance

norms

Format of Document Agency

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I)

16 Earthwork in

embankment under

O.M.C. condition (

Ref : RDSO guide line

No. GE:G-1, July-

2003)

Soil classification; (

i) Grain size analysis

ii) Liquid Limit &

Plastic Limit )

Lab

Test

Minimum 1 test

per 5000 cu.m or

as decided by

Engineer-in-

Charge

1. IS:2720 Pt.IV

2. IS:2720 Pt.V

As per contract

specification

Test

Certificate/Test

Result from

Approved testing

agency/field test

report

Consultancy/Appro

ved testing agency

iii) Max. Dry

Density

-do- Minimum 1 test

per 5000 Cu.m or

as desided by

engineer.

IS 2720 Pt.VIII-

1998

-do- -do- -do-

iv) Omtimum

Moisture content

Lab

Test

-do-

IS:2720 Pt.II -do- -do- -do-

v) Dry Density and

moisture content

As per contract

specification

RDSO guide line

No. GE:G-1, July-

2003

-do- -do- -do-

17 Plastering i) Morter proportion Field

check

Random As per contract

specification

As per contract

specification

-do- Inspection Report

by Site Engineer of

Consultant

ii) Thickness -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-



LIST OF DRAWINGS (TENTATIVE)

Sl No. TITLE

1. Layout plan

2. L-section

3. Bridge drawings. Br. No. 15 & 16

4. Bridge drawings. Br. No. 17



��

��

H.M. LOADING STANDARD - 1995

�� !!!!" �#$ �� $��!"�$!!%�

TP

AT

CH

: 48

34

.41

m

BR

NO

15

, 2X

1. 2

m D

I A H

P A

T C

H: 4

69

1.0

0m

TO

BE

EX

TE

ND

ED

1x

3. 0

mx2

. 00

m R

CC

BO

X

SR

J A

T C

H:4

66

8. 4

0m

T--15

TP

AT

CH

: 46

28

. 11

m

FM

AT

CH

: 46

18

.40

m

TP

AT

CH

:46

11. 5

0m

TP

AT

CH

: 46

09

.60

m

R= 437.5m

R= 437.5m

TP

2 A

T C

H: 4

59

8. 5

5m

TP

2 A

T C

H:4

59

6. 9

5m

LOAD LINE, CAL =794.56m(FM TO FM)ENGINE REVERSAL LINE, CAL = 723.56m(FM TO SRJ)

? 22°-6'-11"

R 437.50m(4°)

TL 85.449mCL 168.774m

CURVE NO 2A

SR

J AT

CH

: 48

45

. 00

m

SR

J A

T C

H: 4

76

1. 0

0m

EM

ER

GE

NC

Y C

RO

SS

OV

ER

PRE TIPPLING YARD

TO WAGON TIPPLER WEST GRID

CHECKED BYDY CE(BRIDGE)E.Co. RLY/BBSR

XEN(BRIDGE)E.Co. RLY/BBSR

Sr. DGM(C)RITES/BBSR

GM(P)RITES/BBSR

GM(TECH)NALCO/BBSR

CHECKED BY

DRAWN BY

ENGINEER (C)RITES/BBSR

CHECKED BY


E.Co. RLY/BBSR E.Co. RLY/BBSR

CBEE.Co. RLY/BBSR

TO

DA

MA

NJ

OD

IT

O W

AG

ON

TIP

PL

ER

TO

SO

UT

H G

RID

U/S D/S

R.C.C. BOX SECTION AT B-B

SECTION OF RETAINING WALL AT A-A

%� �� & %!!

'� �� (� �� $! )�)�

�� *��

��

�!! '% ))� *� � �!!! )�)�� *�� + �%!! ))� ��

+ ��

�� *�� %!)�)� + ��

�� '�% ��

�� '�,#��% �

�!� �� * ��

�$� ��

��

*�� + ��

�"� �� ☺��

�%� �� *�� *��. ��

�,� ��

�'� � � �� / $%�! 0 �1)�

�2� ��

�� # � ��

� � ��

�� 2%3

,� �� #

44� �� $% 4� �� + �� 2%

2� �� *� ��

"� �� . �� "%, #$!!! + ��

��

$� ��*��

��

SECTION OF CURTAIN /DROP WALL

TYPICAL DETAILS AT 'A' & 'B'

� ��

NATIONAL ALUMINIUM COMPANY LTD.

DAMANJODI, ORISSA

BR NO. 15



R. C. C. DETAILS OF RETAINING WALL AT A-A

SECTION OF CURTAIN /

DROP WALL R.C.C. BOX DETAILS SECTION AT B-BTYPICAL DETAILS AT 'A' & 'B'

� ��

NATIONAL ALUMINIUM COMPANY LTD.

DAMANJODI, ORISSA

BR NO.

16

CHECKED BYDY CE(BRIDGE)E.Co. RLY/BBSR


Sr. DGM(C)RITES/BBSR

GM(P)RITES/BBSR

GM(TECH)NALCO/BBSR

CHECKED BY

%� �� & %!!

'� �� (� �� $! )�)�

�� *��

��

�!! '% ))� *� � �!!! )�)�� *�� + �%!! ))� ��

+ ��

�� *�� %! )�)� + ��

�� '�% ��

�� '�,#��% �

�!� � �� * ��

�$� ��

��

*�� + ��

�"� �� ☺��

�%� �� *�� *��. ��

�,� ��

�'� �� / �%�! 0 �1)� �� +

�2� ��

�� # � ��

� � ��

�� 2%3

,� �� #

44� �� $% 4� �� 2%

2� �� *� ��

"� �� . �� "%, #$!!! + ��

��

$� ��*��

��

�2�! 0 �1)� ��

�� !!!!" �#$ �� # $��!"�$!!%

��

DRAWN BY


CHECKED BY


E.Co. RLY/BBSR E.Co. RLY/BBSR

CBEE.Co. RLY/BBSR

H. M. LOADING STANDARD - 1995

3000

600

1100

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

680 6001

50

300 CC 1 :3:6

CC 1:3:6

RL 888.440m

27

02

70

270

27

02

70

27

030

0

620

3000

300 1

50

680 600

270

270

270

270

270

270

300

3650

51

20

600

TO

DA

MA

NJ

OD

IT

O W

AG

ON

TIP

PL

ER

TO

SO

UT

H G

RID

U/S

D/S

U/S D/S



2 : 1

1.5

: 1

2 : 1

1.5

: 1

RETURN WALL

SECTION ON X-XTOE WALL

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRE & ALL LEVELS ARE IN METRE UNLESS

OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2. SAFE BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL AT 3.0m BELOW BED LEVEL 18.3 t/sqm AS PERCOMPLETION DRAWING OF EXISTING BRIDGE. (SIGNED ON 1.10.1986.)

3. DESIGN CRITERIA.

I. IRS BRIDGE RULES INCORPORATING A @ C SLIP No. 37II. IRS CONCRETE BRIDGE CODE INCORPORATING A @ C SLIP No. 11.

III. IRS BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE & FOUNDATION CODE INCORPORATING A @ C SLIP No. 27.

4. EXPOSURE CONDITION SEVERE.

5. CONCRETE GRADE.I, ALL MASS CONCRETE - M 25

II. ALL RCC WORKS - M 35 (DESIGN MIX).6. CLEAR COVER TO REINFORCEMENT = 50mm.

7. LAPPING OF BARS SHOULD BE MINIMISED AND ALL STAGGERED WHEREVER

NECESSARY. MINIMUM LENGTH OF LAP SHALL BE AS GIVEN IN IS:456-1978(DESIGNS AIDS) FOR TOR STEEL. THE NUMBER & LOCATION OF LAP IS TO BE

DECIDED AT SITE.

8. LOADING STANDARD: HM LOADING - 1995

9. HIGH YIELD STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS OF GRADE Fe 500 CONFORMING TO

IS: 1786- 1985 SHALL BE USED AS REINFORCEMENT.

10. ANGLE OF REPOSE OF BACK FILL SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 35°.

11. BACK FILL SHOULD BE AS PER CLAUSE 7.5 OF IRS BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE

AND FOUNDATION CODE.

12. ALL DIMENSIONS AND LEVELS SHOULD BE VERIFIED AND RECONCILED ATSITE BEFORE EXECUTION.

13. WEEP HOLES SHALL BE OF 75/100 DIA PVC PIPES STAGGERED @ 1000 C/C

HORIZONTALLY AND @ 1000 C/C VERTICALLY ABOVE LOW WATER LEVEL INMASS CONCRETE ONLY.

14. THE DRAWING IS TO BE READ ONLY AND NOT TO BE SCALED.

15. THIS DRAWING AND DESIGN IS PREPARED BASED ON RDSO DRG.NO: RDSO/M/00005 / 1-2 (DUPLICATE) DATED 31.08.2005.

16. CONCRETE SHALL BE MECHANICALLY MIXED. VIBRATED AND THOROUGHLYCURED.

17. IN CASE THE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY IS LESS THAN THE SPECIFIED VALUE,THE SAME WILL BE IMPROVED BY REPLACING THE EXISTING SOIL WITHMOORUM UP TO 1.0m DEPTH BELOW THE FOUNDATION LEVEL. MOORUM

SHALL BE SPREAD, WATERED AND THOROUGHLY COMPACTED IN LAYERS OF250mm.

18. THE PROPOSED RAIL LEVEL AND THE FORMATION LEVEL HAVE BEEN CHECKEDWITH RESPECT TO THE APPROVED L-SECTION. THE DETAILS HAVE BEEN VERIFIED

BY M/s RITES Ltd. / BHUBANESWAR.

H. M. LOADING STANDARD - 1995

TYPCAL DETAILS AT 'A' & 'B'

SE

CT

ION

B-B

1.5

:1

CURTAIN / DROP WALL

BR.NO:-17

SPAN:-4X5.0X6.30m R.C.C.BOXES

AT CH:-5260.00M

N: 4

40

AT

CH

: 506

0m

FR

OM

CS

B

400400

898.10

SR

J A

T C

H 4

98

7m

TO WEST GRID

SR

J A

T C

H 5

05

6m

TO SOUTH GRID

N 368.00

E-931.575

CL

OF

WA

GO

N T

IPP

LE

R, C

H.: 5

30

5m

FR

OM

CS

B

(ALO

NG

EX

IST

ING

TR

AC

K)

CL O

F P

RO

P. W

AG

ON

TI P

PL

ER

, CH

.: 52

30

.81

m F

RO

M C

SB

SR

J, C

H.: 5

44

1.7

0m

FR

OM

CS

B

SR

J A

T C

H:5

04

9.8

1m

SR

J A

T C

H:5

17

5.8

1m

SR

J A

T C

H:5

34

7.6

8m

TP

1 A

T C

H:5

47

8.4

8m

TP

2 A

T C

H:5

52

7.7

5m

1 IN 8 1

2 (CS)

SR

J, C

H.: 5

42

8.7

m F

RO

M C

SB

SR

J, C

H.: 5

32

0m

FR

OM

CS

B

SR

J, C

H.: 5

295

m F

RO

M C

SB

SR

J, C

H.: 5

17

3m

FR

OM

CS

B

SR

J, C

H.: 5

186

m F

RO

M C

SB

SR

J, C

H.: 5

06

5m

FR

OM

CS

B

(CH

. 53

56.4

4m

ALO

NG

EX

IST

ING

TR

AC

K)

AT

CH

: 520

0m

FR

OM

CS

B

LEVEL

400

FL

=8

97. 7

5

FL

TO

BE

EX

TE

ND

ED

4X

5.0

0m

X6.0

0m

RC

C B

OX

BR

NO

17

,4X

5.0

0m

X6

.00

m R

CC

BO

X A

T C

H;5

26

0.0

0M

FM

CH

:51

20.8

1m

FM

CH

:510

4.8

1m

FM

CH

:629

2.6

8m

FM

CH

:51

23

m

FM

CH

:50

06

m

FM

CH

:503

7m

FM

CH

:50

16m

FM

, CH

.: 537

0m

FR

OM

CS

B

POST TIPPLING YARD1 IN 8 1

2 (C S)1 IN 8 1

2 (CS)

TO DMNJ STN

TO WEST GRID

KEY PLAN

DAMANJODI

1.5

:1

DRAWN BY

RITES/BBSRSr.DGM(C)

RITES/BBSRGM(P)

RITES/BBSR

GM(TECH)NALCO/BBSR

CHECKED BY

DY CE(BRIDGE)E.Co. RLY/BBSR


CBE

E.Co. RAILWAYCHECKED BY

CHECKED BY

RITES/BBSR

SECTION A-A

PLAN

CONTENT : -GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING

EAST COAST RAILWAY

RITES LTD.RITES LTD.

NATIONAL ALUMINIUM CO. LTD.

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

NATIONAL ALUMINIUM COMPANY LIMITED NALCO BHAWAN, P-1 NAYAPALLI,

BHUBANESWAR – 751 013

Web site: www.nalcoindia.com

Page 1 of 96

INDEX

Sl.No Title Page No.

1. Definitions and Interpretation (Section-1)

1.1 2.

Definitions Facilities to Contractor (Section-II)

2.1 Location of Site climatic conditions and Access by

Road

2.1.1 Location of Site

2.1.2 Access by Road

2.2 Water Supply

2.3 Power Supply

2.4 Land for Contractor’s field office, godown and workshop

2.5 Land and Residential Accommodation

General Instructions to Tenderers (Section-III)

3. Submission of Tender :

4. Documents:

4.1.2 Details to be submitted alongwith the tender

4.2 All pages to b e initiated

4.3 Rates to be in figures and words

4.4 Corrections and Erasures

4.5 Signature of Tenderer

4.6 Witness

5 T ransfer of Tender Documents

6

7

Earnest Money

Validity

8 Addends/ Corrigenda

9 Right of Owner to accept or reject Tender

10 T ime Schedule

11 Collection of data Tenderer’s responsibility

12 Retired Government or Company Officers

13 Signing of the Contract

14 Field Management and Controlling Authority

15 Note to schedule of Rates

General Obligations (Section-IV)

16 Interpretation of contract documents

17 Special Conditions of Contract

18 Tenderer to obtain his own information

19 Security Deposit

20 Forfeiture of Security Deposit

Page 2 of 96

21. 22.

T ime of Performance Extension of Time

23. Force Majeure

24. Compensation for delay.

25. Failure by the contractor

26. Contractor remains liable to pay compensation

27. No Compensation for alteration in /or restriction of work.

28. 29.

Change in Constitution Termination of Contract for death

30. Members of the Owner not individually liable

31. Owner not bound by personal representations

32. Contractor’s Office at Site

33. Contractor’s subordinate staff and their conduct

34. Sub-letting of work

34.1 General

34.2 Sub-Contracting of works

34.3 List of sub-contracted works to be supplied

34.4 Contractor’s liability not limited by sub -contractors

34.5 Owner may terminate sub-contracts

34.6 No remedy for action taken under this clause

35. 36.

Power of Entry Contractor’s responsibility with other agencies

37. Other agencies at site

38. Serving of Notices

38.1 To the Contractor

38.2 To the Owner

39 Rights of various interests

40 Patents, Royalties, Rent and excavated material

41. Liens

41.1 General

41.2 Nothing extra for adverse sub-soil conditions

41.3 Slip and Falls in excavation

41.4 No compensation in case of change in location of site

42.

Performance of Work (Section V)

Execution of Works

43. Coordination and inspection of works

44. Work on monsoon and dewatering

45. Work on Sundays and Holidays

46. General Conditions of Construction and Erection

Work

Page 3 of 96

47. 48.

Drawing to be supplied by the Owner Drawings to be supplied by the Contractor

49. Setting out works

50. Responsibility for Level and Alignment

50.1 General

50.2. Lighting, Watch and Ward

51. Materials to be supplied by Contractor

52. Stores supplied by the Owner

53 Conditions for issue of materials

54. Return of Surplus

55. Materials obtained from dismantling

56. Articles of value found

57. Inspection of works

58. Assistance to the Engineer

59. Discrepancies between Instructions

60. Alterations in specifications & designs and extra works

61. Action where no specification is issued

62. Abnormal Rates

63. Test for quality of Works

64. Samples

65.

66.

Liabilities for defect imperfections etc and

rectification’s thereof

Suspension of works

67. Possession prior to completion

68. Twelve months period of liability form the date of issue of completion certificate

68.1 Guarantee

68.2 Suggestions to fulfill the guarantees

68.3 Care of works

68.4 68.5

Defects prior to taking over Defects after taking over

68.6 Guarantee/ Transfer of Guarantee

Certificate and Payments (Section-VI)

69. Schedule of Rates and Payments.

69.1 Contractor’s Remuneration.

69.2 Schedule of Rates to be inclusive.

69.3 Schedule of Rates to cover constructional plant, materials, labour etc.

69.4 Schedule of Rates to cover royalties, rents and claims

69.5 Schedule of Rates to cover taxes and duties.

Page 4 of 96

69.6 69.7

Schedule of Rates to cover risks of delays. Schedule of Rates can not be altered.

70. Procedure for measurement/ billing of work in progress.

70.1 Measurements.

70.2 Billing.

70.3 Secured Advance on materials.

70.4 Dispute in mode of measurement.

70.5 71.

Rounding of Amounts Lump sum in Tender

72. Running Account payment to be regarded as

advances

73. Notice of claims for additional payment

74. Payment of Contractor’s Bill

75. Receipt for payment.

76. Completion Certificate.

76.1 Application for completion certificate.

76.2 Completion Certificate.

76.3 Completion Documents.

77. Final Decision and final Certificate.

78. Certificate and payments no evidence of completion.

Taxes and Insurance (Section –VII)

79. Taxes, duties, octroi etc.

80. Insurance

80.1 Employees State Insurance act.

80.2 Workmen compensation and employer’s liability Insurance.

80.3 Any other insurance required under law or regulations or by Owner.

80.4 Accident or Injury to workmen.

80.5 Transit Insurance.

81. Damage to property or to any person or any third party

82. Demurrage dues.

Labour Laws and Arbitration (Section – VIII)

83. Labour laws.

84. Implementation of Apprentices Act 1961.

85. Contractor to Indemnify the Owner

86. Health and sanitary arrangements for workers

87. Arbitration

88 Jurisdiction/ Governing Laws

Page 5 of 96

89. Safety Code (Section-IX). General

90. Safety Regulations

91. First Aid and Industrial Injuries

92. General Rules.

93. Contractor’s Barricades.

94. Scaffolding.

95. Excavation and Trenching.

96. General Safety

97. Care in handling Inflammable gas.

98. Temporary combustible Structures.

99. Precautions against fire.

100. E xplosives.

101. Mines Act.

102. P reservation of peace.

103. Out Break of infectious diseases.

104. T reatment of Contractor’s Staff in Owner’s Hospital

105. Use of intoxicants.

Proforma (Section-X)

A. Formats for Bank Guarantees.

B. List of standardized Banks

IA.

Proposal forms - (Appendices) Details of works of similar nature and magnitude

carried out during the last 5 years.

IB. Concurrent commitment of the bidder

II Details of equipment, tools tackle.

III. Details of Minimum manpower proposed to be

deployed on this work.

IV.

V.

Organisation Chart showing no. of qualified engineers and supervision)

List of proposed sub -contractors.

VI. Progress Billings.

VII. Information about Tenderers (Form H)

VIII List of enclosures (Form-I)

IX Exceptions and Deviations (Form –J)

Page 6 of 96


Page 7 of 96

SECTION – 1

DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

1. DEFINITION & INTERPRETATION:

1.1 Definition:

In the contract (as hereinafter defined) the following words and expressions

shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context

otherwise requires.

1.1.1 The ‘Owner’ shall mean the National Aluminium Company Limited

(NALCO), a Company incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956 having its

registered office at IDCO Tower, 8th

Floor, Janapath, Bhubaneswar –751007

or any other place as modified subsequently and shall include its Chairman-

cum-Managing Director or other Administrative Officers authorised to deal

with these presents are concerned on his behalf posted in the any of the

Offices of NALCO and shall also include Owner’s successors and assignees.

The Chairman-cum-Managing Director has nominated the following persons

as the representative of the ‘Owner’ for the purpose of all contractual matters.

Smelter - General Manager (Smelter)

CPP - General Manager (CPP) Projects

Mines - General Manager (Mines) Alumina - General Manager (Alumina)

1.1.2 The ‘Tender’ shall mean the tender submitted by the tenderer for acceptance

by the Owner.

1.1.3. The ‘Chairman-cum-Managing Director’ shall mean the Chairman-cum-

Managing Director of National Aluminium Co. Ltd., or his successors in

office as designated by the Owner.

1.1.4. The ‘Project Head’ shall mean General Manager/ Deputy General Manager of

the Project of National Aluminium Company Ltd., or his successor in office or

his authorised representative.

1.1.5. The ‘Contractor’ shall mean the person or persons, firm or company whose

tender has been accepted by owner and includes the contractor’s legal

representatives, his successors and permitted assigns.

1.1.6. The ‘Sub-contractor’ shall mean any person or firm or company (other than

the contractor to whom any part of the work has been entrusted by the

contractor, with the written consent of the owner or his representative and the

legal representatives, successors and permitted assignee of such person, firm

or company.


Page 8 of 96

1.1.7. The ‘Engineer-in-Charge’ shall mean the person nominated by the Owner

from time to time and shall include those who are expressly authorised by the

Owner to act for and on his behalf for all function pertaining to operation of

this contract. All functions pertaining to the operation of contract means all

acts necessary for execution of the contract coordinating between the different

agencies and final closing of the contract.

1.1.8. The ‘Works’ shall mean and include all works to be executed in accordance

with the contract or part thereof as the case may and shall include all extras,

addition, altered or substituted works as required for the purpose of the

contract or as may be required to be executed by the owner/ engineer-in-

charge.

1.1.9. The ‘Contract’ shall mean the agreement between the Owner and the

contractor for the execution of the works including therein all documents such

as the invitation to tender, instructions to Tenders, General Conditions of

Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Job Specifications, General

Requirements, Time Schedule of Completion of Job, Drawings, Letter of

Intent awarding the work, Agreed variations, if any etc.

1.1.10. The ‘Contract Document’ shall mean collectively the tender documents,

designs, drawings specifications, agreed variations, if any and other

documents constituting the tender and acceptance thereof.

1.1.11. ‘Constitutional Plant’ shall mean all appliances or things of whatsoever nature

required in or about the execution, completion or maintenance of the works or

temporary works (as hereinafter defined) but does not include materials or

other things intended to form of forming part of the permanent work.

1.1.12. ‘Temporary Works’ shall mean all temporary works of every kind required in

or about the execution, completion or maintenance of the works.

1.1.13. ‘Specifications’ shall mean all directions, various technical specification,

provisions, and requirements, attached to the contract, which pertain to the

method and manner of performing the work or works to the quantities and

qualities of the work or works and the materials to be furnished under the

contract for the work or works as may be amplified or modified by the Owner

or the Engineer-in-charge during the performance of Contract in order to

provide the unforeseen conditions or in the best interests of the work or works.

It shall also include the latest edition including all addenda/ corrigenda or

relevant Indian Standard Specifications and other relevant codes.

1.1.14. ‘Plans’ shall mean all maps, sketches, and layouts as are incorporated in the

contract in order to define broadly the scope and specifications of the work or

works, and all reproductions thereof.


Page 9 of 96

1.1.15. ‘Drawings’ shall include maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with any

modifications approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge and such other

drawings as may, from time to time, be furnished or approved in writing by

the Engineer-in-charge.

1.1.16. ‘Foreign consultant’ shall mean a person, agency or firm including their

successors and assigns, who are non-residents of India and are responsible for

supply of process Technology for expansion plant based on review of existing

plant including material flow, energy balance, additional facilities and

improvement on the basis of the recent experience.

1.1.17. ‘Indian Consultant’ shall mean a person, agency or firm including their

successors and assign who are responsible for detailed engineering and

construction management of the project.

1.1.18. ‘Project manager’ shall mean the authorised representative of the consultant

posted at site. He shall be responsible for supervision of the work by the

contractors as well as coordinate with different agencies within the

organisation or otherwise.

1.1.19. ‘Site’ shall mean the lands and other places on, under in or through which the

permanent works are to be carried out and any other lands or places provided

by the owner for the purpose of the contract.

1.1.20. ‘Notice in writing or written Notice’ shall mean a notice in written, typed or

printed characters sent (unless delivered personally or other wise proved to

have been received) by registered post to the last known private or business

address or registered office of the addressee and shall be deemed to have been

received in the ordinary course of post it would have been delivered.

1.1.21. The ‘Completion Certificate’ shall mean the certificate to be issued by the

owner or his representative when the works have been completed to his

satisfaction.

1.1.22. The ‘Final Certificate’ in relation to the work shall mean the certificate

regarding the satisfactory compliance of the various provisions of the contract

to be issued by the owner or his representative after the period of liability is

over.

1.1.23. ‘Approved’ shall mean approved in writing including subsequent written

conformation of previous verbal approval and ‘Approval’ means approved in

writing including as aforesaid.

1.1.24. The ‘Period of Liability’ in relation to a work means the specified period from

the date of issue of completion certificate up to the date of issue of final

certificate which the contractor stands responsible for rectifying all defects

that may appear in the works.


Page 10 of 96

1.1.25. The ‘Appointing Authority’ for the purpose of arbitration shall be the

Chairman and managing Director or any other person so designated by him.

1.1.26. The ‘Alteration Variation Order’ means an order given in writing by the

Engineer-in-Charge/ owner to effect additions to or deletions from or

alteration in the works.

1.1.27. ‘Letter of Intent’ shall mean an intimation by a letter to tenderer that the tender

has been accepted in accordance with the provisions contained in the letter.

1.1.28. ‘Days’ means a day of 24 hours from mid night irrespective of the number of

hours worked in that day.

1.1.29. ‘Working Day’ mean any day which is not declared to be holiday or rest day

by the Owner.

1.1.30. ‘Week’ means a period of any consecutive seven days.

1.1.31. ‘Metric System’: All technical documents regarding the construction of works

are given in the metric system and all work in the project should be carried out

accordingly to the metric system. All documents concerning the work shall

also be maintained in the metric system.

1.1.32. ‘Value of Contract’ shall mean the sum accepted or the sum calculated in

accordance with the prices accepted in tender and / or the contract rates as

payable to the contractor for the entire execution and full completion of the

work.

1.1.33. ‘Headings and Marginal Notes’ in these contract documents are given solely

for facility of reference and are not part of the contract documents and are not

to be taken into account in the interpretation of the provisions of the contract.

1.1.34. ‘Language for Drawings & Instruction’: All the drawings, titles, notes,

instruction, dimensions etc. shall be in English Language.

1.1.35. ‘Singular and Plural’: The singular shall include the plural and vice versa

wherever the context so requires.


Page 11 of 96

SECTION - II

2. FACILITIES TO CONTRACTOR

2.1 Location of Sites and Access by Road:

2.1.1 Locations of Sites:

The general information about Mines Alumina, Aluminium Smelter and

Captive power Plants furnished below is of indicative nature only and shall

not be considered as binding in any way on the Owner and shall not govern

either the scope of work or the nature of the respective rights and the

obligations of the parties to such contract.

(a) Alumina Plant and Mines:

Alumina plant is on south-western side of the Panchpatmali hill near Damanjodi village in Koraput District, Orissa State. The site is situated at

12 Km from the national highway No. 43 off Semiliguda village. The

Alumina Plant Site has the form of saddle between groups of low hills. The

location of Red Mud Pond is in the natural basis of hills situated at a

distance of 2 Km from the western side of the plant. The Bauxite mine is

located at 14 Km away from the Alumina Plant Site.

(b) Smelter Plant:

Aluminium Smelter is on the Southern side of National Highway No. 42,

with its approximate latitude and longitude as 20o51’N and 85

o10’E

respectively. The area, at a higher elevation in comparison with adjacent land, is not subjected to either normal or flash foods. The prevalent directions of wind are from North-West and West.

(c) Captive Power Plant:

Captive Power Plant is located at Angul, District Angul, Orissa on the south

of Talcher Thermal Power Station of Orissa State Electricity Board the

main plant site is about 3 Km on the north of the junction of the National

Highway Nos. 42 and 23, between the villages Balaram Prasad Patna and

Gotamara. The access roads to the main plant site may be taken from

either of the highways.

2.1.2. Access by Road:

Contractor, if necessary, shall build other temporary access roads to the

actual site of construction for his own work at his own cost. The Contractor

shall be required to permit the use of the roads so constructed by him for

vehicles of any other parties who may be engaged on the project site. The

Contractor shall also facilitate the construction of the permanent roads

should the construction thereof start while he is engaged on this work. He

shall make due allowance in his tender for any inconvenience he anticipates

on such account.

Non-availability of access roads, railway siding and railway wagons for the

use of contractor shall in no case condone any delay in the execution of

works not be the cause for any claim for compensation against the Owner.


Page 12 of 96

2.2 Water Supply:

2.2.1. Unless other wise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall be

responsible for the arrangements to obtain supply of water necessary for

the works, his labour colony, his workshops, his offices etc. All pumping

installations, pipe network and distribution system will have to be carried

out by the Contractor at his own cost.

2.2.2. The Owner may agree to supply water to the Contractor for use in the

Owner’s works on specified terms and conditions as shall be determined

by the Owner, which shall be binding on the Contractors. The tenderer is

however required to exercise his option to receive such water supply from

Owner’s main at the time of submission of his tender.

2.2.3. When the water is supplied by the Owner, the Owner’s main will be within

500 metres form the site of work. The Contractor shall provide at his own

cost, all necessary ferrules, pipes, fitting, couplings and tanks and

temporary works required and he shall maintain all such works in

satisfactory condition. The Contractor shall remove all such works and

shall re-instate and make good any work disturbed, to the satisfaction of

the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.2.4. In the event of the Contractor’s drawing water from the Owner’s main/

source, he shall not claim any compensation for interruption or failure of

Owner’s water supply caused due to any reasons beyond the control of the

owner.

2.2.5. The water so supplied by the Owner shall be free of cost for the

Constructional work only.

2.3. Power Supply:

2.3.1 Subject to availability, Owner will supply power at 400/440 V at only one

point at the nearest substation, from where the contractor will make his

own arrangement for temporary distribution. The point of supply will not

be more than 500 Metres away from the Contractor’s premises. All the

works will be done as per IEA regulations and passed by the Engineer-in-

Charge. The temporary line will be removed forthwith after the

completion of work or if there is any hindrance caused to the other works

due to the alignment of these lines, the contractor will re-route or remove

the temporary lines at his own cost. The Contractor at his cost will also

provide suitable electric metres, fuses, switches, etc. for purposes of

payment to the Owner which should be in the custody and control of the

Owner. The cost of power supply shall be payable to the owner every

month. Rs. 1/- per kWh for power, which will be deducted from the

running bills. The owner shall not, however, guarantee the supply of

electricity and no compensation for any failure or short supply of

electricity will be entertained and this does not relieve the contractor of his


Page 13 of 96

responsibility for timely completion of this works as stipulated in the

contract.

2.3.2 It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide and maintain the

complete installation of the load side of the supply with due regard to

safety requirement at site. All cabling, equipment, installations etc. shall

comply in all respects with the latest statutory requirements and safety

provisions i.e. as per and the Central/ State Electricity Acts and Rules etc.

The Contractor will ensure that his equipment and Electrical wiring etc.

are installed modified, maintained by a licensed Electrician/ Supervisor. A

rest certificate is to be produced to the Engineer-in-Charge for his

approval, before power is made available.

2.3.3 At all times, IEA regulations shall be followed failing which the Owner

has a right to disconnect the power supply without any reference to the

contractor. No claim shall be entertained for such disconnection by the

Engineer-in-Charge. Power supply will be reconnected only after

production of fresh certificate from authorised electrical supervisors.

2.3.4 The Owner is not liable for any loss or damage to the Contractor’s

equipment as a result of variation in voltage or frequency or interruption in

power supply or other loss to the Contractor arising there from.

2.3.5 The Contractor shall ensure that the Electrical equipment installed by him

are such that average power factor does not fall below 0.90 at his premises.

In case power factor falls below 0.90 in any month, he will reimburse to

the Owner at the penal rate determined by the Owner for all units

consumed during the month.

2.3.6 The Power supply required for Contractor’s colony near the plant site will

be determined by the Owner and shall as per state Electricity Board’s

Rules and other Statutory provisions applicable for such installations from

time to time. In case of power supply to Contractor’s colony, the power

will be made available at a single point and the Contractor shall make his

own arrangement at his own cost for distribution to the occupants of the

colony as per Electricity Rules & Acts. The site area and colony shall be

sufficiently illuminated to avoid accidents.

2.3.7 The Contractor will have to provide and install his own light and power

meters, which will be governed as per Central/ State Government

Electricity Rules. The meters shall be sealed by the Owner.

2.3.8 In case of damage to any of the Owner’s equipment on account of fault,

intentional or unintentional on the part of the Contractor the Owner

reserves the right to recover the cost of such damage from the contractor’s

bill. Cost of HRC Fuses replaced at the Owner’s terminals due to any fault


Page 14 of 96

in the Contractor’s installation shall be to contractor’s account at the rates

decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.3.9 Only motors upto 3 HP will be allowed to be started direct on line. For

motors above 3 HP and up to 100 HP a suitable starting devices approved

by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be provided by the Contractor For Motor s

above 100 HP slipping induction motors will suitable starting devices as

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be provided by the Contractor.

2.3.10 The Contractor shall ensure at his cost that all electric lines and equipment

and all installations are approved by the State Electricity Inspector before

power can be supplied by the Owner.

2.3.11 The total requirement of power shall be indicated by the tenderer along

with his tender.

2.4. Land for Contractor’s Filed Office, Godown and Workshop :

2.4.1. The Owner will at his discretion and convenience and for the duration of

the execution of the work may provide the land for construction of

Contractor’s field office, godown, workshops and assembly yard required

for the execution of the contract nearer to the site.

The Contractor shall at his cost construct all these temporary buildings

structures and provide suitable water supply and sanitary arrangement as

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and other inspectorates.

2.4.2. On completion of the works undertaken by the Contractor, he shall remove

all temporary works erected by him and have the site cleared as directed

by Engineer-in-Charge. If the Contractor fails to comply with these

requirements, the Engineer-in-Charge has the right to remove any structure,

such surplus, rubbish materials and depose off the same as he deems fit and

get the site cleared and the contractor shall forthwith pay the amount of all

expenses so incurred and shall have no claim in respect of any such

surplus materials disposed as aforesaid. The Owner reserves the right to

ask the Contractor at any time during the pendancy of the contract, to

vacate the land by giving 7 (seven) days notice on security reasons or on

national interest or otherwise. A token rent of Rs. 100/- (Rupees One

hundred only) per hectare or part thereof per annum or part thereof shall

be charged for the land so made available.

Land provided shall be solely on licence basis which is terminable by at

any time without notice or without assigning any reasons. In the event of

any such termination or the termination of the contract/completion thereof,

the contractor shall forthwith vacate the premises.


Page 15 of 96

2.5. Land for Residential Accommodation:

Land for residential accommodation for staff and labour may be made

available at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge and rent for the same

will be as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge according to location and the

area occupied by the Contractor.


Page 16 of 96

SECTION - III GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

3. SUBMISSION OF TENDER:

3.1. The documents issued to the tenderers shall be as follows:

(i) One complete set of tender documents as per index sheet and drawings marked

‘ORIGINAL’ (To be submitted along-with the quotation).

(ii) One complete set of tender documents as per index sheet marked

‘TENDERER’S COPY’ (To be retained by the tenderer for reference).

3.1.1. The tender documents shall be in 2 parts viz. Technical Bid and Price Bid.

Technical and Price Bid should be put in separate sealed cover and marked

with the tender reference and name of the work. In addition, a note on the

Price Bid “Quotation do not open” is to be superscribed. Both the sealed

covers are to be put in a single sealed cover. The name of the work the tender

reference and date of opening are to be superscribed on this sealed envelope

also.

The technical Bid shall be opened in the first instance. Clarifications,

confirmations, if any, shall be obtained with regard to technical specifications.

After technical specifications are firmed up, if a tenderer revises his price bid,

he is required to submit justification in support of the revision made. The

price bid shall be opened thereafter.

3.2. If Addenda/ Corrigenda are issued to this tender document, they must be

signed, submitted along-with the tender documents. The tenderer should write

clearly the revised quantities in schedule of Rates of Tender Document and

should price the work based on revised quantities when amendments on

quantities are issued in addenda.

3.3. Tenderers are advised to submit quotations based strictly on the terms and

conditions and specifications contained in the tender documents and not

stipulate any deviations. Should it however become unavoidable, deviations

should be stipulated in the prescribed proforma only, contained in the proposal

form. Owner reserves the right to evaluate the quotations containing

deviations having financial implications, by adding the cost for such

deviations are determined by Owner.

3.4. Tenders should be submitted in double sealed envelope with the name of work

superscribed thereon and with the note “QUOTATION DO NOT OPEN”

written prominently. The full name, postal address and telegraphic address of

the tenderer shall be written on the bottom left hand corner of the sealed cover.

4.0. DOCUMENTS:


Page 17 of 96

4.1.1 Bidders shall submit with his bids the particular/ documents as envisaged from

Appendix (i) to (x) along with tentative construction net work/ Bar chart for

completion of work taking into account various intermediate completion

milestones/ component milestones and the overall completion of work under

the contract.

4.1.2. Details to be submitted along with tender:

The tenders, as submitted will consist of the following:

The technical Bid and Price Bid shall be submitted as stated in para 3.1.1

Documents to be attached with price bid.

(i) Complete set of the tender document (marked ORIGINAL) as issued

duly filled in by the tenderer as prescribed in different clauses of the

tender document, signed and date affixed.

Documents to be attached with Technical Bid.

(ii) Earnest money in the manner specified in Clause 6 hereof.

(iii) The following proposal forms in FIVE copies

(a) Details of works of similar nature and magnitude carried out during

last 5 years as per the Appendix – 1(A)

(b) Concurrent commitments of the tenderer as per the Appendix – 1(B).

(c) Details of equipments, tools and tackles proposed to be deployed for

this work as per the Appendix – (II). (d) Details of manpower proposed to be deployed for this work as per

the Appendix – (III), indicating the qualification.

(e) Site organisation chart showing number of qualified engineers and

supervisors etc. indicating their bio-data as per the Appendix – (IV),

indicating the qualification.

(f) List of proposed sub-contractors to be deployed as per the Appendix

– (V).

(g) Progress Billing as per the Appendix – (VI).

(h) Information about tenderers as per the Appendix – (VII).

(i) List of enclosures as per the Appendix – (VIII).

a) Power of attorney

b) Income tax & Sales tax clearance certificate.

c) Solvency certificate from nationalised Bank

d) Documents showing annual turnover.

(j) Exception and deviation which tenderer may desire to stipulate as per

Appendix – (IX).

4.2 All pages to be initialled:


Page 18 of 96

All signatures in tender documents shall be dated, as well as the pages of all

sections of tender documents shall be initialled at the lower right hand corner

or signed wherever required in the tender papers by the tenderer or by a person

holding power of attorney authorising him to sign on behalf of the tenderer

before submission of tender.

4.3. Rates to be in Figures and Words:

The tenderer shall quote in English, in figures and in words for the rates and

amount tendered by him in the Schedule of Rates forming part of the

documents, in such a way that interpolation is not possible. The amount of

each item shall be worked out and entered and requisite total given of all items.

The tendered amount for the work shall be entered in the tender and duly

signed by the tenderer.

If some discrepancies are found between the rates given in works and figures or

the amount shown in the tender, the following procedure shall be followed:-

a) When there is difference between the rates in figures and words, the rate

which corresponds to the amount worked out by the tenderer shall be

taken as correct.

b) When the rate quoted by the tenderer in figures and words tally but the

amount is incorrect, the rate quoted by the tenderer shall be taken as

correct.

c) When it is not possible to ascertain the correct rate by either of above

methods the rate quoted in words shall be taken as correct.

4.4. Corrections and Erasures:

All corrections and alterations in the entries of tender papers shall be signed in

full by the tenderer with date. No erasures or over writings are permissible.

4.5. Signature of Tenderer:

4.5.1. The tender shall contain the name, residence and place of business of person

or persons making the tender and shall be signed by the tenderer with his usual

signature. Partnership firms shall furnish the full names of the partners in the

tender. It should be signed in the partnership’s name by all the partners or by

duly authorised representative followed by the name and designation of the

person signing. Tender by a corporation shall be signed by an authorised

representative and a power of attorney on the behalf shall accompany the

tender. A copy of constitution of the firm with names of all partners shall be

furnished.

4.5.2. When the tenderer signs a tender in a language other than English, the total

amount tendered should in addition be written in the same language. The

signature should be attested by at least one witness.


Page 19 of 96

4.6 Witness: Witness and sureties shall be persons of status and property. Their

name occupation and address shall be stated below their signature.

5. TRANSFER OF TENDER DOCUMENTS:

Transfer of tender document purchased by one intending tenderer to another is no

permissible.

6. EARNEST MONEY:

6.1. The tenderer must pay earnest money as given in the Letter/ Notice Inviting

Tenders. Tenders not accompanied with earnest money deposit will be rejected.

The earnest money can be paid in cash or by crossed demand draft or fixed

deposit or Bank Guarantee from any Nationalised/ Scheduled Bank or Insurance

Guarantee in the prescribed proforma as indicated in the tender document in

favour of National Aluminium Company Ltd.

6.2. The Bank Guarantee so furnished by the tenderer shall be only in the proforma

prescribed by the Owner and valid for six months from the date of opening of

the tender. No interest shall be paid by the Owner on the Earnest Money

deposited by the tenderer.

7. VALIDITY: Tender submitted by tenderers shall remain valid for acceptance for

a period of four months from the date of opening of the tender. The tenderers

shall not be entitled during the said period of four months, without the consent in

writing of the Owner, to revoke or cancel his tender or to vary the tender given or

any term thereof. In case of tenderer revoking or canceling his tender or varying

any terms in regard thereof without the consent a Owner in writing, the earnest

money paid by him along-with the tender shall be forfeited.

8. ADDENDA/ CORRIGENDA:

8.1. Addenda/ Corrigenda to the tender documents may be issued prior to the date of

opening of the tenders to clarify documents or to reflect modification in the

design or contract terms.

8.2. The Addenda/ Corrigenda will be issued in duplicate to each person or

organisation to whom a set of tender documents has been issued. Each recipient

should acknowledge the receipt of the same and attach one copy of the addenda/

corrigenda along-with his offer. All addenda/ corrigenda issued shall become

part of Tender Documents.

9. RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCEPT OR REJECT TENDER:

9.1.The right to accept the tender will rest with the Owner. The Owner further does

not bind himself to accept the lowest tender and reserves the authority to reject

any or all the tenders received without assigning any reason whatsoever. The

whole work may be split up between two or more contractors or accepted in part

(not entirely) if considered expedient. The quoted rates would hold good for such

eventualities. Tenders in which any of the particulars and prescribed information

are missing or incomplete in any respect and / or the prescribed conditions are not


Page 20 of 96

fulfilled are liable to be rejected. The decision for the owner in respect of the

above shall be final and binding on the contractor.

9.2.Canvassing in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited. The submitted

tenders of the tenderers who resort to canvassing are liable to rejection. Tenders

containing uncalled remarks or any additional conditions are liable to be rejected.

10. THE SCHEDULE:

10.1. The work shall be executed strictly as per the Time Schedule given in

Appendix –1. The period of construction given in time Schedule includes the

time required for mobilisation as well as testing, rectification if any, re-testing

and completion in all respects to entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

10.2. A joint programme of execution of the work will be prepared by the Engineer-

in-Charge and contractor based on priority requirement of this project. This

programme will take into account the time of completion mentioned in 19.1

above and the time allowed for the priority works by the Engineer-in-Charge.

10.3. Monthly/ weekly construction programme will be drawn up by the Engineer-

in-Charge jointly with the Contractor, based on availability of work fronts and

the joint construction programme as per 10.2 above. The contractor shall

scrupulously adhere to these targets/ programs by deploying adequate

personnel construction tools and tackles and he shall also supply himself

materials of his scope of supply in good time to achieve the targets/

programmes. In all matters concerning the extents of targets set out in the

weekly and monthly programmes and the degree of achievement, the decision

of the Engineer-in-Charge will be final and binding on the contractor.

10.4. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PRESENTATION:

The construction schedule shall be in the form of network of PERT CHART/

CPM or other suitable presentation for the programme of the work indicating

therein the different components item of works and time required for

completion of each components item wise/ month wise season wise so as to

complete the work in all respects within the stipulated period. Before award

of the work the contractor is also required to make the presentation to satisfy

owner of their proposal for construction schedule in the form of BAR CHART

and organizational resources, equipments, machinaries, manpower to be

deployed for timely completion of the project.

11. TENDERER’S RESPONSIBILITY:

The intending tenderers shall be deemed to have visited the site and

familiarised themselves thoroughly with the site conditions before submitting

the tender. Non-familiarity with the site conditions will not be considered a

reason either for extra claims or for not carrying out the works in strict

conformity with the drawings and specifications.

12. RETIRED GOVERNMENT OR COMPANY OFFICERS:


Page 21 of 96

No Engineer of Gazetted rank or other Gazetted Officer employed in

Engineering or Administrative duties in an Engineering department of the

State/ Central Government or of the owner is allowed to work as a contractor

for a period of two years after his retirement from Government service or from

the employment of the Owner without the previous permission of the Owner.

The contract if awarded, is liable to be cancelled if either the contractor or any

of his employees is found at any time to be such a person, who had not

obtained permission of the owner as aforesaid before submission of tender or

engagement in the contractor’s service as the case may be.

13. SIGNING OF THE CONTRACT:

The successful tenderer shall be required to execute an agreement with the

Owner in the proforma attached with tender document within 10 days of the

receipt by him of the notification of acceptance of the tender. In the event of

failure on the part of the successful tenderer to sign the agreement within the

above stipulated period, the earnest money or his initial security deposit will be

forfeited and the acceptance of the tender shall be considered as cancelled. No

bills shall be payable unless the agreement is executed.

14. FIELD MANAGEMENTS AND CONTROLLING AUTHORITY:

14.1 The field management will be responsibility of the Project Manager posted at

site by the consultant and nominated by the owner. The Project manager shall

work in accordance with the directions given to him from time to time by the

project head.

14.2. The Engineer-in-Charge shall only co-ordinate with the other agencies

engaged to work at site, to ensure minimum disruption of work carried out by

different agencies. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to plan and

execute the works strictly in accordance with site instructions and avoid

hindrance to the works being executed by other agencies. The instructions of

the Engineer-in-Charge shall be binding on the contractor.

15. NOTE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES:

15.1. The schedule of rates should be read in conjunction with all the other sections

of the tender.

15.2. The tenderer shall be deemed to have studied the drawings, specifications and

details of work to be done within time schedule and to have acquainted

himself of the conditions prevailing at site.

15.3. Rates must be filled in the original tender document. If quoted in separate

typed sheets, no variation in time description or specification shall be

accepted. Any exceptions taken by the tenderer to the schedule of rates shall

be brought out in the terms and conditions of offer.

15.4. The quantities shown against the various items are only approximate. Any

increase or decrease in the quantities shall not form the basis of alternation of

the rates quoted and accepted.

15.5. The owner reserves the right to interpolate the rates for such items of work

falling between similar items of lower and higher magnitude.


Page 22 of 96

SECTION - IV GENERAL OBLIGATIONS

16. INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:

16.1. Complete documents forming the contract are to be taken as mutually

explanatory. Should there by any discrepancy, inconsistency, error or

omission in the contracts or any of them the matter may be referred to

Engineer-in-Charge who shall give decisions and Issue to the contractor

instructions directing in what manner the work is to be carried out. The

decision of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and conclusive and the

contractor shall carry out work in accordance with this decision.

16.2. Works shown in the drawing but not mentioned in the specification or

described in specification but not shown in the drawings shall nevertheless be

deemed to be included in the same manner as if they had been specifically

shown upon the drawings as well as described in the specifications.

16.3. Unless otherwise stated specifically, the ‘singular’ shall also mean ‘plural’

and vice versa wherever the context so requires words implying ‘persons’

shall include relevant ‘corporate companies or registered association’ or

‘body of individuals’ or ‘firm of partnership’ as case may be.

17. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT:

17.1. Special Conditions of Contract shall be read in conjunction with the General

Condition of Contract Specifications of work, drawing and any other

documents forming part of this contract wherever the context so requires.

17.2. Notwithstanding the sub-divisions of the documents into the separate sections

and volumes each part shall be deemed to be supplementary to

complementary of every other part and shall be read with and into the

contract so far as it may be practicable to do so.

17.3. In case of any discrepancy between various sections of the contract, the

following order of preference shall be observed.

(1) Schedule of quantities

(2) Technical specifications

(3) Special Conditions of Contract

(4) General Conditions of Contract

17.4. Wherever it is mentioned in the specifications that the Contractor shall

perform certain work or provide certain facilities it is understood that the

Contractor shall do so at his cost.

17.5. The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the relevant Indian

Standard, the job specifications contained herein and codes referred to.


Page 23 of 96

Where the job specifications stipulate the requirements in addition to those

contained in the standard codes and specification, these additional

requirements hall also be satisfied.

18. Tenderer to Obtain his Own Information:

18.1. The tenderer shall for all purposes and whatsoever reason may be, deemed to

have himself independently obtained all necessary information for the

purpose of preparing his tender. The correctness of the details given in the

Tender Document as guideline information to help the tenderer but to make-

up the tender is not guaranteed.

18.2. The tenderer shall be deemed to have examined the tender documents, to

have obtained his own information in all matters whatsoever that might

influence carrying out of the works at the scheduled rates and satisfied

himself to the sufficiency of his tender. Any error in description or quantity

or omission therefrom shall not vitiate the contract or release the contractor

from executing the work comprised in the contract according to drawings and

specifications at the scheduled rates. He is deemed to know the scope, nature

and magnitude of the works, the requirements of materials and labour

involved etc. and as what works he has to complete in accordance with the

contract document whatever be the defects, omissions or errors that may be

found in the Contract Document. The contractor shall be deemed to have

visited site and surroundings areas, to have satisfied himself to the nature of

all existing structures, and also as to the nature and the conditions of available

facilities like Railways, roadways, bridges culverts, means of transport and

communications like by land, water or air and possible interruptions thereto

the access to and egress from site and to have made enquiries, examined

satisfied himself of the sites for obtaining sand, stones, bricks and other

materials, the sites for disposal of surplus materials, the available

accommodation like depots, buildings as may be necessary for executing and

completing the works, to have made local independent enquiries as to the

sub-soil water and variations thereof, storms, prevailing winds and climatic

conditions and all other similar matters affecting the works. He is deemed to

have acquainted himself his liability for payment of Government Taxes,

Customs Duties and other charges.

18.3. Any neglect or failure on the part of the tenderer in obtaining necessary and

reliable information or issues stated at 18.2 or any other matters affecting the

contract shall not relieve him from any risks or liabilities or the entire

responsibility for completion of the works at the scheduled rates and time in

strict accordance with the contract documents.

18.4. Any change in layout due to site conditions or technological requirement

shall be binding on the contractor and no extra claim on this account shall be

entertained.


Page 24 of 96

18.5. No verbal agreement or inference from conversation with any officer or

employee of the Owner either before, during or after the execution of the

contract agreement shall in any way affect or modify and of the terms or

obligations herein contained.

19. Security Deposit:

19.1. A sum of 10% of the accepted value of the tender or actual value of the work

done whichever is higher for contracts not exceeding Rs. 1 Crore, 71/2 % for

the value of contracts over Rs. 1 up to Rs. 5 crores and 5%for the value of

contracts over Rs. 5 crores shall have to be deposited by the person/ persons

(hereinafter called as contractor) as security deposit with the owner until the

expiry of defect liability period.

19.2. This may be deposited initially at 2 ½% of the value of the contract (referred

as initial Security deposit) within 20 days of receipt by him of the notification

of acceptance of tender and the balance will be recovered in installments

through the deduction @ 10% of the gross value of the each running account

bill for the contract upto Rs. 1 crore, 71/2 % for contract between Rs. 1 to

Rs.5 crores and 5% for contract over Rs. 5 crores, till total security deposit is

collected. No further deduction from the bills will be made on this account

subject to clause 19.6 below.

19.3. Alternatively the contractor may at his option to deposit the full amount

percentage as mentioned 19.1 above towards deposit within 10 days of issue

of notification accepting his tender. This amount will have to be suitably

enhanced to the tune of above percentage of the executed value.

19.4. The earnest money deposited with the tender shall be adjusted towards

security deposit.

19.5. Contractor can furnish the initial or total security deposit amount (a) in

Demand Draft or (b) through a Bank Guarantee from any Scheduled bank in

the prescribed proforma.

19.6. If contractor /sub-contractor or their employees damages, breaks, deface or

destroy the property belonging to the owner or other during the execution of

the contract, the same shall be made good by the contractor at his own

expense and in default thereof; the Engineer-in-Charge may cause the same to

be made good by other agencies and recover expenses form the contractor

(for which the certificate of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final).

19.7. All compensation or other sums of money payable by the contractor to the

Owner or recoveries to be made under terms of this contract may be deducted

from or paid by the sale of a sufficient part of his security deposit or from any

sums which may be due or may become due to the contractor by the Owner

on any account whatsoever. In the event of his security being reduced by

reasons of any such deduction or sale, the contractor shall within ten days


Page 25 of 96

thereafter make good in cash, bank drafts, any sum or sums which may have

fallen short or Security deposit amount or any part thereof. No interest shall

be payable by the Owner for sum deposited as security deposit.

19.8. The security deposit will be refunded after the expiry of the period of liability

as stipulated in the contract.

20. Forfeiture of Security Deposit:

Whenever any claim against the Contractor for the payment of a sum of

money arises out of or under the contract, the Owner shall be entitled to

recover such sum by appropriating in part or whole the security deposit of the

contractor, and to sell any Government securities, etc. forming whole or part

of such security deposit. In the event of security being insufficient or if no

security has been taken from the contractor, then the balance or the total sum

recoverable as the case may be, shall be deducted from any sum then due or

which at any time thereafter may become due to the contractor. The

contractor shall pay to the Owner on demand any balance remaining due.

In the event of any breach by the contractor or any loss or damage occasioned

to the owner which in the opinion of the owner has arises, the decision where

of shall be final and binding on the contractor or in the event of the

termination of the contract for any such breach, the security deposit is liable

to be forfeited. The decision of forfeiture by the Owner shall be final and

binding on the contractor.

21. Time of performance:

The work covered by this contract shall be commenced within twenty one

days after the issue of the letter of acceptance of tender and be completed in

stages on or before the dates as mentioned in the time schedule of completion

of works. The contractor should bear in mind that time is the essence of the

contract, unless such time be extended pursuant to the provision of clause

No.22 Request for Revision of Construction time after tenders are opened

will not receive consideration. The above period of twenty one days is

included within the overall completion schedule, not over and above the

completion time.

22. Extension of Time.

22.0. The application for extension of time is to be given to project head through

the engineer –in-charge and the project head may authorise extension of time

after considering the due merits.

Whenever extension of time is granted by the project head, the same shall be

on the existing terms and conditions of the contract and without any

additional financial liability to the Owner. The contractor in any case shall

have no claim whatsoever for any type of compensation on account of any

delay attributable to any one.


Page 26 of 96

23. Force Majeure:

23.1 Any delays in or failure of the performance of either parties thereto shall not

constitute default hereunder or give rise to any claims for damages, if any, to

the extent such delays or failure of performance caused by occurrences such

as acts of God or the public enemy, expropriation or confiscation of facilities

by Government authority, compliance with any order or request of any

Governmental authorities, acts or war rebellion, sabotage, fire, floods,

explosions riots or illegal strikes, provided always that such occurrences

result in impossibility of performances of the contract.

23.2 Only events of Force Majeure which impedes the execution of the contract at

the time of its occurrence shall be taken into cognizance.

24. Compensation For Delay:

24.1. Time is essence of the contract. In case the contractor fails to complete the

work within the stipulated period, he shall be liable to pay to the Owner as

compensation, an amount equal to 1% of the value of contract per week of the

delay subject to a maximum of 10% of the value of the contract. This is a

genuine pre-estimate of the loss/ damage which will be suffered on account

of delay /breach on the part of the contractor and he agrees to pay the said

amount on demand without going in for any proof of the actual loss or

damages caused by such delay/ breach.

24.2. To ensure good progress during execution of work, the contractor shall be

bound in all case in which the time allowed for any work exceeds by one

month to complete one-fifth of the work before one-fourth of the time

allowed under the contractor has elapsed, three-eighth of the work before the

half of such time has elapsed and three-fourth of the work before three–fourth

of such time has elapsed. In the event of the contractor failing to comply with

this condition, he shall be liable to pay as compensation for delay an amount

as stipulated above. The compensation for delay so paid shall not relieve the

contractor from his obligations to complete the work or from any other

obligations and liabilities under this contract.

25. Failure by the Contractor to Comply with the Provisions of the Contract:

25.1. If the contractor refuses or fails to execute the work or any separate part

thereof with such diligence as will ensure its completion within the time

specified in the contract or extension thereof or fails to perform any of his

obligation under the Contract or in any manner commits a breach of any of

the provisions of the contract it shall be open to the Owner at its option by

written notice to the Contractor to: -

(a) Determine the Contract: In which event the Contract shall stand terminated

and shall cease to be in force and effect on and from the date appointed by the

Owner on that behalf, whereupon the contractor shall stop forth with any of

the contractor’s work then in progress, except such work as the Owner may,

in writing, requires to be done to safeguard any property or work, or


Page 27 of 96

installations from damage, and the owner, for its part, may take over the work

remaining unfinished by the Contractor and complete the same through fresh

contractor or by other means, at the risk and cost of the Contractor, and any

of his sureties if any, shall be liable to the owner for any excess cost

occasioned by such work having to be so taken over and completed by the

Owner over and above the cost at the rates specified in the schedule of

quantities and rates.

(b) Without determining the Contract: To take over the work of the contractor or

any part thereof and complete the same through a fresh contractor or by other

means at the risk and cost of the Contractor. The contractor and any of his

sureties are liable to the Owner for any excess cost over and above the cost at

the rates specified in the schedule of quantities/ rates, occasioned by such

works having been taken over and completed by the Owner. Besides, the

contractor shall also be liable for any compensation accruing under clause 24.

(c) In other cases, the decision of the Owner is binding on the contractor.

25.2. In such events of clause 25.1 (a) or (b) above

(a) The whole or part of the security deposit furnished by the Contractor is liable

to be forfeited without prejudice to the right of the Owner to recover from the

contractor the excess cost referred to in the sub-clause aforesaid, the Owner

shall also have the right of taking possession and utilizing in completing the

works or any part thereof, such of materials, equipment and plants available

at work site belonging to the contractor as may be necessary and the

Contractor shall not be entitled for any compensation for use or damage to

such materials, equipment and plant.

(b) The amount that may have become due to the Contractor on account of work

already executed by him shall not be payable to him until after the expiry of

six (6) calendar months reckoned from the date of termination of contract or

from the taking over of the work or part thereof by the Owner as the case may

be, during which period the responsibility for faulty materials or

workmanship in respect of such work shall under the contract, rest

exclusively with the contractor. This amount shall be subject to deduction of

any amounts due from the Contractor to the Owner under the terms of the

contract authorised or required to be reserved or retained by the Owner.

25.3. Before determining the contract as per clause 25.1 ( a) or (b) provided in the

judgement of the Owner, the default or defaults committed by the Contractor

is/are curable and can be cured by the Contract if an opportunity given to

him, then the Owner may issue notice in writing calling the Contractor to

cure the default within such time specified in the notice.

25.4. The Owner shall also have the right to proceed or take action as per 25.1 (a)

or Clause 25.1(b) above, in the event that the contractor becomes bankrupt,

insolvent, compounds with his creditors, assigns the contract in favour of his


Page 28 of 96

creditors or any other person or persons or being a company or a corporation

goes into liquidation, provided that in the said events it shall not be necessary

for the Owner to give any prior notice to the contractor.

25.5. Termination of the Contract as provided for in sub-Clause 25.1 (a) above

shall not prejudice or affect their rights of the Owner which may have

accrued upto the date of such termination.

26. Contractor Remains Liable to Pay Compensation if Action Not Taken

Under Clause 25.

In any case in which any of the powers conferred upon the owner by clause 25 hereof shall have become exercisable and the same had not been

exercised, the non-exercise thereof shall not constitute a waiver of any of the

conditions hereof and such powers shall not withstanding be exercisable in

the event of any further case of default by the contractor for which by any

clause or clauses hereof he is declared liable to pay compensation amount to

the whole of his security deposit and the liability of the contractor for past

and future compensation shall remain unaffected. In the event of the Owner

putting in force the powers vested in him under the proceeding clause no. 25

he may if he do so desires, take possession of all or any tools and plants,

materials and stores in or upon the works of the site thereof belonging to the

contractor or procured by him and intended to be used for the execution of

the work or any part thereof paying or allowing for the same in account at the

contract rates or in case of these not being applicable at current market rates

to be certified by the Engineer-in-Charge whose certificate thereof shall be

final, otherwise the Engineer-in-Charge may give notice in writing to the

contractor or his clerk of the works, foremen or other authorised agent,

requiring him to remove such tools, plant, materials or stores form the

premises (within a time to be specified in such notice), and in the event of the

contractor failing to comply with any such requisition, the Engineer-in-

Charge may remove them at the contractor’s expenses or sell them by auction

or private sale on account of the contract and at his risk in all respects without

any further notice as to the date, time or place of sale and the certificate of the

Engineer-in-Charge as to the expense of any such removal and the amount of

the proceeds and expenses of any such sale shall be final and conclusive

against the contractor.

27. No Compensation For Alteration in or Restriction of Work:

At any time from the commencement of the work if the Owner decides for

whatsoever reason, not to carryout the whole work or part thereof as specified

in the tender, then owner shall give notice in writing of the fact to the

contractor, who shall have no claim to any payment or compensation on

whatsoever account (profit or advantage which he might have derived by

executing the work in full) neither shall he have any claim for compensation

by reason of any alterations having been made from the original

specifications, drawings, designs and instructions which may involve any

curtailment of the work as originally contemplated.


Page 29 of 96

28. Change in Constitution:

When the contractor is a partnership firm the prior approval in writing from

the Owner shall be obtained before any changes are made in the constitution

of the firm, where the contractor is an individual or a Hindu undivided family

business concern. Such approval as aforesaid shall, like wise be obtained

before such contractor enters into any agreement with other parties, where

under the reconstituted firm would have the right to carry out the work hereby

undertaken by the contractor. In either case if prior approval is not obtained.

The contractor shall be deemed to have been allotted in contravention of

Clause - 34 hereof and the action and consequence shall ensure as provided in

that clause.

29. Termination of Contract For Death:

If the Contractor is an individual or a proprietary concern and the individual

or the proprietor dies or if the contractor is a partnership concern and one of

the partners dies then, unless the Owner is satisfied that the legal

representative of the individual or the proprietary concern or the surviving

partners are capable of carrying out and completing contract, he (the Owner)

is entitled to cancel the contract for the uncompleted part without being in

any way liable for any compensation payment to the estate of the diseased

contractor and/or to the surviving partners of the contractor’s firm on account

of the cancellation of contract. The decision of the Owner in such assessment

shall be final and binding on the parties. In the event of such cancellation, the

Owner shall not hold the estate of the diseased contractor and / or the

surviving partners of the contractor’s firm liable for any damages for non- completion of contract.

30. Members of the Owner Not individually Liable:

No Director or official or employee of the Owner shall in any way be

personally bound or liable for the acts or obligations of the Owner under the

contract or answerable for any default or omission in the observance or

performance of the acts, matters or things which are herein contained.

31. Owner Not Bound by Personal Representation:

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase on the scheduled rates or

any other rights or claims whatsoever by reason of any representation,

explanation, statement or alleged understanding promise or guarantees given

or to have been given to him by any person.

32. Contractors Office at Site:

The Contractor shall provide and maintain an office at the site for the

accommodation of his agent and staff and such office shall be open at all

reasonable hours to receive instructions, notices or other communications.

The contractor at all time shall maintain a site instruction book and

compliance of these shall be communicated to the Engineer –in-Charge from

time to time and the whole document to be preserved and handed over after

completion of works.


Page 30 of 96

33. Contractor’s Sub-ordinate Staff and their conduct :

33.1. The contractor on award of the work shall name and depute a qualified

engineer having sufficient experience in carrying out work of similar nature

to whom the equipment, materials if any, shall be issued and instruction for

works given. The contractor shall also provide to the satisfaction of the

Engineer-in-charge sufficient and qualified staff to supervise the execution of

the works, competent sub-agents, foremen and leading hands including those

specially qualified by previous experience to supervise the types works

comprised in the contract in such manner as will ensure the best quality and

expeditious working. At any time of in the opinion of the Engineer-in-

Charge any additional, qualified experienced staff is considered necessary,

they shall be employed by the contractor without additional charge. The

contractor shall ensure to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that sub-

contractors, if any, shall provide competent and efficient supervision over the

work entrusted to them.

33 .2. If any of the contractor’s sub-contractor’s, agents, sub-agents, assistants,

foremen or any employee in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge be guilty of

any misconduct or be incompetent or insufficiently qualified or negligent in

the performance of their duties or that in the opinion of the Owner Engineer-

in-Charge, undesirable for administrative or any other reasons, for such or

person (s) to be employed on the works, then at the directions of Engineer-in-

Charge the Contractor shall at once remove such person (s) from employment

with the works without the written permission of the Engineer –in-Charge.

Vacancy so created shall be immediately filled at the expenses of the

contractor by a qualified and competent substitute. Should the contractor be

requested to repatriate any person removed from the works he shall do so and

shall bear all costs in connection therewith.

33.3. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper behaviour of all the staff,

foremen, workmen and others, shall exercise proper degree of control over

them and in particular without prejudice to the said generality the contractor

shall be bound to prohibit/ prevent any employees from trespassing or acting

in any way detrimental or prejudicial to the interest of the community or the

properties or the occupiers of land or properties in the neighborhood. In the

event of such trespassing, the contractor shall be responsible for all

consequent claims or actions for damages or injury or any other grounds

whatsoever. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge upon any matter arising

under this clause shall be final.

33.4. If and when required by the Owner, all contractor’s personnel entering upon

the owner’s premises shall be properly identified by badges of a type

acceptable to the owner which must be worn at all times on Owner’s

premises.


Page 31 of 96

33.5. It is made clear that no relationship of employer and employee is created

between the owner and the contractor labourer and no claim for employment

of any such labourer shall be tenable or entertained.

34. Sub-Letting Work:

34.1. No part of the contract nor any share or interest there in shall in any manner

or degree be transferred, assigned or sublet by the contractor directly or

indirectly to any person, firm or corporation whatsoever except as provided

for in the succeeding sub-clauses without the consent in writing of the Owner.

34.2. Sub – Contracting of Works:

The Engineer-in-Charge may give written consent to sub-contract for the

execution of any part of the works at the site, provided the contractor submits

each individual sub-contract to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval of mode

of operation and agency for the work. The contractor is advised not to enter

into contract before the consent of Engineer-in-Charge.

34.3. List of sub-contracted works to be furnished:

At the commencement of each month, the contractor shall furnish to the

Engineer-in-charge, a list of sub-contractors, persons or firms engaged by the

contractor and worked at the site during the previous month with particulars

like general nature of the sub-contract or works done by them.

34.4. Contractor’s liability not Limited by Sub-Contractors:

Notwithstanding any sub-letting with such approval as aforesaid and

notwithstanding that the Engineer-in-Charge shall have received copies of

any sub-contracts, the contractors shall be and shall remain solely responsible

for the quality and proper and expeditious execution of the works and the

performance of all the conditions of the contract in all respects as if such sub-

contract or sub-letting had not taken place, and as if such work had been done

directly by the contractor.

34.5. Owner may terminate sub-contracts:

If any sub-contractor engaged upon the works at the site executes any work

which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge is not in accordance with the

contract documents, the owner may by written notice to the contractor request

him to terminate such sub-contract. The contractor upon the receipt of such

notice shall terminate and dismiss the sub-contract and the sub-contractor.

The owner shall have the right to remove such sub-contractor from the site if

contractor fails to vacate the sub-contractor immediately.

34.6. No remedy for action taken under this clause:

For action taken by the owner under the clause shall not relieve the contractor

of any of his liabilities under the contract or give rise to any right or

compensation, extension of time or otherwise.

35. Power of Entry:


Page 32 of 96

If the contractor shall not commence the work in the manner described in the

contract documents or if he at any time in the opinion of the Engineer-in-

Charge.

(i) fail to carry on the works in conformity with the contract documents or

(ii) fail to carry on the works in accordance with the contract schedule or

(iii) substantially suspend work or the works for a period of fourteen days

without authority from the Engineer-in-Charge or

(iv) fail to carry on and execute the works to the satisfaction of Engineer-

in-Charge or

(v) fail to supply sufficient or suitable constructional plant, temporary

works, labour materials or other things or

(vi) Commit, suffer or permit any other breach of any of the provisions of

the contract on his part to be performed or observed or persist in any of

the above mentioned breaches of the contract for fourteen days, after

notice in writing shall have been given to the contractor by the

Engineer-in-Charge requiring such breach to be remedied or

(vii) If the contractor abandons the works or

(viii) If the contractor during the continuance of the contract shall become

bankrupt, make any arrangement or composition with his creditors, or

permit any execution to be levied or go into liquidation whether

compulsory or voluntary not being merely a voluntary liquidation for

the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction then in any such case,

the owner shall have the power to enter upon the works and take

possession thereof and of the materials, temporary works,

constructional plant, and stock thereon, and to revoke the contractor’s

licence to use the same, and to complete the works by his agents, other

contractors, or workmen, or to relate the same upon any terms and to

such other person, firm or corporation as the Owner in his absolute

discretion may think proper to employ and for the purpose aforesaid to

use or authorize the use of any materials, temporary works,

constructional plant, and stock as aforesaid, without making payment

or allowance to the contractor for the said materials other than such as

may be certified in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge to be reasonable,

and without making any payment or allowance to the contractor for the

use of temporary said works, constructional plant and stock or being

liable for any loss or damage thereto and if the Owner shall by reason

or his taking possession of the work or of the works being completed

by other contractor (due account being taken of any such extra work or

works which may be omitted) than the amount of such excess as

certified by the Engineer–in-Charge shall be deducted form any money

which may be due for work done by the contractor under the contract

and not paid for any deficiency shall forthwith be made good and paid

to the Owner by the contractor and the Owner shall have power to sell

in such manner and for such price as he may think fit all or any of the

constructional plan, materials etc. constructed by or belonging to and


Page 33 of 96

to recoup and retain the said deficiency or any part thereof out of the

proceeds or the sale.

36. Contractor’s Responsibility with other Agencies:

36.1 Without repugnance to any other condition, it shall be the responsibility of

the contractor executing the work of civil construction to work in close

cooperation and to coordinate in the works with the mechanical, electrical,

air-conditioning and intercommunication contractors and other agencies or

their authorised representatives, in providing the necessary grooves, recesses,

cuts and opening etc. in wall, slabs beams and column etc. and making good

the same to the desired finish as per specification, for the placement of

electrical and intercommunication cables, conduits, air-conditioning inlets

and outlets, grills and other equipment in the false ceiling and other

partitions, the contractor before starting up the work shall in consultation,

with the electrical, mechanical, inter-communication, air-conditioning

contractors and other agencies prepare and put up a joint scheme, showing the

necessary opening, grooves, recesses, cuts, the methods of fixing required for

the works of the aforesaid, and the finishes therein, to the Engineer-in-Charge

and get the approval. The contractor before finally submitting the scheme to

the Engineer-in-Charge, shall have the written agreement of the other

agencies. The Engineer-in-Charge, before communicating his approval to the

scheme, with any required modifications shall get the final agreements of all

the agencies, which shall be binding. No claim shall be entertained on account

of the above.

36.2 The contractor shall conform in all respect with the provisions any statutory

regulation, ordinance or bye-laws of any local or duly constituted authorities

or public bodies which may be applicable from time to time to the works or

any temporary works. The contractor shall keep the Owner indemnified

against all penalties and liabilities of every kind, arising out of non-adherence

to such statues, ordinances, laws, rules, regulations, etc.

37. Other Agencies at Site:

The contractor shall have to execute the work in such place and condition

where other agencies will also be engaged for other works such as site

grading, filling and leveling, electrical and mechanical engineering works etc.

No claim shall be entertained due to work being executed in the above

circumstances.

38. Serving of Notices:

38.1. To the Contractor:

Any notice may be served on the contractor or his duly authorised

representatives at the job site or by registered mail directly to the address

furnished by the contractor. Proof of issue of such notice should be conclusive

of the contractor having been duly informed of the contents.

38.2. To the Owner:


Page 34 of 96

Any notice to be given to the Owner under the terms of the contract shall be

served by sending the same by Registered mail to or delivering the same at

the respective site offices of M/s. National Aluminium Co. Ltd. addressed to

the head/ site in-charge.

38.3. Rights of various Interests:

(i) The Owner reserves the right to distribute the work between more than one

contractor. The contractor shall cooperate and afford the other contractors all

reasonable opportunity for access to the works for the carriage and storage of

materials and execution of their works.

(ii) Wherever the work being done by any department of the Owner or by the

contractor employed by the Owner as per the contingent upon work covered

by this contract, the respective rights and various interests involved shall be

determined by the Engineer-in-Charge to secure the completion of the various

portions of the work in general harmony.

40. Patents, Royalties, Rent and Excavated Material:

40.1. The contractor, if licensed under any patent covering equipment, machinery,

materials or compositions of matter to be used or supplied or methods and

process to be practiced or employed in the performance of this contract,

agrees to pay all royalties and licence fees which may be due with respect

thereto. If any equipment, machinery, materials composition matters, to be

used or supplied or methods and processes to be practiced or employed the

performance of this contract, is covered by a patent under which the

contractor is not licensed then the contractor before supplying or using the equipment, machinery, materials, composition, method or processes shall

obtain such licenses and pay such royalties and license fees as may be

necessary for performance of this contract. In the event the contractor fails to

pay any royalty or obtain any such license, any suit for infringement of such

patents which is brought against the contractor or the Owner as a result of

such failure will be defended by the contractor at his Own expense and the

contractor will pay damages and costs awarded in such suit. The contractor

shall promptly notify the Owner if the contractor has acquired knowledge of

any plant under which a suit for infringement could be reasonably brought

because of the use by the owner of any equipment, machinery, materials,

process, methods, to be supplied hereunder. The contractor agrees to and

does hereby grant to Owner, together with the right to extent the same to any

of the subsidiaries of the Owner as irrevocable, royalty-free licence to use in

country, any invention made by the contractor or his employee in or as a

result of the performance of the work under the contract.

40.2. All charges on account of royalty, tollage, rent octroi terminal or sales tax

and/ or other duties or any other levy on materials obtained for the work or

temporary work or part thereof (excluding materials provided by the Owner)

shall be borne by the contractor.


Page 35 of 96

40.3. The contractor shall not set or otherwise dispose of or remove except for the

purpose of this contract, the sand stone, clay, ballast, earth, rock or other

substances, or materials obtained from any excavation made for the purpose

of the works or any building or produce upon the sited at the time of delivery

of the possession thereof, but all such substances, materials buildings and

produce shall be the property of the Owner provided that contractor may with

the permission of the Engineer-in-Charge, use the same for the purpose of the

works by payment of cost of the same at such a rate as may be determined by

the Engineer-in-Charge.

The Owner shall indemnify and save harmless the contractor from any loss

on account of claims against contractor for the contributory infringement of

patent rights arising out and based upon the claim that the use by the Owner

of the process included in the design prepared by the Owner and used in the

operation of the plant infringes on patent right. With respect of any sub-

contract entered into by the contractor pursuant to the provisions on the

respect to any sub-contract entered into by the contractor pursuant to the

provisions of the relevant clause thereof, the contractor shall obtain from the

sub contractor an undertaking to provide the Owner with the same patent

protection that contractor is required to provide under the provisions of this

clause.

41. Liens:

41.1. If at any time there should be evidence or any lien, claim for which the Owner might have become liable, which is chargeable to the contractor, then

the Owner may pay and discharge the same and deduct the amount so paid

from any amount which may be or may become due and payable to the

contractor, if any lien or claim remain unsettled after all payments are made,

the contractor shall refund or pay to the Owner the cost such lien or claim

including all payment and reasonable expenses. Owner reserves the right to

the same.

41.2. Nothing Extra for Adverse Sub-Soil Conditions:

The nature of sub-soil of the work site varies widely horizontally and

vertically. The KI and KII values also vary widely from place to place. In

addition the water bearing seems are also conspicuous with the water table at

a depth of 0.75 to 3.0 metres from ground level. A number of cohesive and

non-cohesive strata are available particularly everywhere. The contractor

shall have to make cuts and resort to pumping with due care to avoid

collapsing of sides and occurrence of ‘Piping’. The Contractor shall also be

careful to avoid occurrence of excessive ‘heaving’ by avoiding keeping the

excavation proposed to atmosphere for a longer period.

41.3. Slips and falls in excavation shall be cleared by the contractor at his own cost.


Page 36 of 96

Excessive heaving shall have to cut and refill with lean concrete by the

contractor at his own cost. The contractor shall have to adopt under-water

work in case of occurrence of piping/ quick condition without any additional

cost to the Owner.

The contractor will be paid for the earthwork as per the drawing. The slopes

etc. as required for the safety of the work has to be provided as per the

decision of the Engineer-in-Charge at his own cost. All types of dewatering

including seepage, rain water entering. The earthwork in excavation or from

any other source is to be done by the contractor at his own cost till the

completion of foundation upto ground level including back filling.

41.3. No Compensation in case of change of Location of site :

Change of location of site do not invalidate the contract and tenderer have no

claim for any compensation for such changes.


Page 37 of 96

SECTION – V PERFORMANCE OF WORK

42. Execution of Works:

All the work shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the

contract documents explanatory detailed drawings, specifications and

instructions by the Engineer-in-Charge whether mentioned in the contract or

not. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that works are executed

in the most substantial, proper and workman like manner using the quality

materials and labour, through out the job Completion in strict accordance with

the specifications and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

43. Coordination and inspection of Works:

The coordination and inspection of the day-to-day work under the contract

shall be the responsibility of the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised

representative. A work order book will be maintained by the contractor for

each sector in which the aforesaid written instructions will be entered. These

will be signed by the contractor or his authorised representative by way of

acknowledgement within 12 hours.

44. Works in Monsoon and Dewatering:

44.1 The execution of work may entail working in the monsoon also. The

contractor must maintain a minimum labour force as may be required for the

job. And plan execute the construction and erection according to the

prescribed schedule. No extra will be considered for such work in monsoon.

44.2 During monsoon and other period, it shall be the responsibility of the

contractor to keep the construction work site free from water at his own cost.

45. Work on Sundays and Holidays:

For carrying out works on Sundays and holidays, the contractor will to keep

Engineer-in-Charge or his representative at least two days in advance and

obtain permission in writing. The contractor shall observe all labour laws and

other statutory rules and regulations in force. In case of any violation of such

laws, rules and regulations, consequence if any, including the cost thereto shall

be exclusively borne by the contractor and the Owner shall have no liability

whatsoever on his account.

46. General Conditions of Construction and Erection Work:

46.1 The working time at the time of work is 48 hours per week. Overtime work is

permitted in case of need and the owner will not compensate the same. Shift-

working at 2 or 3 shifts per day will become necessary and the contractor

should take this aspect into consideration for formulating his rates for

quotation. No extra claims will be entertained by the Owner on this account.


Page 38 of 96

46.2 The contractor must arrange for the placement of workers in such a way that

the delayed completion of the work or any part thereof or for any reason

whatsoever will not affect their proper employment. The Owner will not

entertain any claim for old time payment whatsoever.

46.3 The contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge reports at regular

intervals regarding the state and progress of work. The contract shall provide

display boards showing progress and labour strength at work site, as directed

by the Engineer-in-Charge.

46.4 The site of work will be released progressively in stages and no claim for any

compensation or damages will be tenable for non-release of the entire site at a

time.

47. Drawings to be supplied by Owner:

47.1 The drawings attached with tender are only for the general guidance to the

contractor to enable him to visualise the type of work contemplated. The

contractor will be deemed to have studied the drawings and formed an idea

about the total work involved.

47.2 In the Course the progress of work detailed working drawings on the basis of

which actual execution of the work has to proceed, shall be furnished in

stages. The contractor shall be deemed to have gone through the drawings

supplied to him thoroughly and carefully, in conjunction will all other

connected drawings and discrepancies if any, shall be brought to the notice of

the Engineer-in-Charge, before actually carrying out the works.

47.3 Copies of all detailed working drawings relating to the works shall be kept at

the contractor’s office on the site and shall be made available to the Engineer-

in-Charge at any time during the contract period. The drawings and other

documents issued shall be returned to the Owner on completion of the works.

48. Drawings to be supplied by the Contractor:

48.1 The drawings/data which are to be furnished by the contractor are enumerated

in the special conditions of contract and shall be furnished within the specified

time.

48.2 Where approval of drawings for manufacture/construction/fabrication has

been specified it shall be contractor’s resposibility to have these drawings

prepared as pe r the directions of Engineer-in-Charge and get them approved

before proceeding with manufacture/construction/fabriction works as the case

may be. Any changes that may have become necessary in these drawings

during the execution of the work shall have to be carried out by the contractor

to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge at no extra cost. All final approved

drawings shall bear the certification stamp duly signed by both the contractor

and the Engineer-in-Charge as indicated below.


Page 39 of 96

“Certified true for ……………………………………….

(Name of work)

Agreement No ……………………………………

Signed

(Contractor) (Engineer-in-Charge)

48.3 A period of 3 weeks from the date of receipt shall be required for approval of

drawings by the Engineer-in-Charge.

48.4 As built drawing showing all Corrections, adjustments etc. shall be furnished

by the Contractor in five copies and one transparent to record purposes to the

owner.

49 Setting Out Works:

49.1 The Engineer-in-Charge shall furnish to the contractor with only the four

corners of the work site that is plant boundary limits, and a level bench mark

only. The contractor shall set out the works, provide an efficient staff for the

purpose and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of such setting out.

49.2 The contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all

stacks, templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take

all necessary precautions to prevent their removal or disturbance. He shall be

responsible for their consequences arising of such removals, disturbances

corrections thereon and for their efficient and timely reinstatement. The

contractor shall also be responsible for the maintenance of all existing survey

marks, boundary marks, distance marks and centre line marks, either existing

or supplied and fixed by the contractor. The work shall be set out to the

satisfation of the Engineer-in-Charge. The approval thereon or jointing with

the contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge in setting out the work, shall not

relive the contractor of any of his responsibilities.

49.3 Before beginning the work the contractor shall at his own cost, provide all

necessary reference and level posts-pegs, bamboos, flags, ranging rods,

strings, and other materials for proper layout of the work in accordance with

the scheme for bearing marks acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge. The

centre, longitudinal, face and cross lines shall be marked by means of small

masonry pillars. Each pillar shall have distinct mark at the centre to eable the

theodolite to be set over it. No work shall be started until all these points

arechecked and approved by Engineer-in-Charge in writing, but such approval

shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities. The contractor

shall also provide all labour, materials and other facilities as necessary, for the

proper checking or layout and inspection of the points during construction.

49.4 Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the sites of units of works under

construction should be protected and faced by the contractor.


Page 40 of 96

49.5 On completion of work, the contractor must submit the geodetic documents

according to which the work was carried out.

50. Responsibility for Level and Alignment:

50.1 The contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal

and vertical alignment, the level and correctness of every part of the work

shall rectify effectually any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectification

shall be carried out by the contractor at his own cost, when instructions are

issued to that effect by the Engineer-in-Charge.

50.2 Lighting, Watch & Ward:

The contractor shall in connection with works provide and maintain at his

own cost all lightings, guards, fencing and watch and ward and the security of

the entire work in progress in cluding all the machineries, materials shall be

the responsibility of the contractor till taken over by the owner by way of the

written taking over certificate.

51. Materials to be Supplied by Contractor :

51.1 The contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required

for the construction including M.S. Rods, Cement and other building

materials, tools, tackles, construction plant and equipment for the completion

and maintenance of the work except the materials which will be issued by the

Owner and shall make his own arrangement for procuring such materials and

for the transport thereof. The owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authorities, if so desired by the contractor, but assumes no

further responsibility of any nature. The owner will insist on the procurement

of materials which has the approval of Indian Standards Institution having ISI

stamp and/or which are supplied by reputed suppliers borne on DGS & D list.

51.2 The contractor shall properly store all materials either issued to him or brought

by him to the worksite to prevent damages due to rain, wind, direct exposure

to sun etc. as also from theft, pilferage, etc. for proper and speedy execution of

his works. The contractor shall maintain sufficient stocks of all meterials

required by him.

51.3 No material shall be despatched from the contractor’s stores before obtaining

the approval in writing of the Engineer-in-Charge.

51.4 All plants, tools and other materials brought by the contractor to the site must

be declared at the time of bringing the same to the site.

52. Stores Supplied by the Owner:

52.1 If the specification of the work provides for the use of any material other than

Steel & Cement of special description to be supplied from the Owner’s stores

or it is required that the contractor shall use certain stores to be provided by


Page 41 of 96

the Engineer-in-Charge, such materials and stores, and price to be charged

therefore as hereinafter mentioned being so far as practicable for the

convinience of the contractor, but no so as in way to control the meaning or

effect of the contract, the contract shall be bound to purchase and shall be

supplied much materials and stores as are from time to time required to be

used by him for the purpose of the contract only. The sums due from the

contractor for the value of materials supplied by the Owner will be recovered

from the Running Account Bill on the basis of actual consumption of materials

(after taking into account any wastage allowance as may be provided for in the

contract). The contractor should raise requisite copies of indents in a

proforma as prescribed by the Engineer-in-Charge and no claim whatsoever

will be entertained by the Engineer-in-Charge on this account. After

completion of the works, the contractor is required to account as per relevant

clauses in this document, for the full quantity of materials supplied to him.

52.2The value of the stores/materials as may be supplied to the contractor by the

Owner will be debited to the contractor’s account at the rates shown in the

schedule of materials and if they are not entered in the schedule, they will be

debited at cost price, which for the purpose of thecontract shall include the cost of

carriage and all other expenses whatsoever such as normal storage supervision

charges which shall have been incurred in obtaining the same at the Owner’s

stores. All materials so supplied to the contractor shall remain the obsolute

property of the Owner and shall not be removed on any account from the site of

the work and shall be at all times open for inspection to the Engineer-in-Charge.

Any such materials remaining unused at the time of the completion or termination

of the contract shall be returned to the Owner’s stores or at a place as directed by

the Engineer-in-Charge in perfectly good condition at contractor’s cost.

52.3 Steel & Cement:

52.3.1 If the specification of the work provides for the use of steel or cement such

items of steel and cement to the extent required as per the specification of the

works, shall be supplied at Owner’s stores by the Owner for utilisation in the

work on non-chargable basis from time to time depending upon the progress

of the work. The tender rates shall be exclusive of the cost of steel and cement

to be supplied as per the specification of the work, However, in case of flats

and chequeuered plates the same have to be procured by the contractor at his

own cost.

52.3.2 Such materials of steel and cement shall be issued only for permanent works

and not for making other temporary works etc. Contractor shall bear all cost

including lifting and loading carting from issue points to work site/contractor

stores, custody and handling etc. and return of surplus

serviceable/unserviceable materials to owner’s store or other places to be

designed by owner and no separate payment for such expenditure shall be

made.


Page 42 of 96

52.3.3 Items of steel as per specification of the work as mentioned above shall be

supplied in the available length only. No claim on account of supply of non-

standard length shall be entertained. Steel materials shall be issued on actual

weight basis.

52.3.4 Cement as mentioned above will be supplied to the contractor a receive from

the manufacturer/stockist. The theoretical weight of each bag of cement

supplied will be considered as 50 Kg.

52.3.5 Scraps & Surplus Material:

The Contractor shall return all the surplus/unutilised as well as the scraps and

wastages out of the materials supplied to him to the Owner’s stores in a

perfectly good condition at the contractor’s cost. However, the following

scraps allowances are permissible.

Unaccountable Accountable

(i) Cement 3% Nil

(ii) Reinforcement Steel ½% 2.5%

(iii) Steel structural (Plates & Sections) ½% 4.5%

(iv) M.S. Plates for fabrication of Pipes ½% As per cutting diagrams

approved by Engineer-in-

Charge before cutting and

fabrication.

52.3.6 Return of unutilised/surplus materials and scrap/wastage:

In respect of any utilised/surplus quantities of cement and steel supplied by not

accounted for and or returned by the contractor shall pay to the Owner

amounts at the penal rate of twice the SAIL, Bhubaneswar Stock-yard rate of

that particular section of steel and cement as the case may be as on the date of

accountability. If the Contractor fails to return the scraps/wastage generated

as per the above percentage, recovery of such scrap/wastage shall be made at

the rate of Rs. 7000/- per tonne.

The charging of penal rate shall be without the prejudice to the other remedies

or action available to the owner against the contractor including any criminal

action.

52.3.7. Accounting for Materials:

Every month the Contractor shall submit a statement for all the materials

supplied to him by the owner in the proforma prescribed by the Engineer-in-

Charge.

52.3.8 On completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit material appropriation

statement for the materials supplied to him by the Owner.

52.3.9 All materials supplied to the contractor shall remain the absolute property of

the all times and title therein shall not pass to the contractor at any time. The

possession of the materials in the hands of the contractor is only for the


Page 43 of 96

purpose of incorporating the same in the Owner’s work. The material supplied

shall not be removed by the contractor on any account from the site of work

and shall be at all times open for inspection by the Engineer-in-Charge or

owners representative. The contractor shall not use the materials supplied

to him for any purpose or work other than the work, which the said materials

are supplied.

53. Conditions for issue of Materials:

(i) Materials specified as to be issued by the Owner will be supplied to the

contractor by the Owner from his stores. It shall be the responsibility of the

contractor to take delivery of the materials and arrange for its loading,

transport and unloading at the site work at his own cost. The material shall

be issued during the working hours of his Stores and as pe the rules of the

Owner framed from time to time.

(ii) The contractor shall bear all incidental charges for the storage and safe

custody of materials at site after these have been issued to him.

(iii) The contractor shall construct suitable godown at the site of work for storing

the materials safe against damage by rain, dampness, fire, theft, etc. He shall

also employ necessary watch and ward establishment for the purpose.

(iv) Materials specified as to be issued by the Owner shall be issued in standard

sizes as obtained from the manufacturers.

(v) It shall be duty of the contractor to inspect the materials supplied to his at the

time of taking delivery and satisfy himself that they are in good condition.

After the materials have been delivered by the Owner, it shall be the

responsility of the contractor to keep them in good condition and if the

materials are damaged or lost, at any time, they shall be repaired and.or replaced by him at his own cost according to the directions of the Engineer-

in-Charge.

(vi) The Owner shall not be liable for delay in supply or non-supply of any

materials, which the Owner has unertaken to supply where such failure or

delay is due to natural calamities, act of enemies, transport and procurement

difficulties and any circumstances beyond the control of the Owner. In no

case, the contractor shall be entitled to claim any compensation or loss

suffered by him on his account.

(vii) It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to arrange in time all materials

required for the works other than those to be supplied by the Owner. If

however in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge the execution of the work.

Is likely to be delayed due to the contractor’s inability’s to make

arrangements for supply of materials which normally he has to arrange for,

the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right at his own discretion to issue such

materials if available with the Owner or procure the materials from the

market or elswhere. The contractor will be bound to take such materials at

the rates decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. This however, does not in

anyway absolve the contractor from responsibility of making arrangement for

the supply of such materials in part or in full, should such a situation occur

nor shall this constitute a reason for the delay in the exectution of the work.


Page 44 of 96

(viii) Non of the materials supplied to the contractor will be utilised by the

contractor for manufacturing item which can be obtained as supplied from

standard manufacturer in finished form unless approved by Engineer-in-

Charge in writing.

(ix) The contractor shall, if desired by the Engineer-in-Charge, be required to

execute an indemnity bond in the prescribed form for safe custody, usage and

accounting of all materials issued by the Owner.

(x) The contractor shall furnish to Engineer-in-Charge sufficiently in advance a

statement showing his requirements of the quantities of the materials to be

supplied by the Owner and the time when the same will be required by him

for the works, so as to enable the Engineer-in-Charge to make necessary

arrangement for procurement and supply of material.

(xi) Account of the materials to be issued by the Owner shall be maintained by

the contractor indicating the daily receipt, consumption and balance in hand

in a manner prescribed by the Enginner-in-Charge. All connected papers

requisitions, issues returns etc. shall be always available for inspection in the

contractor’s office at site.

(xii) The contractor should see that only the required quantities of materials are

got issued. The contractor shall not be entitled to cartage and incidential

charges for returning the surplus materials, if any, to the stores, place of issue

or to the place as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

(xiii) Materials/equipment supplied by Owner shall not be utilised for any other

purpose (s) than issued for.

(xiv) The owner may issue the material in phases at his discretion keeping in view

the programmes of the work.

(xv) In case of free issue of materials, the contractor shall submit an indemnity

bond in the prescribed format for 80% (eighty) value of the materials and a

bank guarantee for 20% (twenty) of the value of the materials. The indemnity

bond and bank guarantee shall be valid till the material acount is totally

settled.

54. Return of Surplus:

Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any or all the clauses of

this contract where any materials for the execution of the contract are procured

with the assistance of the Owner either by issue from Owner’s stock or

purchases made under orders, or permits or licences issued by government the

contractor shall hold the said materials as trustee for the owner and use such

materials economically and solely for the purpose of the contract and not

dispose them off without the permission of the Owner and return, if required

by the project head all surplus or unserviceable materials that may be left with

him after the completion of the contract or at its termination for any reason

whatsoever on his being paid or credited such price as the Project head shall

determine having due regard so the condition of the materials. The price

allowed to the contractor however, shall not exceed the amount charged to him

excluding the storage charges, if any. The decision of the project head shall be

final and conclusive in such matter. In the event of breach of the aforesaid

conditions, the contractor shall, in the terms of the licences, or permits and/ or


Page 45 of 96

for criminal breach of trust, be liable to compensate the Owner at double rate

or any higher, in the event of those materials at the time having higher rate or

not being available in the market, then any other rate to be determined by the

project head and his decision shall be final and conclusive.

55. Materials Obtained From Dismantling:

If the contractor in the course of execution of the work is called upon to

dismantle any part for reasons other than those stipulated in clauses 57 and 65

hereunder, the materials obtained in the work of dismantling etc. will be

considered as the Owner’s property and will be disposed off to the best

advantage of the Owner.

56. Articles of Value Found:

All gold silver and other materials of any descriptions, precious stones, coins,

treasures, relics, antiques and other similar things which shall be found, in,

under or upon the site, shall be property of the Owner and the contractor shall

duly preserve the same to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall

from time to time delivery the same to such person or persons indicated by the

Owner.

57. Inspection of Works:

57.1 The Engineer-in-Charge will have full power and authority to inspect the

works in progress at any time wherever the premises/ workshops situated, of the

Contractor, person, firm or corporation where works in connection with the

contract may be or where materials are being or intended to be supplied.

The contractor shall afford or procure every facility and assistance to

Engineer-in-Charge carry out such inspection. The contractor shall, at all

time during the usual working hours and at all other times at which reasonable

notice of the intention of the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative to visit

the works shall have been given to the contractor, either himself be present to

receive orders and instructions or have a responsible agent duly accredited in

writing be present for the purpose. Orders given to the contractor’s agent

shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the

contractor himself. 57.2 The contractor shall give not less than seven days notice in writing to the

Engineer-in-Charge before covering up or otherwise placing beyond reach of

inspection and measurement any work in order that the same may be

inspected and measured. In the event of failure of above the same shall be

uncovered and all facilities made available again at contractor’s expense for

carrying out such measurement or inspection.

57.3 The contractor is to provide at all times during the progress of the work and

maintenance period proper means at access with ladders gangways etc. and the

necessary attendance to move and adopt as directed for inspection

or measurement of the works by the Engineer-in-Charge.

58. Assistance to the Engineer:

The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer-in-Charge free of cost all

necessary instructions and assistance in checking of settling out of works and


Page 46 of 96

in the checking of any works made by the contractor for the purpose 0f setting

out and taking measurements of work.

59. Discrepancies between instructions:

Should any discrepancy arise between the various instructions furnished to the

contractor or his agents or staff or if any doubt arises on the meaning or

implementation of any such instructions or should there be any difference of

opinion on the issues, the contractor shall refer the matter immediately in

writing to the Engineer-in-Charge whose decisions thereon shall be final and

conclusive. No claim on losses alleged to have been caused by such

discrepancies between instructions, doubts or misunderstanding shall in any

event be admissible.

60. Alterations in Specifications and Designs and Extra Works:

(a) The Project Head shall have power to make any alterations, in omission

from additions to or substitutions, for the schedule of rates, the original

specifications, drawings and instructions that may appear to him to be

necessary or advisable during the progress of the work, and the contractor

shall be bound to carry out such altered/ extra/ new items of work in

accordance with any instructions which may be given to him in writing

signed by the Project Head and such alterations, omissions, additions or

substitutions shall not invalidate the contract and any altered, additional or

substituted work which the contractor may be directed to do in the manner

above specified as part of the work shall be carried out by the contractor

on the same conditions in all respects on which he agreed to do the main

work. The time of completion of work may be extended for the part of the particular job at the discretion of the Project Head for any such alterations,

additions, or substitutions of the work, as he may consider as just and

reasonable. The rates for such additional, altered or substituted work

under the clause shall be worked out in accordance with the following

provisions:-

(b) If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in

the contract for the work, the contractor is bound to carry out the

additional, altered or substituted work at the same rates as are specified in

the contract.

(c) If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not

specifically provided in the contract for the work, the rates will be derived

from rates for similar class of work as are specified in the contract for the

work. The opinion of the Project head as to whether or not the rates can be

reasonably so derived from the items in this contract will be final and

binding on the contractor.

(d) If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work can not be

determined in the manner specified in sub-clause (a) & (b) above, then the

contractor shall within 7 days of the date of receipt of order to carry out


Page 47 of 96

the work, inform the Project Head of the rate which it is his intention to

charge for such class of work, supported by analysis of the rate or rates

claimed, and the project Head shall determine the rate or rates on the basis

of the prevailing market rates of materials plus labour cost including

equipment hire charge at schedule of hourly/ daily rates plus 15% to cover

contractor’s supervisions overhead and profit and pay to the contractor

accordingly. The opinion of the Project Head to current market rates of

the materials and the quantum of labour and equipment involved per unit

of measurement will be final and binding on the contractor. The schedule

of hourly/ daily rates shall be as enclosed.

61. Action Where no Specification is issued:

In case of any class of work for which there is no such specification supplied

by the Owner as is mentioned in the tender document such work shall be

carried out in accordance with the Indian Standard Specifications. If the

Indian Standard Specifications do not cover the same, the work should carried

out as per standard Engineer in Practice subject to the approval of the

Engineer-in-Charge.

62 Abnormal Rates:

The contractor is expected to quote the rate for each item after careful analysis

of cost involved for the satisfactory performance and completion of item work

considering all specifications and conditions of contract. This will avoid loss

of profit or gain in case ofcurtailment or change in specification for any other

item. In case the rate quoted by the tenderer for any item are usually high or

unusually low it will be sufficient cause of the rejection of the tender unless the Owner is convinced about the reasonableness of the analysis for such rate

furnished by the tenderer (on demand) after scrutiny.

63. Tests For Quality Works:

63.1 All materials and workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in

the contract documents and in accordance with the instructions of the

Engineer-in-Charge and shall be subjected from time to time to such tests at

contractor’s cost as the Engineer-in-Charge may direct at the place of

manufacture or fabrication or at the site or at all or any such places. The

contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, machines, labour and

materials as are required for examining, measuring and testing any

workmanship as may be selected and required by the Engineer-in-Charge.

63.2 All the tests that will be necessary in connection with the execution of the

work as decided by Engineer-in-Charge shall be carried out at the field testing

laboratory of this Owner if available by paying the charges as decided by the

Owner from time to time. In case of non-availability of testing facilities with

the Owner, the required laboratory as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

63.3 If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or

materials or workmanship not supplied by the contractor, such tests shall be


Page 48 of 96

carried out by the contractor as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge and

cost of such tests shall be reimbursed by the Owner.

64. Samples:

The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval when

request or if required by the specifications, adequate samples of all materials

and finished to be used in the work. Such samples shall be submitted before

the work is commenced and in sample time to permit tests and examinations

thereof. All materials furnished and finishes applied in actual work shall be

fully equal to the approved samples.

65 Liabilities for Defect, Imperfections etc. and Rectifications Thereof:

If it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge that any work has been executed

with unsound, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials of any

inferior description, or that any matrials or articles provided by the contractor

for the execution of work are unsound or of quality inferior to that contracted

for, or otherwise not in accordance with the contract, the contractor shall on

demand in writing from the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised

representative specifying the work, materials or articles complained of,

notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently passed, certified

and paid for, forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct that work so

specified and provide other proper and suitable materials or articles at his own

charge and cost, and in the event of failure to do so within a period to be

specified by the Engineer-in-Charge in his demand aforesaid, the Engineer-in-

charge may on expiry of notice period rectify or remove, and re-execute the

work or remove and replace with others, the materials or articles complained of as the case may be at the risk and expense in all respects of the contract.

The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as to any question arising under this

clause shall be final and conclusive.

66. Suspension of Works:

(i) Subject to the provision of sub para (ii) of this clause, the contractor shall if

orderded in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge., or his representative,

temporarily suspend the works or any part thereof such period and such time

as so orderded and shall not, after receiving such written orders, proceeds with

the work therein, orderded to be suspended until he shall have received a

written order to proceed therewith. The contractor shall not be entitled to

claim compesation for any loss or damage sustained by him by reason of

temporary suspension of the works aforesaid. An extension of time for

completion, corresponding with the delay caused by any such suspension of

the works as aforesaid will be granted to the contractor should be apply for the

same provided that the suspension was not consequent to any default or failure

on the part of the contractor.

(ii) In case of suspension of entire work, orderded in writing by the Enginner-in-

Charge, for a period of more than two months, the contractor shall have the

option to terminate contract.


Page 49 of 96

67. Possession Prior to Completion:

The Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to take possession of or any

completed or partially completed work or part of the work. Such possession or

use shall not be deemed to be an acceptance of any work completed in

accordance with the contract. If such prior possession or use by the Engineer-

in-Charge delay the progress of work, equitable adjustment in the time of

completion will be made and the contract agreement shall be deemed to be

modified accordingly.

68 Twelve months Period of Liability from the Date of Issue of Completion

Certificate:

68.1 The contractor shall gurantee the installation/work for a period of 12 months

from the date of completion of work as certified by the Engineer-in-Charge

which is indicated in the completion certificate. Any damage or defect that

may arise though remained undeiscovered at the time of issue of completion

certificate, connected in any way with the equipment or materials supplied by

him or in the workmanship shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at

his own expenses as deemed necessary by the Engineer-in-Charge or in

default the Engineer-in-Charge may cause the same to be made good by other

agency and deduct expenses (of which the certificate or Engineer-in-Charge

shall be final) from any sums that may be then or at any time thereafter

become due to the contractor or from his security deposit, or the proceeds of

sale thereof or of a sufficient portion thereof.

68.2 If the contractor feels that any variation in work or in quality of materials or

proportions would be beneficial or necessary to fulfil the guarantees called for,

he shall bring this in writing to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge.

68.3 Care of works:

From the commencement of completion of the work, the contractor shall take

full responsibility for the care of all works including all temporary works and

in case any damage, loss or injury shall happen to the work or to any part

thereof or to any temporary works from any cause whatsoever, shall at his own

cost repair and make good the same so that on completion the work shall be in

good order and in conformity in every respects with the requirements of the

contract and the Engineer-in-Charge’s Instructions.

68.4 Defects Prior to Taking Over:

If at any time before the work is taken over, the Engineer-in-Charge shall: (a) Decide that any work done or materials used by the contractor or any sub-

contractor is defective or not in accordance with the contract, or that the

works or any portion therof are defective, or do not fulfil the requirements

of contract (allsuch matter, being hereinafter, called ‘Defects’ in this clause)

and (b) as soon as reasonably practicable gives to the contractor notice in

writing of the said decision specifying particulars of the defects claimed to

exist or to have occurred then the contractor shall at his own expenses and

with all speed make good the defects so specified.


Page 50 of 96

In case contractor shall fail to do so, the Owner may take, at the cost of

contractor, such steps as may in all circumstances be reasonable to make

good such defects. The expenditure so incurred by the owner be recovered

from the amount due to the contractor. The decision of the Engineer-in-

Charge with regard to the amount to be recovered from the contractor will

be final and binding on the contractor. As soon as the works have been

completed in accordance with the contract (except minor respects that do

not affect their use for the purpose for which they are intended and except

for maintenance thereof provided in clause 68.1 of General Conditions of

Contract) and have passed the tests on completion, the Engineer-in-Charge

shall issue a certificate (hereinafter called completion certificate) in which

he shall certify the date on which the works have been so completed and

have passed the said tests and the Owner shall be deemed to have taken

over the works on the date so certified. If the works have been divided into

various groups in the contract, the Owner shall be entitled to take over any

group or groups before the other or others.

68.5 Defect After Taking Over:

In order that the contractor could obtain a completion certificate he shall make

good with all possible speed, any defect arising from the defective materials

supplied by the contractor or that may have been notices or developed, after

the works or group of the works has been taken over, the period allowed, for

carrying our such work will be normally one month. If any defect be not

remedied within a reasonable time, the owner may proceed to do the work at

contractor’s Risk and expenses and deduct from the final bill such amount as

may be decided by the Owner.

If by reason of any default on the part of the contractor a completion

certificate has not been issued in respect of every portion of the works within

one month after date fixed by the contract for the completion of the works, the

Owner shall be a liberty to use the work or any portion therof in respect of

which a completion certificate has not been issued, provided that the works or

the portion thereof so used as aforesaid shall be afforded reasonable

opportunity for completion of these works for the issue of completion

certificate.

68.6 Guarantee/Transfer of Guarantee:

For works like water-proofing, acid & alkali resisting materials, pre-

construction soil treatment against termite or any other specialized works etc.

the contractor shall invariable engage sub-contractors who are specialists in

the field and firms or repute and such a sub-conractor shall furnish guarantees

for their workmanship to the Owner, through the contractor. In case such a

sub-contractor/firm is not prepared to furnish a guarantee to the owner, the

contractor shall give that guarantee to the Owner directly.


Page 51 of 96

SECTION – VI CERTIFICATE AND PAYMENT

69. SCHEDULE OF RATE AND PAYMENTS:

69.1 Contractor’s Remuneration: The price to be paid by the Owner to the contractor for the whole of the work

done and for the performance of all the obligations undertaken by the

contractor under the contract document shall be ascertained by the application

of the respective schedule of rates (the inclusive nature of which is more

particularly defined by way of application but not of limitation, with clause

No. 69.2) and payment to be made accordingly to the work actually executed

and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The sum so ascertained

shall(exception only as and to the extent expressly provided here in )

constitute the sole and inclusive of remunaeration of the contractor under the

contract and no further or other payment whatsoever shall be or become due or

payable to the contractor under the contract.

69.2 Schedule of Rates to the Inclusive:

The prices/rates quoted by the contractor shall remain firm till the issue of

final certificate and shall not be subject to escalation. Schedule of rates shall

be deemed to include and cover all costs, expenses and liabilities of every

description and all risks of every kind to be taken in executing, completion and

handing over the work to the Owner by the contractor. The contractor shall be

deemed to have known the nature, scope, magnitude and the extent of the

works and materials required though the contract document may not fully and

precisely furnish them. Hr shall make such provision in the schedule of rates as he may consider necessary to cover the cost of such items of work and

materials as may be reasonable and necessary to completer the work. The

opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the items of work which are necessary

and reasonable for completion of work shall be final and binding on the

contractor although the same may not be shown on or described specifically in

contract documents.

Generality of this present provision shall not be deemed to cut down or limited

in any way because in certain cases it may and in other cases it may not

expressly stated that the contractor shall do or perform a work or supply

articles or perform with services at his own cost or without addition of

payment or without extra charge or works to the same effect or that it may be

stated or not stated that the same are included in and covered by the schedule

of rates.

69.3 Schedule of rates to cover Cconstructional Plant, Materials. Labours etc.:

Without in any way limiting the provision of other subclauses the schedule of

rates shall be deemed to include the cover the cost of all constructional plant,

temporary works (except as provided for herein), pumps, materials, labour,

insurance, fuel, stores, and appliances to be supplied by the contractor and all

other matters in connection with each items in the schedule of quantities and


Page 52 of 96

the execution of the works or any portion thereof finished complete in every

respect and maintained as shown or described in the contract documents or as

may be orderded in writing during the continuance of the contract.

69.4 Schedule of Rates to cover Royalties, Rents and Claims:

The schedule of rates shall be deemed to include and cover the cost of all

royalties and fees for the articles, processes, protected by letters, patent or

otherwise incorporated in or used in connection with the works, also all

royalties, rents, and other payments in. connection with obtaining materials of

whatsoever kind for the works and shall include an indemnity to the owner

which the contractor hereby gives against all actions, proceedings, claims,

damages, costs and expenses arising from the incorporation in or use on the

works of any such articles, processes or charges if levied on materials,

equipment or machinery to be brought to site for use on work, shll be borne by

the contractor.

69.5 Schedule of Rates to cover taxes and duties:

No exemption or reduction of custom duties, excise duties, sales tax, quay or

any port duties, transport charges, stamp duties or Central or State

Government or Local Body (or from any other body) or Municipal Taxes or

duties, taxes or charges whatsoever will be granted or obtained and all

expenses of which shall be deemed to be included in and covered by the

schedule of rates. The contractor shall be obtain and pay for all permits or

other privileges necessary to complete the work.

69.6 Schedule of Rates to cover Risk of Delay:

The schedule of rates shall be deemed to include and cover the risk of all

responsibilities of delay and interference with the contractor’s conduct of work

which occur from any cause including orders of the owner in the exercise of

his powers and on account of extension of time granted due to various and for

all other possible or probable causes of delay.

69.7 Schedule of Rates cannot be altered:

For work under unit rate basis no alteration will be allowed in the schedule of

rates by reasons of works or any part of them being modified, altered,

extended, diminished or omitted. The schedule of rates is of fully inclusive

rates which have been fixed by the contractor and agreed to by the Owner and

cannot be altered.

69.7.1 The schedule of rates to cover for working in operating plant. Contractor’s

rates shall be deemed to include taking into account that he has to work in

operating plant and shall take sufficient care in moving the plants, equipments

and materials from one place to another, so that they do not cause any damage

to any person or to the property of the owner or to thirty party including over

head and underground cable/pipe lines. In the event of such damages

including eventual loss of production and operation of the plant or services in

any plant or establishment as estimated by the owner or ascertained or by the


Page 53 of 96

third party shall be borne by the contractor. Since the work is to be executed

for the expansion of the plant, the rate of the contractor shall also deem to

include all interference/obstruction/interruption for which no compensation

shall be paid to be contractor.

70. Procedure For Measurement/ Billing of Work in Progress:

70.1 All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works in progress will be

jointly measured by the representative of the Engineer-in-Charge and the

contractor’s authorised agent progressively. Such measurements will be got

recorded in the measurement book by the Engineer-in-Charge or his

authorised representative and signed in token of acceptance by the contractor

or his authorised representative.

For the purpose of taking joint measurement the contractor’s representative

shall be bound to be present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge. If,

however, he absents for any reason whatsoever the measurements will be

taken by the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative and this will be deemed

to be correct and binding on the contractor.

70.2 Billing:

The contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma in accordance with the

contract terms and the agreed billing schedules in quintuplicate to the

Engineer-in-Charge giving abstract and detailed measurement for the various

items executed during a month, before the expiry of the first week of the

succeeding month. The Engineer-in-Charge shall take or cause to be taken the

requisite measurements for the purpose of having the same verified and the claim as far as admissible, adjusted, if possible, before the expiry of 10 days

form presentation of the bill.

70.2.1 The bill shall be submitted by the contractor in computerised formats

approved by the owner. The bills along-with floppies containing measurement

of work, particulars of materials, recoveries etc. have to be submitted to the

owner.

70.2.2 For lump-sum contracts, the payment will be according to agreed billing

schedule. No adjustment shall be allowed in lump-sum prices for any

variations in the quantities, specifications etc. shall take or a cause to be taken

the requisite measurement for the purposes of having the same verified and the

claim as far as admissible, adjusted, if possible, before the expiry of 10 days

from presentation of the bill.

70.3 Secured Advance on Materials:

In case of tenders for completed items of works, contractor may be allowed

“Secured Advance” on the security of materials brought to site for execution

of the contracted items of work to the extent of 75% of the value of materials

which go into the completed works as assessed by the Engineer-in-Charge

provided that the materials are of an imperishable nature and that formal


Page 54 of 96

agreement is drawn up with the contractor under which the Owner secures a

lien on the materials and is safe guarded against losses due to the contractor

postponing the execution of the work or to the improper storage &/or misuse

of the materials and against the expenses entitled for their proper watch and

safe custody. Recoveries of advances so made would not be postponed until

the whole of the work entrusted to the contractor is completed. They should

be adjusted from his running account bills for work done as the materials are

used, the necessary deductions being made whenever the items of work in

which they are used and billed for.

70.4 Dispute in Mode of Measurement:

In case of any dispute as to the made of measurement not covered by the

contract to be adopted for any item of work, mode of measurement as per

latest Indian Standard Specifications shall be followed.

70.5 Rounding of Amounts:

In calculating the amount of each item due to the contractor in every

certificate prepared for payment, sum of less than 50 paisa shall be omitted

and the total amount on each certificates shall be rounded off to the nearest,

i.e. sum of less than 0.50.p shall be omitted and sums of 0.50p and more upto

one rupee shall be reckoned as one rupee.

71. LUMPSUMS IN TENDER:

For the item in tender where it includes lumpsum in respect of parts of work,

the contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of the items at the same

as are payable under this contract for such items, or if the part of the work in question is not, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge capable of

measurement, or determination, the Owner may at his discretion pay the lump-

sum amount entered in the tender or a percentage thereof and the certificate in

writing of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and conclusive against the

contractor with regards to any sum payable to him, under the provisions of this

clause.

72. RUNNING ACCOUNT PAYMENTS TO BE REGARDED AS

ADVANCE:

All Running Account Payment shall be regarded as Payments by way of

advance against the final payment only and not as payment for work actually

done and completed, and shall not preclude the requiring of bad, unsound and

imperfect or unskilled work to be removed and taken away and reconstructed

or re-erected or be considered as an admission of the due Performance of the

contract, or any part thereof, in this respect, or of the accruing of any claim by

the contractor, nor shall it, conclude, determine or affect in any way the

powers of the Owner under these conditions or any of them as to the final

settlement and adjustments of the accounts or otherwise, or in any other way

vary or affect the contract. The final bill shall be submitted by the contractor

within one month from the sate of physical completion of the work, otherwise,


Page 55 of 96

the Engineer-in-Charge’s certificate of the measurement and of total amount

payable for the work accordingly shall be final and binding on all parties.

73. NOTICE OF CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL PAYMENT:

Should the contractor consider that he is entitled to any extra payment or

compensation or to make any claims whatsoever in respect of the works

arising under the terms of this contract he shall forthwith give notice in writing

to the Engineer-in-Charge that he claims extra payment within ten days from

the ordering of any work or happening of any event upon which the contractor

bases such claims and such notice shall contain full particulars of the nature of

such claims with necessary particulars as above within the time above

specified shall be an absolute waiver thereof. No omission by the Owner to

reject any such claim and no delay in dealing therewith shall be waiver by the

Owner of any right in respect thereof.

74. PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR’S BILL:

No payment shall be made for works estimated to cost less that Rs. 10,000/-

till the whole of the work shall have been completed and a certificate of

completion given. But in case of works estimated to cost more that Rs.

10,000/- the contractor, on submitting the bill thereof be entitled to receive a

monthly payment proportionate to the part thereof approved and passed by the

Engineer-in-Charge, whose certificate of such approval and passing of the sum

so payable be final and conclusive against the contractor. This payment will

be made after making necessary deductions as stipulated elsewhere in the

contract document for materials, security deposit etc. or any statutory recoveries.

Payment due to the contractor shall be made by the Owner, by Crossed

Account Payee Cheque forwarding the same to registered office or the notified

office of the contractor. In no case will owner be responsible if the Cheque is

mislaid or misappropriated by un-authorised person/ persons. In all cases, the

contractor shall present his bill duly pre-receipted on proper revenue stamp.

All payment shall be made in Indian Currency.

75. Receipt For Payment:

Receipt for payment made on account of work when executed by a firm, must

be signed by a person holding due power of attorney in this respect on behalf

of the contractor, except when the contractors are described in their tender as

limited company in which case the receipts must be signed in the name of the

company by one of its principal officers or by some other persons having

authority to give effectual receipt for the company.

76. Completion Certificate:

76.1. Application for completion certificate:


Page 56 of 96

When the contractor fulfils his obligation under clause 69.4 he shall be eligible

to apply for completion certificate in respect of the work by submitting the

completion documents along with such application for completion certificate.

The Owner or his representative shall normally issue to the contractor the

completion certificate within one month after receiving an application therefor

from the contractors after verifying from the completion documents and

satisfying himself that the work has been completed in accordance with and as

set out in the construction and erection drawings, and the contract documents.

The contractor, after obtaining the completion certificate, is eligible to present

the final bill for the work executed by him under the terms of contract.

76.2. Completion Certificate:

Within one month of the completion of work in all respects, the contractor,

shall be furnished with a certificate by the owner or his representative of such

completion but no completion certificate shall be given not shall the work be

deemed to have executed until all, scaffolding, surplus materials and rubbish is

cleared off the site completely not until the work shall have been measured by

the Engineer-in-Charge, whole measurement shall be binding and conclusive.

The work will not be considered as complete and taken over by the owner,

until all the temporary work, labour and staff colonies etc. constructed are

removed and work site cleared to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

If the contractor shall fail to comply with the requirements of this clause on or

before the date fixed for the completion of the work, the Engineer-in-Charge

may at the expenses of contractor remove such scaffolding, surplus materials

and rubbish and dispose off the same as he thinks fit and clean off such dirt as

aforesaid, and the contractor shall forthwith pay the amount for all expenses so

incurred and shall have no claim in respect of any such scaffolding or surplus

materials as aforesaid except for any sum actually realized by the sale thereof.

Completion Certificate shall be in 3 parts as follows:

(1) Physical/ Mechanical Completion work.

(2) Satisfactory completion of commissioning of equipment with load.

(3) Satisfactory completion of guarantee.

The contractor shall clearly indicate the 3 dates separately.

76.3. Completion Documents:

For the purpose of Clause 76 the following documents will be deemed to form

the completion documents:

(i) The technical documents according to which the work was carried out.


Page 57 of 96

(ii) Three sets of construction drawings showing therein the modification

and corrections made during the course of execution and signed by the

Engineer-in-Charge.

(iii) Completion Certificate for embedded and covered –up works.

(iv) Certificate of final levels as set out for various works.

(v) Certificate of tests performed for various works.

(vi) Material appropriation statement to the materials issued by the owner

for the works and list of surplus materials returned to the owner’s store

duly supported by necessary documents.

(vii) Physical/ Mechanical Completion work.

(viii) Satisfactory completion of commissioning of equipment with load.

(ix) Satisfactory completion of guarantee.

The Contractor shall clearly indicate the 3 dates separately.

77. Final Decision And Final Certificate:

Upon the expiration of the period of liability and subject to the Engineer-in-

Charge being satisfied that the works have been duly maintained by the

contractor during monsoon or such period as herein provided in clause 68.1 and that the contractor has in all respect duly made up all subsidence and

performed all his obligations under the contract, the Engineer-in-Charge shall

(without prejudice to the right of the Owner to retain the provisions of relevant

clause hereof) otherwise give a certificate, herein referred to as the final

certificate, to the effect and the contractor shall not be considered to have

fulfilled the whole of his obligations under the contract until Final Certificate

shall have been given by the Engineer-in-Charge notwithstanding any

previous entry upon the work and taking possession, working or using of the

same or any part thereof by the Owner.

78. Certificate And Payments No Evidence of Completion:

Except the final certificate no other certificate or payment against a certificate

or on general account shall be taken to be an admission by the Owner of the

due performance of the contract of any part thereof or of occupancy or validity

of any claim by the Contractor.


Page 58 of 96

SECTION – VII

TAXES AND INSURANCE

79. TAXES, DUTIES, OCTROI ETC.

79.1. The Contractor shall defray all charges, such as rent, toll local taxes excise

duty, other payments and compensations, if any, in connection with the

procurement and handling of materials, fabrication and execution of works or

any method or process connected with the works or Temporary works.

Sales Tax or any other tax on materials required for the works as also Tax on

works contract shall be payable by the Contractor and the Owner will not

entertain any claim whatsoever in this regard.

79.2. Notwithstanding anything contained elsewhere in the contract, the owner shall

deduct at source from the payments due to the contractor, the taxes as required

under Section -13–AA of the Orissa Sales Tax Act or as amended from time to

time or under any other statue. The amounts so deducted shall be deposited by

the Owner with the Sales Tax authorities as per Law. It is for the contractor

to deal with the Sales Tax authorities directly in respect of any claim or refund

relating to the above deductions and the owner shall not be liable or

responsible for any claims or payments or reimbursement in this regard.

80. INSURANCE:

Contractor shall at his own expense carry and maintain insurance with reputed

insurance companies to the satisfaction of the Owner as follows:

80.1 Employees State Insurance Act:

The contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for

compliance with all obligations imposed by the Employees State Insurance

Act., 1948, and the contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold

Owner harmless form any liability of penalty which may be imposed by the

Central, State or Local authority by the reason of any asserted violation by

contractor or Sub-contractor of the Employee’s State Insurance Act, 1948 and

also from all claims, suits or proceeding that may be brought against the

Owner arising under, growing out of or by reasons of the work provided for by

this contract whether brought by employees of the contractor, by third parties

or by Central or State Government authority or any political sub-division

thereof.

The contractor agrees to fill in with the Employees State Insurance

Corporation, the Declaration Forms and all forms which may be required in

respect of the contractor’s or sub-contractor’s employees, whose aggregate

remuneration is Rs. 560.00 per month or less and who are employed in the

work provided for or those covered by ESI from time to time under the

Agreement. The contractor shall deduct and secure the agreement of the sub-

contractor to deduct the employee’s contribution as per the first schedule of

the Employee’s State Insurance Act from wages and affix the employee’s


Page 59 of 96

contribution cards at wages payments intervals. The contractor shall remit and

secure the agreement of the sub-contractor to remit to the State Bank of India,

Employees State Insurance Corporation Account, the employee’s contribution

as required by the Act. The contractor agrees to maintain all cards and records

as required under the Act in respect of employees and payments and the

contractor shall secure the agreement of the sub-contractor to maintain such

records. Any expenses incurred for the contributions, making contributions or

maintaining records shall be to the contractor’s or sub-contractor’s account.

The Owner shall retain such sum as may be necessary from the total contract

value until the contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof that all contribution

as required by the Employees State Insurance Act, 1984, have been paid. This

will be pending on the contractor when the Employees State Insurance Act is

extended to the place of work.

80.2 Workmen Compensation and Employees Liability Insurance:

Insurance shall be affected for all the contractor’s employees engaged in the

performance of this contract. If any of the work is subject, the contractor shall

require the sub-contractor to provide workmen’s compensation and

employer’s liability insurance for the latter’s employees if such employees are

not covered under the contractor insurance.

80.3 Any other insurance required under Law or Regulations or by Owner:

Contractor shall also carry and maintain any and all other insurance, which he

may be required under any law or regulation from time to time. He shall also

carry and maintain any other insurance, which may be required by the Owner.

80.4 Accident or Injury to workmen:

The owner shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or

compensation payable at law in respect or in consequence of any accident or

injury to any workman or other person in the Employment of the contractor or

any sub-contractor save and except and accident or injury resulting from any

act or default of the Owner, his agents or servants and the contractor shall

indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner against all such damages and

compensation (save and except as aforesaid) and against all claims, demands,

proceeding, costs, charges and expenses, whatsoever in respect or in relation

thereto.

80.5 Transit Insurance:

In respect of all items to be transported by the Contractor to the site of work,

the cost of transit insurance should be borne by the contractor and the quoted

price shall be inclusive of this cost.

81 DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR TO ANY PERSON OR ANY THIRD PARTY:

81.1 Contractor’s rate shall deem to include taking into account that he has to work

in operating plant and shall take sufficient care in moving the plants,

equipment and materials from one place to another so that they do not cause


Page 60 of 96

any damage to any person or to the property of the Owner or to a third party

including over head and underground cables, pipelines. In the event of such

damages including eventual loss of production and operation of the plants or

services in any plant or establishment as estimated by the Owner or

ascertained or by the third party shall be borne by the Contractor.

81.2 Contractor shall also be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the

Owner any loss or any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the

Owner or being executed or procured or being procured by owner or by other

agency within the premises of all the work or Owner. If such loss or damages

is due to fault and or the negligence or willful acts or omission of the

contractors, his employees, agents, representatives or sub-contractors.

81.3 The contractor shall indemnify and keep the owner harmless of all claims for

damages to property other than owner’s property arising under or by reason of

this contract if such claims result from the fault and/ or negligence or willful

acts or omission of the contractor, agents, representative or sub-contractor.

82 DEMURRAGE DUES:

The contractor shall pay demurrage charges incurred by the Owner because of

the contractor’s failure to load or unload any goods or materials within the

time allowed by the Railway and/ or Transport Agency for such loading or

unloading as charges incurred by the contractor within the permissible time as

also charges due on consignments booked by or to him. In case the contractor

fails to pay these charges, these charges shall be deducted from any sums,

which may be due or become due to the contractor in terms of this contract and/ or any other contract.


Page 61 of 96

SECTION – VIII LABOUR LAWS AND ARBITRATION

83 LABOURER LAWS:

Contractor shall comply with any and all laws, ordinances, regulations and

decision of courts (which shall be deemed to be a part of this Agreement)

concerning the health, sanitary arrangements, wages, welfare, safety and

employment of any and all of his workers upon the Project or any portion thereof

and shall exclusively bear the consequences of failure to comply therewith

Contractor shall Indemnify and hold Engineer and Owner harmless from any

claims, fines or penalties which may be made against Engineer or Owner as

result of Contractor’s failure to fulfil these obligations.

Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Contractor shall fully comply

with.

The contractor shall obtain clearance from the Labour Department regarding the

compliance of the labour laws on 6 monthly basis and submit to the owner for

record.

(i) No labour below the age of 18 (eighteen) years shall be employed on

the work.

(ii) The contractor shall not pay less than what is provided under law to

labourers engaged by him on the work.

(iii) The contractor shall at his expense comply with all labour laws and

keep the Owner indemnified in respect thereof .

(iv) The contractor shall pay equal wages for men and women in

accordance with applicable labour laws.

(v) If the contractor is covered under the contractor labour (Regulation and

Abolition) Act, he shall obtain a licence from licensing authority (i.e.

office of the labour commissioner) by payment of necessary prescribed

fee and the deposit, if any, before starting the work under the contract.

(vi) The Contractor shall employ labour in sufficient numbers either

directly or through sub-contractors to maintain the required rate of

progress and of quality to ensure workmanship of the degree specified

in the Contract and to satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The

contractor shall not employ in connection with the works any person

who has not completed his 18 (eighteen) years of age.

(vii) The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge the distribution

return of the number and description, by trades of the work people


Page 62 of 96

employed on the works. The Contractor shall also submit on the 4th

and 19th

of every month to the Engineer-in-Charge a true statement

showing in respect of the second half of the preceding month and the

first half of the current month (1) the accidents that occurred during the

said fortnight showing the circumstance-under which they happened

and the extent of damage and injury caused by them and (2) the

number of female workers who have been allowed Maternity benefit as

provided in the Maternity Benefit Act 1961 or Rules made thereunder

and the amount paid to them.

(viii) The contractor shall comply with the provisions of the payment of

Wages Act 1936, Minimum Wages Act 1938, Employees Liability Act

1928. Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923, Industrial Dispute Act

1947, the Maternity Benefit Act 1961, Employees Provident Fund Act,

1952 and Contract Labour regulation and abolition Act 1937,

Employment of Children Act 1938 or any modifications thereof or any

other law relating thereto and rules made thereunder from time to time.

(ix) The Engineer-in-Charge shall on a report having been made by an

Inspecting Officer as defined in Contract Labour (Regulation and

Abolition) Act 1970 have the power to deduct from the moneys due to

the Contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making

good the loss suffered by a worker or Workers by reason of non-

fulfillment of the Conditions of the Contractor for the benefit of

workers, non-payment of wages or of deductions made from his or

their wages which are not justified by the terms of the Contract or non-

observance of the said regulations.

(x) The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner against any payments to be

made under and for the observance of the provisions of the aforesaid

Acts without prejudice to his right to obtain indemnity from his sub-

contractors. In the event of the contractor committing a default or

breach of any of the provisions of the aforesaid Acts as amended from

time to time, of furnishing any information or submitting or filling any

Form/Register/Slip under the provisions of these Acts which is

materially incorrect then on the report of the inspecting Officers the

Contractor shall without prejudice to any other liability pay to the

owner a sum not exceeding Rs. 50.00 as liquidated damages for every

default, breach of furnishing, making submitting, filling materially

incorrect statement as may be fixed by the Engineer-in-Charge and in

the event of the contractor's default continuing in this respect the

liquidated damages may be enhanced to Rs. 50.00 per day of default

subject to a maximum of one percent of the estimated cost of the works

put to tender. The Engineer-in-Charge shall deduct such amount from

bills or security deposit of the Contractor and credit the same to the

welfare fund constituted under these acts. The decision of the

Engineer-in-Charge in this respect shall be final and binding.


Page 63 of 96

84 Implementation Of Apprentices Act 1961:

The contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act 1961

and the Rules and orders issued thereunder from time to time. If he fails to do

so, his failure will be a breach of the contract and the Engineer-in-Charge

may, at his discretion, cancel the contract. The contractor shall also be liable

for any pecuniary liability arising of any violation by him of the provisions of

the Act.

85 Contractor to Indemnify the Owner:

85.1 The contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, Officer and

employee of the owner, also the Engineer-in-Charge and his staff against all

actions, proceedings, claims, demands costs and expenses whatsoever arising

out of or in connection with the matter referred to in clause 81 and elsewhere

and all actions, proceedings, claims demands costs and expenses which may

be made against the Owner for or in respect of or arising out of any failure by

the contractor in the performance of his obligations under the contract. The

Owner shall not be liable for or in respect of any demand or compensation

payable by law in respect or in consequence of any accident or injury to any

workman or other person in the employment of the contractor or his sub-

contractor and contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner

against all such damage and compensation and against all claims, damages,

proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever thereof or in relation

thereto.

85.2 Payment of Claims and Damages:

Should the Owner have to pay any money in respect of such claims or

demands as aforesaid the amount so paid and the cost incurred by the Owner

shall be charged to and paid by the Contractor and the contractor shall not be

at liberty to dispute or question the right of the Owner to make such payments

notwithstanding the same may have been made without his consent or

authority or in law or otherwise to the contrary.

85.3 In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of section 12, sub-section (i)

of workmen’s compensation Act, 1923 or other applicable provision of

Workman Compensation act or any other act, the Owner is obliged to pay

compensation to workman employed by the contractor in execution of the

works, the Owner will recover from the contractor the amount of the

compensation so paid, and without prejudice to the rights of Owner under

section 12, sub-section (2) of the said act. Owner shall be at liberty to recover

such amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the security deposit or

from any sum due to the contractor whether under this contract or otherwise.

The Owner shall not be bound to contest any claim made under section 12

sub-section (I) of the said Act except on the written request of the contractor

and upon his giving to the Owner full security for all costs for which the

Owner might become liable in consequence of contesting such claims.


Page 64 of 96

86. Health and Sanitary Arrangements For Workers:

86.1 In respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed in the works for the

performance the contractor’s part of this agreement, the contractor shall

comply with or cause to be complied with all the rules and regulations of the

local sanitary and other authorities or as framed by the Owner from time to

time for the protection of health and sanitary arrangements for all workers.

86.2 The contractor shall provide in the labour colony all amenities such as

Electricity, water and other sanitary and health arrangements. The Contractor

shall also provide necessary surface transportation to the place of work and

back to the colony for their personnel accommodated in the labour colony.

87. Arbitration:

All disputes or differences whatsoever which shall at any time arise between

the parties hereto touching or concerning the works or the execution or

maintenance thereof of the contract or the rights touching or concerning the

works or the execution or maintenance thereof of this contract or the

construction meaning operation or effect thereof or to the rights or liabilities of

the parties or arising out of or in relation thereto whether during or after

completion of the contract or whether before or after determination, fore

closure or breach of the contract (other than those in respect of which the

decision of any person is by the contract expressed to be final and binding

shall after written notice by either party to the contract to the other of them

and to the Appointing Authority hereinafter mentioned be referred for

adjudication to a sole Arbitrator to be appointed as hereinafter provided.

For the purpose of appointing the sole Arbitrator referred to above, the

Appointing Authority will send within thirty days of receipt of the notice, to

the contractor a panel of three names of persons.

The contractor shall on receipt of the names as referred selected any one of the

person names to be appointed as a sole Arbitrator and communicate his name

to the Appointing Authority within thirty days of receipt of the names. The

appointing Authority shall there upon without any delay appoint the said

person as the sole Arbitrator. If the contractor fails to communicate such

selection as provided above within the period specified, the Appointing

Authority shall make the selection and appoint the selected person as the sole

Arbitrator.

If the Arbitrator so appointed is unable or unwilling to act or resigns his

appointment or vacate his office due to any reason whatsoever sole Arbitrators

shall be appointed as aforesaid. The work under the contract shall, however

continue during the arbitration proceedings.

The Arbitrator shall be deemed to have entered on the reference on the date he

issues notices to both the parties fixing the date of the first hearing.


Page 65 of 96

The Arbitrator may, from time to time, with the consent of the parties, enlarge

the time for making and publishing the award.

The Arbitrator shall give a separate award in respect of each dispute or

difference and shall give a reasoned and speaking award/ awards.

The venue of arbitration shall be at Bhubaneswar. However, if the situation so

warrants, it may, as and when required, be held at the place where the site of

work is situated.

The fees, if any, of the Arbitrator shall, if required to be paid before the award

is made and published be paid half and half by each of the parties. The costs

of the reference and of the award including the fees, if any of the Arbitrator

shall be in the discretion of the Arbitrator who may direct to and by whom and

in what manner, such costs or any part thereof shall be paid may fix or settle

the amount of costs to be so paid.

The award of the arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties.

Subject to aforesaid, the provisions of the Arbitration Act 1940 or any

statutory modification or re-enactment thereof and the rules made thereunder,

and for the time being in force shall apply to the arbitration proceeding under

this clause.

For Public Sector Enterprises guidelines as per the circular of BPE No.

15/9/86-BPE (FIN) dated 30.03.89 as amended time to time will be followed.

88. Jurisdiction/ Governing Laws:

(a) Jurisdiction:

For all disputes arising of this contract, the jurisdiction shall be lie under the

jurisdiction of direct courts in the respective areas in the State of ORISSA

(India) only.

(b) Governing Laws:

The contract shall be governed by and constructed according to the laws in

force in INDIA.


Page 66 of 96

SECTION – IX SAFETY CODE

89. GENERAL:

Contractor shall adhere to safe construction practice and guard against

hazardous and unsafe working conditions and shall comply with Owner’s

safety rules as set forth herein. Prior to start of construction, contractor will be

furnished copies of Owner’s ‘Safety Code’ for information and guidance, if it has been prepared.

90. SAFETY REGULATIONS:

90.1. In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the

performance of contractor’s part of this agreement, the contractor shall at his

own expense arrange for all the safety provisions as per (i) Safety codes of

CPWD & Indian Standards Instructions (ii) The electricity Act, (iii) The

Mines Act, and (iv) Regulations. Rules and orders made thereunder and such

other acts as applicable.

90.2. The contractor shall observe and abide by all fire and safety regulations of the

Owner. Before starting construction work, contractor shall consult Owner’s

Safety Engineer or Engineer-in-Charge and must make good to the satisfaction

of the Owner any loss or damage due to fire to any portion of the work done

under this contract or to any of the Owner’s existing property.

91. First Aid and Industrial Injuries:

(i) Contractor shall maintain first aid facilities for his employees and those of

his subcontractors.

(ii)Contractors shall make outside arrangements for ambulance service and for

treatment of industrial injuries. Name of those providing these services shall

be furnished to Owner prior to start of constructions and their telephone

numbers shall be prominently posted in Contractor’s field office.

(iii)All critical industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to owner, and a

copy of Contractor’s report covering each personal injury requiring the

attention of a physical shall be furnished to the Owner.

92. General Rules:

Smoking within the Battery Areas, rank farm, or dock limits in strictly

prohibited. Violators of the “No Smoking” rules shall be discharged

immediately”.

93. Contractor’s Barricades:

(i) Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades required in connection with

his operation to guard or protect.


Page 67 of 96

(a) Excavations.

(b) Hosting Areas.

(c) Areas adjudged hazardous by Contractor’s or Owner’s Inspectors.

(d) Owner’s existing property subject to damage by Contractor’s operation.

(e) Rail road unloading spots.

(ii) Contractor’s employees and those of his sub-contractors shall become

acquainted with Owner’s barricading practice and shall respect the

provisions thereof.

(iii) Barricades and hazardous areas adjacent to but not located in normal routes

of travel shall be marked by red flasher lanterns at nights.

94. Scaffolding:

(i) Suitable scaffoldings should be provided for workmen for all works that

cannot safety be done from the ground or from solid construction except

such short period works as can be done safely from ladders. When a

ladder is used a Mazdoor shall be engaged for holding the ladder and if

the ladder is used for carrying materials as well, suitable footholds and

handholds shall be provided on the ladder and the ladder shall be given an

inclination not steeper than 1 in 4 (1 horizontal and 4 vertical).

(ii) Scaffolding or staging more than 4 metres above the ground or floor

swing on suspended from an overhead support or erected with stationary

support shall have a guard rail properly attached, bolted, braced and

otherwise retarded at least one metre high above the floor or platform of

such scaffolding or staging and extending along with entire length of the

outside and ends thereof with only such openings as may be necessary for

the delivery of materials. Such scaffolding or staging shall be so fastened

as to prevent it from swaying from the building or structure.

(iii) Working platform, gangways and stairways should be so constructed that

they should not sag unduly or unequally and if the height of the platform

of gangway or the stairway is more than 4 metres above ground level or

floor level, they should closely boarded, should have adequate width and

should be suitable fastened as described in (ii) above.

(iv) Every opening in the floor of a building or in a working platform be

provided with suitable means to prevent the fall of persons or materials by

providing suitable fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be 1

metre.

(v) Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other

working places. Every ladder shall be security fixed. No portable single

ladder shall be over 9 metres in length. The width between the side rails

in run ladder shall in no case be less than 30 cm. For ladder upto and

including 3 metres in length; for longer ladders this width should be


Page 68 of 96

increase at least 15 mm for each additional metre of length. Uniform step

spacing shall not exceed 30 cms. Adequate precautions shall be taken to

prevent danger from electrical equipment. No materials on any of the

sites of work shall be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or

inconvenience to any person or public. The contractor shall also provide

all necessary fencing and lights to protect the workers and staff from

accidents, and shall be bound to bear the expenses of defence of every

suit, action or other proceedings of law that may be brought by any

person for injury sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions and

to pay any damages and cost which may be awarded in any such suit or

action or proceedings to any such person or which may with the consent

of the contractor be paid to compromise any claim by any such person.

95. Excavation and Trenching:

All trenches 1.2 metres or more in depth, shall at all times be supplied with at

least one ladder for each 50 M length or fraction thereof.

Ladder shall be extended from bottom of the trench to at least 1 metre above

the surface of the ground. The sides of the trenches which are 1.5 metres in

depth shall be stepped back to give suitable slope, or securely held by timber

bracing, so as to avoid the danger of sides to collapse. The excavated materials

shall not be placed within 1.5 metres of the edge of the trench or half of the

trench width whichever is more. Cutting shall be done from top to bottom.

Under no circumstances undermining or under-cutting shall be done.

96. General Safety:

(i) Before any demolition work is commenced and also during the process

of the demolition work.

(a) All roads and open areas adjacent to the work site shall either be closed

or suitably protected.

(b) No electric cable or apparatus which is liable to be a source of danger

shall remain electrically charged.

(c) All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed

from risk of fire or explosion or flooding. No floor, roof or other part of

the building shall be so overloaded with debris or materials as to render

it unsafe.

(ii) All necessary personal safety equipment as considered adequate by the

Engineer-in-Charge, should be kept available for the use of the persons

employed at the site and maintained condition suitable for immediate use

and the contractor should take adequate steps to ensure proper use of

equipment by persons concerned as outlined below:


Page 69 of 96

(a) Workers employed on mixing asphalt materials, cement and lime

mortars shall be provided with protective footwear and protective

gloves.

(b) Those engaged in white washing and mixing or stacking of cements

bags or any materials which are injurious to the eyes shall be provided

with protective goggles.

(c) Those engaged in welding and cutting works, shall be provided with

protective face and eye –shields, hand gloves etc.

(d) Stonebreakers shall be provided with protective goggle and protective

clothing and seated at sufficiently safe intervals.

(e) When workers are employed in sewers and manholes which are in use,

the contractor shall ensure that the manhole cover are opened and are

ventilated at least for an hour before the workers are allowed to get into

the manholes, and the manholes so opened shall be cordoned off with

suitable railing and provided with warning signals or board to prevent

accident to the public.

(f) The contractor shall not employ men below the age of 18 years and

women on the work of painting with products containing lead in any

form. Wherever men above the age of 18 years are employed on the

work of lead painting, the following precautions should be taken:

(1) No paint containing lead or lead products shall be used except

in the form paste or readymade paint.

(2) Suitable facemasks should be supplied for use by the workers

when paint is applied in the form of spray or a surface having

lead paint dry rubbed and scrapped.

(3) Overalls shall be supplied by the Contractor to the workmen

and adequate facilities shall be provided to enable the working

painters to wash them on cessation of work.

(iii) When the work is done near any place where there is a risk of drowning

all necessary safety equipment shall be provided and kept ready for use

and all necessary steps taken for prompt rescue of any person in danger

and adequate provision should be made for prompt first aid treatment of

all injuries likely to be sustained during the course of the work.

(iv) Use of hoisting machines and tackles including their attachments

anchorage and supports shall conform to the following standard or

conditions:

(a) These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound materials and

adequate strength and free from patent defect and shall be kept in good

working order.

(b) Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as means of

suspension shall be of durable quality and adequate strength and free

from patent defects.


Page 70 of 96

(c) Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly

qualified and no person under the age of 21 years should be in charge

of any hoisting machine including any scaffolding which or give

signals to the operator.

(d) In case of every hoisting machine and of every chain ring hook,

shackle swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or lowering or as

means of suspension, the safe working load shall be ascertained by

adequate means. Every hoisting machine and all gear referred to above

shall be marked with the safe working load and the conditions under

which it is applicable shall be clearly indicated. No part of any

machine or any gear referred to above in this paragraph shall be loaded

beyond the safe working load except for the purpose of testing.

(e) In case of department machines, the safe working load shall be notified

by the Engineer-in-Charge. As regards contractor’s machines, the

contractor shall notify the safe working load of the machine to the

Engineer-in-Charge, whenever he brings any machinery to site of work

and get it verified by the Engineer-in-Charge.

(v) Motors, gears, transmission lines, electric wiring and other dangerous parts

of hoisting appliances should be provided with efficient safe-guards.

Hoisting appliances should be provided with such means as to reduce to the

minimum the accidental descent of the load, adequate precaution should be

taken to reduce to the minimum the risk of any part or parts of a suspended

load becoming accidentally displaced. When workers are employed on

electrical installations, which are already energized, insulating mats, wearing

apparel such as gloves sleeves and boots as may be necessary should be

provided. The workers shall not wear any rings, watches and carry keys or

other materials, which are good conductors or electricity.

(vi) All scaffolding, ladders and other safety devices mentioned or described

herein shall be maintained in safe conditions and no scaffoldings, ladder or

equipment shall be altered or removed while it is in use. Adequate washing

facilities should be provided at or near places of works.

(vii) These safety provisions should be brought to the notice of all concerned by

displaying on a notice board at a prominent place at the work spot. The

person responsible for compliance of the safety code shall be named therein

by the contractor.

(viii) The ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to

safety precautions, the arrangements made by the contractor shall be open to

inspection by the welfare officer Engineer-in-Charge or safety Engineer of

the Administration or their representatives.

(ix) Notwithstanding the above clauses there is nothing in these to exempt the

contractor from the operations of any other Act or rules in force in the

Republic of India. The works throughout, including any temporary works,

shall be carried out in such a manner as n9ot to interfere in any way

whatsoever with the traffic on any roads or footpaths at the site or in vicinity

thereto or any existing works whether the property of the Administrations or

of a third party.


Page 71 of 96

97. Care in handling Inflammable gas:

The Contractor has to ensure all precautionary measures and exercise utmost

care in handling the inflammable gas cylinder/ inflammable liquids/ paints etc.

as required under the law and/ or as advised by the fire authorities of the

Owner.

98. Temporary Combustible Structures:

Temporary combustible structures will not be built near or around work site.

99. Precautions Against Fire:

The Contractor will have to provide Fire Extinguisher/ Fire Buckets and

drums at work site as recommended by Engineer-in-Charge. They will have

to ensure all precautionary measures and exercise utmost care in handling the

inflammable gas cylinders/ inflammable liquid/ paints etc. as advised by

Engineer-in-Charge. Temporary combustible structures will not be build near

or around the work-site.

100. Explosives:

Explosives shall not be stored or used on the works or on the site by the

contractor without the permission of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing and

then only in the manner and to the extent to which such permission is given.

When explosives are required for the works they shall be stored in a special

magazine to be provided at the cost of the contractor in accordance with the

Explosive Rules. The contractor shall obtain the necessary licence for the

storage and the use of explosives and all operations in which or for which

explosives are employed shall be at sole risk and responsibility of the contractor and the contractor shall indemnify the owner against any loss or

damage resulting directly or indirectly therefrom.

101. Mines Act:

101.1 Safety Code: The contractor shall at his own expense arrange for the safety

provisions as required by the Engineer-in-Charge in respect of all labour

directly employed for performance of the works and shall provide all facilities

in connection therewith. In case the Contractor fails to make arrangements and

provides necessary facilities as aforesaid. The Engineer-in-Charge shall be

entitled to do so and recover the costs thereof from the Contractor.

101.2 Failure to comply with Safety code or the provisions relating to report on

accidents and to grant of maternity benefits to female worker shall make the

Contractor liable to pay Company liquidated damages an amount not exceeding

Rs. 50/- for each default or materially incorrect statement. The decision of the

Engineer-in-Charge in such matters based on reports from the Inspecting

Officer or from representatives of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and

binding and deductions for recovery of such liquidated damages may be made

from any amount payable to the Contractor from all the provisions of the Mines

Act 1952 or any statutory modification’s or re-enactment thereof the time being

in force and any Rules and Regulations made thereunder in respect of all the


Page 72 of 96

persons employed by him under this contractor and shall indemnify the Owner

from and against any claim under the Mines Act or the rules and regulations

framed thereunder by or on behalf of and persons employed by him or

otherwise.

102. Preservation of Peace:

The Contractor shall taken requisite precautions and use his best endeavors to

prevent any riotous or unlawful behaviour by or amongst his workmen and

other employed on the works and for the preservation of peace and protection

of the inhabitants and Security of property in the neighborhood of the work.

In the event of the Owner requiring the maintenance of a special Police force

at or in the vicinity of the site during the tenure of works, the expenses thereof

shall be borne by the Contractor and if paid by the Owner shall be recoverable

from the Contractor.

103. Outbreak of Infectious Diseases:

The Contractor shall remove from his camp such labour and their families as

refuse protective inoculation and vaccination when called upon to do so by the

Engineer-in-Charge’s Representative. Should Cholera, Plague or other

infectious diseases break out the Contractor shall burn the huts, bedding

clothes and other belonging of or used by the infected parties and promptly

erect new huts on healthy sites as required by the Engineer-in-Charge failing

which within the time specified in the Engineer’s requisition, the work may be

done by the Owner and the cost thereof recovered from the Contractor.

104. Treatment of Contractor’s Staff in Company’s Hospital:

The Contractor and his staff, other than labourers and their families requiring

medical aid from the Owner’s hospitals and dispensaries will be treated as

private patients and charged accordingly. The contractor’s labourers and their

families will be granted from treatment in the Owner’s hospitals and

dispensaries where no other hospitals or dispensaries are available provided

the contractor pays the cost of medicines dressing and money accordingly to

the normal scale as also additional charges if any for special examination e.g.

X- Ray etc.

105. Use of Intoxicants:

The sale of dent spirits or other intoxicating beverages upon the work in any of

the buildings, encampments or tenements owned, occupied by or within the

control of Contractor or any of his employee is forbidden and the contractor

shall exercise his influence and authority to the utmost extent to secure strict

compliance with this condition.

In addition to the above, the contractor shall abide by the safety code provision

as per CPWD safety code and Indian Standard Code framed from time to time.

of 96

PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEE FOR EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (To be executed on non- judicial stamped paper of appropriate value)

B. G. No. Date:

1. WHEREAS M/s National Aluminium Company Limited (A Government of India

Enterprise), having its Corporate Office at NALCO BHAWAN, P-1 Nayapalli,

Bhubaneswar (hereinafter called “The Company Owner” which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes its legal representatives, successors and

assigns) has issued tender paper vide its Tender No……………………………………………for ----------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------- (hereinafter called “the said tender”) to M/s.

……………………………(hereinafter called the said Tenderer(s)” which expression

shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes their legal representatives, successors and assigns and as per terms and conditions of the said tender, the tenderer shall submit a Bank guarantee for Rs. …………….(Rupees ……………..only) towards earnest money in lieu of cash.

2. WE ……………………………..Bank having its branch office at ………………..do

hereby undertake to pay the amount due and payable under this guarantee without any demur, merely on a demand from the Company stating that in the opinion of the company which is final and binding, the amount claimed is due because of any

withdrawal of the tender or any material alteration to the tender after the opening of the tender by way of any loss or damage caused to or would be caused or suffered by the Company by reason of any breach by the said tenderer(s) of any of the terms and conditions contained in the said tender or failure to accept the letter of Intent Agreement or that the amount covered under this Guarantee is forfeited. Any such demand made on the Bank by the owner shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the Bank under this guarantee, However, our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount not exceeding

Rs………………..(Rupees………………..only).

3. We undertake to pay to the Company any money so demanded not withstanding any

dispute or disputes raised by the tenderer (s) in any suit or proceeding pending before

any office, court or tribunal relating thereto our liability under this present guarantee being absolute and unequivocal. The payment so made by us under this bond shall be

a valid discharge of our liability for payment thereunder. Our liability to pay is not dependent or conditional on the owner proceeding against the tenderer.

4. The guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected or suspended by the

liquidation or winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the

said tenderer(s) but shall in all respect and for all purposes be binding and operative until payment of all money due or liabilities under the said contract(s)/ Order(s) are

fulfilled.

5. WE ……………..Bank Ltd. further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall

remain in full force and effect during the period that would be taken for the finalisation

of the said tender and that it shall continue to be enforceable till the said tender is

of 96

finally decided and order placed on the successful tenderer(s) and or till all the dues of

the company under or by virtue of the said tender have been fully paid and its claims satisfied or discharged or till a duly authorised officer of the company certifies that the

terms and conditions of the said tender have been fully and properly carried out by the said tenderer (s) and accordingly discharges the guarantee.

6. That the Owner Company will have full liberty without reference to us and without

affecting this guarantee to postpone for any time or from time to time. The exercise of

any of the power of the owner under the tender.

7. Notwithstanding anything contained herein before, our liability shall not exceed

Rs………………….(Rupees…………………………only) and shall remain in force

till……………..Unless a demand or claim under this Guarantee is made on us within

three months from the date of expiry we shall be discharged form all the liabilities

under this guarantee.

8. We………………Bank, lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its

currency except with the previous consent of the Company in writing. We further

undertake to keep this Guarantee renewed from time to time on the request of Tenderer

(s).

Date………. ………………………….Bank

Corporate Seal of the Bank By its constitutional Attorney

Signature of duly

Authorised person On behalf of the Bank

With seal & signature code

Note: BGs to be furnished from any of the banks listed earlier.

of 96

BANK GUARANTEE FOR SECURITY DEPOSIT (To be executed on non- judicial stamped paper of appropriate value)

B. G. No. Date:

1. In consideration of National Aluminium Company Limited (A Government of India

Enterprise), having its office at (hereinafter called “ The Company

Owner” which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes its

legal representatives, successors and assigns) having agreed to exempt M/s.

…………………………..(Hereinafter called “the said Contractor (s)/ Seller(s)” which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes their legal representatives, successors and assigns) from the demand under the terms and conditions of Contract(s)/ Order(s) No. ………………. dt. ………………of cash

security deposit for the due fulfillment by the said contractor(s) seller(s) of the terms

and conditions contained in the said Contract(s)/Order(s), on production of Bank

Guarantee for Rs. …………(Rupees…………………………………..on ly).

2. We ……………………………..Bank having its branch office at ……..do hereby agree

and undertake to pay the amount due and payable under this guarantee without any

demur, merely on a demand from the Company stating that in the opinion of the

company which is final and binding, the amount claimed is due by way of loss or

damage caused to or would be caused to or suffered by the Company by reason of any

breach by the said Contractor(s)/seller(s) of any of the terms and conditions contained

in the said contract(s) or ders(s) or by reasons of the said Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) failure

to perform the said Contract(s)/ Order(s) including defect liability obligations or that

the amount covered under this guarantee is forfeited. Any such demand made on the

Bank by the owner shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the

Bank under this guarantee, However, our liability under this guarantee shall be

restricted to an amount not exceeding Rs……………..(Rupees………………..only).

3. We undertake to pay to the Company any money so demanded notwithstanding any

dispute or disputes raised by the contractor (s)/ Seller(s) in any suit or proceeding

pending before any office, court or tribunal relating thereto our liability under present

guarantee being absolute and unequivocal. The payment so made by us under this bond

shall be valid discharge of our liability for payment there under. Our liability to pay is

not dependent or conditional on the owner proceeding against the Contractor(s)/

Seller(s).


liquidation or winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the said Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) but shall in all respect and for all purposes be binding and

operative until payment of all money due or liabilities under the said contract(s)/

Order(s) are fulfilled.

5. We ……………..Bank further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall remain in

full force and effect during the period that would be taken for the performance of the

said Contract(s)/ Order(s) and that it shall continue to be enforceable till all the dues of

the company under or by virtue of the said Contract(s)/Order(s) have been fully paid

and its claims satisfied or discharged or till a duly Authorised officer of the company

certifies that the terms and conditions of the said Contract(s)/Order(s) have been fully

of 96

and properly carried out by the said contractor(s) and accordingly discharges the guarantee.

6. We ……………Bank further agree with the Company that the company sha ll have the

fullest liberty without our consent and without affecting in any manner our obligations

hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said Contract(s)/ Order(s) or

to extend the time of performance by the said Contractor(s) Seller(s) form time to time

or to postpone for any time or from time to time any of the powers exercisable by the

Company against the said Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) and to forbear or enforce any of the

terms and conditions relating to the said Contract(s)/ Order(s) and we shall not be

relieved from our liability by reason of any such variations, or extension being granted

to the said Contractor (s)/ Seller(s) or for any forbearance, act or omissions on the part

of the Company or any indulgence by the Company to the said Contractor(s)/ Seller(s)

or by any such matter or thing whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties

would, but for this provision, have affect of so relieving us.

7. Notwithstanding anything contained herein before, our liability shall not exc eed

Rs………………….(Rupees…………………………only) and shall remain in force

till……………..Unless a demand or claim under this Guarantee is made on us within

three months from the date of expiry we shall be discharged form all the liabilities

under this guarantee.

8. We…………………Bank, lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its

currency except with the previous consent of the Company in writing. We further

undertake to keep this Guarantee renewed from time to time at the request of

Contractor(s)/ Sellers(s).

Date………. ………………………….Bank


Signature of duly

Authorised person

On behalf of the Bank With seal & signature code

BGs to be furnished from any of the banks listed as per Annexure.

of 96

PROFORMA FOR CONTRACT CUM PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE BY SELLER/ CONTRACTOR.

(To be executed on non- judicial stamped paper of appropriate value)

B. G. No…………………… Date……………….

1. WHEREAS National Aluminium Company Limited (A Government of India

Enterprise) having its office at ………………(hereinafter referred to as “The

Company/Owner” which expressions shall unless repugnant to the subject or context

includes its legal representatives, successors and assigns) has entered into a contract

with M/s. ………………………………../ has placed a purchase order on

M/s………………………….( hereinafter referred to as “Contractor(s)/ Seller(s)”

which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes their legal

representatives, successors and assigns ) for …………………………….on the terms

and conditions as set out inter alia, in the Company’s contract No./ P.O. No.

…………..date …………and various documents forming part thereof hereinafter referred to as the “said contract” which expression include all amendments,

modifications and/ or variations thereto and where as the Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) has

agreed for due execution of the entire contract and guarantees its performance including

any parts executed through any other agencies/ subcontractors.

AND WHEREAS one of the conditions of the “said contract” is that

“contractor(s)/seller(s) shall furnish to the owner a Bank Guarantee from a bank for ….% (……….percent) of the total value of the “said contract” against due and faithful

performance of the “said contract” inc luding defect liability obligations” and the performance guarantee obligations of the contractor(s)/seller(s) for execution/ supplies made under the “said contract.”

2. We …………………………….Bank having its branch office at ……….……..do

hereby agree and undertake to pay the amount due and payable under this guarantee

without any demur merely on a demand from the Company stating that in the opinion

of the Company, which is final & binding, the amount claimed is due by reason of

default made by the Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) in performing any of the terms &

conditions of the said Contract including defect liability obligations, in fulfilling the

performance guarantee obligation or loss or damage caused to or would be caused to or

suffered by the Company by reason of any breach by the said Contractor (s)/ Seller(s)

of any of the terms & conditions of the contract. Any such demand made on the Bank

by the owner shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the Bank

under this guarantee. However our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to

Rs. ……(Rupees………………………only).

3. We undertake to pay to the Company any money so demanded not withstanding any

dispute or disputes raised by the contractor(s)/ Seller(s) in any suit or proceeding

pending before any office, court or tribunal relating thereto our liability under this

present guarantee being absolute and unequivocal. The payment so made by us under

this bond shall be a valid discharge of our liability for payment there under. Our

liability to pay is not dependent or conditional on the owner proceeding against the

Contractor(s)/ Seller(s).

of 96


liquidation or winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the said Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) but shall in all respect and for all purposes be binding and

operative until payment of all money due or liabilities under the said contract(s)/ Order(s) are fulfilled.

5. We ……………..Bank further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall remain

in full force and effect during the period that would be taken for the performance of the

said Contract(s)/ Order(s) and that it shall continue to be enforceable till all the dues of

the company under or by virtue of the said Contract(s)/Order(s) have been fully paid

and its claims satisfied or discharged or till a duly authorised officer of the Company certifies that the terms and conditions of the said Contract(s)/Order(s) have been fully

and properly carried out by the said contractor(s) and accordingly discharges the

guarantee.

6. We ……………Bank further agree with the Company that the company shall have the

fullest liberty without our consent and without affecting in any manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said Contract(s)/ Order(s) or to extend the time of performance by the said Contractor(s) Seller(s) form time to time or to postpone for any time or from time to time any of the powers exercisable by the Company against the said Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) and to forbear or enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to the said Contract(s)/ Order(s) and we shall not be relieved from our liability by reason of any such variation, or extension being granted to the said Contractor (s) / Seller(s) or for any forbearance, act or omission on the part of

the Company or any indulgence by the Company to the said Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) or by any such matter or thing whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties would, but for this provision, have affect of so relieving us.


Rs…………….(Rupees…………only) and shall remain in force till..……..Unless a demand or claim under this Guarantee is made on us within three months from the date of expiry we shall be discharged form all the liabilities under this guarantee.

8. We…………………Bank, lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its

currency except with the previous consent of the Company in writing. We further undertake to keep this Guarantee renewed from time to time at the request of Contractor(s)/ Sellers(s).

Date………. ………………………….Bank


Signature of duly

Authorised person On behalf of the Bank

With seal & signature code

BGs to be furnished from any of the banks listed as per Annexure.

of 96

BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT (To be executed on non- judicial stamped paper of appropriate value)

B. G. No. Date:

1. In consideration of National Aluminium Company Limited (A Government of India

Enterprise), having its office at (hereinafter called “ The Company Owner” which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes its legal

representatives, successors and assigns) having agreed to make an advance payment of Rs…………(Rupees…………………..only) to M/s. ……………………. (hereinafter

called “the said Contractor (s)/ Seller(s)” which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context includes their legal representatives, successors and assigns) from the

demand, terms and conditions of Contract/Order dated. ………………on production of a bank guarantee of equivalent amount.

2. We ……………………………..Bank having its branch office at ……..do hereby agree

and undertake to pay the amount due and payable under this guarantee without any demur, merely on a demand from the Company stating that in the opinion of the Company which is final and binding, the amount claimed is due by way of loss or damage caused to or would

be caused to or suffered by the Company by reason of non-payment / adjustment of any part of the said advance or any dues to the company or any breach by the said Contractor(s)/seller(s) of any of the terms and conditions contained in the said contract(s) orders(s) or by reasons of the Contractor(s)/ Seller(s) failure to perform the said Contract(s)/ Order(s). Any such demand made on the Bank by the owner shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the Bank under this guarantee, However, our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount not exceeding Rs………………..(Rupees………………..only).

3. We undertake to pay to the Company any money so demanded not withstanding any claim

dispute or disputes raised by the contractor (s)/ Seller(s) in any suit or proceeding pending

before any office, court or tribunal relating thereto our liability under this present guarantee being absolute and unequivocal. The payment so made by us under this bond shall be valid

discharge of our liability for payment thereunder. Our liability to pay is not dependable or conditional on the owner proceeding against the Contractor(s)/ Seller(s).


liquidation or winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the said tenderer(s) but shall in all respect and for all purposes be binding and operative until payment of all money due or liabilities under the said tenderer(s) are fulfilled.

5. We ……………..Bank further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall remain in

full force and effect during the period that would be taken for the finalisation of the said

tenderer(s) and that it shall continue to be enforceable till the said tender is finally decided

and order placed on the successful tender and/or till all the dues of the company under or

by virtue of the said tender have been fully paid and its claims satisfied or discharged or till

a duly authorised officer of the Company certifies that the terms and conditions of the said Contractor(s)/ Order(s)have been fully and properly carried out by the said tenderer(s)and

accordingly discharges the guarantee.

of 96

6. That the owner/Company will have fully liberty without reference to us and without affecting this guarantee to postpone for any time or from time to time the exercise of any of the power of the owner under the tender.


Rs………………….(Rupees…………………………only) and shall remain in force till……………..Unless a demand or claim under this Guarantee is made on us within three

months from the date of expiry we shall be discharged form all the liabilities under this guarantee.

8. We…………………Bank, lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its currency

except with the previous consent of the Company in writing. We further undertake to keep

this Guarantee renewed from time to time on the request of the Contractor(s)/ Seller(s).

Date………. ………………………….Bank


Signature of duly

Authorised person

On behalf of the Bank With seal & signature code

i) BGs to be furnished from any of the banks listed as per Annexure.

ii) Addr ess of Corporate Office should be referred in case of Foreign BG.

LIST OF STANDARDISED BANKS

SCHEDULED PUBLIC SECTOR BANKS (INDIAN)

1. State Bank of India.

2. State Bank of Bikaner and Jaipur

3. State Bank of Hyderabad

4. State Bank of Indore.

5. State Bank of Mysore.

6. State Bank of Patialia.

7. State Bank of Saurashtra

8. State Bank of Travancore.

9. Allahabad Bank

10. Andhra Bank

11. Bank of Baroda.

12. Bank of India

13. Bank of Maharashtra

14. Canara Bank 15. Central Bank of India

16. Corporation Bank

17. Dena Bank 18. Indian Bank

19. Indian Oversea Bank

20. Oriental Bank of Commerce

21. Punjab National Bank

22. Punjab and Sid Bank

23. Syndicate Bank 24. Union Bank of India

25. United Bank of India (Deleted) 26. UCO Bank

27. Vijaya Bank.

----------------------------------

Page 81 of 96

LIST OF STANDARDIED BANKS

SCHEDULED PRIVATE SECTOR BANKS (INDIAN)

1. Vyasa Bank 2. UTI Bank Ltd.

3. SBI Commercial & International Bank Ltd.

4. ICICI Banking Corporation Bank Ltd.

5. HDFC Bank Ltd.

6. IDBI Bank Ltd. ------------------------

SCHEDULED FOREIGN BANKS

1. American Express Bank Ltd.

2. ANZ Grindlays Bank Plc

3. Bank of American NT & SA

4. Bank of Tokyo Ltd.

5. Banque Nationale de Paris

6. Barclays Bank Plc 7. Citi Bank N.A.

8. Deutsche Bank A.G.

9. Hongkong & Shanghai Banking Corporation.

10. Standard Chartered Bank 11. The Chase Manhattan Bank Ltd.

12. Dresdner Bank AG.

----------------------------

Page 82 of 96

APPENDIX – I A

DETAILS OF WORKS OF SIMILAR NATURE & MAGNITUDE CARRIED OT

DURING THE LAST 5 YEARS

Sl. Name of work Estimated When When Date of Remarks No. done cost started completed Completion As per contract.

Note : 1. In the remarks column, please state whether the works stated above are carried

out by you in the name of the Firm in which the present Bid is submitted or any other names, if later, state relationship of the firm and also a copy of the Partnership Deed.

2. Please enclose the true copy of the certificate issued by the authorities, if any.

Signature of Bidder

Page 83 of 96

Name of Work:

Name of Tenderer:

Appendix – I-B

CONCURRENT COMMITMENTS OF THE TENDERER

Full Postal Address of

Client & Name of

Officer -in-Charge

Description of the

work Value

of contract

Date of

commenceme nt of work

Scheduled

Completion period

Percentage

Completion as on date

Expected date

of completion Remarks if any

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

Page 84 of 96

of 96

APPENDIX –II

NAME OF WORK:

NAME OF TENDERER:

DETAILS OF EQUIPMETNS, TOOLS TACKLES Tenderer shall submit herein details of equipment, tools, tackles, etc required to

perform the work and shall note in each case whether the same is (a) already owned by

tenderer and available for use on this contract (b) anticipated to be hired by Contractor or (c) anticipated to be purchased by Contractor, in case of (a) anticipated (b) and (c) Location of hirer or supplier shall be stated.

Sl.

No. Description, Make Mode

& Capacity Year of

Manufacture Category

(a) or (b)

or (c)

below

Location Remarks

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1. Contractor agrees to augment the above chart with additional number/ categories of equipment, if required to complete the work within the agreed time schedule of completion and directed by the Engineer- in-charge.

2. In case of hiring of equipment form other agencies, copies of the arrangements made

with the hirer/ supplier shall have to be furnished.

(Signature of Bidder)

of 96

APPENDIX – III

DETAILS OF MINIMUM MANPOWER PROPOSED TO BE

DEPLOYED ON THIS WORK

Sl. No. Details of Manpower No. Remarks

Note : Please furnish the above details in two categories – To be deployed by (I) Contractor and (ii) Sub- contractors.

Minimum manpower deployment shall be based broadly as above and will be modified as mutually agreed to suit the detailed construction programme

jointly worked out; further if any additional man power is required for completion of work in time, the same shall be provided by you as directed by

Engineer without any extra cost.

The manpower proposed to be deployed in the work needs to be given quarter wise separately for direct personnel of the contractor and the manpower proposed to be deployed through the sub-contractors.


of 96

APPENDIX - IV

ORGANISATION CHART SHOWING NO. OF QUALIFIED

ENGINEERS & SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL ETC.

Sl. Details of personnel to be No. No. deployed on this work

Note: Names and short resume of their experiences may also be given for key personnel.

The tentative chart of your site organisation as above furnished by you shall be subject

to variation to suit the construction programme/ requirement and as directed by

Owner/ Engineer.


of 96

APPENDIX – V

LIST OF PROPOSED SUB CONTRACTORS

Sl. Name of Description of Amount (Rs.) No. sub-contractor work or trade

1) Types of work executed by the sub-contractors.

2) The particulars of clients where the sub-contractors did the works.

3) Approximate value of the work carried by the sub- contractors in the last 3 years.


of 96

APPENDIX – VI

PPROGRESS BILLINGS

(Bidder’s anticipated progress billing month by month to be inserted here)

Tentative construction schedule indicating the expected dates of start of activity is to be given by the contractor. This schedule shall be updated within specified milestones from time to

time depending upon the availability of fronts equipment and priorities fixed by Engineer. Contractor shall submit within 15 days of the date of letter of intent programme/ schedule for supply of items covering all phases of work including design, procurement, manufacture, assembly, fabrication, testing, transportation, erection, testing at site and commissioning matching the overall completion schedule.

The billing as well as all the connected documents shall be computerized.


of 96

APPENDIX – VII

NAME OF WORK

NAME OF TENDERER :

INFORMATION ABOUT TENDERERS (FORM – H)

1.0. In case of Individual:

1.1. Name of Business:

1.2. Whether his business is registered:

1.3. Date of Commencement of Business:

1.4. Whether he pays Income Tax over Rs. 10,000/- per year:

2.0. In case of Partnership:

2.1. Name of Partnership with qualification:

2.2. Whether the Partnership is Registered:

2.3. Date of Establishment of firm:

2.4. If each of the partners of the firm pays Income Tax over Rs. 10,000/- a year and if not,

who of them pays the same.

3.0. In case of Limited Liability Company or Company Limited by Guarantees:

3.1. Amount of paid of capital:

3.2. Name of Directors:

3.3. Date of Registration of Company:

3.4. Copies of the Balance Sheet of the Company of the last two years:

Copies of audited Profit & Loss Account and the Balance sheet shall be enclosed in

case of Individuals, partnerships as well as limited companies for the last 3 years.

(Signature of Bidder) Name & Address of the Bidder

of 96

APPENDIX – VIII

NAME OF WORK:

NAME OF TENDERER:

LIST OF ENCLOSURES (FORM – I)

The tenderer is required to enclose the following documents as part of his tenderer.

1. Power of attorne y of the signatory to the tender.

2. Income Tax/ Sales Tax Clearance Certificate in the proforma prescribed by the Govt.

of India.

3. Documents showing annual turnover for similar works for the past two eyars such as

annual report, profit and loss account etc.

4. Solvency Certificate by Nationalized Schedule Bank.


** In absence of Income Tax Clearance Certificate tenderer may not be awarded the work tendered for as per Central Govt. Directives.

of 96

APPENDIX – IX

NAME OF WORK:

NAME OF TENDERER:

EXCEPTION AND DEVIATION (FORM – J)

As pointed out in the NIT/ LIT, tenderer may stipulate here exceptions and deviations

to the tender conditions, if considered un-avoidable.

______ Sl. Page No. of Sl. No. of Subject Deviation No. tenderer document tender document


AMENDMENT TO GCC

Sl

No. Clause

No Brief Description

of Clause Modification

01 2.3

2.3.10

Power Supply i) Clause No. 2.3 of General Condition of Contract stands modified to the following extend:

The cost of construction power appearing in the 10th

and 11th

line as Rs 1/- per kwh shall be read as Rs.4.30 (Rupees four and thirty praise only) per kwh

The state Electricity Inspector appearing in the second line shall be read as ‘Central Electricity Authority at Chenai’.

02 2.4 Land for Contractor’s Field office, Godown and Workshop

Clause No. 2.4 of General Condition of Contract modified to the following extend:

“The owner shall provide land to the Contractor for their offices, godown and workshop “

03 2.5 Land for

Residential

Accommodation

Cla use No. 2.5 of General Condition of Contract

modified to the following extend: “The land for residential accommodation for staff and labour may be made available to Contractor outside plant boundary limit.”

04 22 Extension of time The word “any one” appearing in the end of the

second para of Clause No. 22.0 shall be read as

“OWNER”. 05 52.3.6 Return of

unutilised materials and scrap/wastage.

i) The words “SAIL, Bhubaneswar stock yard rate”

appearing in 3rd line of first para shall be replaced by “Landed cost”.

ii) The words “ Rs.7000/- per tonne” Appearing

in last para shall be replaced by “ twice the landed cost of materials”.

06 53 (xv) Conditions for issue of materials

The contents of the sub- clause No.53.(xv) shall stand deleted and replaced with the following:

“For the free issue materials, the following norms shall be adopted:

i. For issue of materials within plant boundary wall

limit, the Contractor shall submit only indemnity

bond for the entire value of the materials issued to

them free of cost as Clause 53 (ix) of GCC. ii. For the materials which are issued to out side plant

boundary like township etc., the Contractor shall furnish Bank Guarantee equivalent to 20 % of value of materials and indemnity bond for the 80

Page 93 of 96

Sl

No. Clause



% value of the materials.

iii. For materials taken out side Damanjodi/ Angul to

the vendor’s Shop, 100 % Bank Guarantee against value of the materials will be submitted by the vendor before taking of the materials. The Indemnity Bond and the Bank Guarantee shall remain valid till the material account is totally

settled.

07 60 (c) Alterations in Specifications and

Design and Extra

Works

The words “including equipment hire charges at

Schedule hourly/ daily rates” appearing in 7th

line

shall be replaced by the words “ prevalent at site the time of execution”.

08 60(d) Alterations in Specifications and

Design and Extra

Works

Add new sub-Clause 60 (d) as follows: “The quoted prices/rates indicated in Schedule of

Rates shall remain firm for all variations in contract

value within range of (+) 50 % and (-) 25 % for the

entire duration of the contract. In case the actual contract value varies from the awarded contract value

beyond the above mentioned limit than adjustment to contract value shall be made in accordance with

procedure specified in proforma for adjustment for increase/ decrease in contract value enclosed as per

Annexure to SCC.”

09 76.3 (ii) Completion documents

Clause No. 76(ii) of General Condition of Contract shall be replaced by: “Six sets of construction drawings showing there in

execution of the work duly approved by Engineer-in- charge and one set of reproducible on polyester film.”

10 80.1 Employees State Insurance Act

Delete the word “whose aggregate remuneration is

Rs.560.00 per month or less and” appearing in the 3rd

& 4th

line of the 2nd

para of this sub clause.

11 New Sub

clause - Add a new clause designated as Sub clause 80.6 after

existing Cl no. 80.5,

“80.6 – The contractor shall comply with all relevant and applicable statutory provisions in respect of the workers engaged by him at his cost and above stipulation are only indicative are not exhaustive.”

Page 94 of 96

Sl

No. Clause



12 83 (viii) Labour Laws Clause 83 (viii) of GCC shall be modified to the following extent:

Add the words “all relevant statutes at their own

costs including ” betw een the words “provisions of”

and “the payment of Wages Act 1936” appearing in

the first line of this sub-clause.

Provided further that-

a) The payment of minimum wages to contract

labour shall be as per the rates notified by the Central Govt. as per Minim um Wage Act, 1948

and as adopted by the NALCO Management from time to time including any additional element and

statutory dues there on

b) The minimum wage as notified by the Chief Labour Commissioner (Central) has a variable component as Special Allowance which is linked to average AICPI for Industrial workers, which keeps on changing every six months. The contractor has to absorb all such variations due to increase in Minimum wage in their quoted price, and no claim whatsoever on this account shall be entertained.

c) Where the minimum wages notified by the

concerned State Government are higher than the

rates notified by Central Government, the State

Government rates should apply in concerned

scheduled employment as long as the same

remains higher than the Central Government rates

d) The classification of workers in different categories will be as per the notification issued by the Central Government fixing the minimum wages for the above scheduled appointment.

13 New Clause

Jurisdiction/ Governing Law

Add a new clause designated as Sub clause 88 (c) after existing Cl no. 88 (b)

All the works that will be carried out inside the

factory premises shall attract the provisions of factory

act for the contract labourers engaged therein.

Page 95 of 96

Sl

No. Clause



The Contractor, before commencement of work will arrange medical examination at his cost and shall

submit the certificate of fitness in respect of the workers in the prescribed form from the nearby District HQ hospital or any Govt. Hospital for his workers, who will be handling or working with hazardous substance.

In respect of contracts having more than one year, the

medical check up of such workers shall have to be

repeated by the contractor on completion of every

one year.

14 79 Taxes & Duties The rates quoted by the tenderer will cover all the taxes, duties, and levies as applicable on the date of bid/ revised bid (if any). -In case of any imposition of new taxes by Govt notification at a later date, same shall be reimbursed

to the contractor against submission of authentic document towards payment of such taxes by them.

-In case of revision of rate of Works Contract Tax by Govt notification, same shall be reimbursed to the

contractor against submission of documentary evidence towards payment of such extra amount by

them.

15 74 Payment of Contractor’s Bill

Insert the following after the last para: “However, owner prefers to release the payment due

to the contractor electronically. The e- payment

facility is available under INTERNET mode through

company banker as well as in NEFT/RTGS mode

through designated enabled branches. The contractor

shall submit duly filled Bank Mandate form in

duplicate with due authentication from their banker

to avail e-payment facility. The payment of Rs. 1

lakh and above shall be made only through e- mode.

The prescribed mandate form is appended as

Appendix to GCC. The bid documents submitted

without bank mandate is liable for rejection”

Page 96 of 96

(To be submitted in duplicate)

MANDATE FORM FOR ELECTRONIC PAYMENT THROUGH INTERNET & RBI

To

National Aluminium Company Limited,

--------------------------------

--------------------------------

---------------------------------

Dear Sir,

Sub: Authorization for release of payment due from NALCO, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ through

Electronic fund transfer(RBI-EFT)/Internet / RTGS.

Refer Order No……………..dt……………and/or Tender/Enquiry/Letter No……………..dt……………..

(Please fill in the information in CAPITAL LETTERS. Please TICK wherever it is applicable)

1. Name of the Party :

2. Address of the party :…………………………………………

………………………………………….

…………………………………………

City :…………….Pin Code:………….

E-mail Id: ……………………………..

Permanent Account Number :……………………………………….

3. Particulars of Bank:

Bank Name Branch Name Branch Place Branch City Pin Code Branch Code MICR No (9 Digits code number appearing on the MICR Band of the cheque supplied by the Bank. Please attach Xerox copy of a

cheque of your bank for ensuring accuracy of the bank name, branch name and code number) Account Type Savings ڤ Current ڤ Cash Credit ڤ

Account Number(as appearing in the Cheque

Book)

RTGS / IFSC Code 4. Date from which the mandate should be effective :

I hereby declare that the particulars given above are correct and complete. If any transaction is delayed or not

effected for reasons of incomplete or incorrect information, I shall not hold National Aluminium Company Limited

responsible. I also undertake to advise any change in the particulars of my account to facilitate updation of records for

purpose of credit of amount through RBI EFT / Internet / RTGS.

Place:

Date:

Signature of the party/Authorized Signatory

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Certified that particulars furnished above are correct as per our records.

Bank’s Stamp:

Date:

N.B. : RBI EFT / RTGS facilities Centre:

(Signature of the Authorized Official from the Banks)

New Delhi,Chandigarh,Kanpur,Jaipur,Ahmedabad,Mumbai,Nagpur,Hyderabad,Banglaore,Chennai,

Trivandrum,Kolkata,Bhubaneswar,Guwahati,Patna.

N.B. : RTGS charges if any, is to be borne by the party.

98 of 16 Signature of the tenderer


(To be submitted in duplicate)

MANDATE FORM FOR ELECTRONIC PAYMENT THROUGH INTERNET

To

National Aluminium Company Limited,

--------------------------------

--------------------------------

---------------------------------

.

Dear Sir,

Sub: Authorisation for release of payment due from NALCO, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _through

Electronic fund transfer by Internet Mode .

Refer Order No……………..dt……………and/or Tender/Enquiry/Letter No……………..dt……………..

(Please fill in the information in CAPITAL LETTERS. Please TICK wherever it is applicable)

1. Name of the Party :

2. Address of the party :…………………………………………

………………………………………….

…………………………………………

City :…………….Pin Code:………….

E-mail Id: ……………………………..

Permanent Account Number :……………………………………….

3. Particulars of Bank:

Bank Name Branch Name Branch Place Branch City Pin Code Branch Code Account Type Savings ڤ Current ڤ Cash Credit ڤ

Account Number(as appearing in the Cheque

Book)

Please attach Xerox copy of a cheque of your bank for ensuring accuracy of the bank name, branch name and code number . 4. Date from which the mandate should be effective :

I hereby declare that the particulars given above are correct and complete. If any transaction is delayed or not

effected for reasons of incomplete or incorrect information, I shall not hold National Aluminium Company Limited

responsible. I also undertake to advise any change in the particulars of my account to facilitate updation of records for

purpose of credit of amount through Internet.

Place:

Date:

Signature of the party/Authorized Signatory

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Certified that particulars furnished above are correct as per our records.

Bank’s Stamp:

Date:

(Signature of the Authorized Official from the Banks)


BID DOCUMENT NO.


Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges, drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line f

holding yard (Loco shed) to West grid inside plant for new Wagon Tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi (Odisha).

1 of 16





Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges, drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line f

West grid inside plant for new Wagon Tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi (Odisha).

PART – II

BILL OF QUANTITY

RITES LTD ( A GOVERNMENT OF INDIA ENTERPRISE )

PROJECT OFFICE

BHAGWAN TOWER, 1ST

FLOOR

CUTTACK ROAD,

BHUBANESWAR – 751006

of 16 Signature of the tenderer



DMJ(CIVIL)

Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges, drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from

West grid inside plant for new Wagon Tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi (Odisha).



SCHEDULE (BILL) OF QUANTITIES

NAME OF WORK : Construction of Railway formation in filling/cutting, minor & major bridges, drain works, pathway etc. for new Railway line from holding yard (Loco shed) to West grid inside plant for new Wagon Tippler at NALCO M&R complex, Damanjodi (Odisha).

S.N Description Unit Quantity Material Component

In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.

Total Unit Rate to be quoted In figures &

in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7)

Schedule - A (Earthwork in Formation)

1 Earthwork in filling in embankment, guide bunds, around buried type abutments, bridge gaps, trolley refuges, rain bunds if provided, platforms etc. with earth excavated from NALCO's land as per RDSO's latest guidelines and specifications and special condition of contract including all leads, royalty, lifts, ascents, descents, crossing of nallahs or any other obstructions. The rates shall include all dressing of bank to final profile, demarcation and setting out of profile, site clearance, removing of shrubs, roots of vegetations growth, heavy grass, benching of existing slope of old bank, all handling/re-handling. taxes, octroi and royalty etc. as a complete job. Cut trees if any shall be property of NALCO and to be deposited in the NALCO godown unless specified otherwise in the Special conditions of contract.




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7)

i) Earth to be borrowed from inside the plant boundary.

Cum 150000

ii) Earth to be borrowed from outside plant boundary with lead upto 7 Km (Distance from longitudinal centre point for filling area to centre of borrow area) at shortest feasible path.

Cum 200000

iii) Extra payment on above item 1 (ii) for Earth to be borrowed from beyond the lead of 7 Km. but up to 11 Km.

Cum 19300



S.N Description Unit Quantity Material Component In

Rs.

Service Component In

Rs.

Total Unit Rate to be quoted In figures & in

words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7)

2 Earthwork in cutting in formation, trolley refuges, side drains, level crossing approaches, platforms, catch water drains, diversion of nallah & finishing to required dimension and slopes to obtain a neat appearance to standard profile inclusive of all labour, machine and materials and removing & leading all cut spoils either to make spoil dumps beyond 10m. from cutting edge or for filling in embankment with all leads within the section limit, lifts, ascent, descent, loading, unloading, all taxes/royalty, clearance of site and all incidental charges, bailing & pumping out water if required, etc., complete as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The work is to be executed as per Latest / updated edition of "Guidelines for Earthwork in Railway Projects" issued by RDSO, Lucknow. Cut trees shall be property of NALCO and to be deposited in the NALCO godown unless specified otherwise in the Special conditions of contract.

Note - (i) All usable earth arising from cut spoils shall be led into bank formation and Unusable spoils shall be dumped / stacked (ii) All hard rock /and boulders not fit for filling will be stacked by the contractor and will be property of the NALCO. In all conditions and classifications of soil except rock.

Cum

945




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7)

3 Laying and spreading moorum blanketing materials (Natural or Mechanically prepared as per GE-1 or G.E.IRS-2) over new / old embankment / cutting in layers of 30 cm in loose state to make the embankment of designed profile as per specifications. The rate is inclusive of initial site clearance, cutting of shrubs, removal of roots of vegetation growth & heavy grass, surfacing and levelling to give required slope, benching if required on existing bank slope, dressing and finishing of bank, all lead & lift, ascent, descent, crossing of nallahs/ other obstructions, spreading the material and final dressing of slopes and top surface as per specified camber using contractor’s own machinery, equipment, T&P labour etc, as a complete job. Note - The rate includes excavate & supply of blanketing materials from “NALCO’s land at out side plant boundary wall” with removal of overburden but does not includes compaction of blanketing material at site which shall be paid separately.

Cum

38100




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7)

4 Extra for mechanical compaction of earth/blanketing material filled in embankment with contractor’s rollers of suitable capacity, type and size to achieve specified density as per specification, testing as per IS codes incl. cost of water, T&P consumable material and all labour as a complete job. The work is to be executed as per Latest edition of "Guidelines for Earthwork in Railway Projects" issued by RDSO, Lucknow.

Cum 360600

5 Turfing / planting, including all lead and lift, and watering as required until properly rooted, with. Note - Initially payment of only 40% will be made. Balance 60% will be paid only after 3 months of maintenance period if the turfing is properly rooted. Turfing with sods, 10cm thick and 20cm square closely laid.

Sqm 26600




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

2 3 4

5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7)

6 Providing and removing barricading with the help of portable fencing along the running track where the work is to be done in close vicinity of the track. Fencing shall consist of self supporting steel angles of size 50 x50x6mm, 1.5m long provided with hooks etc. and embedded in CC 1:2:4 block of size 0.23x0.23x0.23M placed at c/c distance of 2.0 M along the track. 12 mm dia rods in three horizontal layers tack welded with the angle posts including providing Retro-reflective tapes in Horizontal & vertical direction. Note : Released material will be the property of the contractor after the completion of work. Rate includes cost of cement and all other materials & labour.

Metre

1425

7 Demolishing of dry stone pitching including stacking of serviceable material and disposal of unserviceable material within 50m lead.

cum 8700

Total of Schedule A




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7) Schedule - B (RCC Box, drains etc.)

1 Earth work in excavation for foundations and floors of the bridges, retaining walls etc., including setting out, dressing of sides, ramming of bottom, getting out the excavated material, back filling in layers with approved material and consolidation of the layers by ramming and watering etc. incl. all lift, disposal of surplus soil upto a lead of 300 m, all types of shoring and strutting with all labour and material complete as per drawing and technical specification as directed by Engineer in charge. Rate includes charges for work in conjusted area, under water and or liquid mud including pumping out water as required.

a) All kinds of soils. cum 9000

b) Hard rock ( blasting prohibited) cum 919



S.N Description Unit Quantity Material

Component In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7) 2 Providing and laying in position machine mixed,

machine vibrated and machine batched Design Mix Cement Concrete M35 grade (Cast - in Situ) In Bottom/top slab, side walls, toe wall and sumps haunch filling head walls or any other component using 20 mm graded crushed stone aggregate and coarse sand of approved quality of cast-in-situ RCC box any size including finishing, cement, Admixtures in recommended proportions (as per IS 9103), if approved in Mix design, to accelerate, retard setting of concrete, improve workability without impairing strength and durability, complete as per drawings and technical specifications as directed by Engineer in charge. Payment for reinforcement, admixture and shuttering shall be paid extra.

cum

2536

3 Providing and laying in position machine mixed, machine vibrated and machine batched Design Mix Mass Cement Concrete M25 grade (Cast - in Situ) using 20 mm graded crushed stone aggregate and coarse sand of approved quality in Drop and curtain wall and alike structures below bed level, Including the cost of cement and finishing complete as per drawings and technical specifications as directed by Engineer. Payment for reinforcement, admixture, centring, shuttering shall be paid extra.

cum 406




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7) 4 Providing and laying Pitching with stone boulders

with the voids filled with cement sand mortar 1:4 on slopes laid over prepared including boulder apron laid dry in front of toe of embankment complete as per drawing and Technical specifications. Rate inculding cement and other materials except filter media (filter media to be paid separtely uder the relevant item). Stone boulder to be taken as a free issue material and transport from stacks of dismantled stone boulder vide item A/7 above.

cum

241

5 Providing and laying filter material as per RDSO Specifications underneath pitching slopes complete as per drawing and Technical specification.

cum 121

6 Providing Boulder backing behind wing wall, return wall, retaining wall with hand packed boulders & cobbles with smaller size boulders toward the back including all lead, lift, labour & other incidental charges as complete work in all respect. Boulder to be taken as a free issue material and transporting by contractor from stacks of dismantled stone vide item A/7 above.

cum 582

7 Providing and fixing in position 20mm thick bitumen impregnated fibre board conforming to IS: 1838 including cost of primer, sealing compound in expansion joints.

Sqm 137




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7) 8 Supplying & mixing high range poly carboxylate ether

base water reducing admixture quality conforming to IS:9103-1999 (to be added @ about 1% by weight of cement) for CC & RCC work for controlling water cement ratio and for gaining early strength.

Kg

8706

9 Supply and laying of coarse sand including consolidation, supply of all materials, labour, lead, lift, tools, plants, crossing of tracks as per drawing and technical specification as directed by the Engineer incharge in case loose slush is encountered at site of foundation before casting the foundation or before laying the filtering media.

cum 4950

10 Centring and shuttering including strutting, propping etc. and removal of form for : In Bottom/top slab, side walls, toe wall and sumps haunch filling head walls or any other component. Rate includes staging for required height.

sqm 4890

11 i) Structural steel work in single section including cutting, bending, straightening, drilling, riveting or bolting, hoisting, fixing in position, including applying a priming coat of approved steel primer, complete - upto 6m height above GL In RSJ, tees, angles and channels.

Kg 5000




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7)

ii)

Structural steel work welded in built up section trusses and framed work, girder, stagings,racks, etc including cutting, bending, straightening, hoisting, fixing in position, including applying a priming coat of approved steel primer, complete - upto 6m height above GL. In RSJ, tees, angles and channels.

Kg.

5000

iii)

Painting two coats(excluding priming coat) with chocolate, red, grey or buff ready mixed paint or apporved quality, on steel or wood work. Rate including the cost of enamel paint.

Sqm 400

12

Providing fly ash brick work in cement mortar of proportion 1:6 (1 cement : 6 sand) in foundation and plinth as per drawing, specification and instructions of the engineer, in Fly Ash bricks, Fly Ash bricks to be supplied by NALCO as free issue material at NALCO's owned manufacturing plant at Damanjodi. Except bricks, all other cost to be born by contractor. Reconciliation of bricks issued are to be made in each RA Bill submitted by the contractor.

Cum 30




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7) 13 12 mm cement plaster of mix -

1:4 (1cement: 4 fine sand). Rate includes cement.

Sqm

308

14 Demolishing brick work including stacking of serviceable material and disposal of unserviceable material within 50m lead. In cement mortar.

cum 3

15 Demolishing stone rubble masonry/ stone pitching including stacking of serviceable material and disposal of unserviceable material within 50m lead In cement mortar.

cum 72

16 Demolishing plain cement concrete including disposal of material within 50m lead Mix leaner than 1:2:4 with coarse aggregate larger than 20mm.

cum 172




In Rs.

Service Component

In Rs.


in words (Rs.).

Amount In Rs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = (5+6) 8 = (4x7) 17 Demolishing R.C.C. work including cutting and

stacking of steel bars and disposal of unserviceable material within 50m lead. (Extra payment for scraping, cleaning and straightening of bars to be made separately).

cum

30

Total of Schedule B

Schedule-C (Supply of Reinforcement).

1 Supplying Reinforcement for R.C.C. work including straightening, cutting, bending, placing in position and binding all complete. HYSD - TMT bars, Fe500/500D.

Kg. 415000

Total of Schedule C

Schedule-D (Unforeseen/miscellaneous Items)

1 Any other unforeseen/miscellaneous item which have not been covered in the above items will be operated as per USSR-2010 except banned items by Eco rly. (Rate should be quoted in above or below or at par).

LS Rs.

1360000.00 ______% above/

below / At par

Total D =

GRAND TOTAL (A+B+C+D)

(In words)



Note: Unless otherwise specified the unit rate shall include the cost of following -

a) All labour and materials, tools and plants, equipment , machinery etc.

b) All lead, lift, ascent , descent, crossing of Rail tracks etc

c) All handling , rehandling, loading, unloading, freight, consumable stores fuels, lubricants, transportation, vehicles deploring when & where required and crossing one or more lines if necessary.

d) All taxes including octroi on materials, royalty and all incidental charges complete but excluding service tax & education cess. Service tax will be reimbursed on documentary evidence of deposit with statutory authority by the agency.

e) Cement should be OPC(43 Grade) confirming to IS -8112 :1989 or as approved quality by Engineer-in-charge from reputed manufacturers i.g. Ultra Tech, Grasim, Idcol, Lafarge, ACC, Ramco, Zuari, Century, India Cement (approved vender of NALCO) etc or equivalent in HDPE/Gunny bags of 50kg net in each bag & stacking the same in contractor's godown at the site of construction. Date of manufacturing of cement should be mentioned on bags.

f) Manufacturer test certificate indicating the date of manufacturing, batch number and other test result for cement will be produced by the contractor before using the cement. Cement should be brought to site only in such quantity that it will be utilised within a month or so from the date of supply and within 45-60 days from date of packing. Under no circumstances cement older than six months shall be used.

g) Steel should be as per specification and from reputed manufacturers such as SAIL, RINL, TATA or as approved by Engineer-in-charge and stacking the same in contractor's godown at the site of construction. Manufacturer test certificate should be submitted at the time of supply of steel.

h) Cost of all materials are including the cost of inspection, testing wherever required.

i) Unless/Otherwise specified, dewatering to be done by the contractor at his own cost to make the area water free.

j) Width/ Length of excavation will be paid only as per maximum plan size of foundation.

k) No material will be issued by NALCO for execution of work except 52 Kg Rail (old), if required from NALCO’s stores, Ash brick from NALCO's manufacturing plant, Stone boulder from stacks of dismantled stone. Earth/moorum to be borrowed from NALCO’s land. Transportation including loading, unloading of material will be under scope of bidder.



l) The contractor will have to submit their Design Mix at their own cost for different grades of concrete, keeping in view the requirements stipulated in technical specifications.

m) No extra payment will be made for work under traffic block.

n) The agency has to ensured the water sprinkling for haul road as when required. The making of haul road & cross drainage works for transporting the borrow earth from borrow area to the work place is the responsible of the agency at it's own cost.

o) The sand should be used in the work should be Nawarangpur variety approved sand which is around 120 Km from Damanjodi.

p) The Bridge work will be executed through the different process running pipe lines in phase manner. The work will be executed without disturbing the running rail/pipe lines. The necessary precaution and safety measure will be taken by the contractor at his own cost. The modification of the pipe lines will be done by NALCO.

q) Borrow area for earth/moorum to be shown by NALCO Authority.

r) Rate includes site clearance for borrow area of earth / moorum also.